Yamaha CVP-401 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CVP-401

Categoría: PC / estación de trabajo barebones

Tipo: Manual de usuario

CVP-405 / 403 /401

OWNER’S MANUAL

For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the

end of this manual.

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas

a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the

voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change

the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CVP-405 CVP-403

CVP-401

92-469

(bottom)

(1)B-11

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.

Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in

damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

(1)B-11

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• In the case of a model with a polished ﬁnish, gently remove dust and dirt with a

soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the

instrument's ﬁnish.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping

cloths.

•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a

ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key

cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and

unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• In the case of a model with a polished ﬁnish, bumping the surface of the

instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the ﬁnish to

crack or peel. Use caution.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them

periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

• The data of the types listed below are lost when you turn off the power to the

instrument. Save the data to the USER tab display (page 26), USB storage

device (USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc).

• Recorded/Edited Songs (page 42, 139, 154)

• Created/Edited Styles (page 113)

• Edited Voices (page 96)

• Memorized One Touch Settings (page 51)

• Edited MIDI settings (page 192)

Moreover, the above-mentioned data can be saved all at once. Refer to page 77.

Data in the USER tab display (page 26) may be lost due to malfunction or

incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device (USB ﬂash

memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc).

When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page,

System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List

booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn

off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Clavinova!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and

convenient functions of the instrument.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of the following sections.

Owner’s Manual

Introduction (page 12).......................... Please read this section ﬁrst.

Quick Guide (page 23)......................... This section explains how to use the basic functions.

Basic Operation (page 63).................... This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-

based controls.

Reference (page 79) ............................. This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s

various functions.

Appendix (page 201)............................ This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and

Speciﬁcations.

Data List

Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

•The models CVP-405/403/401 will be referred to as the CVP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual.

•The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different

from those on your instrument.

•The panel illustrations and LCD displays shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the CVP-405.

•The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English.

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except

for your personal use.

•This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the

device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

•The photos of the harpsichord, bandoneon, hackbrett, music box, dulcimer and cimbalom, shown in the displays of the Clavinova, are

courtesy of the Gakkigaku Shiryokan (Collection for Organolgy), Kunitachi College of Music.

•The following instruments, shown in the displays of the Clavinova, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments:

balafon, gender, kalimba, kanoon, santur, gamelan gong, harp, hand bell, bagpipe, banjo, carillon, mandolin, oud, pan ﬂute, pungi, rabab,

shanai, sitar, steel drum, and tambra.

• (CVP-405/403) This product is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901

from IVL Audio Inc.

•The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

•This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with the patented LZW, licensed

from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product, nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF

may not be reverse-engineered, reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied.

This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group.

Trademarks:

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or

with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without lim-

itation, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any

unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws.

Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Accessories

Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration

“50 greats for the Piano” Music Book

Owner’s Manual

Data List

The following items may be included or optional, depending on your locale:

Bench

■

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the instrument does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

■

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the instrument along with other belongings. You can move the

unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you ﬁrst took it out

of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side.

Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock.

When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been

loosened by moving the instrument.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Various display pages and menus appear on the LCD display of this instrument, indicating the functions and opera-

tions. Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up

these functions. The example shorthand below describes a four step operation:

1) press the [FUNCTION] button, 2) press the [D] button to select the Controller page, 3) press the TAB [

] button to

select the Keyboard/Panel page, and 4) press the [A] button to select the Initial Touch parameter.

[FUNCTION]

→

[D] CONTROLLER

→

TAB [

] KEYBOARD/PANEL

→

[A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH

Table of Contents

Introduction

Enhanced Realism and Natural

Expressiveness ................................................. 10

Panel Controls ................................................. 12

Playing the Keyboard ...................................... 14

Setting Up ....................................................... 16

Music Rest ................................................... 16

Sheet Music Braces (CVP-405/403) .............. 16

Using Headphones ....................................... 17

Changing the Display Language .................. 18

Display Settings ........................................... 18

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks .................................................... 21

Handling the USB Storage Device

(USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc) ............ 22

Quick Guide

Playing the Demos .......................................... 23

Operations in the Basic Displays ..................... 25

Operation of the Main Display ............................. 25

Operation of the File Selection Display ................. 26

Operation of the Function Display ........................ 27

Playing Voices ................................................. 28

Playing the Piano Voice ........................................ 28

Playing Various Voices .......................................... 32

Practicing with the Songs ............................... 35

Playing Back Songs Before Practicing .................... 35

Displaying Music Notation (Score) ....................... 38

One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ......... 39

Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ....... 41

Recording Your Performance ................................ 42

Playing Backing Parts with the performance

assistant Technology ....................................... 43

Playing Accompaniment with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback) ...... 44

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature ...................................... 45

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song

—Music Finder ................................................ 52

Calling up the panel settings to match the Style

(Repertoire) .......................................................... 53

Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke)

or Your Own Performance .............................. 54

Connecting a Microphone (CVP-405/403) ........... 54

Singing with the Lyrics Display ............................. 55

Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................ 56

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your

Own Performance ................................................ 58

Recording Your Performance as Audio

(USB Audio Recorder) (CVP-405/403) ............ 60

Recording Your Performance as Audio .................. 60

Playing Back the Recorded Performance ............... 62

Basic Operation

Basic Operation ................................63

Selecting Message Language .......................... 63

The Messages Shown in the Display .............. 63

Instant Selection of the Displays

—Direct Access ................................................ 64

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection

Display) ............................................................ 65

Main Display ........................................................ 65

File Selection Display Configuration and Basic

Operation ............................................................. 66

File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display ..69

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings ... 75

Restoring the Factory-programmed System .......... 75

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

Independently by Item ......................................... 76

Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a

Single File ............................................................. 76

Data Backup .................................................... 77

Backup procedure ................................................ 78

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices ..79

Voice Characteristics ....................................... 79

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously ........ 80

Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) .................. 80

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

(Right 1 and 2 Parts) ............................................ 81

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right

Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts) .............................. 82

Changing Pitch ................................................ 83

Transpose ............................................................. 83

Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument ...... 83

Scale Tuning ......................................................... 83

Adding Effects to Voices Played on the

Keyboard ......................................................... 85

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance

(MIXING CONSOLE) ........................................ 87

Basic Procedure .................................................... 87

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Voice Creating (Sound Creator) ..................... 96

Basic Procedure .................................................... 96

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices ........ 100

Using, Creating and Editing the

Auto Accompaniment Styles ..........103

Style Characteristics ...................................... 103

Selecting a Chord Fingering Type ................ 103

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a

Style ............................................................... 104

Style Playback-related Settings ..................... 105

Split Point Settings ....................................... 107

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of

the Style (MIXING CONSOLE) ...................... 108

Convenient Music Finder feature ................. 108

Searching the Records ........................................ 108

Creating a Set of Favorite Records ...................... 110

Editing Records .................................................. 110

Saving the Record .............................................. 111

Style Creator ................................................. 113

Style Structure .................................................... 113

Creating a Style .................................................. 114

Editing the Created Style .................................... 119

Registering and Recalling Custom

Panel Setups

—Registration Memory ..................127

Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups ...127

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups ......... 128

Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a

Panel Setup ........................................................ 129

Disabling Recall of Specific Items

(Freeze Function) ............................................... 129

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order

—Registration Sequence .................................... 130

Using, Creating and Editing

Songs ...........................................132

Compatible Song Types ................................ 132

Operations for Song Playback ...................... 133

Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice

Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) ....... 136

Using the Practice Function (Guide) ............ 137

Selecting the Guide Function Type ..................... 137

Recording Your Performance ....................... 139

Recording Methods ............................................ 139

Editing a Recorded Song .................................... 154

Using a Microphone

(CVP-405/403) ...............................163

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters .............. 163

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony

Sound ............................................................ 166

Talk Setting ................................................... 170

Connecting the Clavinova Directly

to the Internet ...............................172

Connecting the Instrument to the Internet ... 172

Accessing the Special Website ...................... 173

Operations in the Special Website ............... 173

Scrolling the Display ........................................... 173

Following Links ................................................... 174

Entering Characters ............................................ 174

Return to the Previous Web Page ........................ 174

Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a

Web Page ........................................................... 175

Purchasing and Downloading Data .................... 176

Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages .... 176

About the Internet Settings Display .................... 179

Changing the Home Page .................................. 182

Initializing Internet Settings ................................ 183

Glossary of Internet Terms ........................... 184

Using Your Instrument with Other

Devices ............................................185

Using Headphones

[PHONES] jacks) ...................................... 185

Connecting a Microphone or Guitar

[MIC./LINE IN] jack) (CVP-405/403) ....... 185

Connecting Audio & Video Devices (345

) .. 185

Using External Audio Devices for playback and

Recording (3

[AUX OUT] Jacks) ......................... 185

Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in

Speakers (4

[AUX IN] Jacks) ............................... 186

Showing the Instrument’s Display Contents on a

Separate TV Monitor

[VIDEO OUT] Terminal) (CVP-405) ............... 186

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller

[AUX PEDAL] jack) ................................... 187

Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal . 187

Connecting External MIDI Devices

[MIDI] Terminals) .................................... 190

Connecting a Computer, USB Device,

or Internet (789)

) ................................... 190

Connecting a Computer

[USB TO HOST] and 7 [MIDI] Terminals) ..... 190

Connecting to a USB-type LAN Adaptor and USB

Storage Device

(9 via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal) ............... 191

Connect to the Internet () [LAN] Port) .............. 192

What is MIDI? ................................................ 192

What You Can Do With MIDI ....................... 195

MIDI Settings ................................................ 196

Basic Operation .................................................. 196

Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates ....................... 197

MIDI System Settings ......................................... 198

MIDI Transmit Settings ....................................... 198

MIDI Receive Settings......................................... 199

Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI

Receive ............................................................... 199

Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI

Receive ............................................................... 200

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using

Your

Instrument

with

Other

Devices

Introduction

Quick Guide

Basic Operation

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto

Accompaniment Styles

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Using a Microphone

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the

Internet

Using Your Instrument with Other

Devices

Appendix

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Reference

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Appendix

Troubleshooting ............................................ 201

CVP-405: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............ 206

CVP-403: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............ 208

CVP-401: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............ 210

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)

(CVP-405) ...................................................... 212

Specifications ................................................ 213

Index .............................................................. 215

Panel Button Chart ....................................... 218

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Enhanced Realism and Natural Expressiveness

Authentic Acoustic Piano-like Touch

with Graded Hammer (GH) and Graded

Hammer 3 (GH3) Keyboard

The Clavinova is the next best thing to a real piano. It features an exceptional natural

piano touch and expressive response-thanks to the remarkable Graded Hammer key-

board. Just as on an actual grand piano, the lower keys are heavy in touch and the higher

keys are light, with all the natural gradations in between.

The CVP-405/403 features the enhanced, improved Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) technol-

ogy, providing performance functions and expressive power found only on grand pianos,

such as having repeated plays of the same note perfectly articulated, even when playing

at high speed or with partial key release.

Audio Recording (CVP-405/403)

Recording Your Performance as Audio......................................page 60

You can record your performance as audio data to a USB storage device.

Connect a microphone or guitar to the instrument and enjoy recording a gui-

tar and keyboard performance together, or record your singing along with

Song playback (in karaoke fashion).

Perform Along with a Full Band

—Song Playback.........................................................................page 35

Play along with previously recorded Song data, and ﬁll out your solo perfor-

mance with the sounds and arrangement of an entire band or orchestra.

Ease in Playing Backing Parts with Songs,

—performance assistant technology.........................................page 43

The new performance assistant technology features make it exceptionally

easy to play professional-sounding backing parts along with Song playback.

Playing Melodies along with Auto Accompaniment,

—Style Playback .........................................................................page 44

Use the Style playback features to automatically produce full backing parts and

accompaniment, while you play melodies on top. It’s like having an expert ensemble

playing behind you. Select an accompaniment Style—such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc.—

and let the instrument be your backing band!

Playing the Instrument

Playing Piano Voices ................................................................ page 28

With just the press of a button, you can reconﬁgure the entire instrument for

optimum piano performance, no matter what settings you’ve made from the

panel. Now you can enjoy performing and practicing with authentic grand

piano sounds and response—instantly.

Playing Other Instrument Voices ..............................................page 32

The instrument gives you not only various realistic piano Voices, but also features an

exceptionally wide variety of authentic instruments, both acoustic and electronic.

Introduction

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Practicing

Displaying and Playing along with the Music Score ................page 59

While playing back a Song, you can have the music score (notation) automati-

cally shown on the display—an exceptionally convenient tool for learning and

practicing pieces.

Guide Lamps...............................................................................page 39

The key guide lamps are also helpful in learning and practicing, since they

indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long

you should hold them down.

Recording Your Performance.................................................... page 42

The instrument lets you easily record your own performance and save it to inter-

nal memory or a USB storage device. This, too, is an excellent practice tool, let-

ting you listen back to your playing and spot your strong and weak points.

Expand Your Song Collection

Internet Direct Connection......................................................page 172

The instrument also connects directly to the Internet, letting you download Song data

from special websites, and save them to internal memory or a USB storage device.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Panel Controls

1 [POWER] switch .............................................................. P. 14

2 [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal.............................................. P. 22

3 [MASTER VOLUME] dial.................................................. P. 15

4 [DEMO] button................................................................ P. 23

METRONOME

5 [ON/OFF] button ............................................................. P. 30

TRANSPOSE

6 [–] [+] buttons.................................................................. P. 56

TEMPO

7 [TAP TEMPO] button........................................................ P. 47

8 [–] [+] buttons.................................................................. P. 31

STYLE CONTROL

9 STYLE category selection buttons..................................... P. 45

0 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .................................................. P. 46

A [AUTO FILL IN] button .................................................... P. 48

B INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ................................................ P. 47

C MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] buttons ....................... P. 48

D [BREAK] button................................................................ P. 48

E ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ........................................ P. 48

F [SYNC STOP] button........................................................ P. 48

G [SYNC START] button ...................................................... P. 47

H [START/STOP] button....................................................... P. 47

I [MUSIC FINDER] button.................................................. P. 52

J [LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................. P. 18

K [A]–[J] buttons.................................................................. P. 25

L [DIRECT ACCESS] button................................................. P. 64

M [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................ P. 87

N [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button ................................. P. 105, 139

O [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons ................................................ P. 25

P TAB [

√

][

] buttons......................................................... P. 26

Q [EXIT] button.................................................................... P. 26

R [DATA ENTRY] dial .......................................................... P. 67

S [ENTER] button ................................................................ P. 67

T [USB] button .................................................................... P. 67

U [USER] button .................................................................. P. 67

PART ON/OFF

V [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button ................................................. P. 80

W [SPLIT (LEFT)] button........................................................ P. 80

X [FUNCTION] button ........................................................ P. 27

Y [INTERNET] button ........................................................ P. 172

SONG CONTROL

Z [SONG SELECT] button.................................................... P. 35

[ [REC] button .................................................................... P. 42

\ [STOP] button .................................................................. P. 35

] [PLAY/PAUSE] button ....................................................... P. 35

^ [REW]/[FF] buttons......................................................... P. 134

a [EXTRA TRACKS] button................................................. P. 140

b [TRACK 2 (L)] button ........................................................ P. 41

c [TRACK 1 (R)] button........................................................ P. 39

d [SCORE] button................................................................ P. 38

e [LYRICS/TEXT] button (CVP-405)

[LYRICS] button (CVP-403/401)........................................ P. 55

f [GUIDE] button................................................................ P. 39

g [REPEAT] button ............................................................... P. 41

PIANO Setting

h [PIANO RESET] button ..................................................... P. 29

REGISTRATION MEMORY

i REGIST BANK [+] [–] buttons ......................................... P. 128

j [MEMORY] button .........................................................P. 127

k [1]–[8] buttons ............................................................... P. 127

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

VOICE CONTROL

l VOICE category selection buttons .................................... P. 32

m [VOICE EFFECT] button ................................................... P. 85

ONE TOUCH SETTING

n [1]–[4] buttons................................................................. P. 50

o [OTS LINK] button ........................................................... P. 51

p Drum Kit icons................ Data List (Drum/key Assignment List)

Pedals

q Left pedal......................................................................... P. 30

r Sostenuto pedal ............................................................... P. 30

s Damper pedal.................................................................. P. 30

t Keyboard guide lamps ..................................................... P. 39

u Mic signal/over lamps (CVP-405/403).............................. P. 54

CVP-405 CVP-403/401

For quick reference, also see the alphabetically

sorted “Panel Button Chart” on page 218.

For information on the jacks and connectors located

on the bottom left of the instrument, see page 185.

The [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is also located on the

bottom left of the instrument. (CVP-405)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Playing the Keyboard

1 Connecting the power cable

First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the instrument,

then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.

2 Opening the key cover

CVP-405/403:

Using the hand grip on the front, lift open the key cover.

CVP-401:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

3 Turning the power on

Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the

power on. The display located in the center of the front panel and the power

indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.

(The shape of the plug and outlet

differ depending on locale.)

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both

hands when opening or clos-

ing it. Do not release it until it

is fully opened or closed. Be

careful to avoid catching ﬁn-

gers (yours or others, espe-

cially children’s) between the

cover and the unit.

CAUTION

Do not place objects such as a

piece of metal or paper on

top of the key cover. Small

objects placed on the key

cover may fall inside the unit

when the cover is opened and

may be nearly impossible to

remove. This could cause elec-

tric shock, short circuit, ﬁre or

other serious damage to the

instrument.

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers

when opening the cover.

CVP-405/403 CVP-401

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers

when opening the cover.

The power indicator

lights up.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

4 Playing the keyboard

Play the keyboard to produce sound.

Adjusting the volume

While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using the [MASTER

VOLUME] located at the left of the panel.

5 Turning the power off

Press the [POWER] switch to turn the power off.

The screen and the power indicator turn off.

6 Closing the key cover

CVP-405/403:

Grip the metal rim at the top of the panel, and close the key cover.

CVP-401:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys.

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid catching your

ﬁngers when closing the cover.

CVP-405/403 CVP-401

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid catching your

ﬁngers when closing the cover.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Setting Up

Music Rest

To Raise the Music Rest:

CVP-405/403:

Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

When raised, the music rest is ﬁxed at a certain angle and cannot be adjusted.

CVP-401:

1 Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

2 Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music

rest.

3 Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.

To Lower the Music Rest:

CVP-405/403:

Lift the music rest slightly, then turn it back slowly.

CVP-401:

1 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

2 Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest).

3 Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down.

Sheet Music Braces (CVP-405/403)

These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place.

To Open To Close

CAUTION

When raising or lowering the

music rest, do not release

our hands from the music

rest until it is all the way up or

down.

CAUTION

(CVP-401)

Do not try to use the music

rest in a half-raised position.

CAUTION

(CVP-405/403)

Before lowering the music

rest, close the sheet music

braces (see below).

The music rest will not close

unless the sheet music braces

are also closed.

CVP-405/403 CVP-401

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid

catching your ﬁngers.

Close the sheet

music braces.

CVP-405/403 CVP-401

Using Headphones

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Using Headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks located on the bottom

left of the instrument.

Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be connected. (If you are using only

one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.)

Using the Headphone Hanger

A headphone hanger is included in the instrument package so that you can hang the

headphones on the instrument. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws

(4 x 10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure.

MIN MAX

INPUT

MIC.

MIC. LINE PHONES

VOLUME

LINE IN

CVP-405/403

CVP-401

CVP-405/403

CVP-401

CAUTION

Do not listen with the head-

phones at high volume for

long periods of time. Doing

so may cause hearing loss.

CAUTION

Do not hang anything other

than the headphones on the

hanger. Otherwise, the instru-

ment or the hanger may be

damaged.

Outputting sound from the speaker while headphones are con-

nected

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]→ [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Press the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] (SPEAKER) button to select “ON.”

Outputting sound only from the headphones

From the display called up in step 1 above, press the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

]

(SPEAKER) button to select “OFF.”

When “OFF” is selected, the speakers will not sound and you can only hear

the instrument sound via the headphones.

Changing the Display Language

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Changing the Display Language

This determines the language used in the display for messages, ﬁle names, and

character input.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] button to select a language.

Display Settings

Adjusting the Contrast of the Display

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob

located to the left of the display.

Display Settings

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display

(CVP-405/403)

Adjust the brightness of the display.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Press the [2

ππ

††

] button to adjust the brightness of the display.

Display Settings

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Display

You can have your name appear in the opening display (the display that appears

when the power is turned on).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

Press the [I] (OWNER NAME) button and call up the Owner Name display.

Refer to page 74 for character-entry details.

CVP-405

Displaying the version number

To check the version number of this instrument, press the [7

π†

]/[8

π†

]

(VERSION) buttons in the display in step 1 above. Press the [EXIT] button to

return to the original display.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks

(The ﬂoppy disk drive is optional. For instructions

on installing the ﬂoppy disk drive, see page 212.)

The ﬂoppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve cre-

ated on the instrument to ﬂoppy disk, and allows you to

load data from ﬂoppy disk to the instrument.

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

Floppy Disk Compatibility

• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

Formatting a Floppy Disk

• If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new, blank disks or

old disks that have been used with other devices, you

may need to format them. For details on how to format a

disk, see page 69. Keep in mind that all data on the disk

will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check before-

hand whether or not the disk contains important data.

Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable

as is on other devices.

Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks

Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive:

• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards

the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly

pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the

eject button pops out.

Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive. Other

objects may cause damage to the disk drive or ﬂoppy disks.

Removing a Floppy Disk

• After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the

ﬂoppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the ﬂoppy

disk drive is off), ﬁrmly press the eject button at the

upper right of the disk slot all the way in.

When the ﬂoppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If

the ﬂoppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck,

do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject

button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to

eject it again.

* Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as

recording, playback, or deletion of data.

If a ﬂoppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is

automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether

the disk has data.

• Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventu-

ally cause read and write errors.

•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-avail-

able dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about

once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail-

ability of proper headcleaning disks.

About Floppy Disks

Handle ﬂoppy disks with care, and fol-

low these precautions:

• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy disks

in their protective cases when they are not in use.

• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high

or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq-

uids.

• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

• Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as those

produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since

magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data on

the disk, rendering it unreadable.

• Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or hous-

ing.

• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to

a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in

the proper location.

To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab):

•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab

open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-

protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed).

CAUTION

Do not remove the ﬂoppy disk or turn off the instrument

itself while the disk is being accessed.

Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk

but also damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive.

Write-protect tab open

(protect position)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] termi-

nal. By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device

with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve cre-

ated to the connected device, as well as read data from the

connected device. Be sure to handle USB storage device

with care. Follow the important precautions below.

For more information about the handling of USB stor-

age device, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB stor-

age device.

Compatible USB storage devices

• Up to two USB storage devices, such as a ﬂoppy disk

drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, ﬂash memory

reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The

number of USB storage devices that can be used with

musical instruments simultaneously even when a USB

hub is used is a maximum of two.) This instrument can

recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device.

Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or

mouse cannot be used.

•The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot

guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you

purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices,

please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized

Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Man-

ual) for advice, or visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard

Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to

the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

Formatting USB storage media

• When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format

the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation.

Using USB Storage Devices

• When connecting a USB storage device to the [USB TO

DEVICE], make sure that the connector on the device is

appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc-

tion. Before removing the media from the device, make

sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in

the Save, Copy and Delete operations).

•Though there are two [USB TO DEVICE] terminals on the

CVP-405 (and one on the CVP-403/401), if you are con-

necting two or three devices at the same time (such as

two USB storage devices and a LAN adaptor), you

should use a USB hub device. The USB hub must be self-

powered (with its own power source) and the power

must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error

message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect

the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of

the instrument and re-connect the USB hub.

•Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,

you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with

the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is

that of USB 1.1.

To protect your data (write-protect):

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,

apply the write-protect provided with each storage device

or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,

make sure to disable write-protect.

CAUTION

The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does

not contain important data. Proceed with caution, espe-

cially when connecting multiple USB storage medias.

CAUTION

•Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the

USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting

the cable too often. Doing so may result in the

operation of the instrument “freezing” or hang-

ing up. While the instrument is accessing data

(such as in the Save, Copy and Delete opera-

tions), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT

remove the media from the device, and do NOT

turn the power off to either device. Doing so may

corrupt the data on either or both devices.

• When connecting a USB storage device to the

[USB TO DEVICE] on the top panel, remove it

before closing the key cover. If the key cover is

closed with the USB storage device connected,

the USB storage device may be damaged.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Quick Guide

Playing the Demos

The Demos are more than just songs—they also provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the

features, functions and operations of the instrument. In a way, the Demos are an interactive “mini-man-

ual”—complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J]UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons

to select the desired language.

Demos will play back continuously until

stopped.

When the Demo stops, the display returns

to the MAIN display (page 65).

1 Select the desired Language.

2 Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demos.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to stop the Demo playback.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Showing Speciﬁc Demo Topics

n On the CVP-401, “Yamaha Piano Technology” is shown instead of “Ultimate Realism.”

To return back to the previous display, press the [J] button.

When the Demo has more than

one screen.

Press a [

π†

] button corresponding

to the screen number.

1 Press the [7ππ

ππ

††

]/[8ππ

ππ

††

] buttons in the Demo display to call up the speciﬁc Demo menu.

2 Press one of the [A]–[I] buttons to show a speciﬁc Demo.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from Demo.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Operations in the Basic Displays

To start with, you should know a little about the basic displays that appear in the Quick Guide. There are

three basic displays:

Main display ➤ See below.

File selection display ➤ page 26

Function display ➤ page 27

Operation of the Main Display

The Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument (It is the same display that

appears when the instrument is turned on.).You can also call up display pages related to the displayed function from

the Main display.

n About information in the Main display

See page 65.

1 [A]–[J] buttons

The [A]–[J] buttons correspond to the settings

indicated next to the buttons.

For example, press the [F] button, and the

Voice (RIGHT 1) selection display will appear

in the display.

2 [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons

The [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons correspond to

the parameters which are indicated above the

buttons. (On the CVP-401, open the volume

balance display by pressing the [C] button.)

For example, pressing the [1

] button will

increase the Song (page 35) volume.

3 [DIRECT ACCESS] and [EXIT] buttons

Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main

display from any other display: Simply press the

[DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button.

1 1

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Operation of the File Selection Display

In the File Selection display, you can select the Voice (page 28)/Song (page 35)/Style (page 44), etc.

In the example here, we’ll call up and use the Song Selection display.

About PRESET/USER/USB

PRESET .............. Internal memory to which the preprogrammed data are installed as preset data.

USER ................. Internal memory that allows both reading and writing of data.

USB ...................USB storage device, such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk drive, etc., which is connected

to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

n Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc. will be referred to as “USB

storage device.”

Several Songs may be together in a

folder. In this case, the folder(s) will

appear in the display (see the illustration

at right). Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons

to select a folder.

Press the [8

] (UP) button to call up

the next highest level folder.

When the drive contains more than ten Songs, the display is divided up into several pages. The page indica-

tions are shown at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [1

]–[6

] buttons to select a page.

You can also select a Song by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

53,

1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the desired drive (PRESET/USER/USB).

3 Select a folder (if necessary).

4 Select a page (if the display has several pages).

5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Operation of the Function Display

In the Function display, you can make detailed settings.

In the example here, we’ll call up and use the keyboard touch sensitivity setting display.

Categories of detailed settings are

shown.

When the selected category is further

divided into sub-categories, the tab(s)

will be shown in the display.

When the setting is further divided into

additional settings, a list will be shown

in the display.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

2 Press the [D] button to select the category CONTROLLER.

3 Press the TAB [

] button to select the KEYBOARD/PANEL tab.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

For details on the touch sensitivity settings, see page 29.

Playing Voices

The instrument features a variety of Voices, including exceptionally realistic piano Voices.

Playing the Piano Voice

Here, we’ll call up and play the piano voice. You can play the piano voice using the pedals or metronome.

4 Press the [A] button to select the “1 INITIAL TOUCH.”

5 Press the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] button to select touch sensitivity for the keyboard.

Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain

displays and functions.

For example, the instructions above can be indicated in shorthand as: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

]

KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH.

[PIANO RESET] button (see page 29)

METRONOME

[ON/OFF] button

(page 30)

VOICE category selection buttons (page 32)

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

One-touch Piano Play

This convenient, easy-to-use feature completely and automatically reconﬁgures the entire instrument for optimum

piano performance. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel, you can instantly call up the piano settings

by a single button press.

Piano Lock Function

The convenient Piano Lock function lets you “lock” the piano so that you don’t inadvertently change the settings by

pressing another button on the panel. Once locked, the instrument stays in the piano mode, even if other buttons are

pressed—preventing you from accidentally starting a Song (page 35) during your piano performance.

1 Press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] button on the lower right of the panel for three seconds

or longer, until a message appears prompting you to enable Piano Lock.

2 Press the [F] (OK) button to enable Piano Lock.

3 To turn Piano Lock off, press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] button again for three seconds or

longer.

Press the piano-shaped [PIANO RESET] button on the lower right of the panel.

Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard

You can adjust the touch response of the instrument (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). The touch

sensitivity type becomes the common setting for all Voices.

1 Call up the operation display:

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

] KEYBOARD/

PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH

2 Press the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] buttons to specify the touch response.

HARD 2 ..... Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best

for players with a heavy touch.

HARD 1 ..... Requires moderately strong playing for high volume.

NORMAL... Standard touch response.

SOFT 1....... Produces high volume with moderate playing strength.

SOFT 2....... Produces relatively high volume even with light play-

ing strength. Best for players with a light touch.

•This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard.

• When you do not want to apply touch sensitivity, set Touch to OFF for

the corresponding parts by pressing the [5

†

]–[7

†

] buttons. When

Touch is set to OFF, you can specify the ﬁxed volume level by press-

ing the [4

π†

] button.

•The touch sensitivity settings may have no effect with certain voices.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using the Pedals

The instrument features three pedals.

● Damper Pedal (Right)

The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an

actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even

after releasing the keys.

• Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes

have been released while the damper pedal is held.

• Certain Voices in the “PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT,” “GM&XG” and “GM2”

groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal.

● Sostenuto Pedal (Center)

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal

while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is

held. All subsequent notes will not sustain.

• Certain Voices, such as [STRINGS] or [BRASS], sustain continuously when

the sostenuto pedal is pressed.

• Certain Voices in the “PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT”, “GM&XG” and “GM2”

groups may not be affected by use of the sostenuto pedal.

● Left Pedal

When the Piano voice is selected, pressing this pedal reduces the volume

and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play.

The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected Voice.

n The depth of the left pedal effect can be adjusted (page 98).

● Foot Controller/Footswitch

An optional Yamaha foot controller (FC7) or footswitch (FC4 or FC5) can be connected to the AUX PEDAL jack and

used to control various functions assigned (page 187).

Using the Metronome

The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and

check how a speciﬁc tempo sounds.

Damper Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Left Pedal

CVP-405 CVP-403/401

Damper Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Left Pedal

When you press the damper pedal

here, the notes you play before you

release the pedal have a longer sustain.

When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the

note(s), the notes will sustain as

long as you hold the pedal.

Making Settings for the Pedals

You can assign one of the various functions to the three pedals or an optional foot controller/footswitch, doing things

like controlling the Super Articulation voices (page 79) (CVP-405) or starting and stopping the Style (

page 187).

1 Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button to start the metronome.

2 To stop the metronome, press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button again.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound

■ Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

1 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to call up the pop-up tempo setting display.

2 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons to set the tempo.

Pressing and holding either button lets you continuously increase or decrease the value.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value. To reset the tempo, press the TEMPO [–]/[+] but-

tons simultaneously.

n About the Tempo display

The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and

500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the Tempo display.

■ Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings

1 Call up the operation display:

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

] CONFIG 1 → [B] 2 METRONOME

Set the parameters by pressing the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons.

VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound.

SOUND

Determines which sound is used for the metronome.

Bell Off............... Conventional metronome

sound, with no bell.

Bell On............... Conventional metronome

sound, with bell.

English Voice ...... Count in English

German Voice .... Count in German

Japanese Voice ... Count in Japanese

French Voice....... Count in French

Spanish Voice ..... Count in Spanish

TIME

SIGNATURE

Determines the time signature of the metronome

sound.

Set the Popup Display Time

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 POPUP DISPLAY TIME) button, and use the [7

π†

]/[8

π†

] buttons to set the time.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Playing Various Voices

The instrument features a variety of Voices such as strings or wind instruments, including exceptionally realistic piano

Voices.

Playing Preset Voices

The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. VOICE category selection buttons on the panel

correspond to the categories of the preset Voices. For example, press the [PIANO] button to display various piano

Voices.

n About the various Voices

Refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet.

Make sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] buttons are off.

The Voice selected here is the RIGHT 1 part. For the Voice part, see page 80.

1 Use the [A]/[B]/[F]/[G] (RIGHT1) buttons in the Main display to select the RIGHT 1

part.

Determining how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection

buttons is pressed).

You can select how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is

pressed).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS) button, and use the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] buttons to change

how the Voice selection display is opened.

• OPEN&SELECT:

Opens the Voice selection display with the top (ﬁrst) voice of the voice category automatically selected (when

one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). With the default settings, the OPEN&SELECT function

is turned on.

• OPEN ONLY:

Opens the Voice selection display with the currently selected voice (when one of the VOICE category selection

buttons is pressed).

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to select a Voice category and call

up the Voice selection display.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

You can call up the information for the selected Voice by pressing the [7

] (INFORMATION) button.

n The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. For details on the characteris-

tics, see page 79.

n You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

n Restoring the Piano settings

Press the piano-shaped [PIANO RESET] button.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice.

4 Play the keyboard.

Recalling your favorite Voices easily

The instrument has a huge amount of high-quality Voices, covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds—

making it perfect for virtually every musical application. However, the sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming

at ﬁrst. To easily recall your favorite Voice, there are two methods:

● Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using the

[USER] button

1 Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive.

Refer to page 71 for details on the copy operation.

2 Call up the selection display.

[USER] → [F] VOICE (RIGHT1)

3 Select the desired Voice.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the Voice.

● Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEMORY

[1]–[8] buttons

Refer to page 127 for details on Registration Memory operations.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Playing the Voice Demos

To listen to the various Voices and hear how they sound especially in context, listen to the demo songs for each Voice.

1 In the Voice Selection display (page 33 step 3), press the [8

††

] (DEMO) button to start

the Demo for the selected Voice.

2 To stop the Demo, press the [8

††

] (DEMO) button again.

Selecting percussion sounds

When one of the Drum Kit Voices in the [PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT] group is selected, you can play various drums

and percussion instrument sounds on the keyboard. Details are given in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List.

To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned to each key, look at the icons printed above the keys.

Selecting sound effects

You can play individual sound effects, such as bird chirps and ocean sounds from the keyboard. The sound effects are

categorized as “GM&XG”/“GM2.”

1 Use the [A]/[B]/[F]/[G] (RIGHT 1) buttons to select the RIGHT 1 part.

2 Press the [8

] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories.

3 Press the [2

] button to display page 2.

4 Press the [E]/[F] button to select “GM&XG”/“GM2.”

5 Press the [2

] button to display page 2.

6 Press the [F] button to select “SoundEffect.”

7 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired sound effect.

8 Play the keyboard.

Selecting GM/XG/GM2 Voices

n For details on the Voice allocation format, see page 195.

You can select the GM/XG/GM2 Voices directly via the panel operation.

Perform steps 1–4 described above, select the desired category, then select the desired voice.

Playing different Voices simultaneously

The instrument can play different Voices simultaneously (page 80).

• Layering two different Voices

This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds.

• Setting separate Voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard

You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, you can set up the keyboard to play the

bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right hand.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Practicing with the Songs

n Song

On the instrument, performance data is called a “Song.”

Playing Back Songs Before Practicing

The instrument includes not only the preset demo Songs, but also many preset Songs. This section covers basic infor-

mation on playing back the preset Songs or Songs in a CD-ROM.

The preset Songs are categorized and contained in appropriate folders.

You can also select the ﬁle by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

n You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song category.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song.

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Playing Songs saved to USER (page 43)

1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] button to select the USER tab.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song.

n Select the ﬁle to which the data is saved.

You can also select the speciﬁed ﬁle to which the data is saved by pressing the [USER] button.

[USER] → [A] SONG → [A]–[J]

Playing Songs saved to a USB storage device (page 43)

For information on using USB storage devices, see page 22.

1 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

3 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the USB tab (“USB1”/“USB2”), corresponding to the USB storage device

you inserted in Step 1.

The indication “USB1”/“USB2” will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices.

4 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song.

n Select the ﬁle to which the data is saved.

You can also select the speciﬁed ﬁle to which the data is saved by pressing the [USB] button.

[USB] → [A] SONG → [A]–[J]

Playing Songs in sequence

You can play all Songs in a folder continuously.

1 Select a Song in the desired folder.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

3 Press the [H] (REPEAT MODE) button to select “ALL.”

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

All Songs in the folder play back continuously, in order.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop continuous playback.

6 To turn off the Song sequence playback, press the [H] button to select “OFF” in the display in step 2.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Boost the volume of the part to be practiced

On the instrument, a single Song can contain separate data for up to sixteen MIDI channels. Specify the channel for

practicing and increase the playback volume for the channel.

1 Select a Song. The method for selecting a Song is the same as “Playing Back Songs Before Practicing (page 35 step

1–5).”

2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display.

3 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the VOL/VOICE tab.

4 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button until “MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8)” is shown at the top of the dis-

play.

5 Press the [E]/[J] button to select “VOLUME.”

6 To raise the level of the desired channel(s), press the appropriate buttons [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8) display, press the [MIXING CON-

SOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH9–16) display.

If you don’t know which channel’s volume to raise:

• Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below “VOICE.”

• Look at the channel indicators, which light as the Song plays back. Watching these as you listen can show you

which channel you wish to boost.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Displaying Music Notation (Score)

You can view the music notation of the selected Song. We suggest that you read through the music notation before

starting to practice.

•The instrument can display the music notation of commercially-available music data or your recorded Songs.

•The displayed notation is generated by the instrument based on the Song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as com-

mercially available sheet music of the same song—especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short

notes.

•The notation functions cannot be used to create Song data by inputting notes. For information on creating Song data, see

page 139.

n Look through the entire score before playing back the Song

Press the TAB [

] button to select subsequent pages.

The “ball” bounces along through the score, indicating the current position.

Changing the Notation Display

You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal

preferences.

1 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music nota-

tion.

2 Changing the following settings as desired.

● Changing the size of the music notation

Press the [7

π†

] button to change the size of the

music notation.

● Displaying only right-hand part/left-hand part

notation

Press the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] button to disable display of

the left-hand part/right-hand part.

● Customizing the notation display

• Display the note name at the left of the note

1 Press the [5

ππ

††

] (NOTE) button to display the note name.

2 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (SET UP) button to call up the detailed setting display.

3 Press the [6

†

] (NOTE NAME) button to select “Fixed Do.”

4 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the setting.

•Turn on the note colors (CVP-405)

Press the [6

π†

] button to turn the COLOR on.

n About the note colors

These colors are ﬁxed for each note and cannot be changed.

C: red, D: yellow, E: green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray

● Increase the number of measures in the display

You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be dis-

played (part, lyrics, chords, etc.).

Use the [1

π†

]–[4

π†

] buttons to turn off the items you want not to be displayed.

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation.

3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired.

1 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (SETUP) button to call up the detailed setting display.

2 Press the [1

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to set the view type.

3 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the setting.

n Save the notation view settings

The notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song (page 158).

One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps

The key guide lamps indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold

them down. You can also practice at your own pace—since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes cor-

rectly. Here, mute the right- or left-hand part and try practicing the part using the guide lamps.

Practicing the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the Guide Lamps

LEFT CH/RIGHT CH

Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part. This set-

ting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected.

AUTO

The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically—

setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is speciﬁed in the [FUNCTION] →

[B] SONG SETTING.

1–16

Assigns the speciﬁed MIDI channel (1–16) to each of the left- and right-hand parts.

OFF (LEFT CH only)

No channel assignment: This disables display of the left-hand key range.

KEY SIGNATURE

This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu

is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation.

QUANTIZE

This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing

of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest

note value used in the song.

NOTE NAME

Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the fol-

lowing three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE parameter in “Display the note

name at the left of the note” step 1 is set to ON.

A, B, C

Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).

FIXED DO

Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language.

The language is speciﬁed in LANGUAGE of the OWNER display (page 63).

MOVABLE DO

Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the

key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of “So” would

be indicated as “Do.” As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on.

234

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

The indicator of the [TRACK 1 (R)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself.

n Have the guide lamp ﬂash a lead-in to the music

In the GUIDE LAMP TIMING, select NEXT (page 138).

Practice the muted part using the guide lamps.

n Adjusting the tempo

Refer to page 31.

Quickly changing tempo during a performance (Tap function)

The tempo can also be changed during Song playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo.

3 Press the [TRACK 1 (R)] button to mute the right-hand part.

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off.

Adjusting the volume balance between the Song and the keyboard

This lets you adjust the volume balance between Song playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.

1 Call up the Main display.

[DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT]

n The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display.

When the Balance display is not indicated, press the [EXIT] button.

(On the CVP-401, open the volume balance display by pressing the [C] button.)

2 To adjust the Song volume, press the [1

π†

] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6

π†

]

button.

n About keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left)

See page 80.

Other guide functions

The initial setting “Follow Lights (page 138)” was used in the instructions “One-handed Practice with the Guide

Lamps” above. There are additional functions in the Guide feature, as described below. To select a guide function, see

page 137.

For keyboard performance

• Any Key

This lets you practice the timing of playing the keys.

For Karaoke

• Karao-Key

This automatically controls the timing of Song playback to match your singing—a convenient feature for singing

along with your keyboard performance (page 54).

•Vocal CueTIME (CVP-405/403)

This automatically controls the timing of the accompaniment to match the melody (pitch) of your singing—allow-

ing you to practice singing with the correct pitch.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Practicing the Left-hand Part (TRACK 2) Using the Guide Lamps

The indicator of the [TRACK 2 (L)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself.

Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function

The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a speciﬁc range of measures in a Song. This

is useful for repeated practicing of difﬁcult-to-play phrases.

Playing Back a Song Repeatedly

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn on Repeat playback.

3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

The Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG [STOP] button.

4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback.

Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeat-

edly (A-B Repeat)

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

3 Specify the repeat range.

Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button

again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from

Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly.

n Instantly returning to Point A

Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [STOP] button returns to Point A.

4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback.

1,2 Follow the same steps as in “Practice the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the

Guide Lamps” on page 39.

3 Press the [TRACK 2] button to mute the left-hand part.

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback and practice the muted part

using the guide lamps.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Other Methods for Specifying the A–B Repeat Range

● Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped

1 Press the [FF] button to advance to the Point A location.

2 Press the [REPEAT] button to specify Point A.

3 Press the [FF] button to advance to the Point B location.

4 Press the [REPEAT] button again to specify Point B.

● Specifying the repeat range between Point A and the end of the Song

Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song.

Recording Your Performance

Record your performance by using the Quick Recording feature. This is an effective practice tool, allowing you to easily

compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing. You can also use it to practice duet pieces by

yourself, if you have your teacher or partner record his or her part beforehand.

A blank Song for recording is automatically set.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard.

A message prompting you to save the recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT]

button.

1 Press the [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously.

2 Select a Voice (page 32). The selected Voice will be recorded.

3 Press the [REC] button.

4 Start recording.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording.

6 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the appropriate tab (USER, USB, etc.) to which you want to

save the data. Select USER to save the data to internal memory, or select USB to save the data to a

USB storage device.

3 Press the [6

††

] (SAVE) button to call up the ﬁle naming display.

4 Enter the ﬁle name (page 74).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to save the ﬁle.

To cancel the Save operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

CAUTION

The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save oper-

ation.

Playing Backing Parts with the performance

assistant Technology

This feature makes it exceptionally easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback.

n Before using performance assistant technology

To use the performance assistant technology, the Song must contain chord data. If the Song contains this data, the current chord

name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or

not.

In these example instructions, we recommend that you use the Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

7 Save the recorded performance.

When the following message appears: “Song” changed. Save?/“Song” speichern?/“Song” modiﬁé.

Sauv.?/“Song” cambiado. ¿Guardar?/Salvare “’Song” ?

The recorded data has not yet been saved. To save the data, press the [G] (YES) button to open the Song selection dis-

play and save the data (see above). To cancel the operation, press the [H] (NO) button.

Playing Songs saved to a USER/USB storage device

Refer to page 36.

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Call up the operation display.

3 Press the [8

ππ

††

] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) on.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

The instrument automatically matches your performance on the keyboard to the Song playback and chords,

no matter what keys you play. It even changes the sound according to the way you play. Try playing in the

three different ways below.

Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accom-

paniment Feature (Style Playback)

The Auto Accompaniment features let you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing

“chords” with your left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra—

even if you’re playing by yourself. The Auto Accompaniment sound is made up of the rhythm patterns of the

Styles. The Styles of the instrument cover a wide range of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and

many others.

4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

5 Play the keyboard.

Playing the left and right hand together

(method 1).

Playing the left and right hand together

(method 2).

Playing the left hand and right hand

alternately.

Play three notes at the

same time with your

right hand.

Play several notes one after

the other with different ﬁn-

gers of your right hand.

Play three notes at the

same time with your

right hand.

●● ●

6 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

7 Press the [8

ππ

††

] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) off.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature

122 233 35

1 1 1

21 2 3 2 3 2 1

1 1 4 1

CGC

GCC

MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB

Traditional

Style: Country Pop

Ending

1 Press the STYLE CONTROL “COUNTRY” button.

Enabling tempo display above Style name

You can select whether the tempo is displayed above the Style name or not.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] CONFIG 2

2 Select the [B] (2 DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO) button, and use the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

] buttons to switch the tempo dis-

play on/off.

• ON:

Tempo is displayed above the Style name.

With the default settings, the Display Style Tempo function is on.

• OFF:

Tempo is not displayed above the Style name.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

•The Style type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. For details on the character-

istics, see page 103.

• When the [7

] (REPERTOIRE) button is pressed after selecting a Style, you can call up the custom panel settings (for

voices and tempos, etc.) designed to best match the selected Style. To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT]

button.

•You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

Use the left-hand section (lower part) of the keyboard to play the chords for sounding the Auto Accompaniment.

Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand.

n Chord Fingerings

There are seven different ﬁngering methods you can use to specify chords (page 103).

When Ending playback is ﬁnished, the Style automatically stops.

• About the various Styles

Refer to the Style List in the separate Data List booklet.

• Quickly changing the Style tempo during a performance (Tap function)

The tempo can also be changed during playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo.

• Specifying the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range)

See page 107.

• Turns touch response on/off for the Style playback (Style Touch)

See page 106.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style “CountryPop.”

3 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.

3 45 6

4 Press the [SYNC START] button to set Auto Accompaniment to standby—letting you

simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing.

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Auto Accompaniment starts.

6 Automatically play an appropriate ending by pressing the [ENDING] button, at the

point in the score (page 45) indicated by “Ending.”

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Pattern Variation

While you play, you can automatically add specially created intros and endings, as well as variations in the rhythm/

chord patterns, for more dynamic, professional-sounding performances. There are several different auto accompani-

ment pattern variations for each situation: starting your performance, during your performance, and ending your per-

formance. Try out the variations and combine them freely.

To Start Playing

● Start/Stop

Styles start playing back as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed.

● Intro

This is used for the beginning of the song. Each preset Style features three different intros. When the intro ﬁnished play-

ing, accompaniment shifts to the Main section (see “Main” in the “During Style playback” below).

Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons before starting Style playback and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

button to start Style playback.

● Synchro Start

This lets you start playback as soon as you play the keyboard.

Press the [SYNC START] button when Style playback is stopped and play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard

to start Style playback.

● Tap

Tap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the [TAP TEMPO]

button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped.

n The particular drum sound and the velocity (loudness) of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the following

display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB[

√

] CONFIG 1 → [B] 4 TAP

Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard (page 40)

This lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard.

1 Call up the Main display.

[DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT]

The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display. If the Balance display is not selected, press the [EXIT] button.

(On the CVP-401, open the volume balance display by pressing the [C] button.)

2 To adjust the Style volume, press the [2

π†

] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6

π†

]

button.

Fade In

For information on the settings, see page 187.

n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 105.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

During Style Playback

● Main

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats

indeﬁnitely. Each preset Style features four different patterns.

Press one of the MAIN [A]–[D] buttons during Style playback.

● Fill In

The ﬁll-in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your per-

formance sound even more professional.

Turn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button before starting Style playback or during playback. Then, simply press one of the

MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D) buttons as you play, and the selected ﬁll-in section plays automatically (AUTO FILL), spic-

ing up the auto accompaniment. When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section (A, B, C, D).

Even when [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned off, pressing the same button of the currently playing section automatically

plays a ﬁll-in before returning to the same main section.

● Break

This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more

professional.

Press the [BREAK] button during Style playback.

To Finish Playing

● Start/stop

Styles stop as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed.

● Ending

This is used for the ending of the Song. Each preset Style features three different endings. When the ending is ﬁnished,

the Style stops automatically.

Press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons during Style playback. You can have the ending gradually slow down

(ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING/rit. button again while the ending is playing back.

n If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button in the middle of your performance, a ﬁll-in automatically plays before the ENDING/rit. [I].

Others

● Synchro Stop

When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the Style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in

the chord section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance.

Press the [SYNC STOP] button before starting the Style playback.

• Enable Synchro Stop by pressing/releasing keys (Synchro Stop Window)

See page 106.

• Fixing the section pattern to either Intro or Main (Section Set)

For example, you can set this function to Intro to conveniently have an Intro play automatically whenever you select a Style (page 106).

● Fade Out

For information on the settings, see page 187.

n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 105.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback

Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords

If know the name of a chord but don’t know how to play it, you can have the instrument show you the notes to play

(Chord Tutor function).

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√][®] CHORD FINGERING

The notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display.

n The notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered, no matter which ﬁngering type is selected (page 104).

About the section button (INTRO/MAIN/ENDING, etc.) lamps

• Green

The section is not selected.

• Red

The section is currently selected.

• Off

The section contains no data and cannot be played.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the root note.

2 3

3 Press the [7

ππ

††

]/[8

ππ

††

] button to select the chord type.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Checking How to Play Chords with the Guide Lamps

For Songs containing chord data, you can have the individual notes of the chords indicated with the Guide lamps on

the instrument.

The Guide lamps in the chord section of the keyboard ﬂash according to the chords of the Song. Try practic-

ing the chords, matching the Guide lamps.

Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style (One Touch

Setting)

One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings

(Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided

which Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you.

Not only does this instantly call up all the

settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that match the

current Style—it also automatically turns on

ACMP and SYNC START, so that you can

immediately start playing the Style.

n Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 128).

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button and press the [B] button to call up the Song Setting dis-

play, and make sure that the GUIDE MODE is set to “Follow Lights.”

3 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.

4 Press the [GUIDE] button.

5 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

1 Select a Style (page 46 step 2).

2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected Style starts.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting

● Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link)

The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when

you select a different Main section (A–D).To use the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button.

n Setting the timing for OTS changes

The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings (page 106).

● Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS

You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups.

1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects,

and so on) as desired.

2 Press the [MEMORY] button.

3 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons.

A message appears in the display prompting you to save

the panel settings.

It is possible to save the panel settings with another ﬁle

(step 4), so register it in a favorite number from 1 to 4.

4 Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style selection

display and save the panel settings as a Style ﬁle (page 70).

CAUTION

The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without

executing the Save operation.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song—Music Finder

If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which Style and Voice settings would be

appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function can help you out. Simply select the desired music genre

from among the Music Finder “Records,” and the instrument automatically makes all appropriate panel set-

tings to let you play in that music style.

A new record can be created by editing the currently selected one (page 110).

n The data (records) of the Music Finder are not the same as Song data and cannot be played back.

The ALL tab contains the preset records.

•You can also select the desired record by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute.

• Searching the records

The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword—and

instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria (page 108).

• MUSIC ...............Contains the song title or music genre that describes each record, letting you easily

ﬁnd the desired music style.

n Skipping up or down through the song alphabetically

When sorting records by song title, use the [1

π†

] button to skip up or down through the songs

alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [

π†

] buttons to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record.

• STYLE.................This is the preset Style assigned to the record.

n Skipping up or down through the Style alphabetically

When sorting records by Style name, use the [4

π†

]/[5

π†

] button to skip up or down through the

Styles alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [

π†

] buttons to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record.

• BEAT ..................This is the time signature registered to each Record.

• TEMPO ..............This is the assigned tempo setting for the record.

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the ALL tab.

3 Select the desired record by using the following four search categories.

To select a record, press the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] buttons.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Notice that the panel settings have been automatically changed to match the music genre of the selected record.

• Tempo Lock

Tempo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record. To turn on the

Tempo Lock function, press the [I] (TEMPO LOCK) button in the Music Finder display.

• Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 128).

Calling up the panel settings to match the Style (Rep-

ertoire)

The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for

the currently selected Style.

n The Repertoire function is valid for Styles in the “PRESET”/“USER” tab. The Repertoire function cannot be used for Styles

saved to a USB storage device. To use the Repertoire function, save the desired Style in “USER” tab.

The panel settings that match the Style under selection is searched according to the record group of the

Music Finder. The list of the search results is shown on the “SEARCH 2” display of the Music Finder.

CAUTION

When the result of searching the record in the “SEARCH 2” display has already been shown, the searched result is

lost.

4 Play the keyboard.

1 Select the desired Style for which you want to call up the panel settings from the

“PRESET”/“USER” tab on Style selection display.

2 Press the [7

ππ

] (REPERTOIRE) button.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the desired panel settings.

Sorting the records

Press the [F] (SORT BY) button to sort the records.

• MUSIC .................. The record is sorted by song title.

• STYLE.................... The record is sorted by Style name.

• BEAT ..................... The record is sorted by beat.

• TEMPO ................. The record is sorted by tempo.

Changing the order of the records

Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to change the order of the records (ascending or descending).

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or

Your Own Performance

Connect a microphone to the instrument (CVP-405/403) and sing along with Song playback (Karaoke) or

your own performance.

The lyrics can be displayed when the Song contains lyric data. Sing with the microphone as you read the lyr-

ics shown in the display. Lyrics can also be displayed with the music score, letting you play and sing while fol-

lowing along with the notation and lyrics.

Connecting a Microphone (CVP-405/403)

n Always set the INPUT VOLUME to minimum when nothing is con-

nected to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack. Since the [MIC/LINE IN] jack is

highly sensitive, it may pick up and produce noise when nothing is

connected.

Adjust the controls while checking the SIGNAL and OVER lamps. The SIGNAL

lamp lights to indicate that an audio signal is being received. Make sure to

adjust the INPUT VOLUME so that this lamp is light. The OVER lamp lights

when the input level is too high. Make sure to adjust the INPUT VOLUME so

that this lamp does not light.

Disconnecting the microphone

Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum position.

2 Disconnect the microphone from the [MIC./LINE IN] jack.

n Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob to the minimum position before turning off the power.

1 Make sure you have a conventional dynamic microphone.

2 Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum

position.

3 Connect the microphone to the [MIC./LINE IN] jack.

MIN MAX

INPUT

MIC.

MIC. LINE PHONES

VOLUME

LINE IN

2, 5

4 Set the [MIC. LINE] switch to “MIC.”

5 (For microphones having a power source, turn on the power ﬁrst.) Adjust the [INPUT

VOLUME] knob while singing into the microphone.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Singing with the Lyrics Display

Try singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data

When the Text display appears, press the [1

†

] (LYRICS) button to display the lyrics.

Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display. The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays.

• When the lyrics are unreadable

You may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to “International” or “Japanese” in the Song Setting display ([FUNCTION] → [B]

SONG SETTING), if the lyrics shown are garbled or unreadable. This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data (page 158).

• Changing the Lyrics Background Picture (CVP-405)

You can change the background picture of the Lyrics display. Press the [7

π†

]/[8

π†

] (BACKGROUND) button in the Lyrics dis-

play to call up the Lyrics picture selection display for the available picture ﬁles and select the desired one. Press the [EXIT] button

to return to the previous display.

The lyrics background picture can be saved to the Song (page 158).

• Changing the lyrics

You can change the lyrics as desired (page 162).

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] (CVP-403/401: [LYRICS]) button to display the lyrics.

3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback.

Displaying Text (CVP-405)

This feature lets you show text ﬁles (created on a computer) in the display of the instrument, enabling various

useful possibilities, such as the showing of lyrics, chord names, and text notes.

1 Connect the USB storage device containing the text ﬁle to [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button to display the text.

When the lyrics are displayed, press the [1

†

] (TEXT) button to display the text.

3 Press the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

] (TEXT FILE) buttons to call up the Text selection display.

4 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the desired TAB.

5 Double-click one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a text ﬁle.

If the text is long, use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select other pages.

n An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn pages (page 187).

The following additional settings are available in the TEXT display:

LYRICS ..........................................Switches the screen to the Lyrics display.

CLEAR...........................................Clears the text from the display (the text data itself is not erased).

F (FIXED) 11 pt (point)–

P (PROPORTIONAL) 16 pt............Determines the text type (ﬁxed or proportional) and font size.

TEXT FILE......................................Opens the Text selection display.

BACK GROUND...........................Allows changing of the background picture of the text display, as in the Lyrics

display described above. The background setting is common for both the Lyr-

ics display and Text display.

•The text ﬁle, which is copied in the USER tab can be showed.

• Line feed (or “carriage return”) is not automatically performed in the instrument. If a sentence is not displayed in its

entirety because of limitations in the screen space, execute the line feed on your computer.

• When the background color is speciﬁed in the song data, the BACKGROUND setting cannot be changed.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Convenient Functions for Karaoke

Transpose

You can use this to adjust the key of the Song if it is too high or low.

•Transposing the Song key up................ Press the TRANSPOSE [+] button.

•Transposing the Song key down........... Press the TRANSPOSE [–] button.

• Resetting the transposition ................... Press the TRANSPOSE [+][–] buttons simultaneously.

Applying Effects to Your Voice (CVP-405/403)

You can also apply various effects to your voice.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

n Selecting an effect type

You can select the effect type in the Mixing Console (page 91).

Adjusting the tempo ➤ page 31

Transpose ➤ See below.

Applying Effects to Your Voice (CVP-405/403) ➤ page 56

Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice (CVP-405/403) ➤ page 57

Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch (Vocal CueTIME) (CVP-405/403) ➤ page 137

1 Use an appropriate video cable to connect the [VIDEO OUT] connector of

the instrument to the Video input connector on the TV monitor.

2 Set the external television/video monitor signal (NTSC or PAL) used by

your video equipment, if necessary.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] SCREEN OUT

Press the [1

π†

] button to select the external television/video monitor

signal.

VIDEO OUT AUX IN

L L+R R

Displaying the lyrics/text on an external TV monitor (CVP-405)

The lyrics/text indicated on the display can also be output via the VIDEO OUT terminal.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons to turn the effect on.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice (CVP-405/403)

You can also automatically apply various harmony vocals to your voice.

If the Song contains this data, the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song

playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

For details on the Vocal Harmony types, refer to the separate Data List.

The harmony is applied to your voice according to the chord data.

1 Select a Song which contains chord data (page 35).

2 Call up the operation display.

3 Press the [6

ππ

††

]/[7

ππ

††

] buttons to turn the harmony vocals (Vocal Harmony) on.

4 Press the [H] button to call up the Vocal Harmony selection display.

5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type.

6 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment.

7 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button and sing into the microphone.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your

Own Performance

Changing the Key (Transpose)

You can match both the Song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, the Song data is in F, but

you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the

keys, set the Master Transpose to “0,” the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and the Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the

keyboard part up and the song data down to your desired singing key.

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [B] TRANSPOSE ASSIGN

The following types are available. Select the one most suited to your purpose.

●KEYBOARD

Transpose pitch of the keyboard played Voices and Style playback (controlled by what you play in the chord

section of the keyboard).

●SONG

Transposes the pitch of Song playback.

●MASTER

Transpose the overall pitch of the instrument.

You can set the value in semitone steps.

To reset the transpose value, press the [+][–] buttons simultaneously.

Changing the Key (Transpose) ➤ See below.

Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics on TV (CVP-405) ➤ page 59

Making Announcements Between Songs (CVP-405/403) ➤ page 59

Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice (Karao-Key) ➤ page 137

Adjusting the microphone and Song volume (page 40)

You can adjust the volume balance between the Song playback and the microphone.

1 Call up the Main display.

[DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT]

n The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display.

If the Balance display is not indicated, press the [EXIT] button.

2 To adjust the microphone volume, press the [4

π†

] button.

To adjust the Song volume, press the [1

π†

] button.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] button to select the desired transpose type.

3 Press the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] button to transpose.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to close the TRANSPOSE display.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics

and Text on TV (CVP-405)

This convenient sing-along function lets you have the music score shown on the display of the instrument (for your

playing purposes), while only the lyrics are shown on a separate TV (page 56) so your audience can sing along.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] SCREEN OUT

Making Announcements Between Songs (CVP-405/403)

This function is ideal for making announcements between your singing performances. When singing a song, several

effects are usually assigned to the MIC Setup. When speaking to your audience, however, these effects may sound dis-

turbing or unnatural. Whenever the TALK function is turned on, effects are automatically turned off.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

n Talk settings can be customized as well, allowing you to add any desired effects to your voice as you speak to your audi-

ence (page 170).

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [3

ππ

]/[4

ππ

] button to select LYRICS.

1 Call up the operation display.

2 Press the [2

ππ

]/[3

ππ

] (TALK) button to turn the function on.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Recording Your Performance as Audio (USB

Audio Recorder) (CVP-405/403)

Here you’ll learn how to record your performance as audio data to a USB storage device. For example, by connecting

a guitar, microphone or other device to the instrument, you can record an ensemble performance of guitar and key-

board together or record yourself singing along with Song playback. The performance data is saved as a WAV ﬁle of

conventional CD quality (44.1 kHz/16 bit). Since it is possible to play back the ﬁle on computer, a listener doesn’t need

to have the particular instrument in order to hear the performance. This makes it possible to easily share your perfor-

mances and recordings with your friends via e-mail, record your own CDs, or upload the recordings to websites for

many others to enjoy as well.

Recording methods on the instrument include MIDI recording as well as audio recording. For details about the differ-

ence between audio and MIDI recording, see page 192. For speciﬁc instructions on MIDI recording, refer to page 196.

• In order to record your own original CD, you’ll need a CD-R drive (or compatible device). Refer to the manual that came with your

speciﬁc computer for details.

• When you attach a recorded ﬁle in an e-mail message, make sure the ﬁle size is small enough to be sent.

The following sounds can be recorded.

• Internal tone generator of the instrument.

Keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left), Song parts, Style parts

• Input from a microphone, guitar or other instrument (via the [MIC./LINE IN] jack).

• Input from another audio device, such as a CD player, MP3 player or the like (via the [MIC./LINE IN] jack).

n Songs protected by copyright, such as preset songs, and the metronome sound cannot be recorded.

The recorded data using this function is saved as:

• Stereo WAV data

• 44.1 kHz sample rate/16 bit resolution

Recording Your Performance as Audio

Now, try recording a performance of your singing along with Song playback with a connected microphone. The maxi-

mum amount of recording time is 80 minutes, though this may differ depending on the capacity of the particular USB

storage device.

Here, you’ll also see by example how to sing along with accompaniment/Style playback. To set the Style, go

on to step 6 (page 46).

•To record your performance by USB Audio Recorder, use the compatible USB ﬂash memory. When the USB ﬂash

memory is not compatible, it is not likely to be able to record/playback normally.

• Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy

Disk, etc)” on page 22.

1 Set the desired Voice, etc. which you want to use for your performance, and connect

a microphone. (For information on setting the Voice, see page 28; for connecting a

microphone, see page 54.)

2 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

The following information is indicated on the PROPERTY display.

• DRIVE NAME ...................................... Number of the USB storage device (USB 1, USB 2, etc.)

• ALL SIZE .............................................. Size of USB storage device

• FREE AREA........................................... Available recording space on the USB storage device

• POSSIBLE TIME.................................... Available time for recording

Press the [F] (OK)/[EXIT] button to close the PROPERTY display.

n The USB storage device of “USB1” is selected as the recording destination when multiple USB storage devices are connected. To

check the number of the USB storage device (USB1 and USB2, etc.), press the [A]/[B]/[F] button on the display of step 4, and change

the tab. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

When recording begins, the “RECORDING” indication on the display changes to red (CVP-405), and the

elapsed recording time is displayed.

CAUTION

Avoid frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB storage device, or turning the power on/off too often. Doing so

may corrupt the USB storage device data or the recording data.

The ﬁle name is automatically named (and is always given a new, unique name), and a message indicating

the ﬁle name is displayed.

n The recording operation continues, even if you close the Recording display by pushing the [EXIT] button. To stop the

recording, press the [J] (STOP) button on the Recording display.

3 Press the [USB] button.

4 Press the [E] (USB AUDIO RECORDER) button to call up the recording display

(USB AUDIO RECORDER display).

5 If necessary, press the [E] (PROPERTY) button to call up the Property display, then

check the information of the USB storage device.

5 6, 7

6 Start recording by pressing the [J] (REC) button, then start your performance.

7 Stop recording by pressing the [J] (STOP) button.

Quick Guide

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Playing Back the Recorded Performance

Play back the recorded performance.

[USB] → [E] (USB AUDIO RECORDER).

The ﬁle recorded is selected in step 1-7 (page 60). For information about the operation method to change the

name of the displayed ﬁle or to delete a ﬁle, see the section “File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Dis-

play” on page 69. However, the operation that copies/moves ﬁle/folder to the User tab cannot be done here.

The song is played back from the beginning, and the display indicates the auditioning process. This display

closes automatically when auditioning is stopped. Press the [G] (CANCEL) or [EXIT] button to stop audition-

ing.

CAUTION

Avoid frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB storage device, or turning the power on/off too often. Doing so

may corrupt the USB storage device data or the auditioning data.

n Audio recording is processed internally so that playback volume will be appropriate when played on a computer. There-

fore, the playback sound might be distorted if you record at too high a volume. In this case, lower and adjust the volume

of each part with Volume Balance display (page 40) and the Mixing Console (page 87), etc., and try recording again.

1 Call up the USB AUDIO RECORDER display.

Press the [7

ππ

††

]/[8

ππ

††

] (AUDITION) button to display the audio ﬁles (WAV data)

saved to the connected USB storage device.

3 Press one of the [A]-[J] buttons corresponding to the ﬁle you want to listen to, then

press the [8

††

] (AUDITION) button.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the USB AUDIO RECORDER display shown in step 4

of “Recording Your Performance as Audio” above.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting Message Language

You can select the desired language of the display messages.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

][

] OWNER

2 Use [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] (LANGUAGE) buttons to select the language.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

The Messages Shown in the Display

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen

to facilitate operation. When the message appears, simply press the appropriate

button.

The language selected here is

also used for various “Mes-

sages” shown during operations.

In this example, press the [F] (YES) button

to start formatting the MEDIA (USB storage

device such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy

disk, etc).

Basic Operation

Instant Selection of the Displays—Direct Access

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Instant Selection of the Displays—

Direct Access

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired

display—with just a single additional button press.

1 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button.

A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate

button.

2 Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to

instantly call up that display.

Refer to the separate Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up

with the Direct Access function.

Example of calling up the Guide function display

Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [GUIDE] button.

Returning to the Main display

You can conveniently return to the Main display from any other display by

simply pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Basic Displays (Main Display and File

Selection Display)

There are two basic display types – Main and Selection. Here are explanations of

each display segment and its basic operation.

Main Display

The Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the cur-

rently selected Voice and Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The

Main display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard.

1 Voice name

• RIGHT 1 (indicated at the right edge):

Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part (page 80).

• RIGHT 2 (indicated at the right edge):

Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part (page 80).

• LEFT (indicated at the right edge):

Voice name currently selected for the LEFT part (page 80).

When the Left Hold function is ON, an “H” indication appears (page 85). Pressing one of

the [A]–[C] and [F]–[H] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each part (page 32).

On the CVP-401, one of the [A]–[B] and [F]–[I] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display

for each part (page 32).

2 Style name and related information

Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. On the CVP-405/

403, pressing the [D] button calls up the Style Selection display (

page 46

). On the CVP-

401, open the Style Selection display by pressing the [1

π†

]–[4

π†

] buttons.

3 Current chord name

If the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is set to On, the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the

keyboard will be displayed.

4 Song name and related information

Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo. On the CVP-405/

403, pressing the [I] button calls up the Style Selection display (

page 46

). On the CVP-

401, open the Style Selection display by pressing the [5

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons.

If the Song contains the chord data, the current chord name will be displayed in the “CHORD”

segment (see 3 above). Pressing the [I] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 35).

5 Registration Memory Bank name

Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name.

Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display (page 128).

When the Freeze function is ON, an “F” indication appears (page 129).

6 Volume Balance

Displays the volume balance among the parts. On the CVP-401, open the volume bal-

ance display by pressing the [C] button.

Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons.

7 Transpose

Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 56).

Returning to the Main display

Here’s a convenient way to

return to the Main display from

any other display: Simply press

the [DIRECT ACCESS] button,

then the [EXIT] button.

78 !)

CVP-405/403 CVP-401

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

8 Tempo

Displays the current tempo of the Song or Style.

9 BAR (current position of the Song or Style)

Displays the current position of the Song or bar and beat number from playback start of the Style.

) Recording status of USB Audio recorder (CVP-405/403)

While recording, a “REC” indication appears.

! Registration Sequence

Appears when the Registration Sequence is active (page 130).

File Selection Display Conﬁguration and Basic Operation

The File Selection display appears when you press one of the buttons shown below. From here you can select

Voices, Styles, and other data.

File Selection Display Conﬁguration

• Location (drive) of data

VOICE category selection buttons

SONG SELECT button

REGIST BANK

selection buttons

STYLE category

selection buttons

Preset

Location where pre-programmed

(preset) data is stored.

User

Location where recorded or

edited data is saved.

USB

Location where data on USB storage device

(USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc) is saved.

Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk, etc. will be referred to as “USB storage device.”

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

• Data ﬁles and folders

The data, both pre-programmed and your own original, are saved as “ﬁles.”

You can drop ﬁles into a folder.

File Selection Display Basic Operation

1 Select the tab containing the desired ﬁle by using the TAB [

√

][

]

buttons.

2 Select the page containing the desired ﬁle by using the [1

ππ

]–[7

ππ

]

buttons ([1

ππ

]–[5

ππ

] buttons for Voice, [1

ππ

]–[6

ππ

] buttons for Song

and Style).

3 Select the ﬁle. There are two ways to do so.

• Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons.

• Select the ﬁle by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER]

button to execute.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

Folder

Icon

File

Select the ﬁle to which the

data is saved.

You can also select the speciﬁed

ﬁle to which the data is to be

saved by pressing the [USB]/

[USER] buttons.

[USB]/[USER] → [A] SONG/[B]

STYLE/[F] VOICE → [A]–[J]

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

This display shows the Voice ﬁles

in a folder.

The next highest level—in this case,

folder—is shown. Each folder shown in

this display contains appropriately cat-

egorized Voices.

Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level

folder

To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder, press

the [8

] (UP) button.

Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display

The PRESET Voice ﬁles are categorized and contained in appropriate folders.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

File/Folder Operations in the File Selection

Display

•Saving Files ............................................................................................. page 70

• Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)....................................................... page 71

•Moving Files (Cut & Paste)....................................................................... page 72

• Deleting Files/Folders.............................................................................. page 72

• Renaming Files/Folders ........................................................................... page 73

• Selecting Custom Icons for Files (shown at the left of ﬁle name).............. page 73

• Creating a New Folder ............................................................................ page 73

• Entering characters.................................................................................. page 74

The indications USB 1, USB 2,

etc. will be displayed depending

on the number of the connected

devices.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message

may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the

format operation.

CAUTION

The format operation deletes any previously existing data. Make sure that the media

you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, espe-

cially when connecting multiple USB storage medias.

1 Insert a USB storage device for formatting into the [USB TO

DEVICE].

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] →→

→→

[J] UTILITY →→

→→

TAB[

√

][

]MEDIA

3 Press the [A]/[B] buttons to select the “USB” Tabs (USB1/USB2)

connected to the devices in step 1.

4 Press the [H] button to format the media.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Saving Files

This operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs and Voices you’ve

created) to a ﬁle.

1 After you’ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR

or VOICE SET display, press the [SAVE] display button.

The File Selection display for the corresponding data appears. Keep in mind

that the Save operation is executed from the File Selection display.

2 Select the appropriate tab (USER/USB) to which you want to save the

data by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

3 Press the [6

††

] (SAVE) button to call up the ﬁle naming display.

4 Enter the ﬁle name (page 74).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to save the ﬁle.

If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

The saved ﬁle will be automatically located at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Internal memory (User tab

displays) capacity

The internal memory capacity of

the instrument is about 1.4MB

(CVP-405/403), or about 560KB

(CVP-401). This capacity applies

to all ﬁle types, including Voice,

Style, Song, and Registration

data ﬁles.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)

This operation lets you copy a ﬁle/folder and paste it to another location (folder).

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to copy.

2 Press the [3

††

] (COPY) button to copy the ﬁle/folder.

The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the dis-

play.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/

folder.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles/folders

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the cur-

rent display including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

†

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Select the destination tab (USER/USB) to paste the ﬁle/folder, by

using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

6 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle/folder.

The folder/ﬁle copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate

position among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Restrictions for protected Songs

Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal

copying or accidental erasure. They are marked by the indications at the

upper left side of the ﬁle names. The indications and relevant restrictions

are detailed below.

Note for “Prot. 2 Orig” and “Prot. 2 Edit” Song ﬁle operation

Make sure to save the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song to the same folder containing its

original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. Otherwise the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song cannot be

played back. Also, if you move a “Prot. 2 Edit” Song, be sure to move its

original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song to the same location (folder) at the same time.

Prot. 1 Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display, Disk Orchestra

Collection (DOC) Songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs. These

cannot be copied/moved/saved to USB storage device.

Prot. 2 Orig Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be

copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display

and USB storage device.

Prot. 2 Edit Indicates edited “Prot. 2 Orig” Songs. Make sure to save these to

the same folder containing the corresponding “Prot. 2 Orig” Song.

These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the

USER tab display and USB storage device.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Moving Files (Cut & Paste)

This operation lets you cut a ﬁle and paste it to another location (folder).

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle you want to move.

2 Press the [2

††

] (CUT) button to cut the ﬁle.

The pop-up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the dis-

play.

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles indicated on the current dis-

play including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle selection.

To cancel the Cut operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Select the destination tab (USER/USB) to which the ﬁle is to be

pasted, by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

6 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste the ﬁle.

The ﬁle moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

Deleting Files/Folders

This operation lets you delete a ﬁle/folder.

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to delete.

2 Press the [5

††

] (DELETE) button.

The pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/folder.

To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again.

■ Selecting all ﬁles/folders

Press the [6

†

] (ALL) button to select all ﬁles/folders indicated on the cur-

rent display including the other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL OFF) button again.

4 Press the [7

†

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Delete operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Follow the on-display instructions.

YES ........................Delete the ﬁle/folder

YES ALL .................Delete all selected ﬁles/folders

NO ........................Leave the ﬁle/folder as is without deleting

CANCEL.................Cancel the Delete operation

Deleting all data in a USB

storage device at once

Formatting a USB storage device

completely erases all data on the

USB storage device (page 69).

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Renaming Files/Folders

This operation lets you rename ﬁles/folders.

1 Call up the display containing the ﬁle/folder you want to rename.

2 Press the [1

††

] (NAME) button.

The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the

display.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired ﬁle/folder.

4 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8

††

] (CANCEL) button.

5 Input the name (characters) of the selected ﬁle or folder (page 74).

The renamed folder/ﬁle appears on the display at the appropriate position

among the ﬁles in alphabetical order.

6 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name.

Selecting Custom Icons for Files (Shown at the

Left of File Name)

You can select custom icons for ﬁles (shown at the left of ﬁle name).

1–4 Operations are the same as the above “Renaming Files/Folders”

section.

5 Press the [1

††

] (ICON) button to call up the ICON display.

Select the icon by using the [A]–[J] buttons or [3

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons.

The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB [

] button to select

different pages.

To cancel the operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

7 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply the selected icon.

8 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name.

Creating a New Folder

This operation lets you create new folders. Folders can be created, named and

organized as desired, making it easier to ﬁnd and select your original data.

1 Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to

create a new folder.

2 Press the [7

††

] (FOLDER) button to call up the naming display for a

new folder.

3 Input the name of the new folder (page 74).

A new folder cannot be made in

the PRESET tab.

Folder directories for the

USER tab display

In the USER tab display, folder

directories can contain up to four

levels. The maximum total num-

ber of ﬁles and folders which can

be stored is 740 (CVP-405/403),

370 (CVP-401), but this may differ

depending on the length of the ﬁle

names. The maximum number of

ﬁles/folders which can be stored

in a folder in the USER tab is 250.

Basic Operation

Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Entering Characters

The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your ﬁles/

folders and when entering the Keyword for Music Finder function/website. The

method is much the same as entering names and numbers to a conventional

mobile phone. Entering characters should be done in the display shown below.

1 Change the type of character by pressing the [1

ππ

] button.

• If you select a language other than Japanese as the Language

(page 63), the following different types of characters are available:

CASE......................Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half

size), marks (half size)

case .......................Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half

size), marks (half size)

• If you select Japanese as the Language (page 63), the following

different types of characters and sizes can be entered:

(kana-kan) ...Hiragana and Kanji, marks (full size)

(kana) ............Katakana (normal size), marks (full size)

(kana) ..............Katakana (half size), marks (half size)

A B C.....................Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), num-

bers (full size), marks (full size)

ABC.......................Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), num-

bers (half size), marks (half size)

2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired position.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] and [7

ππ

] buttons, corresponding to the

character you wish to enter.

For details on entering characters, refer to the following section, below

instruction step 4.

4 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and

return to the previous display.

Entering letters, numerals and symbols can be done by moving the cursor or

pressing one of the character entry buttons. Alternately, you can wait for a

short time and the characters will be entered automatically.

• Deleting characters

Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the [DATA

ENTRY] dial, and press the [7

†

] (DELETE) button. To delete all charac-

ters on the line at once, press and hold the [7

†

] (DELETE) button.

• Entering special character marks (Japanese “ ” and “ ”)

Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press

the [6

†

] button before actual entry of the character.

• Entering marks

1 After actually entering a character by moving the cursor, press the

†

] button to call up the mark list.

2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired mark,

then press the [8

] (OK) button.

Depending on the display for

character entry you are working

in, some types of characters can-

not be entered.

Even if you select Japanese as the

Language, when you enter the

characters in the lyrics editing

display (page 162), the Internet

Setting display (page 179), or

website, the type of characters

“CASE”/“case” may be entered.

The following half-size marks

cannot be entered for a ﬁle/

folder name.

\ / : * ? " < > |

Entering password or WEP key of

wireless LAN connection in the

website, those characters are

converted to “*“.

In the case of characters which are

not accompanied by special char-

acter marks (with the exception of

kanakan and half-size katakana),

you can call up the mark list by

pressing the [6

†

] button after

selecting a character (before

actual entry of a character).

Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the

characters change each time you press the button.

Basic Operation

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

• Inserting a Character

1 Move the cursor to the desired position.

Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above.

2 Press the [2

π†

]–[6

π†

], [7

] buttons to enter numbers and sym-

bols.

3 Press the [8

] (OK) button to enter characters.

• Entering a Space

1 Move the cursor to the desired position.

Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above.

2 Press [6

†

] button to call up the mark list.

3 Make sure the cursor is at the beginning space (blank) of the mark list,

and press the [8

] (OK) button.

• Entering numbers

First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC”

”CASE“ (half-size capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase

alphabet). Then, press and hold down the appropriate button, [2

π†

]–

π†

], [6

] and [7

] button, for a while, or press it repeatedly until

the desired number is selected.

• Converting into Kanji (Japanese language)

When the entered “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display

(highlighted), press the [1

]/[ENTER] button one or several times to

convert the characters into the appropriate kanji. To actually enter the

change, press the [8

] (OK) button or enter the next character.

When the entered “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse

display (highlighted):

• Re-converting the characters into other kanji

Press the [1

]/[ENTER] button.

• Changing the reversed area

Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

• Changing the converted kanji back to “hiragana”

Press the [7

†

] (DELETE) button.

• Clearing the reversed area at once

Press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

• Entering the “hiragana” itself (without converting it)

Press the [8

] (OK) button.

• Canceling the character-entering operation

Press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

Restoring the Factory-programmed

Settings

Restoring the Factory-programmed System

While holding the C7 key (right-most key on the keyboard), turn the [POWER] but-

ton ON.

This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore

operation explained in step 2 of the following section.

e operat

on o

restor

ng t

factory-programmed settings

does not affect the Internet Set-

tings. To reset the Internet Set-

tings, refer to page 183.

Basic Operation

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

Independently by Item

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

]SYSTEM RESET

2 Select items by pressing the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons.

3 Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory pro-

grammed settings by pressing the [4

ππ

] button.

4 Press the [D] button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all

checkmarked items.

Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as

a Single File

For the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall.

1 Make all desired settings on the instrument.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

]SYSTEM RESET

CAUTION

This operation deletes all your

original data for the respec-

tive item (MIDI SETUP, USER

EFFECT, MUSIC FINDER, and

FILES&FOLDERS).

SYSTEM SETUP Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory resettings.

Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details about which parameters

belong to the System Setup.

MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab dis-

play to the original factory status.

USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the user effect types, user master

EQ types, and user vocal harmony types (CVP-405/403) created via the

Mixing Console display to the original factory resettings.

MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory resettings.

FILES&FOLDERS Deletes all ﬁles and folders stored in the User tab display.

REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected

Bank. The same can be done also by turning the [POWER] button ON while

holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard).

Basic Operation

Data Backup

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for sav-

ing your data.

4 Select one of the tabs (other than the PRESET) by pressing the TAB

[

√

][

] buttons.

Note that the ﬁle in the PRESET tab display is the ﬁle of factory-programmed

settings. If you select it, the factory-programmed settings for the respective

item will be restored. (This is the same results as on page 75 “Restoring the

Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item”.)

5 Save your ﬁle (page 70).

6 To recall your ﬁle, select the tab and page to which you’ve saved the

ﬁle (same tab and page as speciﬁed in step 4), and press the corre-

sponding [A]–[J] button.

Data Backup

For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your

important data to a USB storage device. This provides a convenient backup if the

internal memory is damaged.

The backup procedure is different for the data types in 1, 2, and 3 above.

SYSTEM SETUP Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → UTILITY

and microphone setting display (CVP-405/403) are handled as a single Sys-

tem Setup ﬁle. Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details on which

parameters belong to the System Setup.

MIDI SETUP The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are

handled as a single ﬁle.

USER EFFECT The User Effect settings including the user effect types, user master EQ

types, and user vocal harmony types (CVP-405/403) created via the Mixing

Console displays are managed as a single ﬁle.

MUSIC FINDER All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a sin-

gle ﬁle.

Data that can be saved1

1 Song*, Style, Registration Memory Bank and Voice

2 Music Finder Record, Effect**, MIDI Template and System File

* Protected Songs (those with a “Prot.1/Prot.2” indication at the upper left of the ﬁle

name) cannot be saved.

However, Songs with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cut-and-paste operation)

to a USB ﬂash memory.

**Effect data includes the following:

- Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console “EFFECT/EQ.”

- Edited or saved data of the Vocal Harmony type. (CVP-405/403)

3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above, as well as the Internet settings.

Basic Operation

Data Backup

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Backup procedure

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the display containing the desired

ﬁle to be copied.

Song:

Press the [SONG SELECT] button.

Style:

Press the STYLE category selection buttons.

Registration Memory Bank:

Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEM-

ORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–].

Voice:

Press one of the VOICE category selection but-

tons.

3 Select the USER tab by using the TAB

[

√

][

] buttons.

4 Press the [3

††

] (COPY) button to copy the

ﬁle/folder.

The pop-up window for the Copy operation

appears at the bottom of the display.

5 Press the [6

††

] (ALL) button to select all

ﬁles/folders indicated on the current dis-

play and all other pages.

To cancel the selection, press the [6

†

] (ALL

OFF) button again.

6 Press the [7

††

] (OK) button to conﬁrm the

ﬁle/folder selection.

To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8

†

]

(CANCEL) button.

7 Select the destination USB tab to which

the ﬁle/folder is to be copied, by using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

8 Press the [4

††

] (PASTE) button to paste

the ﬁle/folder.

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

]

SYSTEM RESET

3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up

the relevant display for saving your data.

4 Select the appropriate USB tab to which

you want to save the data by using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

5 Save your data (page 70).

1 Insert/connect the backup USB storage

device (destination).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

]

OWNER

3 Press the [D] (BACKUP) button to save the

data to the USB storage device.

To restore the data, press the [E] (RESTORE)

button in step 3 above.

• It takes a few minutes to complete the backup/restore

operation.

• Backup data which has not been created on the CVP-

405/403/401 cannot be restored.

CAUTION

Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER dis-

play before restoring. If the songs are not moved, the opera-

tion deletes the data.

1 Song, Style, Registration Memory Bank

and Voice Data

If a message appears indicating data

cannot be copied

Protected Songs (“Prot. 1/Prot.2” is indicated

at the upper left side of the ﬁle names) are

included in the copied ﬁles. These protected

Songs cannot be copied. However, Songs

with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cut-

and-paste operation) to a USB ﬂash memory.

2 Music Finder Record, Effect, MIDI Tem-

plate and System Data

3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Characteristics

The Voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice

name.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

Playing Voices ................................................................................page 28

Playing the Piano Voice ........................................................... page 28

Playing Various Voices............................................................. page 32

Mega Voices Compatibility

Mega Voices are unique to the

Clavinova and are not compati-

ble with other models. Any song

style data you’ve created on the

Clavinova using the Mega Voices

will not sound properly when

played back on other instru-

ments.

Natural!

These rich and luscious Voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument

sounds and are especially intended for playing piano and other keyboard parts.

They also take full advantage of Yamaha’s advanced sampling technology such as

Stereo Sampling, Dynamic Sampling (CVP-405/403), Sustain Sampling (CVP-

405/403), and Key-off Sampling (CVP-405/403).

S. Articulation!

(CVP-405)

The Super Articulation voices sound remarkably authentic and natural, featuring

the unique performance characteristics of each instrument—for example, guitar

scratching sounds or the legato phrasing of wind instruments. They provide many

of the same beneﬁts as the MegaVoices (see below), but with greater playability

and expressive control in real time. To effectively play these natural sounds in

performance of certain voices, you may need to use the pedal or footswitch. For

details on how to best play each voice, call up the Information window (pressing

the [7

] button in the Voice Selection display).

Mega Voice

(CVP-405/403)

The Mega Voices are not intended to be played from the keyboard. They are

primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data (such as songs

and styles). Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular have been cre-

ated as Mega Voices.

What makes Mega Voices special is their use of velocity switching. Normal

Voices use velocity switching, too—to make the sound quality and/or level of a

Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it. This makes the instrument’s

Voices sound authentic and natural. However, with Mega Voices, each velocity

range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different sound.

For example, a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various performance

techniques. In conventional instruments, different Voices having those sounds

would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired

effect. However, now with Mega Voices, a convincing guitar part can be played

with just a single Voice, using speciﬁc velocity values to play the desired sounds.

Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to

play the sounds, they’re not intended for playing from the keyboard. They are,

however, very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data—especially when

you want to avoid using several different Voices just for a single instrument part.

Live! These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly

authentic, rich sound—full of atmosphere and ambience.

Cool! These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric

instruments—thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisti-

cated programming.

Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also beneﬁt from Yamaha’s sophisticated

technology—and feature a sound so ﬁnely detailed and natural, you’ll swear

you’re playing the real thing!

Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting

you play the sounds from the keyboard.

SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play

the sounds from the keyboard.

Organ Flutes!

This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various

footages and craft your own original organ sounds. See page 100 for details.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Playing Different Voices Simulta-

neously

The instrument keyboard features various functions and performance conveniences

that are simply unavailable on an acoustic instrument. It allows you to play several

different Voices together in a layer, or play one Voice with your left hand while you

play a different Voice (or even two layered Voices!) with your right.

Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left)

Voices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part: Right 1, Right 2, and

Left. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a

rich, ensemble sound.

Keyboard Part Combinations

■ Playing a single Voice (Right 1 part)

You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range. This is used for nor-

mal performance—for example, with the piano Voice.

Make sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] buttons are turned off.

■ Dual: Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 parts)

You can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound.

Refer to page 81 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part.

■ Split: Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and

Left parts)

You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, try play-

ing the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right.

The keyboard lamp will light at the split point of the keyboard.

Refer to page 82 for Voice selection operations for the Left part.

■ Dual+Split: Playing Three Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

(Right 1, 2 and Left parts)

You can combine these three parts to create a rich, ensemble sound.

Adjusting the volume balance

among parts

Adjust the volume balance

among the parts in the BALANCE

display (page 40).

Specifying the split point (the

border between the right-

and left-hand range)

See page 107.

Right 1 part

Right 2 part

Right 1 part

Left part

Right 1 part

Left part

Right 1 part

Right 2 part

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1

and 2 Parts)

You can play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts by turning

Dual on.

1 Press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button to play two Voices

simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts.

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice

selection display for the Right 2 part.

3 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET display.

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

5 Play the keyboard.

6 Press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button again to turn it off.

For the selected part, a LEFT

mark appears at the right of the

Voice name in the Main display.

Quickly selecting Voices for

Right 1 and 2 parts

You can quickly select the Right

1 and 2 part Voices, just from the

VOICE category selection but-

tons. Press and hold one VOICE

category selection buttons, then

press another. The Voice of the

ﬁrst pressed button is automati-

cally set for the Right 1 part,

while the Voice of the second

pressed button is set for the Right

2 part.

Switching the Dual on/off

with a pedal

You can use a pedal to switch the

Dual on/off (when the PART ON

OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] is appro-

priately assigned; page 187). This

is useful for turning the Dual on

and off while you play.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Playing Different Voices with the Left and

Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts)

You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts)

by turning Split on.

1 Press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button to play different Voices

with the Right and Left Hands (Right 1 and Left parts).

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice

selection display for the Left part.

3 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET display.

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

5 Play the keyboard.

6 Press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button again to turn it off.

For the selected part, a RIGHT

mark appears at the left of the

Voice name in the Main display.

Switching the Split on/off

with a pedal

You can use a pedal to switch the

Split on/off (when the PART ON/

OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] is appropri-

ately assigned; page 187). This is

useful for turning the Split on

and off while you play.

Specifying the split point (the

border between the right-

and left-hand range)

See page 107.

Changing Pitch

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Changing Pitch

Transpose

Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down (in semitones).

•Transposing during performance

You can easily set the desired transposition of the overall sound of the instru-

ment by pressing the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] buttons.

•Transposing before performance

Change the transpose settings in the MIXING CONSOLE display. You can set the

transposition for the keyboard pitch (KBD), song playback (SONG), or overall

sound of the instrument (MASTER), respectively.

1 Call up the operation display.

[MIXING CONSOLE] → TAB [

√

][

] TUNE

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to set the transposition.

Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument

You can ﬁne-tune the pitch of the entire instrument—useful when you play the

instrument along with other instruments or CD music.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [

√

] MASTER

TUNE

2 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons to set the tuning.

Press the 4 or 5’s [

] and [

†

] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to

the factory resetting of 440.0 Hz.

Scale Tuning

You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for speciﬁc historical

periods or music genres.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [

] SCALE TUNE

2 Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using

the [6

ππ

††

]/[7

ππ

††

] buttons.

Checkmark the box by pressing the [8

] button.

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale.

The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the

keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display.

Please note that the Tune func-

tion does not affect the Drum Kit

or SFX Kit Voices.

Hz (Hertz):

This unit of measurement refers

to the frequency of a sound and

represents the number of times a

sound wave vibrates in a second.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Changing Pitch

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

4 Change the following settings as necessary.

•Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard (TUNE)

1 Press the [3

ππ

††

] button to select the note for tuning.

2 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] buttons to set the tuning in cents.

• Determines the base note for each scale.

Press the [2

ππ

††

] button to select the base note.

When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed,

yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes.

Preset Scale Types

Tuning values for Preset Scales (base note: C) (in cents)

* In the display, the rounded off value is shown.

Cent:

In musical terms a “cent” is 1/

100th of a semitone. (100 cents

equal one semitone.)

Instantly recalling the desired

scale

Registration Memory. Be sure to

checkmark the SCALE item when

registering (page 127).

EQUAL

TEMPERAMENT

The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with

each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used

tuning in music today.

PURE MAJOR

PURE MINOR

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale,

especially for triad chords (root, third, ﬁfth). You can hear this best in

actual vocal harmonies – such as choirs and a cappella singing.

PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created

from a series of perfect ﬁfths, which are collapsed into a single octave.

The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are

beautiful and suitable for some leads.

MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by

making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popu-

lar from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others,

used this scale.

WERCKMEISTER

KIRNBERGER

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger sys-

tems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and

Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has

its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the

time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when per-

forming period music on the harpsichord.

ARABIC Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

CC##

DEbb

EFF##

GAbb

ABbb

EQUAL TEM-

PERAMENT

0 00 0 0 0000000

PURE MAJOR

0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

PURE MINOR

0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

PYTHAGOREAN

0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2

MEAN-TONE

0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2

WERCKMEISTER

0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8

KIRNBERGER

0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7

ARABIC 1

00-50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 0 0

ARABIC 2

0000-50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0

Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Adding Effects to Voices Played on

the Keyboard

The instrument features a sophisticated multi-processor effect system which can

add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound.

1 Call up the operation display.

[DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT]

2 Select the desired part for which you want to add effects by pressing

one of the [A]–[C], [F]–[H] buttons. On the CVP-401, select the

desired part for which you want to add effects by pressing one of the

[A]–[B] and [F]–[I] buttons.

3 Press the [VOICE EFFECT] button to call up the VOICE EFFECT display.

4 Use the buttons at the lower/right part of the display to apply effects

to the Voices.

Effect Parameters

You can use a pedal to turn the

Harmony/Echo effects on and off

(page 187).

Portamento:

Portamento is a function that cre

ates a smooth transition in pitch

from the ﬁrst note played on the

keyboard to the next. The porta-

mento time (the pitch transition

time) can be set via the MIXING

CONSOLE display (page 89).

DSP:

Stands for Digital Signal Proces-

sor (or Processing). DSP changes

and enhances the audio signal in

the digital realm to produce a

wide range of effects.

LEFT HOLD

This function causes the LEFT part Voice to be held even when the keys are released.

Non-decaying voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type voices

such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed).

HARMONY/

ECHO

The Harmony/Echo types are applied to the right-hand Voices (page 86).

MONO/POLY

This determines whether the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note

at a time) or polyphonically. Using the MONO mode lets you play single, lead

sounds (such as brass instruments) more realistically. It also lets you expressively

control the Portamento effect (depending on the selected Voice) by playing legato.

DSP/DSP

VARIATION

With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and

depth to your music in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes

you sound like you are playing in a concert hall.

•The DSP switch is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on

or off for the currently selected keyboard part.

•The DSP Variation switch is used to change between variations of the DSP

effect. You could use this while you play, for example, to change the rotat-

ing speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type

You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types.

In order to make the type you’ve selected here effective, set HARMONY/ECHO to

On in the display shown in step 4 above.

Call up the operation display by pressing the [J] (TYPE SELECT) button.

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type

(page 86).

3 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo set-

tings (page 87).

The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type.

Harmony/Echo Types

The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the

particular effect applied.

● Harmony Types

When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to notes

played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the type selected

above and the chord speciﬁed in the chord section of the keyboard shown below.

Echo Types

These types apply echo

effects to notes played in

the right-hand section of

the keyboard in time with

the currently set tempo.

Harmony Types

These types apply the harmony effect

to notes played in the right-hand sec-

tion of the keyboard according to the

chord speciﬁed in the left-hand sec-

tion of the keyboard. (Note that the

“1+5” and “Octave” settings are not

affected by the chord.)

Multi Assign Type

This type applies a special effect to

chords played in the right-hand section

of the keyboard.

Canceling the chord sound

for the harmony effect

This cancels the sound of the

chord played in the chord range

of the keyboard—letting you

hear only the Harmony effect.

Set [ACMP ON/OFF] to On, set

[SYNC START] to Off, and select

“Off” for the Stop Accompani-

ment parameter.

Split point Split point

Chord section for Style playback and

Harmony effect

Left Voice and

chord section for

Harmony effect

Split Point

(for Style)

Split Point

(for keyboard Voice)

Right 1

Right 2

Voices

Chord section

for Style

playback and

Harmony effect

Left Voice

Right 1

Right 2

Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

● Multi Assign Type

Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously in the right-hand

section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both of the keyboard part [RIGHT

1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1

and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play.

● Echo Types

When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo, trill) is

applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the cur-

rently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep

in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously

(last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately.

Harmony/Echo Settings

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance

(MIXING CONSOLE)

The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts

and Song/Style channels, including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds.

It lets you adjust the levels and stereo position (pan) of each Voice to set the opti-

mum balance and stereo image, and lets you set how the effects are applied.

Basic Procedure

1 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CON-

SOLE display.

VOLUME

This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines

the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo effect.

SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type

above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects.

ASSIGN

This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” This lets

you determine the keyboard part via which the harmony/echo notes will be sounded.

CHORD

NOTE

ONLY

This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. When this is set to

“ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note (played in the right-hand section of

the keyboard) that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard.

TOUCH

LIMIT

This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines

the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selec-

tively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the

melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value).

1, 3

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

2 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the section “Adjustable

items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 89.

3 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the MIX-

ING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts.

The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different

part displays. The part name is indicated at the top of the display. The

various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following:

PANEL PART display → STYLE PART display → SONG CH 1–8 display →

SONG CH 9–16 display

4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired parameter.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to set the value.

6 Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings.

• Saving the PANEL PART display settings

• Saving the STYLE PART display settings

Save them as Style data.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU → [B] STYLE CREATOR

2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display.

3 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for sav-

ing your data, then save it (page 70).

• Saving the SONG CH 1–8/9–16 display settings

First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SET UP), then save

the Song.

See the SONG CREATOR → CHANNEL display → SETUP item explana-

tion on page 158.

out

arts

See below.

Instantly setting all parts to

the same value

Once you’ve selected a parame-

ter in step 4, you can instantly

set the same value to all other

parts. To do this, simultaneously

hold down one of the [A]–[J] but

tons, and use the [1]–[8] buttons

or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

About Parts

PANEL PART

In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE, you can indepen-

dently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT

2 and LEFT), SONG, STYLE, and MIC parts (CVP-405/403). The part compo-

nents are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the

panel [BALANCE] button (page 40).

STYLE PART

A Style consists of eight separate channels. Here you can adjust the level

balance among these eight channels or parts. These part components are the

same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHAN-

NEL ON/OFF] button to call up the STYLE display.

SONG CH 1–8/9–16

A Song consists of sixteen separate channels. Here you can adjust the level

balance among these sixteen channels or parts. These part components are

the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the SONG display.

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Adjustable Items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE Dis-

plays

The following explanations cover the available items (parameters) in the MIXING

CONSOLE displays.

VOL/VOICE

FILTER

TUNE

EFFECT

•The RHY2 channel in the

STYLE PART display can only

be assigned to Drumkit Voices

and SFX kit Voices.

• When playing GM song data,

channel 10 (in the SONG CH

9–16 page) can only be used

for a Drum Kit Voice.

SONG AUTO REVOICE See page 90.

VOICE Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. When the Style

channels are called up, neither Organ Flutes Voices nor User

Voices can be selected. When the Song channels are called up,

User Voices cannot be selected.

PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part (channel).

VOLUME Determines the level of each part or channel, giving you ﬁne

control over the balance of all the parts.

HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 98) for each part.

BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting

the cutoff frequency (page 98).

PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch

from the ﬁrst note played on the keyboard to the next. The Porta-

mento Time determines the pitch transition time. Higher values

result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results in

no effect. This parameter is available when the selected keyboard

part is set to Mono (page 85).

PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND in semitones for each

keyboard part (when a pedal is assigned to this function).

OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves for each

keyboard part.

TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part.

TRANSPOSE Allows you to set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KEY-

BOARD), Song playback (SONG), or overall sound of the instru-

ment (MASTER), respectively.

TYPE Select the desired effect type (page 92). After editing various

parameters for the selected effect type, you can save it as an orig-

inal effect.

REVERB Adjusts the amount of the Reverb sound for each part or chan-

nel.

CHORUS Adjusts the amount of the Chorus sound for each part or chan-

nel.

DSP Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each part or channel.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

EQ (Equalizer)

Song Auto Revoice

This feature lets you use the high-quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage

with XG-compatible song data. When you play back any commercially available

XG song data or that created on other instruments, you can use Auto Revoice to

automatically assign the specially created Voices of the instrument (Natural!, Live!,

Cool!, etc.) instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type.

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 87. In step 2,

select the VOL/VOICE tab.

4 Press the [G] (SETUP) button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP dis-

play.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Voice to be replaced.

6 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the Voice for replacing the

XG selected in step 5.

Several different Revoice settings are available by using the [F]/[G]/[I] but-

tons, for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one

action.

ALL REVOICE: Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the

high-quality Voices of the instrument.

PIANO REVOICE: Replaces only the piano Voices.

BASIC REVOICE: Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suit-

able for playing back the song.

ALL NO REVOICE: All Voices are returned to the original XG Voices.

TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the per-

formance environment (page 94). This affects the overall sound

of the instrument.

EDIT For editing the EQ (page 95).

EQ HIGH Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is

attenuated/boosted for each part.

EQ LOW Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is

attenuated/boosted for each part.

567

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

7 Press the [8

ππ

] (OK) button to apply your Revoice settings.

To cancel the Revoice operation, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

8 In the VOL/VOICE tab display, press the [F] button to set SONG AUTO

REVOICE to ON.

Effect Type

■ Selecting an Effect type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 87. In step 2,

select the EFFECT tab.

4 Press the [F] (TYPE) button to call up the Effect Type selection display.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect BLOCK.

DSP:

Stands for Digital Signal Proces-

sor (or Processing). DSP changes

and enhances the audio signal in

the digital realm to produce a

wide range of effects.

5678

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

6 Use the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] buttons to select the part to which you want

to apply the effect.

7 Use the [5

ππ

††

]/[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY.

8 Use the [7

ππ

††

]/[8

ππ

††

] buttons to select the effect TYPE.

If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation.

■ Editing and Saving the effect

9 Press the [F] (PARAMETER) button to call up the display for editing

the effect parameters.

Effect Block Effect-applicable parts Effect characteristics

REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in

a concert hall or jazz club.

CHORUS All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts

are being played simultaneously.

DSP1 STYLE PART

SONG CHANNNEL 1–16

In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types,

the instrument has special DSP effects, that

include additional effects usually used for a

speciﬁc part, such as distortion and tremolo.

DSP2

DSP3

RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, SONG

CHANNEL 1–16

Any unused DSP blocks are automatically

assigned to the appropriate parts (channels) as

needed.

DSP4 RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, SONG

CHANNEL 1–16, Microphone

sound (CVP-405/403)

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

10 If you have selected one of the DSP 2–4 effect blocks in step 5:

You can edit its standard parameters as well as its variation parameter.

To select the standard type of parameters, press the [B] button. To select its

variation parameter, press the [E] button.

11 Select one of the parameters you want to edit by using the [4

ππ

††

ππ

††

] buttons.

Available parameters differ depending on the selected Effect type.

12 Adjust the value for the selected parameter by using the [6

ππ

††

ππ

††

] buttons.

If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1 effect block in step

Adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing [8

π†

] button.

13 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your origi-

nal effect.

14 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to select the destination for saving

the effect.

The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the

effect block.

15 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect (page 70).

When recalling the saved effect, use the same procedure as in step 8.

Re-selecting the Effect block,

category and type

Use the [1

π†

]–[3

π†

] but-

tons. The re-selected effect con-

ﬁguration is displayed at the

upper left side box in the display.

11 12

Effect Return Level:

Determines the level or amount

of effect applied.

This is set for all parts or chan-

nels.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

EQ (Equalizer)

Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spec-

trum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall

frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speak-

ers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of

the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too

“boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound

is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. The instrument possesses a high-grade ﬁve-

band digital EQ. With this function, a ﬁnal effect—tone control can be added to the

output of your instrument. You can select one of the ﬁve preset EQ settings in the

EQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the fre-

quency bands, and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types.

■ Select a Preset EQ type

1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 87. In step 2,

select the EQ tab.

4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your perfor-

mance (music style or environment).

If you want to edit the EQ parameters, go on to the next operation.

Gain

5 bands →

Bandwidth

(also called “Shape” or “Q”)

Freq (Frequency)

EQ1 EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5

LOW LOW MID MID HIG MID HIGH

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

■ Editing and Saving the selected EQ

5 Press the [F] (EDIT) button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display.

6 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type.

7 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to boost or cut each of the ﬁve

bands.

Use the [8

π†

] button to boost or cut all the ﬁve bands at the same time.

8 Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the

band selected in step 7.

• Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”)

Use the [1

ππ

††

]button. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band

width.

• FREQ (center frequency)

Use the [2

π†

]button. The available FREQ range is different for each

band.

9 Press the [H] or [I] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited EQ type

(page 70).

Up to two types of EQ can be created and saved. When recalling the saved

EQ type, use the same procedure as in step 6.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

The instrument has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own

Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a

Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER/(USB) display for future recall.

The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other

Voices.

Basic Procedure

Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice) (page 32).

2 Press the [6

ππ

] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display.

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the “Editable Parameters in

the VOICE SET Displays” on page 97.

4 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter)

to be edited.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the Voice.

6 Press the [D] (COMPARE) button to compare the sound of the edited

Voice with the unedited Voice.

7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice (page 70).

Editing the ORGAN FLUTES

Voices

The editing method is different

for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices

compared to other Voices. For

instructions on editing the

ORGAN FLUTES Voices, see

page 100.

CAUTION

If you select another Voice

without saving the settings,

the settings will be lost. If you

wish to store the settings

here, make sure to save the

settings as a User Voice before

selecting another Voice or

turning the power off.

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays

The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays

explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 96. The Sound Creator param-

eters are organized into ﬁve different displays. The parameters in each display are

described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parame-

ters (page 102), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected.

PIANO

This display is available only when the Natural! piano Voice (page 79) is selected.

COMMON

CONTROLLER

1. MODULATION

When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION, the pedal can be used to

modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the

degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters.

The available parameters differ

depending on the Voice.

Changes to velocity curve

according to Touch sensitivity

TOUCH SENSE DEPTH

Changes to velocity curve

according to VelDepth (with Off-

set set to 64)

TOUCH SENSE OFFSET

Changes to velocity curve

according to VelOffset (with

Depth set to 64)

Portamento Time:

The Portamento Time deter-

mines the pitch transition time.

Portamento is a function that cre-

ates a smooth transition in pitch

from the ﬁrst note played on the

keyboard to the next.

127

ctual Velocity

or tone generator

Depth=127

(twice)

Depth=32

(half)

Depth=64

(normal)

Depth=0

Received Velocity

(Actual KeyOn speed)

127

Actual Velocity

for tone generator

Offset=96 (+64)

Offset=127

(+127)

Offset=64

(normal)

Offset=32

(-64)

Received

Velocity

(Actual

KeyOn speed)

Offset=0 (-127)

Depends on

offset

Depends on

offset

TUNING CURVE

Determines the tuning curve. Select “FLAT” if you feel the tuning curve

of the piano Voice does not quite match that of other instruments Voices.

STRETCH

Tuning curve particularly for pianos

FLAT

Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the

entire keyboard range

KEY OFF SAMPLE

(CVP-405/403)

Adjusts the volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs

when you release a key).

SUSTAIN SAMPLE

(CVP-405/403)

Adjusts the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal.

STRING RESONANCE

(CVP-405)

Adjusts the depth of string resonance.

VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice.

TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the

volume responds to your playing strength.

DEPTH

Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the

voice changes in response to your playing strength (velocity).

OFFSET

Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted

for the actual velocity effect.

PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves.

When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–2 parts, the R1/

R2 parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT

part, the LEFT parameter is available.

MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or

polyphonically (page 85).

PORTAMENTO TIME

Sets the portamento time when the edited Voice is set to “MONO” above.

FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter Cutoff

Frequency. For details about the ﬁlter, see page 98.

AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude

(volume).

LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or the

vibrato effect.

LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modu-

lation, or the wah effect.

LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude, or

the tremolo effect.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

2. LEFT PEDAL

This allows you to select the function to be assigned to the left pedal.

SOUND

● FILTER

Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking

or passing a speciﬁc frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall

timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to

making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce elec-

tronic, synthesizer–like effects.

FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the left pedal. For details on

the pedal functions, see page 187.

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] but-

tons (RIGHT 1, RIGHT

2, LEFT, etc.)

Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the

respective keyboard part. This also determines the depth for the

function. For details, see page 188.

BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the

ﬁlter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound.

HARMONIC CONTENT Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance),

set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a

more pronounced effect.

Volume

Cutoff frequency

These frequencies are

“passed” by the ﬁlter.

Frequency (pitch)

Cutoff range

Volume

Frequency (pitch)

Resonance

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

● EG

The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound

changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural

acoustic instruments—such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or

the long release of a sustained piano tone.

● VIBRATO

EFFECT/EQ

1. REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH

ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after

the key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack.

DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a

slightly lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the

quicker the decay.

RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is

released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay.

Level

Sustain level

Time

Key on Key off

AT TACK DECAY RELEASE

Vibrato:

A quavering, vibrating sound

effect that is produced by regu-

larly modulating the pitch of the

Voice.

DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result

in a more pronounced Vibrato.

SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect.

DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of

a key and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the

delay of the Vibrato onset.

Pitch

Time

SPEED

DEPTH

DELAY

Switching the VIBE ROTOR

on/off with a pedal

You can use a pedal to switch the

VIBE ROTOR on/off (when the

VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF function

is properly assigned; page 187).

REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb (page 92) depth.

CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus (page 92) depth.

DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP (page 92) depth.

If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the DSP

menu explained on page 100.

DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off.

VIBE ROTOR This will be displayed only if VIBE VIBRATE is selected for the DSP

Type parameter explained on page 92. Determines whether VIBE

VIBRATE should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice.

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

100

2. DSP

3. EQ

HARMONY

Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Select the Right 1 part (page 32,

step 1) in the Main display, before you set it.

This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo type” on

page 86 in step 1.

Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices

The instrument features a variety of lush, dynamic organ Voices that you can call up

with the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. It also gives you the tools to create your own

original organ sounds by using the Sound Creator function. Just as on a traditional

organ, you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the ﬂute footages.

Basic Procedure

1 Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited (page 32).

2 In the ORGAN FLUTES Voice Selection display, press the [6

ππ

] (FOOT-

AGE) button to call up the SOUND CREATOR [ORGAN FLUTES] dis-

play.

DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select a type after select-

ing a category.

VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type.

Here, you can edit the VARIATION on/off status and variation-

parameter value setting.

ON/OFF

The factory-programmed assignments are set to variation-off for

all Voices (standard variation of DSP is assigned). If you select

VARIATION ON here, a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to

the Voice. The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the

VALUE menu explained below.

PARAMETER

Displays the variation parameter.

VALUE

Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter.

EQ LOW/HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ

bands.

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

101

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters, see the following “Editable

Parameters in the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays”.

4 If you select the EFFECT/EQ tab display, use the [A]/[B] buttons to

select the parameter to be edited.

5 Use the [A]–[D], [F]–[H] and [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the

Voice.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited ORGAN FLUTES Voice

(page 70).

Editable Parameters in the SOUND CREATOR [ORGAN FLUTES]

displays

The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays

explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 100. The Organ Flutes

parameters are organized into three different pages. The parameters in each page

are described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set

parameters (page 102), which are automatically called up when the Voice is

selected.

FOOTAGE, VOLUME/ATTACK (common parameters)

(When selecting

the EFFECT/EQ

tab display.)

CAUTION

If you select another Voice

without saving the settings,

the settings will be lost. If you

wish to store the settings

here, make sure to save the

settings as a User Voice before

selecting another Voice or

turning the power off.

ORGAN TYPE Speciﬁes the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or

Vintage.

ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker

speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes

(see “EFFECT/EQ” DSP TYPE parameter on page 100), and the Voice

Effect DSP (page 100) is turned on (this parameter has the same

effect as the Voice Effect VARIATION ON/OFF parameter).

VIBRATO ON/OFF Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or

OFF.

VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3

(high).

Using, Creating and Editing Voices

Voice Creating (Sound Creator)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

102

FOOTAGE

VOLUME/ATTACK

EFFECT/EQ

Same parameters as in the SOUND CREATOR “EFFECT/EQ” tab display explained

on page 99.

Footage:

The term “footage” is a reference

to the sound generation of tradi-

tional pipe organs, in which the

sound is produced by pipes of

different lengths (in feet).

16' ←←

←←

→→

5 1/3'

Which footage (16' or 5 1/3') is operated with the [1

π†

] button can

be switched by pressing the [D] button.

16'–1'

Determines the basic sound of the organ ﬂutes. The longer the pipe, the

lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16' setting determines the low-

est pitched component of the Voice, while the 1' setting determines the

highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the

greater the volume of the corresponding footage. Mixing various vol-

umes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds.

VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the

graphic bar, the greater the volume.

RESP Affects both the attack and release (page 99) portion of the sound,

increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and

release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the

slower the swell and release.

VIBRATO SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato

On/Off and Vibrato Depth above.

MODE The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH.

In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the ﬁrst notes played

and held simultaneously; while the ﬁrst notes are held, any subse-

quently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode,

attack is applied equally to all notes.

4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE

Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume

of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the

graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume.

LENG Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter

decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic

bar, the longer the decay.

Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.)

Each Voice is linked to its related parameter settings that are indicated in the

SOUND CREATOR displays, including effects and EQ. Usually these settings

are automatically called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also

disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained

below.

For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony

effect, set the HARMONY/ECHO parameter to OFF (in the display explained

below).

You can set these independently by keyboard part and parameter group.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST.SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [

]

VOICE SET

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part.

3 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling

up of the settings (ON or OFF) independently for each parameter

group.

Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters contained in each

parameter group.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

103

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Characteristics

The Style type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style

name.

Selecting a Chord Fingering Type

Style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the chord section of the

keyboard. There are seven types of ﬁngerings.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING →

TAB [

] CHORD FINGERING

2 Press the [1

ππ

††

]–[3

ππ

††

] buttons to select a ﬁngering.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto

Accompaniment Feature ..................................................................... page 45

Pattern Variation ...................................................................... page 47

Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback ...... page 49

Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style

(One Touch Setting) ................................................................. page 50

Pro

These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined

with perfect playability. The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the

chords of the player. As a result, your chord changes and colorful harmo-

nies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment.

Session These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by

mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with

chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed

to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain

songs and in certain genres. Keep in mind, however, that the Styles may

not necessarily be appropriate—or even harmonically correct—for all

songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a

simple major triad for a country song may result in a “jazzy” seventh

chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in inappropriate or unex-

pected accompaniment.

Pianist These special Styles provide piano-only accompaniment. Just by play-

ing the proper chords with your left hand, you can automatically add

complicated, professional-sounding arpeggios and bass/chord patterns.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

104

Playing Only the Rhythm Channels

of a Style

Rhythm is one of the most important parts of a Style. Try to play the melody along

with just the rhythm. You can sound different rhythms for each Style. Keep in mind,

however, that not all Styles contain rhythm channels.

1 Select a Style (page 45).

2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] to turn Auto Accompaniment off.

3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to play back the

rhythm channels.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the rhythm.

AI:

Artiﬁcial Intelligence

Starting the rhythm with Sync

Start

You can also start the rhythm

simply by playing the keyboard,

if Sync Start is enabled (turn on

the [SYNC START] button).

The rhythm does not sound for

the Pianist Styles (or other similar

Styles). When you want to use

any of these Styles, always make

sure that ACMP ON/OFF is

turned on.

SINGLE FINGER Makes it simple to produce

orchestrated accompani-

ment using major, seventh,

minor and minor-seventh

chords by pressing a mini-

mum number of keys on the

Chord section of the key-

board. This type is available

only for Style playback.

The abbreviated chord ﬁn-

gerings described at right are

used:

MULTI FINGER Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ﬁngerings, so you

can use either type of ﬁngering without having to switch ﬁngering types.

FINGERED

Lets you ﬁnger your own chords on the Chord section of the keyboard,

while the instrument supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass,

and chord accompaniment in the selected Style. The Fingered type rec-

ognizes the various chord types which are listed on the separate Data List

booklet and can be looked up using the Chord Tutor function (page 49).

FINGERED ON

BASS

Accepts the same ﬁngerings as the Fingered, but the lowest note played

in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing

you to play “on bass” chords (in the Fingered mode the root of the

chord is always used as the bass note).

FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way

similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and

right hands—for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a

chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a

melody note with your right.

AI FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that less than three

notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously

played chord, etc.).

AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced ﬁngering type is engaged, the instrument will auto-

matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about

anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have

to worry about specifying the Style chords. Although the AI Full Key-

board type is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements

may not be suitable for use with this feature. This type is similar to Full

Keyboard, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to

indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th,

11th and 13th chords cannot be played. This type is available only for

Style playback.

For a major chord,

press the root key only.

For a minor chord,

simultaneously press the root

key and a black key to its left.

For a seventh chord,

simultaneously press the root

key and a white key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord,

simultaneously press the root key a

both a white and black key to its lef

Style Playback-related Settings

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

105

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Playback-related Settings

The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions, which can be accessed in

the display, see page 106.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING →

TAB[

√

] STYLE SETTING

Turning channels of the Style on/off

A Style contains eight channels: RHY1 (Rhythm 1) – PHR2 (Phrase 2). You

can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning

channels on/off as the Style plays.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the CHANNEL ON/

OFF display.

When the STYLE tab is not selected, press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] but-

ton again.

2 Press the [1

††

]–[8

††

] buttons to turn the channels on or off.

To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate but-

ton for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply

press the appropriate channel button again.

Playing the chords in free tempo (without Style playback)

You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the

Style, by setting [ACMP ON/OFF] to on, and [SYNC START] to off. For

example, if MULTI FINGER is selected (page 104), you can perform with

your own pace while sounding the chord by pressing the chord section of

the keyboard with your one ﬁnger.

Setting the fade in/out time

You can set the time of the fade in and fade out (page 133).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[

√

] CONFIG 1 → [A] FADE IN/OUT/

HOLD TIME

2 Set the parameters by using the [3

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons.

FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go

from minimum to maximum.

FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go

from maximum to minimum.

FADE OUT HOLD

TIME

Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade

out.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Playback-related Settings

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

106

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons for each setting.

• Stop Accompaniment

When [ACMP ON/OFF] is turned on and [SYNC START] is off, you can play chords

in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accom-

paniment chord. In this condition—called “Stop Accompaniment”—any valid chord

ﬁngerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display.

From the display in page 106, you can determine whether the chord played in

the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status.

OFF...............................The chord played in the chord section will not sound.

STYLE...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the

Voices of the selected Style.

FIXED ...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the

speciﬁed Voice, regardless of the selected Style.

• OTS Link Timing

This applies to the OTS Link function (page 51). This parameter determines the

timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION [A]–

[D] change. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)

Real Time.....................One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you

press a MAIN VARIATION button.

Next Bar ......................One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after

you press a MAIN VARIATION button.

• Synchro Stop Window

This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is

automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to a

value other than “OFF,” this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you hold

a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control

to normal, letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if you

release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop function works.

• Style Touch

Turns touch response for the Style playback on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the Style vol-

ume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the keyboard.

• Style Change Behavior

There are three types as shown below.

Section Set

Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting differ-

ent Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback

is stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected.

When any of the MAIN A-D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest

section is automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in

the selected Style, MAIN C will be called up.

Data that is recorded when

recording a Song

Please note that both the Voice

that is sounded and the chord

data will be recorded when set

to “STYLE,” and only the chord

data will be recorded when set

to “OFF” or “FIXED.”

Split Point Settings

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

107

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Tempo

This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles dur-

ing Style playback.

HOLD ..........................The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained.

RESET...........................The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo

for the selected Style.

Part On/Off

This determines whether the Style Channel On/Off status changes or not when

you change Styles during Style playback.

HOLD

..........................The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is

maintained.

RESET...........................All Style Channels are set to On.

Split Point Settings

These are the settings (there are two Split Points) that separate the different sec-

tions of the keyboard: the Chord section, the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1

and 2 section. The two Split Point settings (below) are speciﬁed as note names.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD

FINGERING → TAB [

√

][

] SPLIT POINT

2 Use the [F]–[H] buttons to set the Split Point (see below).

• Split Point (S)—separates the Chord section for Style playback from the

section(s) for playing Voices (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT)

• Split Point (L)—separates the two sections for playing Voices, LEFT and

RIGHT 1– 2.

These two settings can be set to the same note (as in the default) or two different

notes as desired.

Split Point (L) cannot be set lower than Split Point (S), and Split Point (S) cannot be

set higher than Split Point (L).

Specifying the Split Point by

note name

Press the [1

π†

]–[4

π†

] but-

tons. You can specify the Split

Point of the Voice and chord sec-

tion of the keyboard by using

STYLE in the display, and you can

specify the Split Point of the left

and right Voices by using LEFT.

Voice RIGHT 1and 2

Split Point (S+L)

Chord section +

Voice LEFT

Press the [F] (S+L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Press the [H] (S) button or the [G] (L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Split Point (S)

Split Point (L)

Chord section

Voice LEFT

Voice RIGHT 1and 2

Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to the same note

Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to different notes

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

108

Editing the Volume and Tonal Bal-

ance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE)

You can set various mixing-related parameters of the Style. (See “Adjustable items

(parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 89.) Call up the “STYLE

PART” display in step #3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume Balance and

Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 87, and follow the instructions.

Convenient Music Finder feature

Music Finder (page 52) is a convenient feature that calls up pre-programmed panel

settings (for Voices, Styles, etc.) that match the song or type of music you want to

play. The records of the Music Finder can be searched and edited.

Searching the Records

You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword, using the Search func-

tion of the Music Finder. You can also save your favorite records in the FAVORITE display.

Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the ALL tab.

The ALL tab display contains the preset Records.

3 Press the [6

ππ

] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the Search display.

4 Enter the search criteria.

Clear the search criteria

To clear the entered Music/Key-

word/Style, press the [F]/[G]/[H]

(CLEAR) button.

Convenient Music Finder feature

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

109

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

• Search by song title or music genre (MUSIC) or keyword

1 Press the [A] (MUSIC)/[B] (KEYWORD) button to call up the character

entry display.

2 Enter the song title or music genre, or the keyword (page 73).

• Search by Style name

1 Press the [C] (STYLE) button to call up the Style selection display.

2 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the search display.

• Adding other Search Criteria

You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name/keyword/Style

name.

BEAT ............................Select the beat (time signature) you want to use in your

performance by pressing the [D] button. All beat settings

are included in the search if you select ANY.

SEARCH AREA .............Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing

the [E] button. (These correspond to the tabs at the top

of the Music Finder display.)

TEMPO.........................Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your per-

formance by using the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] (TEMPO) but-

tons.

GENRE .........................Select the desired music genre by using the [5

π†

] (GENRE) buttons.

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (START SEARCH) button to start the search.

The Search 1 display appears, showing the results of the search. To cancel

searching, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

Entering several different key-

words

You can search several different

keywords simultaneously by

inserting a separator (comma)

between each.

Searching other music genres

When you want to search other music genres, press the [6

†

] (SEARCH 2)

button in the Music Finder display. The search result is displayed in the

SEARCH 2 display.

Calling up the panel settings to match the style (REPERTOIRE)

When searching by style name, the same search result is obtained even if

the search is done by using the Repertoire function. See page 53 for

details.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Convenient Music Finder feature

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

110

Creating a Set of Favorite Records

As convenient as the Search function is in plumbing the depths of the Music Finder

records, you may want to create a “folder” of favorite records—so you can quickly

call up those Styles and settings you use most often in your performance.

1 Select the desired record from the Music Finder display.

2 Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record

to the FAVORITE display.

3 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons, and

check to see if the record has been added.

Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display

1 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display.

2 Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button.

Editing Records

You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly

created records are automatically saved in the internal memory.

1 Select the desired record to be edited in the Music Finder display.

2 Press the [8

ππ

††

] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the Edit display.

CAUTION

You can also change a preset

record to create a new one. If

you want to keep the original

preset, make sure to change

the name and register the

edited record as a new record

(see step 5, page 111).

Convenient Music Finder feature

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

111

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

3 Edit the record as desired.

• Editing the song name/keyword/Style name

Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display (page 109).

• Changing the Tempo

Press the [1

π†

] (TEMPO) button.

• Memorizing the Section (Intro/Main/Ending)

Use the [2

π†

]/[4

π†

] buttons to select the section that will automatically be

called up set when the record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you

want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro sec-

tion.

• Editing the Genre

Select the desired genre by using the [5

π†

]/[6

π†

] (GENRE) buttons. When

creating a new genre, press the [7

π†

] (GENRE NAME) button and input the

genre name. (page 74)

• Deleting the Currently Selected Record

Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button.

• Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions

Press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button.

4 To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display, press the [E]

(FAVORITE) button to turn on the FAVORITE.

5 Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below.

• Creating a new record

Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If

you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above, the record is

added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display.

• Overwriting an existing record

Press the [8

] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above,

the record is added to the FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the

FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten.

Saving the Record

The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and addi-

tionally created records as a single ﬁle. Keep in mind that individual records (panel

setups) cannot be handled as separate ﬁles.

1 Call up the Save display.

[MUSIC FINDER] → TAB[

√

][

] ALL → [7

π†

] (FILES)

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/

USB).

3 Press the [6

††

] button to save the ﬁle (page 70).

All records are saved together as a single ﬁle.

Keep in mind that the Beat set-

ting made here is only for the

Music Finder search function;

this does not affect the actual

Beat setting of the Style itself.

The maximum number of

records is 2500 (CVP-405/403)

and 1200 (CVP-401), including

internal records.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Convenient Music Finder feature

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

112

CAUTION

• Selecting “REPLACE” auto-

matically deletes all your

original records from inter-

nal memory and replaces

them with the factory Music

Finder data.

• Make sure that all impor-

tant data has been archived

to another location before-

hand, when the ﬁle to

delete all records of the

Music Finder is down-

loaded from the web

(page 113) and executed.

Restoring the Music Finder

Data

You can restore the instrument’s

Music Finder to its original fac-

tory resettings (page 75).

Calling up Music Finder Records Saved to USER/USB

To call up the Music Finder records you’ve saved to USER/USB, follow the

instructions below.

1 Call up the [MUSIC FINDER] display.

[MUSIC FINDER] → TAB [

√

][

] ALL

2 Press the [7

ππ

††

] (FILES) button to open the File selection display of

the Music Finder.

3 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select USER/USB.

4 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder ﬁle.

The message is displayed according to the content of the ﬁle when the ﬁle

is chosen, and the desired button is pressed.

• REPLACE

All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and

replaced with the records of the selected ﬁle.

• APPEND

The records called up are added.

Execute the operation to call up the Music Finder ﬁle. Select “CANCEL”

to abort this operation.

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

113

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

You can create your own Styles—recording them by yourself or by combining the

internal Style data. The created Styles can be edited.

Style Structure

Styles are made up of ﬁfteen different sections and each section has eight separate

channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately

recording the channels, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles.

The available contents of the ser-

vice described at left are subject

to change.

Viewing information about Music Finder records

Information on the record about which you like in Music Finder is called,

and the song of the model is downloaded, or it is possible to add it to

musical instruments by downloading the Music Finder record which you

like. For more details about this service, refer to the following website.

http://music.yamaha.com/idc

1 Make sure that you’re connected to the Internet (page 175), press

the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons in the display to select the record

for which you want to view information on the Web.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to make a selection. After using

the dial to make a selection, press [ENTER].

3 Press the [J] (MUSIC FINDER +) button to open the Web page.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the browser screen and return to the

MUSIC FINDER display.

Style

Section

Four different

Fill-ins are

available.

Channel

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

114

Creating a Style

You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style.

The created Styles can also be edited (page 119).

■ Realtime Recording ➤ See page 114

This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the instrument. You can

select an internal Style that most closely matches your image of the Style you want

to create and then re-record parts of the Style as desired, or you can create a new

Style from scratch.

■ Step Recording ➤ See page 117

This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter

each note or individually, and specify its length.

This allows you to create a Style without having to play the parts on the instrument,

since you can enter each event manually.

■ Style Assembly ➤ See page 118

This convenient feature lets you create composite Styles by combining various pat-

terns from the internal preset Styles. For example, if you want to create your own

original 8-beat Style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “70’s 8Beat” Style,

use the bass pattern from “60’s Rock1” Style and import the chord patterns from the

“Cool8Beat” Style—combining the various elements to create one Style.

Realtime Recording (BASIC)

Create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using

realtime recording.

Realtime Recording Characteristics

• Loop Recording

Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and

Style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with

a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes

that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record

while hearing previously recorded material.

• Overdub Recording

This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded

data, without deleting the original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is

not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 116) and

Delete (page 116). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN

section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will

play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop

while hearing previously recorded material.

When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is

applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm),

delete the original data before recording.

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

60’s Rock1

70's 8Beat Cool8Beat

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

115

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles:

Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing (page 45).

When creating a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button

from the display shown in step 5 below.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Press the [B] button to call up the Style Creator display.

4 Use the TAB [

√

][

] buttons, then select the BASIC tab to call up the

RECORD display.

Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT] button.

6 Use the [3

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] buttons to select the section (page 113) to

be recorded.

7 Use the [5

ππ

††

]/[6

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the length (number of

measures) of the selected section.

Actually enter the speciﬁed length for the selected section by pressing the

[D] (EXECUTE) button.

When recording channels BASS-

PHR2 based on an internal Style,

delete the original data before

recording. Overdub recording is

not possible on channels BASS-

PHR2 (see page 114).

When the RECORD display (chan

nel indication) at the lower part of

the STYLE CREATOR display dis-

appears, you can press the [F]

(REC CH) button to re-display it.

Muting speciﬁc channels dur-

ing recording

Turn off the desired channels by

pressing the [1

†

]–[8

†

] but-

tons.

Specifying sections from the

panel buttons

You can specify the sections to

be recorded by using the Section

buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[END-

ING], etc) on the panel. Pressing

one of the Section buttons calls

up the SECTION display. Change

the sections by using the

π†

]/[7

π†

] buttons and

execute the selection by pressing

the [8

] button.

The INTRO 4/ENDING 4 sec-

tions cannot be speciﬁed with

the panel controls.

Overdub

recording

possible.

Overdub recording

not possible.

Delete the data

before recording.

6 7-1

7-2

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

116

8 Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down

the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate numbered but-

ton, [1

††

]–[8

††

To cancel the selection, press the appropriate numbered button [1

†

]–[8

†

]

again.

9 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1

ππ

]–[8

ππ

]

buttons

and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

10 To delete a channel, simultaneously hold down the [J] (DELETE) but-

ton and press the appropriate numbered button, [1

ππ

]–[8

ππ

You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again,

before releasing your ﬁnger from the [J] button.

11 Start recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button.

Playback of the speciﬁed section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern

plays back repeatedly in a loop, you can record individual sounds one by

one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For information on

recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the

section “Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” (see below).

12 To continue recording with another channel, simultaneously hold

down the [F] (REC CH) button and press the appropriate [1

††

]–[8

††

]

button to specify the channel, then play the keyboard.

13 Stop recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button.

14 Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT]

button.

15 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 70).

Limits on the recordable

Voices

• RHY1 channel:

Any except Organ Flute Voice/

S. Articulation Voice

• RHY2 channel:

Only drum/SFX kits

• BASS–PHR2 channels:

Any except Organ Flute Voice,

Drum/SFX kits, and S. Articula

tion Voice

S. Articulation (Super Articula-

tion) Voices are available on the

CVP-405.

Deleting the recorded rhythm

channel (RHY 1, 2)

To delete a speciﬁc instrument

sound, simultaneously hold

down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) but-

ton (from the display where the

recorded channels are shown)

and press the appropriate key.

CAUTION

The recorded Style will be lost

if you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 70).

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

117

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Step Recording (EDIT)

The explanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of “Realtime

Recording” (page 115).

In the EDIT display, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step

Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 117),

with the exception of the points listed below:

• In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Cre-

ator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the Style is automatically

ﬁxed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a Style based on

a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the

end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display.

Any desired chord or chord pro-

gression can be used for the

INTRO and ENDING sections.

Changing the Source Chord

If you want to record the pattern

with a Source Chord other than

CM7, set the PLAY ROOT and

PLAY CHORD parameters on the

PARAMETER page (page 123)

before recording.

Rules when recording non-rhythm channels

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE

channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B).

• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD chan-

nels (i.e., C, E, G, and B).

Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is

appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make dur-

ing your performance. The chord which forms the basis for this note con-

version is called the Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the

example illustration above). You can change the Source Chord (its root and

type) from the PARAMETER display on page 123. Keep in mind that when

you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the

chord notes and recommended notes will also change. For details on

chord notes and recommended notes, see page 124.

CRC CRC

C = Chord notes

C, R = Recommended notes

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

118

• Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1–16 tab display; how-

ever, they cannot be changed in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel

in the BASIC tab display.

• In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can

be edited (delete, copy, or move). You can switch between the two by pressing the

[F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System Exclusive data cannot be entered.

Style Assembly (ASSEMBLY)

Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns

(channels) from existing internal Styles.

1 Select the basic Style, then call up the display for Style Assembly.

The operation steps are the same as steps 1–4 in “Realtime recording”

(page 115). In step 4, select the ASSEMBLY tab.

2 Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new

Style.

Call up the SECTION display by pressing one of the Section buttons

([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING], etc.) on the panel. Change the section as

desired by using the [6

π†

]/[7

π†

] buttons and execute the operation by

pressing the [8

] (OK) button.

3 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using

the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by

pressing the same button again. Select the Style containing the pat-

tern you want to replace in the Style Selection display.

To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the

Style.

4 Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step

3 above) by using the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] (SECTION) buttons.

5 Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 4 above) by

using the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons.

6 Repeat steps 3–5 above to replace the patterns of other channels.

7 Press the [J] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display, and

save your data from the display (page 70).

You cannot select the SECTION

INTRO 4/ENDING 4 directly via

the panel operation.

CAUTION

The recorded Style will be lost

if you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 70).

Section display

Indicates the channels

that make up the section.

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

119

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Editing the Created Style

You can edit the Style you’ve created by using Realtime recording, Step recording

and/or Style Assembly.

Basic Operation for Editing Styles

1 Select a Style to be edited.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Call up the Style Creator/Edit display by pressing the [B] button.

4 Press the TAB[

√

][

] button to select a tab.

• Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) ➤ See page 120

These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the

rhythmic feel of your created Style.

• Editing Data for each Channel (CHANNEL) ➤ See page 122

The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize set-

tings for each channel in the Style data.

• Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ➤ See page 123

For playback of your created Style, you can decide how notes will be con-

verted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the

chord section of the keyboard.

5 Edit the selected Style.

Playing the Style During Style Assembly

While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style and select

the method of playback. Use the [6

π†

]/[7

π†

] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in

the Style Assembly display to select the playback method.

• SOLO

Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any

channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played

back simultaneously.

• ON

Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any chan-

nels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC

page are played back simultaneously.

• OFF

Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display.

Select the ﬁle to which the

data is saved.

You can also select the speciﬁed

ﬁle to which the data is to be

saved by pressing the [USB]/

[USER] buttons.

[USB]/[USER] → [B] STYLE →

[A]–[J]

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

120

Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE)

The explanation here applies when you select the GROOVE tab in step 4 of “Basic

Operation for Editing Styles” (page 119).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 121).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see page 121.

3 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each

display.

After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this but-

ton changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has

one level; only the previous operation can be undone.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 70).

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation (page 70).

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

121

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

■ GROOVE

This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making

subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all

channels of the selected Style.

■ DYNAMICS

This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback.

The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selected

Style.

ORIGINAL BEAT Speciﬁes the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other

words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes;

if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (speciﬁed in the ORIGINAL

BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when

ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,”

all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The

“16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT

is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats,

depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if

the speciﬁed ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat,” the Swing parameter

will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure

to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different

degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most

pronounced.

FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected

section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early,

while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered

settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats

up to the speciﬁed beat—but not including the ﬁrst beat—will be

played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is

selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types

produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied.

ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied—in other words, which notes in

the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings.

STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be

applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect.

EXPAND/COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than

100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% com-

press it.

BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values

above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100%

reduce it.

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

122

Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL)

The explanation here applies when you select the CHANNEL tab in step 4 of

“Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 119).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (see below).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to

be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see below.

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each

display.

After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this but-

ton changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level;

only the previous operation can be undone.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 70).

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the save

operation.

QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator (page 157), with the exception of the two

additional available parameters below.

Eighth notes with swing

Sixteenth notes with swing

VELOCITY

CHANGE

Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the speciﬁed channel, accord-

ing to the percentage speciﬁed here.

BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of

measures to another location within the speciﬁed channel. SOURCE

speciﬁes the ﬁrst (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be

copied. DEST speciﬁes the ﬁrst measure of the destination location, to

which the data is to be copied.

BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the speciﬁed range of measures within

the selected channel.

REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove speciﬁc events from the selected channel.

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

123

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER)

Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File

Format

The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of

“Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 119).

1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 124).

Editing of Style File Format data

is related only to note conver-

sion. Editing the rhythm chan-

nels has no effect.

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto

accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single

uniﬁed format. By using the Style Creator, you can take

advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create

your own Styles.

The chart shown at left indicates the process by which the

Style is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm

track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator

feature.

• Source Pattern

There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback

notes, depending on the particular root note and chord

type that are selected. The Style data is appropriately con-

verted depending on the chord changes you make during

your performance. This basic Style data that you create

with the Style Creator is referred to as the “Source Pat-

tern.”

• Note Transposition

This parameter group features two parameters that deter-

mine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be con-

verted in response to chord changes.

• Other Settings

Using the parameters of this group, you can ﬁne-tune how

Style playback responds to the chords you play. For exam-

ple, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the

Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shift-

ing the pitch to an authentic range—ensuring that no

notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instru-

ment (e.g., very low notes of a piccolo sound).

Source Pattern

SOURCE ROOT

(Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern)

SOURCE CHORD

(Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern)

Note Transposition

NTR

(Note Transposition Rule applied to the

Chord Root change)

NTT

(Note Transposition Table applied to the

Chord Type change)

Chord change via the

chord section of the

keyboard.

Other Settings

HIGH KEY

(Upper limit of the octaves of the note

transposing caused by the Chord Root

change)

NOTE LIMIT (Note range in which the

note is sounded)

RTR

(Retrigger Rules that determine how

notes held through chord changes will be

handled)

Output

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

124

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]/[2

ππ

††

] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to

be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see below.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to

save your data.

Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 70).

■ SOURCE ROOT/CHORD

These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used

when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C”

and a Source Type of “M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is

deleted prior to recording a new Style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord

included in the preset data. When you change Source Root/Chord from the default

CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change,

depending on the newly selected chord type.

When the Source Root is C:

■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

This determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted

from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes.

CAUTION

The edited Style will be lost if

you change to another Style

or you turn the power off

without executing the Save

operation.

Auditioning Your Style with a

Speciﬁc Chord

Normally in the Style Creator,

you can hear your original Style-

in-process with the Source Pat-

tern. However, there is a way to

hear it played by a speciﬁc chord

and root. To do this, set NTR to

“Root Fixed,” NTT to “Bypass,”

and NTT BASS to “OFF” then

change the newly displayed

“Play Root” and “Play Chord”

parameters to the desired set-

tings.

ROOT TRANS

(Root Transpose)

When the root note is transposed, the

pitch relationship between notes is

maintained. For example, the notes

C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become

F3, A3 and C4 when they are trans-

posed to F. Use this setting for chan-

nels that contain melody lines.

ROOT FIXED The note is kept as close as possible to

the previous note range. For example,

the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of

C become C3, F3 and A3 when they

are transposed to F. Use this setting for

channels that contain chord parts.

CR CR

CR CCR

CCR

RRCCC

CC RC

(9)

CR CC

(11)

CR C CR

CmM

CC RC

(9)

CCC

CC RC C

CmM

(9)

CCR

Cdim

CR R RC

CCR

Cdim

CCC C

(9)

CRC

CRC CR

(#11)

CCC

C sus

CRC CR

CRC C CR

CCC C CR

(9)

CCC C RC

(9)

CRC

RCR

Caug

CRC C RC

CRC C CR

(#11)

CCC CR

add9

CRC CC

(13)

CCC

(b9)

1+8

1+5

CCC

RCC

(#9)

CRC

RCC

C aug

CRC CRR

CM aug

CCCR

RCC

(b13)

CR CC

Csus

CCR CR

1+2+5

C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes

When playing a

C major chord.

When playing an F

major chord.

When playing a C

major chord.

When playing an

F major chord.

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

125

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

■ NTT (Note Transposition Table)

This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern.

■ NTT BASS ON/OFF

The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note,

when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument.

■ HIGH KEY

This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord

root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed

down to the next lowest octave. This setting is available only when the NTR param-

eter (page 124) is set to “Root Trans.”

BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not

do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table

used only converts the root note.

MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels

such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.

CHORD

Suitable for chord transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2

channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts.

MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the

chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is

raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody

channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such

as Intros and Endings.

MELODIC MINOR

5th

In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern.

HARMONIC

MINOR

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor

third and ﬂatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are

not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond

only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings.

HARMONIC

MINOR 5th

In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

NATURAL MINOR

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table

lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third,

ﬂatted sixth and ﬂatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other

notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which

respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings.

NATURAL MINOR

5th

In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this

table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor

third and ﬂatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes

are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond

only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings.

DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and dimin-

ished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

C3-E3-G3

F3-A3-C4

F#M

F#2-A#2-C#3

C#M

C#3-F3-G#3

Example—When the highest key is F.

Root changes

Notes played

Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles

Style Creator

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

126

■ NOTE LIMIT

This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style

channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound

as realistic as possible—in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are

sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). The actual notes that

sound are automatically shifted to the set range.

■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change

pitch in response to chord changes.

STOP The notes stop sounding.

PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type

of the new chord.

PITCH SHIFT TO

ROOT

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root

of the new chord.

RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding

to the next chord.

RETRIGGER TO

ROOT

The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next

chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same.

E3-G3-C4

High Limit

Low Limit

F3-A3-C4

C#M

F3-G#3-C#4

Example—When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4.

Root changes

Notes played

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

127

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups—Registration Memory

The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all

panel settings to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your cus-

tom panel settings by pressing a single button. The registered settings for eight Reg-

istration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank (ﬁle).

Registering and Saving Custom

Panel Setups

Registering Custom Panel Setups

1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as

desired.

Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered

with the Registration Memory function.

2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] button. The display

for selecting the items to be registered appears.

Only the items selected here will be registered.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to select items.

To cancel the operation, press the [I] (CANCEL) button.

4 Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine

whether the item should be registered or not, by pressing the

ππ

††

] button.

5 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons to register

your settings.

It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or

green. Buttons that are lit in red or green, already contain the panel setup

data. Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION

MEMORY button (lamp lights in green or red) will be erased and replaced

by the new settings.

6 Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps #1–

#5.

When recalling registration set-

ups, you can also select the

items to be recalled or not, even

if you selected all items when

registering (page 129).

About the lamp status:

Off.............. no data registered

On (green)...data registered, but

not currently selected

On (red)......data registered, and

currently selected

Deleting an unneeded panel

setup

See page 129.

Deleting all eight current

panel setups

To delete all the eight current

panel setups, turn the [POWER]

button ON while holding the B6

key (right-most B key on the key-

board).

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

128

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Saving the Registered Panel Setups

You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory

Bank ﬁle.

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but-

tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press the [6

††

] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 70).

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but-

tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank.

3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1]–[8]) in the Registra-

tion Memory section.

Bank 1

Bank 2

Bank 3

Bank 4

strat

emory

ata

compatibility

In general, Registration Memory

data (Bank ﬁles) is compatible

among the models CVP-409/

407/405/403/401. However, the

data may not be perfectly com-

patible, depending on the speci-

ﬁcations of each model.

out reca

lli

ng setups

rom a

USB storage device

When recalling the setups includ-

ing Song/Style ﬁle selection from

a USB storage device, make sure

that the appropriate USB storage

device including the registered

Song/Style is connected into the

[USB TO DEVICE] Terminal.

Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them

selectable only via the panel controls—in other words, instead of via Registration

Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, Song or incoming MIDI data, etc.

Call up the Parameter Lock display ([FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

]

CONFIG 1 → [B] 3 PARAMETER LOCK). Select the desired parameter by

using the [1

π†

]–[7

π†

] buttons, then lock it with the [8

] button.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

129

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a

Panel Setup

The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired.

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but-

tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display.

2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank to be edited.

3 Press the [8

††

] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Dis-

play.

4 Edit the panel setups.

• Deleting a panel setup

Press the [5

†

] button to delete a panel setup (page 72).

• Renaming a panel setup

Press the [1

†

] button to rename a panel setup (page 73).

5 Press the [8

ππ

] (UP) button to return to the REGISTRATION BANK

Selection display.

Disabling Recall of Speciﬁc Items (Freeze Func-

tion)

Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single

button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain

the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. For example, you may

want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment

Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the set-

tings of certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Regis-

tration Memory buttons.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET →

TAB [

√

][

] FREEZE

The number above

the ﬁle name corre-

sponds to the

REGISTRATION

MEMORY [1]–[8]

buttons.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

130

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

2 Press the [2

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to select items.

3 Enter checkmarks for the items to be “Frozen” (i.e., to remain

unchanged), by pressing the [8

ππ

††

] button.

4 Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze function

on.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in

Order—Registration Sequence

As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a

performance when you want to quickly switch between settings—without having

to take your hands from the keyboard. The convenient Registration Sequence func-

tion lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the

TAB [

√

][

] buttons or the pedal as you play.

1 Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence

(page 128).

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET →

TAB [

√

][

] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings,

specify here how the pedal will be used—to advance or to reverse

through the sequence.

Use the [C] button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence.

Use the [D] button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence.

4 Use the [E] button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves

when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END).

STOP .....................Pressing the TAB [

] button or the “advance” pedal has

no effect. The sequence is “stopped.”

TOP .......................The sequence starts again at the beginning.

NEXT BANK...........The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of

the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder.

5 Program the Sequence order.

The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REG-

ISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel.

Program the Sequence order from left to right.

CAUTION

Settings in the REGISTRATION

FREEZE display are automati-

cally saved to the instrument

when you exit from this dis-

play. However, if you turn the

power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Recalling the Registered Panel Setups

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

131

Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] button on the

panel, then press the [6

ππ

††

] (INSERT) button to input the number.

• Replacing the number

Press the [5

π†

] (REPLACE) button to replace the number at the cursor

position with the currently selected Registration Memory number.

• Deleting the number

Press the [7

π†

] (DELETE) button to delete the number at the cursor

position.

• Deleting all numbers

Press the [8

π†

] (CLEAR) button to delete all numbers in the sequence.

6 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on.

7 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button to

return to the Main display and conﬁrm whether the Registration

Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence pro-

grammed above.

• Use the TAB [

] button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the

order of the sequence, or use the TAB [

√

] button to call them up in

reverse order. The TAB [

√

] [

] buttons can only be used for Registration

Sequence when the Main display is called up.

• When pedal operation has been set in step 3, you can use a pedal to select

the Registration Memory numbers in order. The pedal can be used for Reg-

istration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the dis-

play in step 3 above).

Saving the Registration Sequence Settings

The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when

reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the

Registration Memory Bank ﬁle. To store your newly programmed Registration

Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank ﬁle.

1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] but-

tons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display.

2 Press the [6

††

] button to save the Bank ﬁle (page 70).

CAUTION

Settings in the REGISTRATION

SEQUENCE display are auto-

matically saved to the instru-

ment when you exit from this

display. However, if you turn

the power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Returning to the ﬁrst

Sequence in one action

In the Main display, press the

TAB [

√

] and [

] buttons simul-

taneously. This cancels the cur-

rently selected Sequence

number (the box indicator at the

top right goes out). The ﬁrst

Sequence will be selected by

pressing one of the TAB [

√

][

]

buttons or by pressing the pedal.

The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of

the Main display, letting you conﬁrm the currently selected

number.

CAUTION

Keep in mind that all Registra-

tion Sequence data is lost

when changing Registration

Memory Banks, unless you’ve

saved it with the Registration

Memory Bank ﬁle.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

132

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Compatible Song Types

The instrument can play back the following Song types.

Preset Songs

Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display.

Your Own Recorded Songs

These are Songs which you’ve recorded (page 42, page 139) and saved to the

USER/USB display. (USB is available when you connect an USB storage device

such as USB ﬂash memory/ﬂoppy disk to the instrument.)

Commercially Available Song Data

Song data downloaded from the Yamaha Web site and commercially available Disk

Songs are available when you connect the optional ﬂoppy disk drive to the instru-

ment. The instrument is compatible with the Song disks (ﬂoppy disks) that bear the

following marks:

Reference to Quick Guide Pages

Practicing with the Preset Songs .................................................. page 35

Playing Back Songs Before Practicing ..................................... page 35

Displaying Music Notation (Score) ......................................... page 38

One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ........................... page 39

Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ......................... page 41

Recording Your Performance.................................................... page 42

Singing Along with Song playback (Karaoke) or Your Own

Performance ............................................................................page 54

Connecting a Microphone...................................................... page 54

Singing with the Lyrics Display ................................................ page 55

Displaying Text ....................................................................... page 55

Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................................... page 56

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your

Own Performance ................................................................... page 58

Recording Your Performance as Audio ..................................... page 60

Before using a USB storage

device, be sure to read “Han-

dling the USB Storage Device

(USB Flash Memory/Floppy

Disk, etc)” on page 22.

Before using a ﬂoppy disk and

the disk slot, be sure to read

“Handling the Floppy Disk Drive

(FDD) and Floppy Disks” on

page 21.

Commercially available music

data is subject to protection by

mercially available data is strictly

prohibited, except for your own

personal use.

See page 195 for information on

the types of Song data that can

be played on the instrument.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

133

Operations for Song Playback

This section explains detailed operations and functions related to Song playback

which are not covered in the “Quick Guide.”

■ Starting/Stopping a Song

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Song playback, and press the SONG

[STOP] button to stop. In addition, there are several other convenient ways to start/

stop a Song.

Starting Playback

Synchro Start

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard.

While playback is stopped, simultaneously press the SONG [STOP] and [PLAY/

PAUSE] buttons simultaneously.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, simultaneously press the SONG [STOP] and

[PLAY/PAUSE] buttons simultaneously once again.

•Tap function

This useful function lets you press the [TAP TEMPO] button to tap out the tempo

and automatically start the Song at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release)

the button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) while the instrument is in Synchro

Start standby mode, and the Song playback starts automatically at the tempo you

tapped.

Fade In

The Fade In function can be used to produce smooth fade-ins when starting the

Song. To produce fade-ins, press the foot pedal which is assigned to Fade In/Out

while playback is stopped and then press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start

playback. For information on the settings, see page 187.

Stopping Playback

Fade Out

The Fade Out function can be used to produce smooth fade-outs when stopping

the Song playback. Press the foot pedal which is assigned to Fade In/Out at the

beginning of the phrase you want to fade out. For information on the settings, see

page 187.

Depending on the particular

Song data, the Style will also

play back at the same time.

Set the Fade In/Out time

The times of the fade-in and fade-out can be set independently. For details,

refer to page 105.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

134

■ Top/Pause/Rewind/Fast Forward

Moving to the top position of the Song

Press the SONG [STOP] button, regardless of whether the Song is stopped or play-

ing back.

Pausing the Song

Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button during Song playback. Press the SONG

[PLAY/PAUSE] button again and the Song will resume from the current position.

Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward)

1 Press the SONG [REW] or SONG [FF] button to move back and forth

(rewind and fast forward).

It calls up a pop-up window showing the current measure number in the

Main display.

For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can use the [FF] or [REW] buttons

to navigate through the Phrase Marks in the Song. If you don’t want to set the

Song position by the phrase marks, press the [E] button and select “BAR” in

the window showing the Song position.

2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the pop-up window showing the cur-

rent measure number (or Phrase Mark number).

■ Repeat Playback/Chain Playback

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Set the parameters related to the Repeat Playback by using the [H]/[I]

buttons. The available parameters are shown below.

Phrase Mark:

Phrase Mark is a pre-pro-

grammed marker in certain Song

data, which speciﬁes a certain

location (set of measures) in the

Song.

The preset Songs in the “Follow

Lights” folder contain the Guide

settings. These Songs are inap-

propriate for use with ALL or

RANDOM repeat.

REPEAT MODE OFF

Plays through the selected Song, then stops.

SINGLE

Plays through the selected Song repeatedly.

ALL

Continues playback through all the Songs in the folder

containing the current Song repeatedly.

RANDOM

Randomly and repeatedly plays back all Songs in the

folder containing the current Song.

PHRASE MARK REPEAT For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can set Repeat

Playback to “ON” or “OFF.” When this is on, the part corre-

sponding to the speciﬁed Phrase Mark number is repeatedly

played back. The steps for specifying the Phrase Mark num-

ber are the same as in the steps 1–2 of the section “Moving

back and forth (rewind and fast forward)” (see above).

For Songs not containing

Phrase Marks

For Songs containing

Phrase Mark

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Operations for Song Playback

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

135

■ Queuing the Next Playback Song

While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is

convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during stage performance.

Select the Song you want play next in the Song Selection display, while a Song is

playing back.

The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name.

To cancel this setting, press the [8

†

] (Cancel) button.

■ Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the

Song Playback

When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9–16 in the Song

data are replaced with style channels—allowing you to play the accompaniment

parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as

shown in the instructions below. When playing back a Song and a Style at the same

time, we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder.

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Select a Style (page 45).

3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the

Auto Accompaniment function.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button to enable standby—

letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you

start playing.

5 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

6 Play chords along with the Song.

The chord name is indicated in the Main display. To return to the Main dis-

play, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button.

When the Song playback is stopped, the style playback is also stopped at the same

time.

•Tempo for playing back a Song and a style at the same time

When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in

the Song is automatically used.

Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parame-

ters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.)

to make them selectable only via

the panel controls (page 128).

If the Song data does not contain

this data, the current chord name

will not be displayed in the Main

display during Song playback.

Playing Songs with the Quick Start function

With the default settings, the Quick Start function is turned on. On some

commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song

(such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the ﬁrst measure,

before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instru-

ment reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible

speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the ﬁrst

note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a mini-

mum pause for reading of data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” a Song is

played back directly from the ﬁrst note (which may be in the middle of a

measure). If you want to play from the beginning of the measure that has

silence prior to the ﬁrst note, turn Quick Start “OFF.”

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Press the [7

††

] (QUICK START) button to turn the Quick Start

“OFF.”

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

136

Adjusting the Volume Balance and

Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING

CONSOLE)

You can set the mixing-related parameters of a Song. Refer to the section “Adjust-

able items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 89. Call up the

“SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16” display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in

“Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on

page 87. Below are two operation examples.

Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel

1 Select a Song (page 35).

2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CON-

SOLE display.

3 Select the [VOL/VOICE] tab by pressing the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

4 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the display

of “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16.”

5 Press the [J] button to select the “VOLUME.”

6 Adjust the volume balance of each channel by using the [1

ππ

††

]–

ππ

††

] buttons.

7 You can save the volume settings to the Song in the Setup operation

of the SETUP (page 158).

Make sure to checkmark the “VOLUME” item in step 2 of the Setup proce-

dure.

Reading Song data automatically when connecting a USB stor-

age device

You can have the instrument automatically call up the ﬁrst Song (not con-

tained in a folder) on a USB storage device, as soon as the device is con-

nected in the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] MEDIA

2 Press the [3

ππ

]/[4

ππ

] (SONG AUTO OPEN) button to select “ON”.

About the [SONG CH 1–8]/

[SONG CH 9–16] displays

A Song consists of 16 separate

channels. Separate settings can

be made for each of the 16 chan-

nels in the MIXING CONSOLE

display. Adjust the parameters in

the SONG CH 1–8 or SONG CH

9–16 display respectively. Usu-

ally, CH 1 is assigned to the

[TRACK 1] button, CH 2 is

assigned to the [TRACK 2] but-

ton, and CH 3–16 are assigned

to the [EXTRA TRACKS] button,

respectively.

Press the [C]/[H] (VOICE) but-

tons in step 5 to select the Voice

which you want to change. Then,

press one of the [1

π†

] to [8

π†

] buttons to call up the

Voice selection display for the

channel.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Using the Practice Function (Guide)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

137

Changing Voices

1–4 The operation steps are the same as in the “Adjusting the Volume

Balance of Each Channel” (see page 136).

5 Press the [H] button to select the “VOICE”.

6 Press one of the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to call up the Voice selec-

tion display for the channel.

7 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice.

8 You can save the changed Voice selection to the Song in the Setup

operation (page 158).

Make sure to checkmark the “VOICE” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure.

Using the Practice Function (Guide)

The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play.

Also, when you sing along with a Song playback using a connected microphone

(CVP-405/403), the instrument automatically adjusts the timing of the Song play-

back to match your vocal performance.

To use the practice function, press the [GUIDE] button.

Selecting the Guide Function Type

1 Call up the setting display:

[FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. The

following types are available.

Saving the Guide settings in

the SONG SETTING display

You can save the Guide settings

as a part of the Song data

(page 158). For Songs to which

Guide settings have been saved,

the Guide function will be auto-

matically turned on and the

related settings will be recalled

when the Song is selected.

Turning the keyboard guide

lamps off

Press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) but-

ton in the SONG SETTING dis-

play (in step 1 as described at

left) to turn the keyboard guide

lamps off.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Using the Practice Function (Guide)

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

138

For Keyboard Performance

Follow lights

With this function, the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play

(page 39). Song playback pauses and waits for you to play. When you play the cor-

rect notes, Song playback continues.

Any key

With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key

(any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to

play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with music (any key is OK)

and the Song playback continues.

For Karaoke

Karao-key

This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one ﬁnger, while

you sing along. This is useful for singing to your own performance.

Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play a key on the keyboard

and the Song playback continues.

Vocal CueTIME (CVP-405/403)

This function lets you practice singing with the proper pitch.

Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. When you sing with proper pitch,

Song playback continues.

Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps

light (GUIDE LAMP TIMING)

Press the [D] button in the SONG SETTING display in step 1 (page 137) to

select the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light.

JUST........................... The guide lamps light in time with the music, at the

same timing you should play.

NEXT ......................... The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music,

indicating the notes you should play next. The

guide lamps ﬂash if you fail to play the keys with

the correct timing.

If the guide lamps do not light as intended

The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and

2 and the chord data in the Song (when such data is included).

If the guide lamps do not light as intended, you may need to assign the

appropriate right- and left-hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively, by

using the [1

π†

]/[2

π†

] buttons in the SONG SETTING display as

described in step 1 on the previous page.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

139

Recording Your Performance

You can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a

USB storage device. Several different recording methods are available:

Quick Recording which lets you record performance conveniently and quickly,

Multi track Recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple

channels, and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one. You can also

edit the Songs you’ve recorded.

For details on MIDI Recording, see page 192.

For details on USB Audio Recording (CVP-405/403), see page 60.

Recording Methods

There are three methods as shown below.

You can also edit Songs after they’ve been recorded (page 154).

For example, you can edit speciﬁc notes one by one, or you can use the Punch In/

Out function to re-record a speciﬁc part.

Turning playback channels of the Song on and off

A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each

channel of the selected Song playback on or off. Usually, CH 1 is assigned to

[TRACK 1] button, CH 2 is assigned to [TRACK 2] button, and CH 3–16 are

assigned to the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.

1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the Song CHANNEL

ON/OFF display.

If the display shown below does not appear, press the [CHANNEL ON/

OFF] button again.

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to turn each channel on or off.

If you want to play back only one particular channel (muting all other chan-

nels), press and hold down one of the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons corresponding

to the desired channel. To cancel solo playback, press the same button again.

e microp

one input signa

can

not be recorded.

Internal memory (User tab

displays) capacity

The internal memory capacity of

the instrument is about 1.4MB

(CVP-405/403), or about 560KB

(CVP-401). This capacity applies

to all ﬁle types, including Voice,

Style, Song, and Registration

data ﬁles.

Quick Recording

➤ page 140

This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly

record your performance—useful, for example, in recording solo

piano pieces. You can record to the [TRACK 1 (R)] or [TRACK 2

(L)] button, and also to the [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] track,

which can be used for recording at the same time.

Multi track Recording

➤ page 141

This lets you record a whole Song including several different

instrument parts, to create the sound of a full band or orchestra.

Record the performance of each instrument part one by one

and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record

over already-recorded parts of an existing Song (Preset Song or

a Song on USB storage device) with your own performance.

Step Recording

➤ page 143

This method lets you compose your performance by “writing”

it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, manual

recording method – similar to writing music notation onto

paper. You can input notes, chords and other events one by

one (realtime performance is not needed).

ecor

tep

ecor

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

140

Quick Recording

This lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance.

1 Press the SONG [REC] and SONG [STOP] buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

2 Make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance.

Below are some example settings you may want to try.

• Recording the RIGHT 1 part

Select the voice for the RIGHT 1 part by calling up the Voice selection dis-

play (page 32).

• Recording the Dual voice (RIGHT 1 and 2 parts)

Turn on the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button (page 81). Select the

voice for each keyboard part (RIGHT 1, 2) by calling up the Voice selec-

tion display (page 32).

• Recording the LEFT part

Turn on the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button (page 82). Select the

voice for the LEFT part by calling up the Voice selection display (page 32).

• Recording Styles

1 Select a Style (page 45).

2 Set the tempo for recording by pressing the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons, as

necessary.

• Using Registration Memory panel setups

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1–8] buttons.

3 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the SONG TRACK but-

tons to be recorded.

• Recording your performance

Press the SONG [TRACK 1 (R)] button for the right-hand part recording,

and/or the SONG [TRACK 2 (L)] button for the left-hand part recording.

• Recording Styles

Press the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.

• Recording your performance and the Style playback simultaneously

Press the SONG [TRACK 1 (R)]/[TRACK 2 (L)] buttons and the

SONG[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.

The RIGHT and/or LEFT parts are

recorded onto separate tracks.

With Multi Track Recording, you

can record RIGHT 2 part individ-

ually.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

141

4 Start recording.

There are several different ways you can start recording.

• Starting by playing the keyboard

If you’ve selected the SONG [TRACK 1(R)]/[TRACK 2 (L)] buttons in step 3

above, play in the right-hand section of the keyboard (page 80). If you’ve

selected the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLES)] button in step 3 above,

play in the left-hand (chord) section of the keyboard (page 107). Record-

ing begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard.

• Starting by pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button

If you start recording in this way, “empty” data is recorded until you play a

note on the keyboard. This is useful for starting a Song with a short one-or

two-beat pick-up or lead-in.

• Starting by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

In this case the rhythm parts (channels) of the Style begin playing back and

recording starts simultaneously.

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording.

When recording is ﬁnished, a message prompting you to save the recorded

performance data appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button.

See step 7 for instructions on saving your recording.

6 Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE] button to play back the performance you just recorded.

7 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display

for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

Multi Track Recording

A Song consists of 16 separate channels. With this method, you can record data to

each channel independently, one by one. Both Keyboard and Style parts can be

recorded.

1 Press the SONG[REC] and

SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up

for recording.

Select Voices for recording the keyboard

parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and/or LEFT)

(page 32, page 81, page 82). Select a Style

for recording also, as necessary (page 45).

Using the metronome

You can record your perfor-

mance while playing back the

metronome (page 30). But the

metronome sound is not

recorded.

Pausing and restarting your

recording

To pause recording, press the

SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button

during recording. To restart

recording, follow the operations

shown below.

•For recording to [TRACK 1]/

[TRACK 2] recording, press the

SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

•For recording to [EXTRA

TRACKS (STYLES)] recording,

press the STYLE CONTROL

[SYNC START] button, then

play in the chord section of the

keyboard.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

About Channels

See page 143.

Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2

part to the channel 2

Turn the PART ON/OFF [DUAL

(RIGHT2)] button on. Then, call up

Voice Selection display, and select a

voice for the RIGHT 2 part (page 81).

Example

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

142

2 While holding the SONG [REC] button,

press the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to

set the desired channels to “REC”.

Normally, the keyboard parts should be

recorded to channels 1–8, and the Styles

should be recorded to channels 9–16. To

cancel the channel selection, press the

SONG [REC] button again.

3 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to select the

desired part for the channel to be

recorded.

This determines which part—keyboard or

Style (Rhythm 1/2, Bass, etc.)—is recorded

to each of the channels selected in step 2.

Default channel/part assignments are

shown in the section “About Song chan-

nels” (page 143).

To close PART selection display, press the

[EXIT] button.

4 Start recording.

The method for starting is the same as in step 4 of Quick Recording (page 141).

5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording.

When recording is ﬁnished, a message appears prompting you to save the

recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] but-

ton. For instructions on saving Song data, see step 8.

6 Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE] button to playback the performance you just recorded.

7 To record another channel, repeat steps 2 through 6.

Sett

ng a

e 9–16 c

an-

nels to “REC” simultaneously

While holding the SONG [REC]

button, press the SONG [EXTRA

TRACKS (STYLE)] button.

When selecting the MIDI part

• Setting a single channel to

MIDI

All incoming data received via

any of the MIDI channels 1–16

is recorded. When using an

external MIDI keyboard or

controller to record, this lets

you record without having to

set the MIDI transmit channel

on the external device.

• Setting several channels to

MIDI

When using an external MIDI

keyboard or controller to

record, this records data only

over the set MIDI channel—

meaning the external device

must also be set to the same

channel.

Recording each channel with

the same tempo

Use the Metronome function

(page 30) to record each channel

with the same tempo. Keep in

mind that the metronome sound

is not recorded.

Pausing and restarting your

recording

See page 141.

While holding the SONG [REC] but-

ton, press the [2

] button to set the

channel 2 to “REC”.

Press the [D] button to select

the “RIGHT2”.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

143

8 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display

for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

Step Recording

This method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords.

Basic Operations for Step Recording

1 Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

About Song channels

Default channel/part assignments are shown below.

About keyboard parts

There are three keyboard parts, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. As the

default, the RIGHT 1 part is assigned to each of the channels 1–8. Nor-

mally, the keyboard parts should be recorded to the channels 1–8.

About Style parts

As the default, each of the Style parts is assigned to the channels 9–16,

respectively as shown below. Normally, the Style parts should be recorded

to the channels 9–16.

RHYTHM ......... This is the basic part of the Style, containing the drum and

percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits

is used.

BASS ................ The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds

to match the style.

CHORD ........... This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with

piano or guitar Voices.

PAD ................. This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings,

organ, choir, etc.

PHRASE ........... This part is used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated

chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment

more interesting.

RIGHT1

RHYTHM1

RHYTHM2

BASS

CHORD1

CHORD2

PAD

PHRASE1

PHRASE2

Channels ChannelsDefault Parts Keyboard parts

Keyboard Parts

Style parts

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

144

3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display for recording/

editing a Song.

4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons.

For recording melodies .............. Select the [1–16] tab.

For recording chords .................. Select the [CHORD] tab.

5 If you select the “1–16” tab in step 4, press the [F] button to select the

channel for recording.

6 Press the [G] button to call up the STEP RECORD display.

7 Start Step Recording.

For recording melodies .............. See page 145.

For recording chords .................. See page 152.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

145

Recording Melodies

This section explains how to step-record notes, using three music score examples.

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the section “Basic Operations for Step

Recording” on page 144.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [G] button to select “



.”

2 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

3 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

4 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

5 Play the keys C3, D3, E3, F3, G3, and A3 in order, according to the

notation example.

Since t

e music score

isp

aye

on the instrument is generated

from the recorded MIDI data, it

may not appear exactly the same

as shown below.

About the items which can be

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 147.

Example 1

6 7

3–5

* The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following opera-

tion step numbers.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

146

6 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to enter a quarter-note rest.

To enter the rest, use the [4

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons. (Press the button once to

select the rest value, and once again to actually enter it.) A rest having spec-

iﬁed note length will be entered.

7 Play the C4 key.

8 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning

of the Song.

9 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered

notes.

10 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 154).

11 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

Move the cursor to the begin-

ning of the Song.

Press the SONG [STOP] button

during recording.

Deleting data

Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons in the STEP RECORD display (page 144) to

select the data you want to delete.

2 Press the [J] (DELETE) button to delete the selected data.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

147

About velocity

Velocity is determined by how

strongly you play the keyboard.

The more strongly you play the

keyboard, the higher the velocity

value and the louder the sound.

The velocity value can be speci-

ﬁed within a range from 1 to

127. The higher the velocity

value, the louder the sound

becomes.

About items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons

in the Step Record display

[G] button ........... Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to

be entered.

[H] button ........... Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to

be entered.

[I] button ............. Determines the note type to be entered. Pressing the

button alternately switches the note selectors (at the

bottom of the display) among three basic note values:

normal, dotted and triplet.

Kbd.Vel

fff

ppp

127

111

Items Velocity to be recorded

Actual velocity you play the keyboard with

Normal

Tenuto

Staccato

Staccatissimo

Manual

80%

99%

40%

20%

Items Gate time to be recorded

The gate time (note length) can be set to any

desired percentage by using the [DATA

ENTRY] dial.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

148

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 144.

In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on

the keyboard while executing the operation.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [G] button to select “



.”

2 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

3 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

4 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the half-note length.

5 While holding F3 on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

] button.

Before you go on to step 6, release the F3 key and the [7

ππ

††

] button.

6 Press the [H] button to select the “Staccato”.

7 Press the [7

ππ

††

] button to select the eighth-note length.

Example 2

2–5 10–13 14–16

6–8

* The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation

step numbers.

out t

tems w

can

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 147.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

149

8 Play the keys E3, F3, and A3 in order, according to the notation exam-

ple.

9 Press the [G] button to select “



.”

10 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

11 Press the [I] button to select “dotted.”

12 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the dotted half-note length.

13 Play the A3 key on the keyboard, as speciﬁed in the example.

14 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

15 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

16 Play the F3 key on the keyboard, as speciﬁed in the example.

17 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning

of the Song.

18 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered

notes.

19 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

You can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded as necessary (page 154).

20 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

17 18

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

150

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 144.

In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on

the keyboard while executing the entire operations.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display.

1 Press the [H] button to select “Normal.”

2 Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type.

3 Press the [7

ππ

††

] button to select the eighth note.

4 While holding C3 key on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

] button.

Do not release the C3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following

steps.

Example 3

1–4

* The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following

operation step numbers.

out t

tems w

can

selected via the [G] [H] [I] but-

tons

See page 147.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

151

5 While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard, press the [7

ππ

††

]

button.

Do not release the C3 and E3 keys yet. Keep holding them while executing

the following steps.

6 While holding the C3, E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard, press the

ππ

††

] button.

Do not release the C3, E3 and G3 keys yet. Keep holding them while exe-

cuting the following steps.

7 While holding the C3, E3, G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard, press the

ππ

††

] button, and successively press the [5

ππ

††

] button.

After you press the [5

ππ

††

] button, release the keys.

8 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning

of the Song.

9 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered

notes.

10 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 154).

11 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

152

Recording Chords

You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time

with precise timing. These instructions show how to record chord changes using

the Step Record function.

The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording”

on page 144.

1 Make sure the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to OFF,

then press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION A] button.

2 Press the [5

ππ

††

] button to select the half-note length.

3 Play the chords C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [BREAK] button.

CF GFG7 C

2,3 5,6 8,9

147

* The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step

numbers.

MAIN A

BREAK

MAIN B

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

153

5 Press the [6

ππ

††

] button to select the quarter-note length.

6 Play the chords F, and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard.

7 Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION B] button.

8 Press the [4

ππ

††

] button to select the whole-note length.

9 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard.

10 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning

of the Song.

11 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered

notes.

12 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display.

If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner

(page 154).

13 Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change

data into the Song data.

14 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

Deleting data

Mistakenly entered notes can be

deleted (page 146).

Entering ﬁll-ins

Turn the STYLE CONTROL

[AUTO FILL IN] button to ON,

and simply press one of the

STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARI-

ATION (A, B, C, D)] buttons.

(The appropriate ﬁll-in section

plays and then automatically

goes to the selected [MAIN

VARIATION (A, B, C, D)] pattern

playback.)

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

154

Editing a Recorded Song

You can edit the Songs you’ve recorded with any recording method—Quick

Recording, Multi Track Recording, or Step Recording.

Basic Editing Operation

1 Select a Song for editing.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU

3 Press the [A] button to call up the SONG CREATOR display to record

or edit Songs.

4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons and edit

the Song.

• Re-Recording a Speciﬁc Section

—Punch In/Out (REC MODE) ............................................... page 155

This lets you re-record a speciﬁc section of a Song.

• Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL) .................................... page 156

This lets you edit the channel events. For example, you can delete data or

transpose notes by channel.

• Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16) .................... page 159

This lets you change or delete the recorded notes or chords.

• Editing System Event (SYS/EX.) ........................................... page 161

This lets you change the tempo or the time signature.

• Editing Lyrics (LYRICS).......................................................... page 162

This lets you change the Song name or lyrics events.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

155

Re-Recording a Speciﬁc Section—Punch In/

Out (REC MODE)

When re-recording a speciﬁc section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch

IN/OUT function. In this method, only the data between the Punch In point and

the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in mind

that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over,

although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In/Out

timing. You can specify the Punch In and Punch Out points as measure numbers

beforehand for automatic operation, or manually execute the Punch In/Out record-

ing by using a Foot Pedal or simply by playing the keyboard.

The explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the “Basic Edit-

ing Operation” on page 154.

1 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[6

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the settings for re-

recording (see below).

2 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the desired track but-

ton.

3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the key-

board at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out

point.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

■ PUNCH IN settings

■ PUNCH OUT settings

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG [PLAY/

PAUSE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro

Standby mode.

FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as

soon as you play the keyboard.

PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indi-

cated Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that

point. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3

π†

]

button.

REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as

the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the

point at which recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the

speciﬁed Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display

button), at which point recording stops and normal playback

continues. This setting maintains all data after the point at which

recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out measure by

pressing the [6

π†

] buttons.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

156

Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings

This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function.

The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures

in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

■ Pedal Punch In/Out settings

When this is set to ON, you can use the sostenuto pedal to control the punch-in

and punch-out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) the

sostenuto pedal instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal

stops recording (Punch Out).You can press and release the sostenuto pedal as often

as you want during playback, to punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the

current function assignment of the sostenuto pedal is cancelled when the Pedal

Punch In/Out function is set to ON.

Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL)

The explanations here apply to the CHANNEL tab display in the step 4 of the Basic

Editing Operation on page 154.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the Edit menu (page 157).

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to edit the data.

For information on the available parameters, see page 157.

3 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the cur-

rent display.

After the operation (with the exception of the SETUP menu display) is com-

pleted, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data

if you are not satisﬁed with the Operation results. The Undo function only

has one level; only the immediate operation can be undone.

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

1234567

PUNCH IN setting

PUNCH OUT setting

NORMAL

REPLACE ALL

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT AT=006

FIRST KEY ON

REPLACE ALL

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT AT=006

PUNCH IN AT=003

REPLACE ALL

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT AT=006

Original data

Start overwrite recording

Play back (Original data)

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to

start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording

Play back (Original data)

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

Stop recording

Stop overwrite recording/Play original data

*1 To avoid overwriting measures 1-2, start recording from measure 3

*2 To stop recording, press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5.

Previously recorded data

Newly recorded data

Deleted data

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

157

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

■ QUANTIZE menu

The Quantize function allows you to align

the timing of all the notes in a channel. For

example, if you record the musical phrase

shown at right, you may not play it with

absolute precision, and your performance

may have been slightly ahead of or behind

the precise timing. Quantize is a conve-

nient way of correcting for this.

■ Deleting the data of the speciﬁed channel (DELETE menu)

You can delete the data of the speciﬁed channel in the Song. Select the channel

whose data to be deleted by using the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons, then press the [D]

(EXECUTE) button to execute the operation.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

About Quantize size (resolu-

tion)

The Quantize size or resolution

is the number of clocks per quar-

ter note.

CHANNEL Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized.

SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the

Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth

notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use eighth note as the Quantize

size.

Settings

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally conve-

nient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same

time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are

contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all

notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes—completely elimi-

nating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet

setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% pro-

duces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved

toward the speciﬁed quantization beats according to the speciﬁed percentage.

Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human”

feel in the recording.

After eighth note quantization

quarter

note

eighth note sixteenth

note

thirty-second

note

sixteenth note

+ eighth note

triplet*

quarter

note triplet

eighth note

triplet

sixteenth

note triplet

eighth note

+ eighth

note triplet*

sixteenth

note + six-

teenth triplet*

Quarter-note length

Original data

Quantizing strength=100

Quantizing strength=50

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

158

■ Mixing (merging) the data of the speciﬁed two channels (MIX menu)

This function lets you mix the data of the two channels and place the results in a

different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another.

■ CHANNEL TRANSPOSE menu

This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down

by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments.

To display the channels 9–16

Press the [F] button to toggle between the two channel displays—Channels 1–8,

and Channels 9–16.

Transposing to the same value for all channels simultaneously

While holding the [G] (ALL CH) button, press one of the [1

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons.

SETUP menu

The current settings of the Mixing Console (page 87) displays and other panel set-

tings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing

Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the

Song starts.

■ Setup recording procedure

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU →→

→→

[A] SONG CREATOR →→

→→

TAB

[

√

][

] CHANNEL →→

→→

[B] SET UP

2 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to determine the settings to be

automatically called up when the Song starts.

3 Checkmark the selected item by pressing the [8

ππ

] button.

SOURCE 1 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. All MIDI events in the

selected channel are copied to the destination channel.

SOURCE 2 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. Only note events in the

selected channel are copied to the destination channel. In addi-

tion to the values 1–16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you

to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. If

“COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the

destination channel. (The original channel data is maintained.)

DESTINATION Selects the channel into which the mix or copy results will be

placed.

SONG Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing

Console.

KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings including the Voice selection of the

keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status.

Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to

the One Touch Setting. This can be recorded at any point in a

Song (the other items in this chart can be recorded only to the

top position of the Song).

SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display.

GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide

ON/OFF setting.

LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display.

MIC SETTING

(CVP-405/403)

Records the microphone and the Vocal Harmony settings in the

Mixing Console display (page 87).

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

159

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the SETUP recording oper-

ation.

Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving

your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70).

Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16)

The explanations here apply to the CHORD and 1–16 tab displays in step 4 of the

Basic Editing Operation on page 154.

1 When the 1–16 tab display is selected, press the [F] button to select

the channel to be edited.

2 Move the cursor to the desired data.

To move the cursor up or down ..............................Use the [A]/[B] button.

To move the cursor to the top data..........................Press the [C] button.

To move the cursor by Measure/Beat/Clock units ....Use the [1

π†

]–

π†

] buttons.

3 Edit the data.

Editing the data line by line

Use the [6

π†

]–[8

] buttons to cut/copy/paste/insert/delete the

events.

Editing each parameter of the data

1 Use the [D]/[E] buttons to select the parameter to be edited.

2 Use the [4

π†

]/[5

π†

] buttons to edit the parameter value. The

[DATA ENTRY] dial can also be used. To actually enter an edited

value, simply move the cursor away from the parameter.

To restore the original value, press the [8

†

] (CANCEL) button before move

the cursor.

4 When the CHORD tab display is selected, press the [F] (EXPAND) but-

ton to convert the data into Song data.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

ect

ng mu

nes o

data

While holding the [J] (MULTI

SELECT) button, press the [A]/[B]

buttons.

Displaying speciﬁc types of

event (FILTER)

You can select the event types to

be displayed in the [CHORD]

and [1-16] tab displays. This is

convenient, for example, when

you wish to have only the note

events shown (page 161).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

The data recorded by Realtime

Recording will not appear on the

display and cannot be edited.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

160

About Clock

A unit of note resolution. The

Quantize size is the number of

clocks per quarter note. On the

instrument, one clock is equal to

1/1920th of a quarter note.

About the events shown in the display

12 3

001 : 1 : 1440

Example

Measure number (BAR)

Beat

Clock

1 Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Same as the indication

at the lower left of the display.

2 Indicates the event types (see below).

3 Indicates the event values.

Event types shown on the 1–16 tab display

Event types shown on the CHORD tab display

Note The individual note of a Song. Includes the note number

which corresponds to the key which was played, plus a

velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the

gate time value (the length of a note).

Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, ﬁlter and

effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described on

page 87), etc.

Prog

(Program Change)

MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice.

P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously.

A.T.(Aftertouch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key

after the note is played.

Style Style

Tempo tempo

Chord chord root, chord type, on bass chord

Sect Accompaniment Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break,

Ending)

OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment

Style

CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style

S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

161

Displaying Speciﬁc Types of Events (FILTER)

In the edit displays various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difﬁcult

to pinpoint the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in

handy. It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the edit displays.

1 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the edit displays.

2 Select the event type by using the [2

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons.

3 Checkmark (show) or remove the checkmark for the selected item by

using the [6

ππ

††

]/[7

ππ

††

] buttons.

[H] (ALL ON)..............Checkmarks for all event types.

[I] (NOTE/CHORD).....Selects only NOTE/CHORD data.

[J] (INVERT) ................Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In

other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that

were previously unchecked and vice versa.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings.

Pressing the [C]–[E] buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below.

MAIN .........................Call up the Main Filter display.

CTRL CHG .................Call up the Control Change Filter display.

STYLE .........................Call up the Accompaniment Style Filter Display.

Editing System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX.)

The explanations here apply to the [SYS/EX] tab display in step 4 of the Basic Edit-

ing Operation on page 154.

From this display, you can edit recorded System Exclusive events, which do not

belong to a speciﬁc channel, such as tempo and beat (time signature). The opera-

tions here are basically the same as those in the section “Editing Note or Chord

Events” on page 159.

System Events

Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your

data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70).

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Time (Time Signature) Determines the time signature.

Key (Key Signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor set-

ting, for the music score shown on the display.

XGPrm (XG Parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parame-

ters. Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the separate Data List

booklet for details.

SysEx (System exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind

that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the

data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the

data.

Meta (Meta Event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that

you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data

here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Using, Creating and Editing Songs

Recording Your Performance

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

162

Editing Lyrics (LYRICS)

The explanations here apply to the LYRICS tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing

Operation on page 154. From this display, you can edit the recorded Lyrics events.

The operations here are basically the same as in the section “Editing Note or Chord

Events” on page 159.

Lyrics Events

Inputting and Editing Lyrics

1 Use the [4

ππ

††

]/[5

ππ

††

] (DATA ENTRY) buttons to call up the lyrics

editing display.

Operations are the same as in the section “Entering Characters” (page 73).

2 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for

saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display

(page 70).

Name Allows you to enter the Song name.

Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.

Control Codes CR

Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

Unavailable on the instrument. On some MIDI devices, this

event may delete the currently displayed lyrics and display the

next set of lyrics.

CAUTION

The recorded Song data will

be lost if you select another

Song or turn the power to the

instrument off without exe-

cuting the Save operation

(page 70).

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

163

Using a Microphone

Using a Microphone (CVP-405/403)

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters

This section explains brieﬂy how to create your own Vocal Harmony (page 57)

types, and lists the detailed parameters for editing. Up to ten Vocal Harmony types

can be created and saved.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

2 Press the [H] (VOCAL HARMONY TYPE) button to call up the VOCAL

HARMONY TYPE selection display.

Reference to Quick Guide pages

Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own

Performance.................................................................................. page 54

Connecting a Microphone........................................................... page 54

Singing with the Lyrics Display ...................................................page 55

Convenient Functions for Karaoke ..............................................page 56

Adjusting the tempo ................................................................ page 31

Transpose ................................................................................ page 56

Applying effects to Your Voice ................................................. page 56

Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice..................................... page 57

Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch (Vocal CueTIME)........... page 137

Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own

Performance................................................................................. page 58

Changing the Key (Transpose).................................................. page 58

Displaying the Music Score on Instrument and Lyrics on TV .... page 59

Making Announcements Between Songs ................................. page 59

Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice (Karao-Key) ......... page 137

Using a Microphone

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

164

3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type to be

edited.

4 Press the [8

††

] (EDIT) button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT

display.

5 If you want to re-select the Vocal Harmony type, use the [1

ππ

††

ππ

††

] buttons.

Or you can re-select the Vocal Harmony type by pressing the [8

π†

]

(RETURN) button to return to the Vocal Harmony selection display.

6 Use the [3

ππ

††

]–[5

ππ

††

] buttons to select the parameter (page 165)

you want to edit.

7 Set the value of the parameter selected above.

8 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Vocal Harmony type

(page 70).

567

CAUTION

The settings here will be lost

if you change to another

Vocal Harmony type or you

turn the power off without

executing the save operation.

Using a Microphone

Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

165

Editable Parameters in the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT Display

VOCODER TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro-

phone sound when the Harmony mode (page 169) is set to

“VOCODER.”

CHORDAL TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the micro-

phone sound when the Harmony mode (page 169) is set to

“CHORDAL.”

HARMONY GENDER TYPE Determines whether the gender of the harmony sound is

changed or not.

Off

The gender of the harmony sound is not changed.

Auto

The gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically.

LEAD GENDER TYPE Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound

(i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be changed. Please note

that the number of harmony notes differs depending on the

selected type. When set to Off, three harmony notes are pro-

duced. Other settings produce two harmony notes.

Off

No gender change occurs.

Unison

No gender change occurs. You can adjust the LEAD GENDER

DEPTH below.

Male

The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal.

Female

The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal.

LEAD GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change. This is available

when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off.

The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice

becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice.

LEAD PITCH CORRECT This parameter is only effective when the LEAD GENDER TYPE

above is set to other than Off.

When Smooth or Hard is selected, the pitch of the lead vocal is

shifted in precise semitone steps.

UPPER GENDER THRESH-

OLD

Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or

exceeds the speciﬁed number of semitones above the lead vocal

pitch.

LOWER GENDER THRESH-

OLD

Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or

exceeds the speciﬁed number of semitones below the lead vocal

pitch.

UPPER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes

higher than the UPPER GENDER THRESHOLD. The higher the

value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The

lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice.

LOWER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes

lower than the LOWER GENDER THRESHOLD. The higher the

value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The

lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice.

VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also

affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE

above is set to other than Off.

VIBRATO RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect. Also affects the lead vocal

sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than

Off.

VIBRATO DELAY Speciﬁes the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins

when a note is produced. Higher values result in a longer delay.

Using a Microphone

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

166

Adjusting the Microphone and Har-

mony Sound

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

2 Press the [I] (MIC SETTING) button to call up the MICROPHONE SET-

TING display.

HARMONY1/2/3 VOLUME Sets the volume of the ﬁrst (lowest), second, and third (highest)

harmony notes.

HARMONY1/2/3 PAN Speciﬁes the stereo (pan) position of the ﬁrst (lowest), second,

and third (highest) harmony notes.

Random

The stereo position of the sound will change randomly when-

ever the keyboard is played. This is effective when the Har-

mony mode (page 169) is set to “VOCODER” or “CHORDAL.”

L63>R – C – L<R63

A setting of L63>R pans the sound hard left, while C is at cen-

ter, and L<R63 is at hard right.

HARMONY1/2/3 DETUNE Detunes the ﬁrst (lowest), second, and third (highest) harmony

notes by the speciﬁed number of cents.

PITCH TO NOTE When this is set to “ON,” you can “play” the voices of the instru-

ment with your voice. (The instrument tracks the pitch of your

voice and converts it to note data for the tone generator. Keep in

mind, however, that dynamic changes in your voice do not affect

the volume of the tone generator.)

PITCH TO NOTE PART Determines which of the instrument parts will be controlled by

the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is “ON.”

Using a Microphone

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

167

3 Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the OVERALL SETTING tab display.

4 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the item (parameter) (see below) to

be adjusted.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to set the value.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING dis-

play.

Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the OVERALL SETTING Tab

Display

■ 3BAND EQ

EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple

bands, which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency

response. The instrument features a high-grade three-band (LOW, MID and HIGH)

digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.

•Hz

Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.

•dB

Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.

■ NOISE GATE

This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below

a speciﬁed level. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired sig-

nal (vocal, etc.) to pass.

• SW (Switch)

This turns the Noise Gate on or off.

• TH. (Threshold)

This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.

CAUTION

Settings in the OVERALL SET-

TING tab display are automat-

ically saved to the instrument

when you exit from the dis-

play. However, if you turn the

power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Using a Microphone

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

168

■ COMPRESSOR

This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone

exceeds a speciﬁed level. This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that

have widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft

parts louder and loud parts softer.

• SW (Switch)

This turns the Compressor on or off.

• TH. (Threshold)

This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be applied.

•RATIO

This adjusts the compression ratio.

• OUT

This adjusts the ﬁnal output level.

■ VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL

The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled.

• VOCODER CONTROL

The Vocal Harmony effect in Vocoder mode (page 169) is controlled by note

data—the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the song data. This

parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony.

• BAL.

This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal

Harmony. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and

decreases that of the lead vocal.

When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead Vocal, H: Vocal Harmony), only the Vocal

Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead vocal is output.

SONG CHANNEL MUTE/PLAY

When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below (to control

Harmony) is muted (turned off) during song playback.

OFF/Channels 1–16

When set to “OFF,” song data control over harmony is turned

off. When set to one of the values 1–16, note data (played

from a song on the instrument or an external MIDI sequencer)

contained on the corresponding channel is used to control the

harmony. This setting is linked to the HARMONY CH setting in

the SONG SETTING display (page 137).

KEYBOARD OFF

Keyboard control over harmony is turned off.

UPPER

Notes played to the right of the split point control the har-

mony.

LOWER

Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.

Using a Microphone

Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

169

• MODE

All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes, which produce har-

mony in different ways. The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal

Harmony mode, and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to

your voice. The three modes are described below.

• CHORD

The following parameters determine which data in a recorded song is used for

chord detection.

•Vocal Range

Set this to obtain the most natural vocal harmony, depending on your voice.

■ MIC

The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled.

• MUTE

When set to ON, the microphone sound is turned off.

• VOLUME

Adjusts the output volume of the microphone sound.

AUTO When the [ACMP ON/OFF] or [LEFT] is set to ON and if chord

data exists in the song, the mode is automatically set to

CHORDAL. In all other cases, the mode is set to VOCODER.

VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the

keyboard and/or song data. You can specify whether the Vocoder

effect is controlled by your keyboard performance or by the Song

data (page 168).

CHORDAL The harmony notes are determined by the following three types

of chord: chords played in the chord section of the keyboard

(with the [ACMP] turned on), chords played in the LEFT Voice

section of the keyboard (with the [ACMP] turned off and the

[LEFT] turned on), and chords contained in song data for control-

ling the harmony. (Not available if the song does not contain any

chord data.)

OFF Chords are not detected from the song data.

XF Chords of XF format are used for the Vocal Harmony.

1–16 Chords are detected from note data in the speciﬁed song chan-

nel.

Normal Normal setting

Low Setting for lower voice. This setting is also appropriate for growl-

ing and shouting.

High Setting for higher voice. This setting is also appropriate for sing-

ing close to the microphone.

Using a Microphone

Talk Setting

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

170

Talk Setting

This function lets you have special settings for making announcements between

songs, separate from the settings for your singing performance.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY

2 Press the [I] (MIC SETTING) button to call up the MICROPHONE SET-

TING display.

3 Press the TAB [

] button to select the TALK SETTING tab display.

4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) (page 171) to

be set.

5 Use the [1

ππ

††

]–[7

ππ

††

] buttons to set the value.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING dis-

play.

CAUTION

Settings in the TALK SETTING

tab display are automatically

saved to the instrument when

ou exit from the display.

However, if you turn the

power off without exiting

from this display, the settings

will be lost.

Using a Microphone

Talk Setting

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

171

Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the TALK SETTING Tab Display

VOLUME This determines the output volume of the microphone sound.

PAN This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound.

REVERB DEPTH This sets the depth of the reverb effects applied to the micro-

phone sound.

CHORUS DEPTH This sets the depth of the chorus effects applied to the micro-

phone sound.

TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUA-

TOR

This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the

overall sound (excepting the microphone input)—allowing you

to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the

overall instrument sound.

DSP MIC ON/OFF This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON

or OFF.

DSP MIC TYPE This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the micro-

phone sound.

DSP MIC DEPTH This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone

sound.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

172

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

You can purchase and download Song data and other types of data from the spe-

cial Clavinova website by directly connecting the instrument to the Internet. This

section contains terms related to computers and online communications. If there

are some terms you are unfamiliar with, refer to the Internet Glossary (page 184).

Connecting the Instrument to the

Internet

You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical ﬁber,

cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. For speciﬁc

instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible LAN adaptors, rout-

ers, etc.), refer to the Yamaha website:

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard

To use the Internet connection, you will ﬁrst need to subscribe to an Internet ser-

vice or provider.

Connection example 1:

Connecting by cable (using a modem without router)

Connection example 2:

Connecting by cable (using a modem with router)

Connection example 3: Wireless connection

The special website can be

opened when directly connect-

ing the Clavinova to the Internet.

Depending on the Internet con-

nection, you may not be able to

connect to two or more devices

(for example, a computer and

the instrument), depending on

the contract with the provider.

This means you cannot connect

with the Clavinova. If in doubt,

check your contract or contact

your provider.

Connect the LAN cable to the

LAN port.

Due to EU regulations, users

within Europe should use an STP

(shielded twisted pair) cable to

prevent electromagnetic interfer-

ence.

Some types of modems require

an optional hub network for

simultaneously connecting to

several devices (such as com-

puter, musical instrument, etc.).

Connect the LAN cable to the

LAN port.

A USB wireless LAN adaptor

also can be used.

Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connect-

ing the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from

the instrument itself.

Modem*

No router capability

Router

Cable type

LAN cable

LAN port

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

LAN cable

ADSL modem

Router capability

LAN cable

LAN port

LAN cable

Modem* Access point

Wireless Game Adaptor

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Accessing the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

173

Accessing the Special Website

From the special website, you can audition and purchase Song data, among other

things. To access the site, press the [INTERNET] button, while the instrument is

connected to the Internet.

To close the website display and return to the operation display of the instrument,

press the [EXIT] button.

Operations in the Special Website

Scrolling the Display

When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser

display of the instrument, a scroll bar appears at the right side of the display. Use

the [DATA ENTRY] dial to scroll through the display and view those parts of the

page that are not shown.

Scroll bar

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

174

Following Links

When there is a link in the page, it is shown as a button or in colored text, etc. To

select the link, press the [6

†

]/[7

π†

]/[8

†

] buttons or use the [DATA ENTRY]

dial. Press the [8

] (ENTER) button to actually call up the link destination.

You can also select and call up links by using the [A]–[J] buttons.

Entering Characters

This section explains how to enter characters within the website, for inputting a

password or searching for data, refer to the “Entering Characters” on page 74.

Return to the Previous Web Page

To return to a previously selected web page, press the [1

π†

] (BACK) button. To

return to the page selected before pressing the [1

π†

] (BACK) button, press the

π†

] (FORWARD) button.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

175

Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of

a Web Page

To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the page, or to

try reloading), press the [5

] (REFRESH) button.

To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press the [6

]

(STOP) button.

SSL:

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) is an

industry-standard method for

protecting web communications

by using data encryption and

other tools.

Monitoring the Internet Connection Status

The messages and icons at the bottom right of the Internet display indicate

the current Internet connection status.

13 4

Message

The following three messages are displayed according to the loading status of

the web page.

“Disconnected”

This appears when the instrument is not connected with the Internet. When

this message is displayed, the web page cannot be seen. Icon 1 is displayed.

“Now opening web page... ”

The web page is being loaded. Icon 2 ﬂashes.

“Web page has been displayed. ”

Loading of the web page is completed, and the page is displayed completely.

Icon 2 stops ﬂashing. When the displayed web page uses SSL, icon 3 is dis-

played, and information is encrypted for communication.

Strength of the reception is displayed in 4 when connecting to the Internet by

wireless LAN. When reception is weak, move the instrument near the access

point to improve reception.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

176

Purchasing and Downloading Data

You can purchase and download Song data (for playback on this instrument) and

other types of data from the special website. For details on purchasing and down-

loading data, refer to the instructions on the site itself.

Operation after purchase and download

When downloading is completed, a message appears asking you whether or not to

open the File Selection display. Select “YES” to call up the File Selection display,

from which you can select the downloaded data. To return to the Internet display,

select “NO” When the File Selection display is open, press the [8

] (UP) button to

call up the next highest level folder.

Download Destination

The download destination depends on the use of storage media, as

described below.

• When a USB storage device is connected to the instrument during pur-

chase:

The downloaded data is saved in the “MyDownloads” folder in the USB

tab display of the File Selection display. To close the folder and call up

the next highest level folder, press the [8

] (UP) button in the File

Selection display.

• When a USB storage device is not connected to the instrument during pur-

chase:

The downloaded data is saved in the “MyDownloads” folder in the User

tab display of the File Selection display. To close the folder and call up

the next highest level folder, press the [8

] (UP) button in the File

Selection display.

Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages

You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing, and set up a custom link so the page

can be instantly called up in the future.

1 With the desired page currently selected, press the [4

ππ

††

] (BOOK-

MARK) button. The Bookmark display appears, showing a list of the

currently registered bookmarks.

The title of the currently selected web page is shown below the list.

2 Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the [3

ππ

††

]

(ADD) button.

CAUTION

The purchased data will be

lost if you turn the power to

the instrument off during

download.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

177

3 Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button.

4 To register the bookmark, press the [7

ππ

††

] (EXECUTE) button, or

press the [8

ππ

††

] (CANCEL) button to cancel.

5 To return to the browser, press the [8

ππ

††

] (CLOSE) button.

Opening a Bookmarked Page

1 Press the [4

ππ

††

] (BOOKMARK) button to call up the Bookmark dis-

play.

2 Press the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button to select the desired bookmark.

3 Press the [2

ππ

††

] (VIEW) button to open the page of the selected

bookmark.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

178

Editing Bookmarks

From the Bookmark display, you can change the names and rearrange the

order of your bookmarks, as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from

the list.

123456 7

ππ

††

Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list.

2 View

Opens the web page of the selected bookmark.

3 Add

Used when registering a bookmark (page 176).

4 Move

Changes the order of the bookmarks.

1 Select the bookmark you wish to move, then press the [4

ππ

††

]

(MOVE) button.

The lower part of the display changes, letting you select the new posi-

tion for the bookmark.

2 Select the intended position by pressing the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

)

button.

3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the

ππ

††

] (EXECUTE) button.

5 Changing names

Changes the name of the selected bookmark. Pressing the [5

π†

] (CHANGE) but-

ton calls up the display for entering characters. For details on entering characters,

see page 74.

6 Delete

Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list.

7 Close

Closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

179

About the Internet Settings Display

From the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the

Internet connection, including preferences for the menus and displays. The Internet

Settings display has four sub-displays: Browser, LAN, Wireless LAN, and Others.

Basic Operation

1 Press the [5

††

] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting dis-

play.

2 Press the TAB [

√

][

] buttons to select the desired display.

3 Select the desired item by pressing the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button.

4 To call up the relevant Edit display, press the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] (EDIT)

button.

For some items, the Edit display may not be shown, but the setting or change

may be executed.

5 Press the [2

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button to select the setting or change the

value.

This can also be done by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Entering Characters

When the character input dis-

play is opened, you can enter

characters. (Refer to “Entering

Characters” on page 174.)

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

180

6 To execute the setting, press the [3

ππ

] (ENTER) button. To cancel,

press the [3

††

] (CANCEL) button.

7 To actually apply all settings changed in the Internet Settings display,

press the [7

ππ

††

] (SAVE) button.

To cancel, press the [8

π†

] (CANCEL) button.

Browser

LAN

Both the wired LAN and wireless LAN need to be set in this display.

1 Encode

Selects the character code encoding for the browser.

2 Home Page

Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page.

3 Set current page as Home

For details, refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 182.

4 Restore Default Home

Restores the home page setting.

5 Show images

Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set

to on. Image data is not shown when this is set to off.

6 Time zone

This determines the time zone setting for the browser.

Make a written note of the settings here,

in case you have to enter them again.

Use DHCP

DNS server1

DNS server2

IP address

Subnet mask

Gateway

1 Use DHCP

Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP,

select “ON.”

2 DNS server 1/DNS server 2

These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. These

settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manu-

ally)” or “OFF.”

3 IP address/Subnet mask/Gateway

These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. The settings here are: IP

address, subnet mask, and gateway server address. These settings must be made

when “Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF.”

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

181

Wireless LAN

These settings here are only necessary when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor.

For a wireless LAN setup, make sure to set both the LAN settings (page 180) and

the Wireless LAN settings below.

Others

The settings at left are not neces-

sary when using the Wireless

Game Adaptor.

Make a written note of the settings here,

in case you have to enter them again

SSID

Channel

Encryption

WEP key type

WEP key length

WEP key

Wireless Networks

Determines whether or not Wireless Networks are displayed.

SSID

Determines the SSID setting.

3 Channel

Determines the channel.

4 Encryption

Determines whether or not the data is encrypted.

5 WEP key type/WEP key length/WEP key

These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the

type and length of the encryption key.

1 Proxy server/Proxy port/Non-proxy server

Determines the proxy server name, port number and the host name for the non-

proxy server. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server. When

using a non-proxy server, enter a separator (comma) between each server name.

2 Delete cookies

Deletes the information of all saved cookies.

3 Delete all bookmarks

Deletes all saved bookmarks.

4 Initialize setup

Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. See “Initializ-

ing Internet Settings” on page 183.

5 Connection information

Shows detailed information on the current connection.

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

182

Changing the Home Page

In the default condition, the top page of the special website is automatically set to

be the Home page for the browser. However, you can specify any desired page on

the special website to be the Home page.

Open the page you wish to set as your new Home page.

Press the [5

††

] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting dis-

play.

Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the BROWSER tab.

Press the [1

††

] (

††

) button to select the setting “Set current page as

Home.”

5 Use the [2

ππ

††

]/[3

ππ

††

] (EDIT) buttons to actually set the selected

page as your new Home page.

6 To return to the browser, press the [7

ππ

††

] (SAVE) button.

To cancel, press the [8

π†

] (CANCEL) button.

45 6

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Operations in the Special Website

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

183

Initializing Internet Settings

The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize

operation of the instrument; Internet settings must be initialized separately, as

explained here. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of

the browser, but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays

(except for the cookies and bookmarks), including those related to Internet connec-

tion.

1 Press the [5

††

] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Settings dis-

play.

2 Press the TAB [

] button to select the OTHERS tab.

3 Press the [1

ππ

††

] (

ππ

††

) button to select “Initialize.”

4 Use the [2

ππ

††

]/ [3

ππ

††

] (EDIT) buttons to initialize the Internet set-

tings.

Sometimes cookies contain per-

sonal information.

3 4

Delete cookies/bookmarks

Cookies and bookmarks are still remain after executing the initialize oper-

ation above.

To delete the cookies or bookmarks, use the appropriate operations in the

OTHERS tab display (page 181).

Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet

Glossary of Internet Terms

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

184

Glossary of Internet Terms

Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical ﬁber) that allows for high-speed, high-

volume data communication.

Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display that

shows the contents of the web pages.

A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet. The

function is similar to a preference ﬁle in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” certain informa-

tion such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each time you visit the site.

DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network conﬁguration information

can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet.

DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses.

Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other

local storage device—much like copying ﬁles from your hard disk drive to a ﬂoppy disk. For this instrument,

this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument.

Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite

differing communications standards.

Home page The ﬁrst page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to mean

the “front screen” or top page of a website.

Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile

phones and other devices.

IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location

on the network.

LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single

location (such as an ofﬁce or home) by means of a special cable.

Link Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character strings on a

web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the relevant link.

Modem

A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It con-

verts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa.

NTP

Short for Network Time Protocol, a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network.

For this instrument, the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for cookies and SSL.

Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is

necessary to contract to a provider.

Proxy

A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information

on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulﬁll the requests itself. If

not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed, and to

ﬁlter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network.

Router

A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several

computers in a house or ofﬁce, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is usually con-

nected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router.

Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to ﬁles and services.

Site

Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection

of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site.

SSID This is an identiﬁcation name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection. Communi-

cation is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names.

SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting conﬁdential data such as credit card numbers over

the Internet.

Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks.

URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to speciﬁc websites and

pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.”

Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website.

Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.

Wireless Game

Adaptor

(Wireless Ethernet

Converter or Bridge)

Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and game

machines, etc. equipped with LAN ports.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

185

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

Using Headphones

(

1 [PHONES] jacks)

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES]

jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the leftward

underside of the instrument. For details, see page 17.

Connecting a Microphone or

Guitar (2 [MIC./LINE IN] jack)

(CVP-405/403)

By connecting a microphone to the [MIC./LINE IN] jack

(standard 1/4" phone jack) located on the left underside

of the instrument, you can enjoy singing along with

Song playback (KARAOKE) or with your own perfor-

mance. The instrument outputs your vocals or guitar

sounds through the built-in speakers. For instructions on

connecting, see page 54. Please note that when con-

necting devices of high output level, make sure to set

the [MIC. LINE] switch to “LINE.”

Connecting Audio & Video

Devices (345)

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance.

Using External Audio Devices for play-

back and Recording (3 [AUX OUT] Jacks)

You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to

amplify the instrument’s sound or to a cassette tape

recorder or a digital audio device for recording your

performance. The microphone or guitar sound con-

nected to the instrument’s [MIC./LINE IN] jack) is output

at the same time. Refer to the diagrams below and use

audio cables for connection. These jacks are located on

the underside jacks panel of the instrument.

[AUX OUT] Jacks

(Standard phone jacks of [L/L+R] and [R])

When these are connected, you can use the instru-

ment’s [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the vol-

ume of the sound output to the external device.

Connect the instrument’s AUX OUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks

and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers using

appropriate audio cables. Use only the [L/L+R] jack for

connection with a monaural device.

CAUTION

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic

components, turn off the power of all the components.

Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure

to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, elec-

trical shock or damage to the components may occur.

MIN MAX

INPUT

MIC.

MIC. LINE PHONES

VOLUME

LINE IN

1 1

CVP-405/403 CVP-401

6 8 9

)

P. 187 P. 190 P. 190 P. 191

P. 186 P. 186 P. 192P. 185

CVP-405

The right side of the instrument

(near the higher keys)

The front

side of the

instrument

(the key-

board side)

The left side of the instrument

(near the lower keys)

CAUTION

When the instrument’s sound is output to an external

device, ﬁrst turn on the power to the instrument, then to

the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the

power off.

Do not route the output from the [AUX OUT] jacks to the

[AUX IN] jacks. If you make this connection, the signal

input at the [AUX IN] jacks is output from the [AUX OUT]

jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop

that will make normal performance impossible, and may

even damage both pieces of equipment.

)

P. 185 P. 186

P. 192 P. 191 P. 190 P. 187

CVP-403/401

The left side of the

instrument (near

the lower keys)

The right side of the

instrument (near

the higher keys)

The front side of the instrument

(the keyboard side)

RL/L+R

AUX OUT

Instrument

Powered speakers

Input jack

Phone plug

(standard)

Phone plug (standard)

Audio cable

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

186

Playing External Audio Devices with the

Built-in Speakers (4 [AUX IN] Jacks)

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be con-

nected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external

instrument to be reproduced via the instrument’s speak-

ers. Connect the output jacks (LINE OUT etc.) of an

external synthesizer or the tone generator module and

the instrument’s AUX IN [L/L+R]/[R] jacks using appro-

priate audio cables.

• Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device.

•The instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input

signal from the [AUX IN] jacks.

Showing the Instrument’s Display Con-

tents on a Separate TV Monitor

(5 [VIDEO OUT] Terminal) (CVP-405)

Connect the instrument to an external TV monitor, and

you can have the current display contents, lyrics (for

group sing-alongs and the like) or text ﬁles displayed on

the TV. For instructions on connecting, see page 56.

CAUTION

When the sound of an external device is output to the

instrument, ﬁrst turn on the power to the external device,

then to the instrument. Reverse this order when you turn

the power off.

LINE OUT

RL/L+R

AUX IN

Instrument

Synthesizer

Tone generator

Phone plug (standard)

Audio cable

Pin plug

Video out settings (CVP-405)

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [J] (UTILITY) → TAB [

√

][

]

SCREEN OUT

2 Select the video equipment standard “NTSC”

or “PAL” by using the [1

ππ

††

]/ [2

ππ

††

] but-

tons. Select the contents of the Screen Out

signal—the current display contents (LCD),

or lyrics/text (LYRICS/TEXT) —by using the

ππ

††

]/[4

ππ

††

] buttons.

• Set the NTSC or PAL to correspond to the standard used by

your video equipment.

• When LYRICS/TEXT is selected as the contents of the Screen

Out signal, only the lyrics of the song or text ﬁles are output

via VIDEO OUT, regardless of the display that is called up

on the instrument.

•Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for pro-

longed periods of time since doing so could damage your

eyesight. Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on dis-

tant objects to avoid eyestrain.

Connecting Audio & Video Devices

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

187

Using the Footswitch or Foot

Controller

(6 [AUX PEDAL] jack)

By connecting a Foot Controller or Footswitch to the

[AUX PEDAL] jack, you can have convenient control

over various user-assignable functions. For example,

connecting the Foot controller FC7 and assigning it the

volume control function allows you to add expression

to your performance by controlling the volume level of

the notes you play. Or by connecting the FC4 or FC5

footswitch and assigning it to the Style playback start/

stop function, you can start and stop the Style with your

foot. (In this case, the pedal has the same function as

the panel STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.) The

assignable functions are listed following the instructions

below.

Assigning Speciﬁc Functions to Each

Foot Pedal

In addition to the footswitch or foot controller, the three

piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right, Center

and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various func-

tions here. The following explanations cover the related

operations and assignable functions (parameters).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [

√

]

PEDAL

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the

three pedals or the AUX-connected pedal, to

which the function is to be assigned.

3 Use the [1

ππ

††

] button to select the functions to

be assigned to the pedal speciﬁed in step 2.

Details on the pedal functions are listed below.

4 Use the [2

ππ

††

]–[8

ππ

††

] buttons to set the

details of the selected functions.

The available parameters differ depending on the

function selected in step 3. Details on the parameters

are given below.

5 Check that the desired function is controllable

with the pedal by actually pressing the pedal.

n When you use a pedal to switch Registration Memory

settings (page 130), these settings are invalid.

CAUTION

Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when

the power is off.

AUX PEDAL

Foot Pedals

Footswitch FC4

(optional)

Footswitch FC5

(optional)

Foot Controller FC7

(optional)

Set the polarity of the pedal

Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the partic-

ular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. For exam-

ple, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected

function on, while pressing a different make/brand of

pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this set-

ting to reverse the control. Press the [I] (AUX PEDAL

POLARITY) button to switch the polarity.

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

188

Details on the pedal functions are listed here. For functions indicated with “

“, use only the foot controller; proper

operation cannot be done with a footswitch.

Assignable Pedal Functions

VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. This function is available only

for the pedal connected to the instrument’s AUX PEDAL jack.

SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the pedal,

all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the pedal immedi-

ately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

SOSTENUTO Allows you to use the pedal as a sostenuto pedal. In other words, if you play a note or

chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sus-

tain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not sustain. This

makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces the vol-

ume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only for certain

appropriate Voices.

GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch when

the pedal is released.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal

is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is

played while the preceding note is still held). Portamento Time can also be adjusted

from the Mixing Console (page 89). This function does not affect certain Natural Voices,

which would not sound appropriately with this function.

PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal.

MOD/S.ART1* (CVP-405)

MODULATION (CVP-403/401)

Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. Moreover, various effects can

be added to the S. Articulation Voice (CVP-405) (page 79). The effect becomes deeper

when pressing down the foot controller. You can turn this function on/off for each key-

board part on this display.

MOD/S.ART2 (ALT) (CVP-405) As a variation on MOD/S.ART1, the effects (waveform) can be switched on/off by the

pedal/footswitch. The effects (waveform) is alternately turned on and off each time the

pedal/footswitch is pressed. You can turn this function on/off for each keyboard part on

this display.

S.ART SW (CVP-405) When you use a S. Articulation voice that has an effect assigned to the pedal/

footswitch, you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal/footswitch. You can turn this

function on/off for each keyboard part on this display.

DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off.

VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE effect type is

selected.

HARMONY/ECHO Switches the HARMONY/ECHO Voice Effect on and off.

VOCAL HARMONY (CVP-405/403) Switches the Vocal Harmony function on and off.

TALK (CVP-405/403) Switches the MIC SETTING Talk function on and off.

SCORE PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page.

SCORE PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page.

LYRICS PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next lyrics page.

LYRICS PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can return to the last lyrics page.

TEXT PAGE+ (CVP-405) You can turn to the next text page.

TEXT PAGE– (CVP-405) You can return to the last text page.

SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button.

SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button.

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

189

n The Sostenuto and Portament functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices, even they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals.

Adjustable Parameters for Each Function

The parameters below correspond to buttons [2

π†

]–[8

π†

], and their availability depends on the selected control

type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT,” “RIGHT 1,” “RIGHT 2”

and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.

INTRO1–3 Same as the [INTRO I–III] buttons.

MAIN A–D Same as the [MAIN VARIATION A–D] buttons.

FILL DOWN Plays a ﬁll-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the

immediate left.

FILL SELF Plays a ﬁll-in.

FILL BREAK Plays a break.

FILL UP Plays a ﬁll-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the

immediate right.

ENDING1–3 Same as the [ENDING/rit. I–III] buttons.

FADE IN/OUT Switches Fade In/Fade Out function on and off.

FINGERED/FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 103).

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the

chord is changed during Style playback. If the ﬁngering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,”

the function does not work.

PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4

π†

]–[8

π†

] buttons. You

can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument.

DUAL ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button.

SPLIT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button.

OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting.

OTS– Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.

SONG, STYLE, MIC (CVP-405/403),

LEFT, RIGHT1, RIGHT2

These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.

HALF PEDAL POINT* (CVP-405/403) You can specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the damper or soft

effect (page 188) starts working.

DEPTH Determines the depth of the pedal effect.

UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change is

raised or lowered.

RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch

change, in semitones. Linked to the Mixing Console → Pitch Bend Range (page 89) set-

ting.

ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal

is pressed.

OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal

is released.

KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here,

letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal.

PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT

above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the

pedal.

Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack)

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

190

Connecting External MIDI

Devices (7 [MIDI] Terminals)

Use the built-in [MIDI] terminals and standard MIDI

cables to connect external MIDI devices.

For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effec-

tively use it, refer to the following sections:

• What is MIDI?..............................................page 192

• What You Can Do With MIDI.......................page 195

• MIDI Settings ...............................................page 196

Connecting a Computer, USB

Device, or Internet (789))

Connecting a Computer

(8 [USB TO HOST] and 7 [MIDI] Terminals)

By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] or

[MIDI] terminals, you can transfer data between the

instrument and the computer via MIDI, and take advan-

tage of sophisticated computer music programs. Keep in

mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB-

MIDI driver.

The instructions below explain how to connect and use

the terminals.

If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recom-

mend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB,

rather than by MIDI.

Driver

A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between

the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware

device. You need to install a USB-MIDI driver to connect the com-

puter and the instrument. Refer to the separate Installation Guide

(page 4).

This explanation is divided into two parts, covering the

two connections: connection to the [USB TO HOST]

terminal and connection to the [MIDI] terminal.

• Connecting to the [USB TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the instrument to the computer via

USB, use a standard USB cable (having the USB logo)

to connect the [USB TO HOST] terminal on the

instrument to the USB terminal of the computer. Then,

install the USB-MIDI driver.

About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals

There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument:

[USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse

the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors.

Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. Expla-

nations on the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal follow in the next section.

•The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the

USB connection is made.

• When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your

computer, make the connection directly without passing

through a USB hub.

•For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to

the owner’s manual of the relevant software.

• Connection by [MIDI] terminals

There are two ways to connect the instrument via MIDI

to a computer. If you have a MIDI interface built into

your computer, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the

computer interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the

instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of

the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface.

MIDI IN Receives MIDI messages from an external

MIDI device.

MIDI OUT Transmits MIDI messages generated by the

instrument.

MIDI THRU Simply relays the MIDI messages received at

MIDI IN.

Instrument

USB cable

CAUTION

Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] termi-

nal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so

risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data. If the

computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the

instrument off and restart the computer.

• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] ter-

minal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer

(such as suspended, sleep, standby), and quit any open appli-

cation software, also turns off the power to the instrument.

• Execute the following before turning the power to the instru-

ment off or unplugging the USB cable to/from the instrument/

computer.

- Quit any open application software on the computer.

- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the

instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on

the keyboard or playing back a song.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you

should wait for six seconds or more between these

operations: When turning the power of the instrument

off then on again, or when alternately connecting/dis-

connecting the USB cable.

Instrument

MIDI cable

[MIDI IN]

terminal

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

Computer with MIDI

interface installed

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

[MIDI IN]

terminal

Connecting external MIDI devices ([MIDI] terminals)/Connecting a Computer or USB Device

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

191

The second connection possibility involves a separate,

external MIDI interface connected to the computer via a

USB port or a serial port (modem or printer terminal).

Using standard MIDI cables, connect the MIDI OUT ter-

minal of the external interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal

of the instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal

of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface.

Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer.

Connecting to a USB-type LAN Adaptor

and USB Storage Device

(9 via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal)

There are two ways of using the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-

minal.

■ By connecting the USB-type LAN adaptor, you can

directly access special Internet websites for down-

loading music data (page 172).

■ By connecting the instrument to a USB storage

device with a standard USB cable, you can save data

you’ve created to the connected device, as well as

read data from the connected device.

About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals

There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument:

[USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse

the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors.

Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction.

Explanations on the [USB TO HOST] terminal can be found in the

previous section.

Using USB Storage Devices

This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB

storage device, and allows you to save data you’ve cre-

ated to the connected device, as well as read data from

the connected device. The following description gener-

ally explains about how to connect and use them.

Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read

“Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Mem-

ory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 22.

1 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal with a standard USB cable.

2 After that, exit once from the selection display

then return to the display (or press the Tab

switch buttons [

√

] and [

] simultaneously from

the selection display). The USB tabs (USB 1, USB

2, etc.) are automatically called up, allowing you

to save ﬁles and play back music data from the

devices.

Checking remaining memory on the USB storage device

You can check this in the display called up by the following oper-

ation:

[FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [

√

][

] MEDIA

Select the device by using the [A]/[B] buttons in this display and

press [F] (PROPERTY).

Even with a computer connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal

and a USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] ter-

minal, you cannot access the USB storage device from the com-

puter via the instrument.

Instrument

MIDI cable

[MIDI IN]

terminal

[MIDI OUT]

terminal

MIDI interface

Computer

USB port or serial

port (modem or

printer terminal)

Formatting USB storage media

For details, see page 69.

CAUTION

Formatting a USB storage media completely erases all

data on the media. Make sure that the USB storage media

you’re formatting does not contain important data!

Backing up your data to a computer

■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer

Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can

copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then

archive and organize the ﬁles as desired. Simply recon-

nect the device as shown below.

Instrument

Computer

USB storage device

USB TO DEVICE terminal

Saves internal data to a USB storage device.

Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and

connect it to the computer

Backing up data to a computer and organizing ﬁles/folders

Connecting a Computer or USB Device

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

192

Connect to the Internet () [LAN] Port)

There are three ways to use the [LAN] port (located on

the bottom left of the instrument) to access special Inter-

net websites, and download song data, etc.

See page 172 for instructions on connecting.

What is MIDI?

Put simply, MIDI is a data transfer standard that allows

easy and comprehensive control among electronic/digi-

tal music instruments and other devices. To get a better

idea of what MIDI does, let’s ﬁrst consider acoustic

instruments, such as a grand piano and a classical gui-

tar. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer

inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the gui-

tar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds.

But how does a digital instrument go about playing a

note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument the sampling note (previously recorded

note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic

circuit) is played based on information received from

the keyboard.

Now, let’s examine what happens when we playback a

recording. When you play back a music CD (for exam-

ple, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual

sound (vibration in air) of the acoustic instrument. This

is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.

In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the

pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as

audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play

back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the

actual piano performance. The piano itself is not neces-

sary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of

the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.

Copying ﬁles from a computer hard disk to a

USB storage device

Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be

transferred to the instrument by ﬁrst copying them to the

storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the

instrument.

Not only ﬁles created on the instrument itself but also

Standard MIDI ﬁles and Style File-formatted Style ﬁles cre-

ated on other devices can be copied to a USB storage

device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve

copied the data, connect the device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the

data on the instrument.

Copying the ﬁles of the hard disk of the computer to the USB

storage device

Computer

USB storage device

Instrument

Computer

USB storage device

Reading ﬁles on the USB storage device from the instrument

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal

Disconnect the USB storage

device from the computer an

connect it to the instrument

Internal amp

Playing the key board

Internal amp

Tone generator

(Electric circuit)

Acoustic guitar note

production

Digital instrument note pro-

duction

Pluck a string and the

body resonates the

sound.

Based on playing information

from the keyboard, a sampling

note stored in the tone generator

is played through the speakers.

Recording Playback

Recording and playing back the performance of an

acoustic instrument (audio data)

Connecting a Computer or USB Device

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

193

In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent

through output jacks (such as [AUX OUT]) on the instrument.

The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration

above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic exam-

ple. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is

captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In

order to record the audio performance on an acoustic

piano, special recording equipment is needed. How-

ever, since the instrument features a built-in sequencer

that lets you record performance data, this recording

equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instru-

ment—the Clavinova—allows you to both record and

play back the data.

However, we also need a sound source to produce the

audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The

tone generator of the instrument ﬁlls this function. The

recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer,

playing back the song data, using a tone generator

capable of accurately producing various instrument

sounds—including that of a piano. Looked at in another

way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone genera-

tor is similar to that of the pianist and the piano—one

plays the other. Since digital instruments handle play-

back data and the actual sounds independently, we can

hear our piano performance played by another instru-

ment, such as guitar or violin.

Even though it is a single musical instrument, the instrument can

be thought of as containing several electronic components: a con-

troller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.

Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets

recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the

sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter

note using the grand piano sound on the instrument’s

keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a

resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out infor-

mation from the keyboard such as “with what voice,”

“with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it

pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece

of information is changed into a number value and sent

to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis

for sound generation, the tone generator plays the

stored sampled note.

Example Keyboard Data

Panel operations on the instrument, such as playing the

keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and

stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment Styles

and Songs also consist of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument

Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical

instruments to communicate with each other, by send-

ing and receiving compatible Note, Control Change,

Program Change and various other types of MIDI data,

or messages.

The instrument can control a MIDI device by transmit-

ting note related data and various types of controller

data. The instrument can be controlled by incoming

MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone

generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and

effects, change parameter values and of course play the

voices speciﬁed for the various parts.

MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:

•The amount of data is much less.

•The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point

of changing voices and transforming the data.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Chan-

nel messages and System messages.

Channel Messages

The instrument is an electronic instrument that can han-

dle 16 MIDI channels (or reception of 32 channels for

MIDI data reception when using the [USB] terminal).

This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments

at the same time.” Channel messages transmit informa-

tion such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each

of the 16 channels.

Sequencer

Tone Generator

Recording and play back the performance of a digital

instrument (MIDI data)

Controller (keyboard, etc.)

Recording Playback

USB storage

device

USB storage

device

Tone generator

Sequencer

Keyboard performance (MIDI data)

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed)

and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed

numerically

(quarter note)

Velocity

(strength at which it was played)

120 (strong)

Connecting a Computer or USB Device/What is MIDI

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

194

What is MIDI?

The performance data of all Songs and Styles is handled as MIDI

data.

MIDI Channels

MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen

MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1–16, the perfor-

mance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be

simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV

station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc channel.

Your home TV set receives many different programs

simultaneously from several TV stations and you select

the appropriate channel to watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The trans-

mitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc MIDI

channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI

cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instru-

ment’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches

the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will

sound according to the data sent by the transmitting

instrument.

The instrument’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also

connected by MIDI. → LOCAL CONTROL (page 198)

For example, several parts or channels can be transmit-

ted simultaneously, including the Style data (as shown

below).

Example: Recording a performance with the auto accompa-

niment (Style playback) sound of the instrument to an exter-

nal sequencer

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is

to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting

MIDI data (page 198).

The instrument also allows you to determine how the

received data is played back (page 199).

System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI

system. These include System Exclusive messages for

transferring data unique to each instrument manufac-

turer and Realtime messages for controlling the MIDI

device.

The messages transmitted/received by the instrument

are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Imple-

mentation Chart in the separate Data List.

Message Name Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when

the keyboard is played. Each mes-

sage includes a speciﬁc note num-

ber which corresponds to the key

which is pressed, plus a velocity

value based on how hard the key is

played.

Program Change For selecting Voices (with control

change bank select MSB/LSB set-

tings)

Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console),

etc.

NEWS

Weather report

NEWS

MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

Message Name Operation/Panel Setting

System Exclusive

Message

Effect type settings (Mixing Console),

etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting,

Start/stop operation

MIDI cable

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Tra ck 1

Tra ck 2

Tra ck 3

Tra ck 4

Tra ck 5

Tra ck 6

Tra ck 7

Tra ck 8

Tra ck 9

Tra ck 10

Tra ck 11

RIGHT 1

RIGHT 2

LEFT

STYLE instrument

Clavinova track (channnel)

External sequencer

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

195

What You Can Do With MIDI

■ Record your performance data (1–16 channels) using

the instrument’s auto accompaniment features on an

external sequencer (or computer with sequencer

software). After recording, edit the data with the

sequencer, then play it back on the instrument.

When you want to use the instrument as an XG-com-

patible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part

for MIDI channels 1–16 to “SONG” in MIDI/USB 1 in

MIDI Receive (page 199).

■ Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard

MIDI Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compati-

bility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback

the data recorded by CVP-405/403/401, and whether or

not the CVP-405/403/401 can playback commercially

available song data or song data created for other

instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI

device or data characteristics, you may be able to play

back the data without any problem, or you may have to

perform some special operations before the data can be

played back. If you run into problems playing back

data, please refer to the information below.

Sequence Formats

Song data is recorded and stored in a variety of different

systems, referred to as “sequence formats.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of

the Song data matches that of the MIDI device. The

CVP-405/403/401 is compatible with the following for-

mats.

● SMF (Standard MIDI ﬁle)

This is the most common sequence format. Standard

MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types:

Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compati-

ble with Format 0, and most commercially available

software is recorded as Format 0.

•The CVP-405/403/401 is compatible with both For-

mat 0 and Format 1.

• Song data recorded on the CVP-405/403/401 is auto-

matically saved as SMF Format 0.

● ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series

instruments. This is a common format used with various

Yamaha software.

•The CVP-405/403/401 is compatible with ESEQ.

● XF

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard

MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-

ended expandability for the future. The instrument is

capable of displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle containing

lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format

used for MIDI sequence ﬁles. The instrument is compat-

ible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data

using SMF Format 0.)

● Style File

The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto

accompaniment know-how into a single uniﬁed format.

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, Voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice

allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback. The instru-

ment is compatible with the following formats.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,

the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the

speciﬁcations of the devices and particular data recording meth-

ods.

● GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation for-

mats.

Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System

Level 1, as is most commercially available software.

● GM System Level 2

“GM System Level 2” is a standard speciﬁcation that

enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and

improves Song data compatibility. It provides for

increased polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded

voice parameters, and integrated effect processing.

● XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1

format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to

provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater

expressive control over Voices and effects, and to

ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

Song data recorded on the CVP-405/403/401 using

Voices in the XG category is XG-compatible.

● DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series

instruments.

● GS

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation.

In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhance-

ment of the GM speciﬁcally to provide more Voices and

Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expres-

sive control over Voices and effects.

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

Instrument

MIDI receive

MIDI transmit Computer or

Sequencer

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Instrument

MIDI receive

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

196

MIDI Settings

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for

the instrument. The instrument gives you a set of ten

pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and

easily reconﬁgure the instrument to match your particu-

lar MIDI application or external device. Also, you can

edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten

of your original templates to the USER display. You can

then save all these original templates as a single ﬁle to

USB storage devices, in the MIDI SETUP selection dis-

play (called up by pressing [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY

→ TAB [

] SYSTEM RESET).

Basic Operation

1 Call up the operation (MIDI template selection)

display.

Function

→ [I] MIDI

2 To use the pre-programmed templates or to edit

them

Press the TAB [

√

] button to select the PRESET dis-

play. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a MIDI

template.

To use the templates already saved to the USER

display or to edit them

Press the TAB [

] button to select the USER display.

Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a MIDI tem-

plate.

3 To edit a template, press the [8

††

] (EDIT) but-

ton to call up the MIDI display for editing.

The individual parameters settings are shown for the

selected template. Here you can edit each parameter.

4 Use the TAB [

√

]/[

] buttons to call up the rele-

vant setting display.

5 When you’ve ﬁnished editing, press the [EXIT]

button to return to the MIDI template selection

display (PRESET or USER).

6 Select the USER tab display to save the data by

using the TAB [

√

][

] buttons (page 70).

SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings (page 198)

TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmission Settings

(page 198)

RECEIVE display MIDI Reception Settings (page 199)

BASS display Settings for the bass note of chord

for Style playback via MIDI recep-

tion data (page 199)

CHORD DETECT

display

Settings for the chord type for Style

playback via MIDI reception data

(

page 200)

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

197

MIDI Settings

Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates

Template name Description

All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2,and LEFT), with the excep-

tion of Song parts.

KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “All Parts” with the exception of how keyboard parts are man-

aged. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the

left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.”

Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and controlling

one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/

sequencer).

Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used to play

Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external

sequencer.

Clock Ext Playback (Song or Style) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instru-

ment’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on

the MIDI device connected to the instrument.

MIDI Accord 1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators

from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play

melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the left-

hand buttons.

MIDI Accord 2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass

notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI

note events.

MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially

convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the

chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit.

MIDI Pedal 2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit.

MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received.

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

198

MIDI Settings

MIDI System Settings

The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM display to

be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 196.

■ LOCAL CONTROL

Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When

Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the instru-

ment controls its own (local) internal tone generator,

allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the

keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and

controllers are internally disconnected from the instru-

ment’s tone generator section so that no sound is output

when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For

example, this allows you to use an external MIDI

sequencer to play the instrument’s internal voices, and

use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the exter-

nal sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.

■ Clock setting, etc.

● CLOCK

Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its

own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from

an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting

when the instrument is being used alone or as a master

keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the

instrument with an external sequencer, MIDI computer,

or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to

that device, set this parameter to the appropriate setting:

MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the

external device is connected properly (e.g., to the instru-

ment’s MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly transmit-

ting a MIDI clock signal. When this is set for control by

an external device (MIDI, USB 1 or USB 2), the Tempo is

indicated as “Ext.” in the Main display.

● TRANSMIT CLOCK

Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set

to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted

even if a Song or Style is played back.

● RECEIVE TRANSPOSE

Determines whether or not the instrument's transpose

setting (page 58) is applied to the note events received

by the instrument via MIDI.

● START/STOP

Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop)

messages affect Song or Style playback.

■ MESSAGE SW

● SYS/EX.

The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Sys-

tem Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting turns

MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclu-

sive messages generated by external equipment on or

off.

● CHORD SYS/EX.

The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord

exclusive data (chord detect. root and type) on or off.

The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition

of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external

equipment on or off.

MIDI Transmit Settings

The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT display

to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 196. This determines which parts will be sent as

MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will

be sent.

Operation

Select the part to be transmitted and the channel via

which the selected part will be transmitted. You can also

determine the types of data to be sent.

● With the exception of the two parts below, the

conﬁguration of the parts is the same as those

already explained elsewhere in this manual.

• UPPER

The keyboard part played on the right side of the key-

board from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT1 and/

or 2).

• LOWER

The keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard

from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not affected by

the on/off status of the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

● Tx MONITOR

The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) ﬂash

brieﬂy whenever any data is transmitted on the chan-

nel(s).

SYSTEM display

TRANSMIT display

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

199

MIDI Settings

When different parts are assigned to the same transmit channel

If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts,

the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel—

resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the con-

nected MIDI device.

About the protected Songs

Write-protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper

Song channels 1–16 are set to be transmitted.

■ MIDI messages which can be transmitted or

received (recognized)

The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANS-

MIT/RECEIVE display.

• Note (Note events).......................................page 160

• CC (CONTROL CHANGE) ..........................page 160

• PC (PROGRAM CHANGE)...........................page 160

• PB (Pitch Bend)............................................page 160

•AT (Aftertouch).............................................page 160

MIDI Receive Settings

The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to be

called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196.

This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and

over which MIDI channels the data will be received.

Operation

Select the channel to be received and the part via which

the selected channel will be received. You can also

determine the types of data to be received.

● The instrument can receive MIDI messages over

32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB con-

nection.

● With the exception of the two parts below, the

conﬁguration of the parts is the same as those

already explained elsewhere in this manual.

• KEYBOARD

The received note messages control the instrument’s

keyboard performance.

• EXTRA PART 1–5

There are ﬁve parts specially reserved for receiving

and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not

used by the instrument itself. The instrument can be

used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by

using these ﬁve parts in addition to the general parts

(except for the microphone sound).

● Rx MONITOR

The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) ﬂash

brieﬂy whenever any data is received on the channel(s).

n Parameter Lock

You can “lock” speciﬁc parameters (e.g., effect, split

point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel

controls (page 128).

■ MIDI transmission/reception via the USB ter-

minal and MIDI terminals

The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the

[USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/

receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the

MIDI messages is as follows:

Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback

via MIDI Receive

The explanations here apply to the BASS display to be

called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on

page 196.

These settings let you determine the bass note for Style

playback, based on the note messages received via

MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the chan-

nel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass note of the

chord of Style playback. The bass note will be detected

regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point set-

tings. When several channels are simultaneously set to

“ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data

received over the channels.

Operation

Select the channel and set the “ON/OFF” for that chan-

nel. Use the All OFF item to set all channels to OFF.

RECEIVE display

MIDI/USB1

01–16

USB2

01–16

USB2USB1

MIDI/USB 01–16

[MIDI IN] jack

MIDI reception MIDI transmission

[USB TO

HOST] jack

[MIDI OUT] jack

[USB TO

HOST] jack

Port

handling

Merge

BASS display

Using Your Instrument with Other Devices

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

200

MIDI Settings

Setting the Chord Type for Style Play-

back via MIDI Receive

The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT

display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Opera-

tion” on page 196.

These settings let you determine the chord type for Style

playback, based on the note messages received via

MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the chan-

nel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for

detecting chords in Style playback. The chords to be

detected depend on the ﬁngering type. The chord type

will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or

split point settings. When several channels are simulta-

neously set to “ON,” the chord type is detected from

merged MIDI data received over the channels.

The operation procedure is basically the same as that of

the BASS display above.

CHORD DETECT display

Displaying the Voice Program Change Number

Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number

are shown in the Voice selection display. This is useful

when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB val-

ues and program change number you need to specify

when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device.

You can set this in the display called up by the following

operations: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB [

√

][

]

CONFIG 2. Switch the DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER menu

ON and OFF.

•The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the

actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower, since

that number system starts from “0.”

• For the GS Voices, this feature is not available (the program

change numbers are not shown).

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

201

Appendix

Troubleshooting

The instrument does not turn on.

• Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the

instrument, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet.

A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on

or off.

• Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This

is normal.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers.

• Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the

instrument or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile

phone, or use it further away from the instrument.

The letters in the display cannot be read, because the

display is too bright (or dark).

• Use the [LCD CONTRAST] knob to adjust for optimum

visibility.

• Adjust the brightness of the display (page 19).

The overall volume is too low, or, no sound is heard.

•The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an

appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

•The volume of the individual parts may be set too low.

Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 40).

• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 105).

• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker out-

put. (This happens when the speaker setting is set to

“HEADPHONE SW”; page 17.) Unplug the headphones.

• Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 17).

•The Fade-In and Fade-Out function is on, muting the

sound. To turn it off, press the pedal to which you

assigned the Fade In/Out function.

• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON

(page 198).

Not all simultaneously played notes sound.

•You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony

(page 213) of the instrument. When the maximum

polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will

stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound.

The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style

playback volume.

•The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low.

Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 40).

Keys do not sound at the proper pitch.

• Make sure the Performance Assistant function is off on

the operation display (page 43).

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.

The Scale parameter has probably been set to some-

thing other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of

the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the

Scale in the Scale Tune display (page 83).

- There is a slight difference in sound quality among

different notes played on the keyboard.

- Some Voices have a looping sound.

- Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher

pitches, depending upon the voice.

•This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sam-

pling system.

Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played

in the upper or lower registers.

•This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which,

when reached, causes this type of pitch shift.

The Main display does not appear even when turning

the power on.

•This may occur if a USB storage device has been

installed to the instrument. Installation of some USB stor-

age device may result a long interval between turning

the power on and appearance of the Main display. To

avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the

device.

The damper, sostenuto and soft functions do not

work for the relevant pedals.

•The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the

pedal cord plug into the proper jack (page 207).

• Each pedal has been assigned to a different function.

Make sure that each pedal is properly assigned to SUS-

TAIN, SOSTENUTO, and SOFT (page 187).

• Make sure the Registration Sequence function is set to

OFF (page 131).

Some characters of the ﬁle/folder name are garbled.

•The language settings have been changed. Set the appro-

priate language for the ﬁle/folder name (page 18).

An existing ﬁle is not shown.

•The ﬁle extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed

or deleted. Manually rename the ﬁle, adding the appro-

priate extension, on a computer.

The data contained in the USB storage device is not

shown on the instrument itself.

• Data ﬁles with names of more than 50 characters cannot

be handled by the instrument. Rename the ﬁle, reducing

the number of characters to 50 or less.

Overall

Pedals

Files/Folders

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

202

Appendix

How can I stop the demo?

• Press the [EXIT] button.

The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display

does not sound.

• Check whether or not the selected part is turned on

(page 80).

•To select the Voice for the right-hand key range, make

sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)]

buttons are off. For the Voice to be layered in the right-

hand range, press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]

button. To select the Voice for the left-hand key range,

press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button.

A strange “ﬂanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. The

sound is slightly different each time the keys are

played.

•The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON,” and

both parts are set to play the same Voice. Turn off the

RIGHT 2 part or change the Voice of one of the parts.

The sound seems strange or different than expected

when changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit, etc.) of the

Style or Song from the Mixer.

• When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum

kits, etc.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parame-

ter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are

reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore

the original sound. In the case of Song playback, you

can restore the original sound by returning to the begin-

ning of the Song and playing back from that point. In the

case of Style play, you can restore the original sound by

selecting the same Style again.

Tremolo/Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute

Voice.

•This is normal; Tremolo and Trill settings in the Har-

mony/Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute

Voices.

The Harmony function does not operate.

• Harmony cannot be used with the AI Fingered or AI Full

Keyboard ﬁngering modes. Select an appropriate ﬁnger-

ing mode (page 103).

When a Voice is changed, the previously selected

effect is changed.

• Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings, which are

automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice

Set parameters are turned on (page 102).

The Voice produces excessive noise.

• Certain Voices may produce noise, depending on the

Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FIL-

TER page of the Mixing Console display (page 89).

The sound is distorted or noisy.

•The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all

relevant volume settings are appropriate.

•This may be caused by certain effects. Try canceling all

unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects

(page 91).

• Adjust the sound using the [8

π†

] (TOTAL GAIN ADJ.)

buttons from the display shown in step 6 of “Editing and

Saving the selected EQ” (page 95), if you are using the

Master EQ.

• Some ﬁlter resonance settings in the VOICE SET display

(page 98) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these set-

tings if necessary.

• Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the

Filter display of the Mixing Console. Adjust the Har-

monic Content or Brightness controls in the Filter display

(page 89).

The sound does not change when replacing Voices

with the Song Auto Revoice feature.

• Depending on the particular Song data, there are some

instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect, even

when replacing Voices.

The sound of the Voice doesn’t change, even when

editing the Voice.

•Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters

may not make much change in the actual sound depend-

ing on the original settings of the Voice.

Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot

be selected for Step recording.

•This is normal.

Style playback does not start.

• Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP]

button.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is

set to “INTERNAL” (page 198).

Only the rhythm channel plays.

• Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned

on; press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

•You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the

keyboard. Make sure to play keys in the chord range of

the keyboard.

Styles cannot be selected.

• If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or

greater), the Style cannot be selected because the data is

too large to be ready by the instrument.

The desired chord is not recognized or output by the

auto accompaniment.

•You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating

the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fin-

gered Mode” of the separate Data List.

•You may be playing the keys according to a different ﬁn-

gering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check

the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according

to the selected mode (page 104).

Demo

Voice

Style

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

203

Appendix

Synchro Stop cannot be turned on.

• Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the ﬁngering

mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard,” or

when Style On/Off is set to off. Make sure the ﬁngering

mode is set to something besides “Full Keyboard” or “Al

Full Keyboard” and set Style On/Off to on.

Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regard-

less of the split point or where chords are played on

the keyboard.

•This is normal if the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Key-

board” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is

selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of

the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If

desired, select a different ﬁngering mode (page 104).

When playing back one Style and selecting another, the

newly selected Style doesn’t play at the proper Tempo.

•You can select whether the appropriate tempo will be

called up automatically or not by using the TEMPO

parameter in the STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR function.

Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style

playback.

This is because Song playback has priority. The two ways

shown below let you play back a Style and Song simulta-

neously.

• Set the Song to Synchro Start standby, then start the Style.

• Start the Style playback after playing back a Song.

The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong

or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a

Style or a Voice after selecting a Song.

•The level balance of the Parts can change and unex-

pected sounds can be produced because of the effects

applied to each Part.

The “Off” setting is not shown for the Play Type

parameter in the Assembly (Style Creator) feature.

•The selected section is set to record enable. Release the

recording assignment by pressing the appropriate [1

†

]–

†

] button in the recording channel display (TAB [

√

]

button → BASIC tab → [F] REC CH).

The channels BASS-PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel

Edit.

•This is normal; BASS-PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles

cannot be edited.

The Song/Style registered to the Registration Mem-

ory cannot be called up.

• If the registered Song/Style is contained on USB storage

device and the USB storage device is not inserted or

connected to the instrument, the Song/Style cannot be

called up. Insert or connect the appropriate USB storage

device containing the Song/Style data.

The order for calling up Registration Memory settings

is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting

display.

•The bank containing the Registration has not been

selected. Select the appropriate bank (page 128).

When using the Freeze function of the Registration

Memory, the On/Off setting of the Left Part does not

change even when changing the Registration Mem-

ory setting.

•The Left Part On/Off setting is included in the Style

group. Remove the checkmark from “STYLE” in the

Freeze setting display (page 129).

Even though a Registration Memory setting contain-

ing a User/USB voice is selected, the File Selection dis-

play shows a Preset Voice.

•This is normal; even with the Preset Voice shown, the

actual sounding Voice is the selected User/USB Voice.

When a User/USB Voice is saved to the User/USB drive,

the actual data is divided into two separate types: 1) the

source Preset Voice itself, and 2) the parameter settings

as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registra-

tion Memory setting containing a User/USB Voice, the

instrument selects the Preset voice (on which the User/

USB Voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter

settings to it—so that your original User/USB Voice is

sounded.

Songs cannot be selected.

•This may be because the language settings have been

changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song ﬁle

name.

• If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or

greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is

too large to be read by the instrument.

Song playback does not start.

• “New Song” (a blank Song) has been selected. Make

sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection

display (page 35).

• Make sure to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

•The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data.

Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the

SONG [STOP] button.

• In the case a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the original ﬁle may not be in the same

folder. It cannot be played back unless the original ﬁle

(showing “Prot.2 Orig” at the upper left of the Song

name) is in the same folder.

• In case of a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the original ﬁle name may have been

changed. Rename the ﬁle with the original ﬁle name (so

that “Prot.2 Orig” is shown at the upper left of the Song

name).

• In case of a Song to which write-protect has been

applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the

Song name), the ﬁle icon may have been changed. Songs

to which write-protect has been applied cannot be

played back when the ﬁle icon of the original has been

changed.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is

set to “INTERNAL” (page 198).

Registration memory

Song

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

204

Appendix

Song playback stops before the Song is ﬁnished.

•The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback

is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the

[GUIDE] button to turn off the guide function.

The Song last selected before turning off the power is

no longer available.

• If the Song last selected before turning off the power is

contained in USB storage device, you’ll need to reinsert/

reconnect the same USB storage device to call up the

Song again.

The measure number is different from that of the

score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing

the [REW]/[FF] buttons.

•This happens when playing back music data for which a

speciﬁc, ﬁxed tempo is set.

In the AB Repeat function, the B point cannot be set.

•The A point has not been set. Set the B point only after

setting the A point.

When playing back a Song, some channels do not

play.

• Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn

playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF”

(page 139).

A Song to which write-protect has been applied

(“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song

name) cannot be moved to external media such as a

SmartMedia card or ﬂoppy disk.

•A Song to which write-protect has been applied cannot

be moved to an external media such as SmartMedia/

ﬂoppy disk, etc. Use the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal to

move the song to a USB ﬂash memory device connected

to this instrument.

The Tuning Curve of the piano Voice does not quite

match that of other instruments’ Voices.

•The Tuning Curve designed especially for piano Voices

may not sound with the appropriate pitches when used

with other instrument Voices. Set the Tuning Curve to

“FLAT” (page 97).

The melody still plays back, even when specifying Track

1 as the part to be muted for one-handed practice.

•A part other than the melody part has been assigned to

Track 1. Reassign the channel containing the melody to

Track 1 (page 138).

The Guide lamps do not light during Song playback,

even after pressing the [GUIDE] button.

• Make sure to turn on the Guide lamps (page 137).

•Any notes outside of the 88-key range cannot be indi-

cated by the Guide lamps.

The Guide lamps light an octave or two lower/higher

than the actual pitch.

•The Guide lamps sometimes light an octave or two

lower/higher than the actual pitch depending on the

selected Voice.

The lamps in the chord section of the keyboard light.

•The Guide function for chords (page 50) has been

enabled. Turn the Style off by pressing the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button.

The Guide lamps do not indicate how to play chords.

• Make sure that the Guide Mode is set to “FollowLights”

(page 104).

•You cannot check how to play chords with the Guide

lamps if the chord ﬁngering method is set to “Single Fin-

ger,” “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” Select

another ﬁngering method (page 104).

When displaying the music score, long notes that

have been entered, such as whole notes and ties, are

not displayed correctly.

• Long notes, such as whole notes and ties, may not be

shown in the music score display exactly as they were

entered. Selecting “Tenuto” by pressing the [H] button

before inputting each note in the Step Record display

(page 145) may solve the problem.

The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not

displayed correctly.

• Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded

with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data,

the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be

displayed correctly.

The note name partially obscures the note in the dis-

play.

• When several notes occur close to each other, the note

name may obscure the note at left.

The music score of the right-hand/left-hand part is

not displayed.

•The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the

right-hand and left-hand parts. Set RIGHT and LEFT to

the appropriate channels (page 39).

The notation in the display is cut off, with the middle

of a measure starting on the next line.

• When all the notes of a measure cannot ﬁt on one line,

the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to

the next line.

Dotted notes are indicated as rests.

•This is normal; sometimes dotted notes are indicated as

rests.

Chords are not displayed.

• If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords

are not displayed.

Guide

Score

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

205

Appendix

Lyrics are not displayed.

• If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed.

Some of the lyrics overlap each other.

•This happens for Songs containing many lyrics.

The Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed.

(CVP-405)

• When the background color is speciﬁed in the song

data, the Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed.

Performance assistant technology does not work

appropriately.

• Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop Song playback,

then set the [ACMP ON/OFF] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT]

to off. Finally, restart the Song.

The instrument display contents cannot be sent via

video out and do not show on an external monitor.

• Make sure that the NTSC/PAL setting corresponds to the

standard of your particular video equipment (page 56).

Some ﬂashing parallel lines appear in the television or

video monitor.

• Occasionally some ﬂashing parallel lines may appear in

the television or video monitor. This does not necessarily

indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning. For optimum

results, try adjusting the color settings on the monitor

itself.

The monitor you are using may not show the instru-

ment's display contents as expected.

•Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as rec-

ommended, the monitor you are using may not show the

instrument's display contents as expected (e.g., the dis-

play contents may not ﬁt on the screen, the characters

may not be completely clear, or the colors may be incor-

rect).

The microphone input signal cannot be recorded.

•The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by

Song/Style recording. Use the USB Audio Recorder func-

tion (page 60). Furthermore, you can connect a recorder

to the output terminals [AUX OUT] and record the

microphone signal.

Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone

sound.

•Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off

(page 57).

The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-of-

tune.

Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous

sounds, such as the Style sound from the instrument. In

particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal

Harmony. To remedy this:

• Sing as closely to the microphone as possible.

• Use a directional microphone.

•Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song

volume control (page 40).

• Separate the microphone from the external speakers as

much as possible.

• Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the

MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 167).

• Raise the microphone input level (TH) via the Com-

pressor function in the MICROPHONE SETTING dis-

play (page 168).

Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the

Vocal Harmony feature.

• Make sure you are using the appropriate method to

specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Har-

mony mode (page 169).

The message “This drive is busy now.” appeared, and

then the recording was aborted.

• Make sure to use a compatible USB storage device

(page 22).

• Make sure that the USB storage device has enough

memory (page 191).

• If you are using a USB memory device to which data has

already been recorded, check ﬁrst that no important data

remains on the device, then format it (page 69) and try

recording again.

Lyrics (Karaoke)

Performance assistant technology

Video out (CVP-405)

Microphone/Vocal harmony (CVP-405/403)

USB Audio Recorder (CVP-405/403)

Appendix

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

206

CVP-405: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all

parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-

dance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below.

Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Be sure to tighten up

all screws upon com-

pleting assembly of

each unit.

•To disassemble,

reverse the assembly

sequence given below.

1 Remove all parts from the box. Conﬁrm that all

parts shown in the illustration are provided.

2 With the key cover closed and the keyboard side

on the bottom, lean A against the wall.

Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the ﬂoor.

Place the unit A on the cloth with the keyboard side on

the bottom and lean A against the wall so that it will not

fall or slip. Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect

the instrument and wall from scratches.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

• The top part of the music rest is not ﬁxed. When you lean

the unit against the wall, support the music rest with your

hand so that the music rest will not fall.

CAUTION

• Do not place the unit A with

the rear side facing down.

• Do not lay the unit A upside-

down on the ﬂoor.

3 Attach B and C.

4 Attach D.

5 Raising A to the standing position.

Use the B and C as support to raise A.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

• When you raise A, do not hold the key cover.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screw-

driver ready.

AC power cord

5 ✕18 mm ﬁxing

screws ✕ 14

Bundled pedal

cord inside

CAUTION

To prevent the

key cover from

accidentally

opening during

assembly, press

down on the

key cover, mak-

ing sure that

the sheet

(shown) remain

in place.

Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom.

CAUTION

Please do not touch the speaker

net. Doing so may damage the

speaker inside.

Incorrect

1 Fix B to the bottom

surface of A using

two screws.

2 Fix B to the speaker

box using two screws.

3 Fix C in the same way.

If the screw holes do not align, loosen the other screws and

adjust the position of C and D.

If the screw holes do not align, loosen the other screws and

adjust the position of D.

1 Fix D to the bottom

surface of A using

two screws.

2 Fix D to the speaker box

using two screws.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

207

Appendix

6 Installing E.

7 Connect the pedal cord.

8 Set the voltage selector and connect the power

cord.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the volt-

age selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector

for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screw-

driver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your

region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selec-

tor is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC

power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adap-

tor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin conﬁg-

uration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to

the instrument or result in improper operation.

9 Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until it

comes in ﬁrm contact with

the ﬂoor surface.

■ After completing the assembly, please check

the following.

1 Remove the plastic

cover from D.

2 Untie and straighten

out the bundled

cord attached to the

bottom of E.

3 Pass the pedal

cord between E

and D.

4 Make sure that E lays ﬂat, with no gap between

itself and the ﬂoor, then afﬁx the E using two

screws.

1 Insert the

pedal cord

plug into the

pedal connec-

tor.

Insert the plug

with the

arrow-printed side facing front

(toward the keyboard side).

If the plug will not go in easily,

do not force it. Double-check

the orientation of the plug,

then try again.

2 Align the pedal cord into

the groove on D, and install

the plastic cover onto the

groove. Be careful not to

insert the cover’s

attachment strip between

the groove wall and the leg.

Correct

Incorrect

240

127

110

220

(the bottom of the right side

as seen from the front)

• Are there any parts left over?

→ Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

→ Move the instrument to an appropriate location.

• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

→ Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

→ Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the

ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely

into the sockets?

→ Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assem-

bly diagrams and retighten all screws.

When moving the instrument after assembly, always

hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling

can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.

Top portion

Key cover

Do not hold here.

Hold here.

Do not

hold here.

Appendix

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

208

CVP-403: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all

parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-

dance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below.

Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Be sure to tighten up

all screws upon com-

pleting assembly of

each unit.

•To disassemble,

reverse the assembly

sequence given below.

1 Open the package, take out marked “C” in the

illustration, take out the styrofoam pads, and

place the unit A on top of the pads.

Position the pads so that they will protect the headphone

jack located underneath the front left corner.

2 Attach C to D and E.

3 Attach B.

Depending on the model of digital piano you purchased,

the surface color of one side of the rear panel may be dif-

ferent from the other side. In this case, position the rear

panel so that the side of the surface color similar to the

side panel (left) and the side panel (right) faces the player.

1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E, then attach

the upper side to D and E.

2 Attach the top of B to D and E by ﬁnger-tightening the thin

screws (4 ✕ 12mm).

3 While pushing the lower part of D and E from outside, secure

the bottom ends of B using two tapping screws (4 ✕ 20mm).

4 Insert the other two tapping screws (4 ✕ 20mm) into the

other two screw holes to secure B.

5 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that were

attached in Step 3-2.

4 Mount A.

Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm

from either end of A when positioning it.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screw-

driver ready.

To prevent the key

cover from accidentally

opening during assem-

bly, press down on the

key cover, making sure

that the sheet (shown)

remain in place.

Bundled pedal cord inside

Phones jacks

Styrofoam pads

AC power cord

Assembly Parts

6 ✕ 25 mm long screws ✕ 4

6 ✕ 16 mm short screws ✕ 4

4 ✕ 12 mm thin screws ✕ 2

4 ✕ 20 mm tapping screws ✕ 4

Cord holders ✕ 2

1 Untie and straighten out the

bundled cord attached to the

bottom of the C. Don’t discard the

vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 6.

2 Use the four 6 ✕ 25 mm long screws to attach C. First

attach one side panel, then attach the other side panel.

CAUTION

• Fingers can become pinched between A and C/D/E, be

extra careful so as not to drop A.

• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than

the position shown in the illustration.

At least

10 cm

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

209

Appendix

5 Fix A.

Center A to produce equal

clearance on the left and

right sides.

2 Use 6 ✕ 16 mm short screws

to secure A from the front.

6 Connect the pedal cord.

7 Set the voltage selector and connect the power

cord.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the

voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the

selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a

“minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct

voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel.

The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially

shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC

power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug

adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin

conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to

the Clavinova or result in improper operation.

8 Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with

the ﬂoor surface.

■ After completing the assembly, please check

the following.

Insert the pedal

cord plug to the

pedal connector

from the front.

2 Attach the cord holders

to D as shown, then clip

the cord into the

holders.

3 Use a vinyl tie to

take up any slack

in the pedal cord.

• Are there any parts left over?

→ Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

→ Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you

shake it?

→ Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

→ Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the

ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely

into the sockets?

→ Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assem-

bly diagrams and retighten all screws.

When moving the instrument after assembly, always

hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper han-

dling can result in damage to the instrument or personal

injury.

Top portion

Key cover

Hold here.

Do not hold here. Do not hold

here.

Appendix

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

210

CVP-401: Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all

parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-

dance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below.

Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Be sure to tighten up all

screws upon completing

assembly of each unit.

•To disassemble,

reverse the assembly

sequence given below.

1 Open the package, take out marked “C” in the

illustration, take out the styrofoam pads, and

place the unit A on top of the pads.

Remove all parts from the box. Conﬁrm that all parts

shown in the illustration are provided.

2 Attach (ﬁnger-tighten) C to D and E.

Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord. Don’t

discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 7.

2 Align D and E with each end of C.

3 Attach D and E to C by ﬁnger-tightening the long screws

(6 ✕ 20 mm).

3 Attach B.

Depending on the model of digital piano you purchased,

the surface color of one side of the rear panel may be dif-

ferent from the other side. In this case, position the rear

panel so that the side of the surface color similar to the

side panel (left) and the side panel (right) faces the player.

1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E, then attach

the upper side to D and E.

2 Attach the top of B to D and E by ﬁnger-tightening the thin

screws (4 ✕ 12mm).

3 While pushing the lower part of D and E from outside, secure

the bottom ends of B using two tapping screws (4 ✕ 20mm).

4 Insert the other two tapping screws (4 ✕ 20mm) into the

other two screw holes to secure B.

5 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that were

attached in Step 3-2.

4 Securely tighten the screws on C that were

attached in Step 2-3.

5 Mount A.

Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm from

either end of A when positioning it.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screw-

driver ready.

Assembly Parts AC power cord

Styrofoam pads

6 ✕ 20 mm long screws ✕ 4

6 ✕ 16 mm short screws ✕ 4

4 ✕ 12 mm thin screws ✕ 2

4 x 20 mm tapping screws ✕ 4

Cord holders ✕ 2

Bundled pedal cord inside

Tighten the screw.

CAUTION

• Fingers can become pinched between the unit A and

the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to

drop the A.

• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than

the position shown in the illustration.

At least

10 cm

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

211

Appendix

6 Secure A.

Adjust the position of A so that the left and right ends of A will

project beyond D and E equally when seen from the front.

2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 ✕ 16mm) from the

front.

7 Connect the pedal cord.

Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the

voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector

for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus”

screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for

your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC

power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug

adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin

conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to

the Clavinova or result in improper operation.

9 Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with

the ﬂoor surface.

■ After completing the assembly, please check

the following.

Center A to produce equal

clearance on the left and

right sides.

Use 6x16 mm short

screws to secure A

from the front.

1 Insert the pedal

cord plug to the

pedal connector

from the rear.

2 Attach the cord holders

to the rear panel as

shown, then clip the

cord into the holders.

3 Use a vinyl tie

to take up any

slack in the

pedal cord.

240

127

110

220

• Are there any parts left over?

→ Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

→ Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you

shake it?

→ Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

→ Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the

ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely

into the sockets?

→ Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assem-

bly diagrams and retighten all screws.

When moving the instrument after assembly, always

hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper han-

dling can result in damage to the instrument or personal

injury.

Top portion

Key cover

Hold here.

Do not hold here.

Do not hold

here.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

212

Appendix

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) (CVP-405)

The ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of

the instrument by using the included ﬂoppy disk drive

case and screws. For a list of optional ﬂoppy disk drives

available for this instrument, see “Optional Accesso-

ries” (page 214).

1 Remove the three backing papers from the

adhesive tape in the case, and ﬁt the ﬂoppy disk

drive into the case.

2 Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown.

3 Attach the drive and case assembly to the left

underside of the instrument, using the included

four screws (4 mm x 10 mm).

4 Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

Insert the drive to the case, with the side

having the rubber stoppers facing the case.

Dual-sided adhesive tape

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

213

Appendix

Speciﬁcations

CVP-405 CVP-403 CVP-401

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling AWM Stereo Sampling

Keyboard Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) Keyboard

Graded Hammer (GH)

Keyboard

Number of keys 88

Display

320 ✕ 240 dots QVGA

color 5.7 inch LCD

320 ✕ 240 dots QVGA

Monochrome 5.7 inch

LCD

320 ✕ 240 dots QVGA

Monochrome 4.6 inch

LCD

Music Score, Lyrics YES

Tex t YES –

Wallpaper Customize

(Lyrics display)

YES –

Voice

Polyphony (max) 128 96

Voice Selection

414 voices + 480 XG

Voices

19 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2

+ GS (GS Voices for GS

Song playback)

340 voices + 480 XG

Voices

16 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2

+ GS (GS Voices for GS

Song playback)

296 voices + 480 XG

Voices

15 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2

+ GS (GS Voices for GS

Song playback)

Natural! Voice 21 21 3

S. Articulation!

Voice

24 –

Mega Voice 15 10 -

Live! Voice 20 14 10

Cool! Voice 26 18 16

Sweet! Voice 22 13 11

Organ Flutes! 10

Regular Voice 276 254 246

Sound Creator YES

Effects

Effect

Blocks

Reverb/Chorus/

DSP/Master

Microphone 1 –

Effect

Types

Reverb/Chorus/

DSP

Reverb: 34 Preset + 3 User

Chorus: 29 Preset + 3 User

DSP 1: 191 Preset + 3 User

DSP 2–4: 106 Preset + 10 User

Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User

Part EQ 27 Parts

Vocal Harmony 60 Preset + 10 User –

Accompani-

ment Style

Accompaniment Styles 344 243 191

Pro Styles 284 195 151

Session Styles 24 12 4

Pianist Styles 36

Mega Voice Styles YES –

Fingering

Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard,

AI Full Keyboard

Style Creator YES

OTS

(One Touch Setting)

4 for Each Style

OTS Link YES

Music

Finder

Preset YES

Edit YES

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

214

Appendix

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options

may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

CVP-405 CVP-403 CVP-401

Song

Preset Songs 120 61

Guide Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Vocal CueTIME

Follow Lights, Any Key,

Karao-Key

Guide Lamp YES

Performance assistant tech-

nology

YES

Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing

Record Channels 16

USB Audio Recorder YES –

Internet Direct Connection

LAN Port, Wireless Game Adaptor (LAN Port),

External adaptor (via USB to DEVICE)

Memory

Device

USB Flash Memory YES

Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD) External adaptor (via USB to DEVICE)

Hard Disk External adaptor (via USB to DEVICE)

Flash Memory (Internal) about 1.4 MB about 560 KB

Memory Card (SmartMedia, etc.)

External adaptor (via USB to DEVICE)

Tempo

Tempo Range 5–500, Tap Tempo

Metronome YES

Sound Bell on/off, Human Voices (5 Languages)

Registra-

tion Memory

Buttons 8

Regist. Sequence/Freeze YES

Others

Demo YES

Language for Display 6 Languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian)

Direct Access YES

Piano Reset Button

(incl. Piano Lock)

YES

Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master

Scale Type 9

USB

Connection

USB to HOST

(Computer)

YES

USB TO DEVICE

(left side of front panel)

YES

USB TO DEVICE (bottom left

panel of the instrument)

YES –

Other Connectors

PHONES

2, MIDI (THRU, OUT, IN), AUX PEDAL, AUX IN (L/L+R, R),

AUX OUT (L/L+R, R), LAN

MIC (INPUT VOLUME,

MIC./LINE IN),

VIDEO OUT

MIC (INPUT VOLUME,

MIC./LINE IN)

–

Pedals Functions

VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, S. Articulation (CVP-405),

SONG PLAY/PAUSE, STYLE START/STOP, etc.

Ampliﬁers/

Speakers

Ampliﬁers 40 W + 40 W 20 W + 20 W

Speakers (16 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2 16 cm ✕ 2

Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H]

(with the Music Rest)

1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 890 mm

[56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 35-1/8"]

(1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 1047 mm)

[56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 41-3/8"]

1432 mm ✕ 614 mm ✕ 888 mm

[56-1/2" ✕ 24-1/4" ✕ 35"]

(1432 mm ✕ 614 mm ✕ 1045 mm)

[56-1/2" ✕ 24-1/4" ✕ 41-1/4"]

1372 mm ✕ 595 mm ✕ 896 mm

[54-1/8" ✕ 23-1/2" ✕ 35-1/4"]

(1372 mm ✕ 595 mm ✕ 1049 mm)

[54-1/8" ✕ 23-1/2" ✕ 41-3/8"]

Weight 79 kg (174 lbs., 2 5/8 oz) 73 kg (160 lbs., 15 oz) 59 kg (130 lbs., 1 oz)

Optional

Accessories

Headphones HPE-160

Foot Switch FC 4/FC 5

Foot Controller FC 7

USB-FDD Unit UD-FD01

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

215

Appendix

-For information on the panel controls, see “Panel

Controls” on page 12.

-For information on the jacks and connectors

located on the bottom of the instrument, see “Using

Your Instrument with Other Devices” on page 185.

-For Internet-related terms, see “Glossary of Internet

Terms” on page 184.

-For information on the parameters in the tab dis-

plays, refer to the tab names in this index.

Index

Numerics

1–16 .................................................................. 144, 154

A-B Repeat ...................................................................41

...............................................................................104

AI FINGERED

.............................................................104

AI FULL KEYBOARD

..................................................104

Any key

......................................................................138

ARABIC

........................................................................84

Assembly

...................................................206, 208, 210

ASSEMBLY (Style)

.......................................................118

Audio Recorder

............................................................60

Auto Accompaniment Feature

......................................44

AUTO REVOICE SETUP

...............................................90

Background (Lyrics) ......................................................55

Backup

.........................................................................77

BASIC

.........................................................................114

BASS

..........................................................................199

BOOKMARK

..............................................................176

Brightness

.....................................................................19

Browser

......................................................................180

Chain Playback ..........................................................134

CHANNEL

......................................................... 122, 154

CHANNEL ON/OFF

...................................................105

Characters

....................................................................74

CHORD

............................................................ 144, 154

CHORD DETECT

.......................................................200

CHORD FINGERING

.................................................103

Chord Tutor function

....................................................49

COMMON

...................................................................97

CONFIG 1

............................................31, 47, 105, 128

CONFIG 2

.....................................................17, 19, 200

Contrast

........................................................................18

CONTROLLER

..............................................................97

Cool!

............................................................................79

COPY

...........................................................................71

CUT

.............................................................................72

Damper Pedal ..............................................................30

DELETE

........................................................................72

Demo

...........................................................................23

Demo (Voice)

...............................................................34

Direct Access

...............................................................64

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

...............................195

Drums

..........................................................................79

DSP

..............................................................................85

DSP/DSP VARIATION

..................................................85

DUAL

...........................................................................80

EDIT ...........................................................................117

Edit (Bookmarks)

........................................................178

Edit (Effect)

...................................................................92

Edit (EQ)

.......................................................................95

Edit (Lyrics)

.................................................................154

Edit (Music Finder)

..................................................... 110

Edit (OTS)

.....................................................................51

Edit (Song)

.................................................................. 154

Edit (Style)

..................................................................119

Edit (Vocal Harmony)

................................................. 163

Edit (Voice)

...................................................................96

EFFECT

.........................................................................89

Effect (microphone)

......................................................56

Effect (Voice)

................................................................ 85

Effect Return Level

........................................................93

Effect Type

................................................................... 91

EFFECT/EQ

................................................................... 99

Entering characters

....................................................... 74

Entering Characters (Internet Direct Connection)

........ 174

EQ (Equalizer)

..............................................................90

EQUAL TEMPERAMENT

.............................................. 84

ESEQ

.......................................................................... 195

EXIT

............................................................................. 67

F ...................................................................................65

Factory Reset

................................................................75

Factory-programmed Settings

.......................................75

FADE IN/OUT (Song)

................................................. 133

Fade In/Out time

........................................................133

FADE IN/OUT/HOLD TIME

........................................105

Fast forward

............................................................... 134

Favorite

...................................................................... 110

File

...............................................................................66

File Selection Display

............................................ 26, 69

File Selection Display Basic Operation

.........................67

File Selection Display Configuration

.............................66

File/Folder Operations

..................................................69

FILTER

................................................................. 89, 161

FINGERED

................................................................. 104

FINGERED ON BASS

................................................. 104

Flash Memory

.............................................................. 22

FOLDER

....................................................................... 73

Folder

...........................................................................66

Follow lights

...............................................................138

Foot Controller

............................................................. 30

FOOTAGE

......................................................... 100, 101

Footage

......................................................................102

Footswitch

....................................................................30

Format

..........................................................................69

FREEZE

.......................................................................129

FULL KEYBOARD

...................................................... 104

Function display

...........................................................27

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

216

Appendix

GM System Level 1 ....................................................195

GM System Level 2

....................................................195

GROOVE

...................................................................120

..............................................................................195

Guide

.........................................................................137

Guide Lamp

.................................................................39

GUIDE LAMP ON/OFF

...............................................137

GUIDE LAMP TIMING

...............................................138

H ..................................................................................65

HARMONY

................................................................100

HARMONY/ECHO

.......................................................85

Headphone Hanger

......................................................17

Headphones

.................................................................17

Home Page

................................................................182

................................................................................83

ICON ...........................................................................73

Initialize

.......................................................................75

Initializing Internet Settings

........................................183

Internet Direct Connection

.........................................172

Internet Settings

..........................................................179

Karaoke ........................................................................54

Karao-key

...................................................................138

key cover

.....................................................................14

Keyboard Parts

.............................................................80

KEYBOARD/PANEL

............................................... 29, 58

KIRNBERGER

...............................................................84

LAN ...........................................................................180

LAN port

........................................................... 172, 192

Language

......................................................................18

Left

...............................................................................80

Left Pedal

.....................................................................30

Live!

.............................................................................79

LYRICS

.......................................................................154

Lyrics

...........................................................................55

Main Display ......................................................... 25, 65

MASTER TUNE

.............................................................83

MEAN-TONE

...............................................................84

MEDIA

........................................................69, 136, 191

Mega Voice

..................................................................79

MELODIC MINOR

.....................................................125

Messages

......................................................................63

microphone

..................................................................54

MICROPHONE SETTING

...........................................166

MIDI

..........................................................................192

MIDI Settings

..............................................................196

MIDI Templates

..........................................................197

MIXING CONSOLE

......................................................87

MONO/POLY

...............................................................85

MULTI FINGER

..........................................................104

Multi track recording

..................................................139

Music Finder

................................................................52

Music Rest

....................................................................16

NAME ..........................................................................73

Natural!

........................................................................79

Notation

.......................................................................38

One Touch Setting ....................................................... 50

One-Handed Practice

...................................................39

Organ Flutes

...............................................................100

Organ Flutes!

............................................................... 79

Others

........................................................................ 181

OTS Link

...................................................................... 51

OTS Link Timing

........................................................106

OVERALL SETTING

....................................................167

OWNER

................................................................ 18, 20

Owner Name

...............................................................20

PANEL PART ................................................................ 88

PARAMETER

.............................................................. 123

Part

.............................................................................. 80

PASTE

................................................................... 71, 72

Pause

......................................................................... 134

PEDAL

........................................................................187

pedal polarity

............................................................. 187

pedals

.......................................................................... 30

percussion sounds

........................................................ 34

performance assistant technology

.................................43

Phrase Mark

...............................................................134

PHRASE MARK REPEAT

.............................................134

Pianist

........................................................................103

PIANO

.........................................................................97

Piano Lock

...................................................................29

Portamento

...................................................................85

Portamento Time

..........................................................97

Practice Function

....................................................... 137

PRESET

.........................................................................26

Pro

.............................................................................103

PROPERTY

................................................................. 191

Prot. 1

..........................................................................71

Prot. 2 Edit

................................................................... 71

Prot. 2 Orig

..................................................................71

Punch In/Out Recording

.............................................155

PURE MAJOR

...............................................................84

PURE MINOR

.............................................................. 84

PYTHAGOREAN

.......................................................... 84

QUANTIZE ................................................................ 122

Quick Recording

........................................................ 139

QUICK START

............................................................135

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

217

Appendix

-For information on the panel controls, see “Panel

Controls” on page 12.

-For information on the jacks and connectors

located on the bottom of the instrument, see “Using

Your Instrument with Other Devices” on page 185.

-For Internet-related terms, see “Glossary of Internet

Terms” on page 184.

-For information on the parameters in the tab dis-

plays, refer to the tab names in this index.

RANDOM ..................................................................134

Realtime Recording

....................................................114

REC

..............................................................................66

REC MODE

................................................................154

RECEIVE

.....................................................................199

Record (Song)

...................................................... 42, 139

Record (Style)

.............................................................114

REGISTRATION MEMORY

.........................................127

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

......................................130

REPEAT MODE

................................................... 36, 134

Repeat Playback

.........................................................134

Repeat Playback Function

............................................41

Repertoire

....................................................................53

Revoice

........................................................................90

Rewind

.......................................................................134

Right 1

.........................................................................80

Right 2

.........................................................................80

S. Articulation! .............................................................79

SAVE

............................................................................70

Save (Music Finder)

....................................................111

SCALE TUNE

................................................................83

Score

............................................................................38

Search (Music Finder Records)

....................................108

Section Set

.................................................................106

Session

.......................................................................103

Set the polarity of the pedal

........................................187

SFX

...............................................................................79

Sheet Music Braces

......................................................16

SINGLE FINGER

.........................................................104

SMF (Standard MIDI file)

............................................195

Song

.............................................................................35

SONG CH 1-8/9-16

.....................................................88

Song channels

............................................................143

Sostenuto Pedal

............................................................30

SOUND

.......................................................................98

Sound Creator

..............................................................96

sound effects

................................................................34

Speaker setting

.............................................................17

SPLIT

............................................................................80

SPLIT POINT

..............................................................107

Step Recording

.................................................. 114, 139

Stop ACMP

.................................................................106

Style

.................................................................... 44, 106

Style Assembly

...........................................................114

Style Change Behavior

...............................................106

Style Creator

...............................................................113

Style File

....................................................................195

STYLE PART

.................................................................88

Style parts

...................................................................143

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT

....................................105

Style Structure

............................................................113

Style Touch

................................................................106

Sweet!

..........................................................................79

Synchro Start (Song)

...................................................133

Synchro Start (Style)

......................................................47

Synchro Stop

................................................................48

Synchro Stop Window

................................................106

SYS/EX.

.......................................................................154

SYSTEM

......................................................................198

SYSTEM RESET

.............................................................76

TALK ............................................................................ 59

TALK SETTING

...........................................................170

Tap function

...............................................................133

Text

..............................................................................55

Top

............................................................................ 134

TRANSMIT

................................................................. 198

Transpose

........................................................56, 58, 83

TUNE

........................................................................... 89

UP ................................................................................68

USB Audio Recorder

....................................................60

[USB TO DEVICE] Terminal

.......................................191

USER

............................................................................26

Vibrato ......................................................................... 99

VIDEO OUT

.................................................................56

Vocal CueTIME

..........................................................138

VOCAL HARMONY EDIT

................................. 164, 165

VOCAL HARMONY TYPE

..........................................163

Voice

..............................................................28, 32, 79

VOICE EFFECT

.............................................................85

Voice Program Change Number

.................................200

VOICE SET

.................................................................102

VOL/ATTACK

.............................................................101

VOL/VOICE

..................................................................89

WERCKMEISTER .......................................................... 84

Wireless Game Adaptor

.................................... 172, 184

Wireless LAN

.............................................................181

XF .............................................................................. 195

............................................................................. 195

Appendix

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

218

Panel Button Chart

The position of the button on the panel can be conﬁrmed by the Panel Control (page 12).

Symbol

[–] [+] (TEMPO) ............................................................. 8

[–] [+] (TRANSPOSE) ..................................................... 6

Number

[1]–[4] (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ................................... n

[1]–[8] (REGISTRATION MEMORY)............................... k

π†

]–[8

π†

] ................................................................... O

[ACMP ON/OFF] ........................................................... 0

[AUTO FILL IN] ............................................................. A

[A]–[J]............................................................................ K

[BREAK]................................................................................. D

[CHANNEL ON/OFF].......................................................... N

Damper pedal....................................................................... s

[DATA ENTRY]..................................................................... R

[DEMO]......................................................................... 4

[DIRECT ACCESS]................................................................ L

Drum Kit icons ..................................................................... p

[DUAL (RIGHT2)] ................................................................ V

ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III]........................................................ E

[ENTER]................................................................................. S

[EXIT]..................................................................................... Q

[EXTRA TRACKS] ................................................................. a

[FUNCTION]........................................................................ X

[GUIDE] ................................................................................ f

[INTERNET] .......................................................................... Y

INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] ................................................................. B

Keyboard guide lamps......................................................... t

[LCD CONTRAST] ............................................................... J

Left pedal .............................................................................. q

[LYRICS] button (CVP-403/401) ......................................... e

[LYRICS/TEXT] button (CVP-405)....................................... e

MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] ..................................... C

[MASTER VOLUME]............................................................. 3

[MEMORY]............................................................................ j

Mic signal/over lamps (CVP-405/403)............................ u

[MIXING CONSOLE] ........................................................... M

[MUSIC FINDER].................................................................. I

[ON/OFF] (METRONOME) ............................................ 5

[OTS LINK]............................................................................ o

[PIANO RESET] ..................................................................... h

[PLAY/PAUSE]....................................................................... ]

[POWER] ............................................................................... 1

[REC] ...................................................................................... [

REGIST BANK [+] [–] ........................................................... i

[REPEAT]................................................................................ g

[REW]/[FF] buttons ............................................................... ^

[SCORE]................................................................................. d

[SONG SELECT].................................................................... Z

Sostenuto pedal..................................................................... r

[SPLIT (LEFT)] ........................................................................ W

[START/STOP] ............................................................... H

[STOP] ................................................................................... \

STYLE category selection buttons................................... 9

[SYNC START] ...................................................................... G

[SYNC STOP] ........................................................................ F

TAB [

√

][

] ........................................................................... P

[TAP TEMPO] (TEMPO) ................................................. 7

[TRACK 1 (R)]........................................................................ c

[TRACK 2 (L)] ........................................................................ b

[USB]...................................................................................... T

[USB TO DEVICE] ......................................................... 2

VOICE category selection buttons.................................. l

[VOICE EFFECT] ................................................................... m

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

219

The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for ﬁfty

seven (57) of the songs pre-installed in this instrument:

Alﬁe

Theme from the Paramount Picture ALFIE

Words by Hal David

Music by Burt Bacharach

All Shook Up

Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley

All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis

Songs

Beauty And The Beast

from Walt Disney’s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST

Lyrics by Howard Ashman

Music by Alan Menken

pany, Inc.

Bésame Mucho (Kiss Me Much)

Music and Spanish Words by Consuelo Velazquez

English Words by Sunny Skylar

S.A.

Copyrights Renewed

All Rights Administered by Peer International Corporation

Blue Hawaii

from the Paramount Picture WAIKIKI WEDDING

Words and Music by Leo Robin and Ralph Rainger

Corporation

Blue Moon

Words by Lorenz Hart

Music by Richard Rodgers

All Rights Controlled by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG INC. (Publishing)

and WARNER BROS. PUBLICATIONS U.S. INC. (Print)

Brazil

Words and Music by Ray Barroso

English lyrics by S. K. Russell

California Girls

Words and Music by Brian Wilson and Mike Love

Can You Feel The Love Tonight

from Walt Disney Pictures’ THE LION KING

Music by Elton John

Lyrics by Tim Rice

Can’t Help Falling In Love

from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII

Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Cre-

atore

All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company,

Inc. and Chrysalis Music

Chim Chim Cher-ee

from Walt Disney’s MARY POPPINS

Words and Music by Richard M. Sherman and Robert B. Sherman

Do-Re-Mi

from THE SOUND OF MUSIC

Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II

Music by Richard Rodgers

WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through-

out the world

Don’t Be Cruel (To A Heart That’s True)

Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley

Music, Inc.

All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis

Songs

Edelweiss

from THE SOUND OF MUSIC

Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II

Music by Richard Rodgers

WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through-

out the world

Fly Me To The Moon (In Other Words)

featured in the Motion Picture ONCE AROUND

Words and Music by Bart Howard

Corp., New York, NY

International Copyright Secured

Used by Permission

Hey Jude

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

Hound Dog

Words and Music by Jerry Leiber and Mike Stoller

Co., Inc.

Music Publishing, A Division of Universal Studios, Inc.

All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company,

Inc. and Chrysalis Music

I Just Called To Say I Love You

Words and Music by Stevie Wonder

c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC.

mission

I Left My Heart In San Francisco

Words by Douglass Cross

Music by George Cory

mission

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

220

In The Mood

By Joe Garland

Used by Permission

Isn’t She Lovely

Words and Music by Stevie Wonder

c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC.

mission

Let It Be

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

Let’s Twist Again

Words by Kal Mann

Music by Dave Appell and Kal Mann

All Rights Controlled and Administered by Spirit Two Music, Inc.

(ASCAP)

Linus And Lucy

By Vince Guaraldi

Love Story

Theme from the Paramount Picture LOVE STORY

Music by Francis Lai

Corporation

Lullaby Of Birdland

Words by George David Weiss

Music by George Shearing

mission

Michelle

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

Mickey Mouse March

from Walt Disney’s THE MICKEY MOUSE CLUB

Words and Music by Jimmie Dodd

Mission: Impossible Theme

from the Paramount Television Series MISSION: IMPOSSIBLE

By Lalo Schifrin

pany

Mona Lisa

from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A.

Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans

Moon River

from the Paramount Picture BREAKFAST AT TIFFANY’S

Words by Johnny Mercer

Music by Henry Mancini

Moonlight Serenade

Words by Mitchell Parish

Music by Glen Miller

TION

All Rights Controlled and Administered by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG

INC.

My Favorite Things

from THE SOUND OF MUSIC

Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II

Music by Richard Rodgers

WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights through-

out the world

My Way

By Paul Anka, Jacques Revaux, Claude Francois and Giles Thibault

The Nearness Of You

from the Paramount Picture ROMANCE IN THE DARK

Words by Ned Washington

Music by Hoagy Carmichael

Corporation

Theme From “New York, New York”

Music by John Kander

Words by Fred Ebb

All Rights Controlled by EMI UNART CATALOG INC. (Publishing) and

WARNER BROS. PUBLICATIONS U.S. INC. (Print)

Ob-La-Di, Ob-La-Da

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

Proud Mary

Words and Music by J.C. Fogerty

Return To Sender

Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Winﬁeld Scott

All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis

Songs

The Shoop Shoop Song (It’s In His Kiss)

Words and Music by Rudy Clark

Charts

All Rights for the United States Controlled and Administered by Trio

Music Company, Inc.

All Rights for the World excluding the United States Controlled and

Administered by Trio Music Company, Inc. and Alley Music Corp.

Used by Permission

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

221

(Sittin’ On) The Dock Of The Bay

Words and Music by Steve Cropper and Otis Redding

Smoke Gets In Your Eyes

from ROBERTA

Words by Otto Harbach

Music by Jerome Kern

INC.

International Rights Secured. Not for broadcast transmission.

DO NOT DUPLICATE. NOT FOR RENTAL.

WARNING: It is a violation of Federal Copyright Law to synchronize

this Multimedia Disc with video tape or ﬁlm, or to print the Composi-

tion(s) embodied on this Multimedia Disc in the form of standard

music notation, without the express written permission of the copy-

right owner.

Somewhere, My Love

Lara’s Theme from DOCTOR ZHIVAGO

Lyric by Paul Francis Webster

Music by Maurice Jarre

and EMI Robbins Catalog Inc.

Spanish Eyes

Words by Charles Singleton and Eddie Snyder

Music by Bert Kaempfert

KAEMPFERT

All Rights for the world, excluding Germany, Austria and Switzerland,

Controlled and Administered by SCREEN GEMS-EMI MUSIC INC.

mission

Speak Softly, Love (Love Theme)

from the Paramount Picture THE GODFATHER

Words by Larry Kusik

Music by Nino Rota

Stella By Starlight

from the Paramount Picture THE UNINVITED

Words by Ned Washington

Music by Victor Young

tion

Take The “A” Train

Words and Music by Billy Strayhorn

Billy Strayhorn Songs, Inc. (ASCAP) for the U.S.A.

Rights for DreamWorks Songs and Billy Strayhorn Songs, Inc. Adminis-

tered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc.

Tears In Heaven

Words and Music by Eric Clapton and Will Jennings

All Rights for E.C. Music Ltd. Administered by Unichappell Music Inc.

All Rights for Blue Sky Rider Songs Administered by Irving Music, Inc.

That Old Black Magic

from the Paramount Picture STAR SPANGLED RHYTHM

Words by Johnny Mercer

Music by Harold Arlen

That’s Amore (That’s Love)

from the Paramount Picture THE CADDY

Words by Jack Brooks

Music by Harry Warren

and Four Jays Music

Up Where We Belong

from the Paramount Picture AN OFFICER AND A GENTLEMAN

Words by Will Jennings

Music by Buffy Sainte-Marie and Jack Nitzsche

Corporation

Waltz For Debby

Lyric by Gene Lees

Music by Bill Evans

(Renewed) Folkways Music Publishers, Inc., New York, NY

International Copyright Secured

Used by Permission

White Christmas

from the Motion Picture Irving Berlin’s HOLIDAY INN

Words and Music by Irving Berlin

A Whole New World

from Walt Disney’s ALADDIN

Music by Alan Menken

Lyrics by Tim Rice

Company

Yesterday

Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney

All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music

Square West, Nashville, TN 37203

You Are The Sunshine Of My Life

Words and Music by Stevie Wonder

MUSIC

c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC.

mission

You Sexy Thing

Words and Music by E. Brown

Administered in the USA and Canada by Music & Media International,

Inc.

Administered for the World excluding the USA and Canada by RAK

Music Publishing Ltd.

CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual

222

MEMO

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-

ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your

dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instruc-

tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.

For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the

Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem

persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet

replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-

ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire

size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations

that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for

enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that

unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool,

spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected

when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical

storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids

are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may

exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualiﬁed service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-

ing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss.

DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level

or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-

sory mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the

product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are

designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure

that benches are stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applica-

ble) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by

Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recom-

mended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

(polarity)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music

Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada

Musique Ltée.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-

ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-

tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-

minal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH

WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-

TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE

LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE

LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

This product contains a high intensity lamp that con-

tains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this

material may be regulated due to environmental

considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer

to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Electronic Piano

Model Name : CVP-405/403/401

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[CL] 41

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WH96710 612APZC?.?-01A1

Printed in Indonesia

Clavinova Web site

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

CVP-405 / 403 /401 OWNER’S MANUAL Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual. EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. CVP-405 SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 (bottom) CVP-403 CVP-401 Model Serial No. Purchase Date PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Water warning • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. Location • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. Assembly • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (1)B-11 Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • In the case of a model with a polished finish, gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument's finish. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Using the bench (If included) • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • The data of the types listed below are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to the USER tab display (page 26), USB storage device (USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc). Handling caution • Recorded/Edited Songs (page 42, 139, 154) • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Created/Edited Styles (page 113) • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Memorized One Touch Settings (page 51) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Data in the USER tab display (page 26) may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device (USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc). • Edited Voices (page 96) • Edited MIDI settings (page 192) Moreover, the above-mentioned data can be saved all at once. Refer to page 77. • In the case of a model with a polished finish, bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use caution. When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1)B-11 Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of the following sections. Owner’s Manual Introduction (page 12).......................... Please read this section first. Quick Guide (page 23)......................... This section explains how to use the basic functions. Basic Operation (page 63).................... This section explains how to use the basic operations including displaybased controls. Reference (page 79) ............................. This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s various functions. Appendix (page 201)............................ This section contains additional information such as Troubleshooting and Specifications. Data List Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. • The models CVP-405/403/401 will be referred to as the CVP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The panel illustrations and LCD displays shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the CVP-405. • The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are in English. • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. • The photos of the harpsichord, bandoneon, hackbrett, music box, dulcimer and cimbalom, shown in the displays of the Clavinova, are courtesy of the Gakkigaku Shiryokan (Collection for Organolgy), Kunitachi College of Music. • The following instruments, shown in the displays of the Clavinova, are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments: balafon, gender, kalimba, kanoon, santur, gamelan gong, harp, hand bell, bagpipe, banjo, carillon, mandolin, oud, pan flute, pungi, rabab, shanai, sitar, steel drum, and tambra. • (CVP-405/403) This product is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901 from IVL Audio Inc. • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with the patented LZW, licensed from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product, nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF may not be reverse-engineered, reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied. This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group. Trademarks: • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 5 Accessories Guide to Yamaha Online Member Product User Registration “50 greats for the Piano” Music Book Owner’s Manual Data List The following items may be included or optional, depending on your locale: Bench ■ Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the instrument does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. ■ Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the instrument along with other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you first took it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument. 6 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Table of Contents Introduction Enhanced Realism and Natural Expressiveness ................................................. 10 Panel Controls ................................................. 12 Playing the Keyboard ...................................... 14 Setting Up ....................................................... 16 Music Rest ................................................... 16 Sheet Music Braces (CVP-405/403) .............. 16 Using Headphones ....................................... 17 Changing the Display Language .................. 18 Display Settings ........................................... 18 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks .................................................... 21 Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc) ............ 22 Quick Guide Playing the Demos .......................................... 23 Operations in the Basic Displays ..................... 25 Operation of the Main Display ............................. 25 Operation of the File Selection Display ................. 26 Operation of the Function Display ........................ 27 Playing Voices ................................................. 28 Playing the Piano Voice ........................................ 28 Playing Various Voices .......................................... 32 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance ................................................ 58 Recording Your Performance as Audio (USB Audio Recorder) (CVP-405/403) ............ 60 Recording Your Performance as Audio .................. 60 Playing Back the Recorded Performance ............... 62 Basic Operation Basic Operation ................................63 Selecting Message Language .......................... 63 The Messages Shown in the Display .............. 63 Instant Selection of the Displays —Direct Access ................................................ 64 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) ............................................................ 65 Main Display ........................................................ 65 File Selection Display Configuration and Basic Operation ............................................................. 66 File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display ..69 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings ... 75 Restoring the Factory-programmed System .......... 75 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item ......................................... 76 Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single File ............................................................. 76 Data Backup .................................................... 77 Backup procedure ................................................ 78 Practicing with the Songs ............................... 35 Playing Back Songs Before Practicing .................... 35 Displaying Music Notation (Score) ....................... 38 One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ......... 39 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ....... 41 Recording Your Performance ................................ 42 Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology ....................................... 43 Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback) ...... 44 Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Accompaniment Feature ...................................... 45 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song —Music Finder ................................................ 52 Reference Using, Creating and Editing Voices ..79 Voice Characteristics ....................................... 79 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously ........ 80 Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) .................. 80 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 Parts) ............................................ 81 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts) .............................. 82 Changing Pitch ................................................ 83 Calling up the panel settings to match the Style (Repertoire) .......................................................... 53 Transpose ............................................................. 83 Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument ...... 83 Scale Tuning ......................................................... 83 Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance .............................. 54 Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard ......................................................... 85 Connecting a Microphone (CVP-405/403) ........... 54 Singing with the Lyrics Display ............................. 55 Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................ 56 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) ........................................ 87 Basic Procedure .................................................... 87 Various display pages and menus appear on the LCD display of this instrument, indicating the functions and operations. Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up these functions. The example shorthand below describes a four step operation: 1) press the [FUNCTION] button, 2) press the [D] button to select the Controller page, 3) press the TAB [®] button to select the Keyboard/Panel page, and 4) press the [A] button to select the Initial Touch parameter. [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [®] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 7 Voice Creating (Sound Creator) ..................... 96 Basic Procedure .................................................... 96 Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices ........ 100 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet ... 172 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles ..........103 Accessing the Special Website ...................... 173 Style Characteristics ...................................... 103 Scrolling the Display ........................................... 173 Following Links ................................................... 174 Entering Characters ............................................ 174 Return to the Previous Web Page ........................ 174 Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page ........................................................... 175 Purchasing and Downloading Data .................... 176 Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages .... 176 About the Internet Settings Display .................... 179 Changing the Home Page .................................. 182 Initializing Internet Settings ................................ 183 Selecting a Chord Fingering Type ................ 103 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style ............................................................... 104 Style Playback-related Settings ..................... 105 Split Point Settings ....................................... 107 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE) ...................... 108 Convenient Music Finder feature ................. 108 Searching the Records ........................................ 108 Creating a Set of Favorite Records ...................... 110 Editing Records .................................................. 110 Saving the Record .............................................. 111 Style Creator ................................................. 113 Style Structure .................................................... 113 Creating a Style .................................................. 114 Editing the Created Style .................................... 119 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups —Registration Memory ..................127 Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups ...127 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups ......... 128 Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a Panel Setup ........................................................ 129 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze Function) ............................................... 129 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order —Registration Sequence .................................... 130 Using, Creating and Editing Songs ...........................................132 Compatible Song Types ................................ 132 Operations for Song Playback ...................... 133 Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) ....... 136 Using the Practice Function (Guide) ............ 137 Selecting the Guide Function Type ..................... 137 Recording Your Performance ....................... 139 Recording Methods ............................................ 139 Editing a Recorded Song .................................... 154 Using a Microphone (CVP-405/403) ...............................163 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters .............. 163 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound ............................................................ 166 Talk Setting ................................................... 170 8 Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet ...............................172 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operations in the Special Website ............... 173 Glossary of Internet Terms ........................... 184 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices ............................................185 Using Headphones (1 [PHONES] jacks) ...................................... 185 Connecting a Microphone or Guitar (2 [MIC./LINE IN] jack) (CVP-405/403) ....... 185 Connecting Audio & Video Devices (345) .. 185 Using External Audio Devices for playback and Recording (3 [AUX OUT] Jacks) ......................... 185 Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in Speakers (4 [AUX IN] Jacks) ............................... 186 Showing the Instrument’s Display Contents on a Separate TV Monitor (5 [VIDEO OUT] Terminal) (CVP-405) ............... 186 Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller (6 [AUX PEDAL] jack) ................................... 187 Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal . 187 Connecting External MIDI Devices (7 [MIDI] Terminals) .................................... 190 Connecting a Computer, USB Device, or Internet (789)) ................................... 190 Connecting a Computer (8 [USB TO HOST] and 7 [MIDI] Terminals) ..... 190 Connecting to a USB-type LAN Adaptor and USB Storage Device (9 via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal) ............... 191 Connect to the Internet () [LAN] Port) .............. 192 What is MIDI? ................................................ 192 What You Can Do With MIDI ....................... 195 MIDI Settings ................................................ 196 Basic Operation .................................................. 196 Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates ....................... 197 MIDI System Settings ......................................... 198 MIDI Transmit Settings ....................................... 198 MIDI Receive Settings ......................................... 199 Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive ............................................................... 199 Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive ............................................................... 200 Appendix Troubleshooting ............................................ 201 Introduction CVP-405: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............ 206 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices CVP-403: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............ 208 CVP-401: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............ 210 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) (CVP-405) ...................................................... 212 Quick Guide Specifications ................................................ 213 Index .............................................................. 215 Panel Button Chart ....................................... 218 Basic Operation Reference Using, Creating and Editing Voices Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Using, Creating and Editing Songs Using a Microphone Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Appendix CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 9 Enhanced Realism and Natural Expressiveness Introduction Authentic Acoustic Piano-like Touch with Graded Hammer (GH) and Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) Keyboard The Clavinova is the next best thing to a real piano. It features an exceptional natural piano touch and expressive response-thanks to the remarkable Graded Hammer keyboard. Just as on an actual grand piano, the lower keys are heavy in touch and the higher keys are light, with all the natural gradations in between. The CVP-405/403 features the enhanced, improved Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) technology, providing performance functions and expressive power found only on grand pianos, such as having repeated plays of the same note perfectly articulated, even when playing at high speed or with partial key release. Audio Recording (CVP-405/403) Recording Your Performance as Audio......................................page 60 You can record your performance as audio data to a USB storage device. Connect a microphone or guitar to the instrument and enjoy recording a guitar and keyboard performance together, or record your singing along with Song playback (in karaoke fashion). Playing the Instrument Playing Piano Voices ................................................................ page 28 With just the press of a button, you can reconfigure the entire instrument for optimum piano performance, no matter what settings you’ve made from the panel. Now you can enjoy performing and practicing with authentic grand piano sounds and response—instantly. Playing Other Instrument Voices ..............................................page 32 The instrument gives you not only various realistic piano Voices, but also features an exceptionally wide variety of authentic instruments, both acoustic and electronic. Perform Along with a Full Band —Song Playback.........................................................................page 35 Play along with previously recorded Song data, and fill out your solo performance with the sounds and arrangement of an entire band or orchestra. Ease in Playing Backing Parts with Songs, —performance assistant technology.........................................page 43 The new performance assistant technology features make it exceptionally easy to play professional-sounding backing parts along with Song playback. Playing Melodies along with Auto Accompaniment, —Style Playback .........................................................................page 44 Use the Style playback features to automatically produce full backing parts and accompaniment, while you play melodies on top. It’s like having an expert ensemble playing behind you. Select an accompaniment Style—such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc.— and let the instrument be your backing band! 10 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Practicing Introduction Displaying and Playing along with the Music Score ................page 59 While playing back a Song, you can have the music score (notation) automatically shown on the display—an exceptionally convenient tool for learning and practicing pieces. Guide Lamps...............................................................................page 39 The key guide lamps are also helpful in learning and practicing, since they indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold them down. Recording Your Performance.................................................... page 42 The instrument lets you easily record your own performance and save it to internal memory or a USB storage device. This, too, is an excellent practice tool, letting you listen back to your playing and spot your strong and weak points. Expand Your Song Collection Internet Direct Connection......................................................page 172 The instrument also connects directly to the Internet, letting you download Song data from special websites, and save them to internal memory or a USB storage device. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 11 Introduction Panel Controls 1 [POWER] switch .............................................................. P. 14 Q [EXIT] button.................................................................... P. 26 2 [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal.............................................. P. 22 R [DATA ENTRY] dial .......................................................... P. 67 3 [MASTER VOLUME] dial.................................................. P. 15 S [ENTER] button ................................................................ P. 67 4 [DEMO] button................................................................ P. 23 T [USB] button .................................................................... P. 67 METRONOME 5 [ON/OFF] button ............................................................. P. 30 TRANSPOSE 6 [–] [+] buttons.................................................................. P. 56 TEMPO 7 [TAP TEMPO] button........................................................ P. 47 U [USER] button .................................................................. P. 67 PART ON/OFF V [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button ................................................. P. 80 W [SPLIT (LEFT)] button........................................................ P. 80 X [FUNCTION] button ........................................................ P. 27 Y [INTERNET] button ........................................................ P. 172 8 [–] [+] buttons.................................................................. P. 31 STYLE CONTROL 9 STYLE category selection buttons ..................................... P. 45 SONG CONTROL Z [SONG SELECT] button.................................................... P. 35 [ [REC] button .................................................................... P. 42 0 [ACMP ON/OFF] button .................................................. P. 46 \ [STOP] button .................................................................. P. 35 A [AUTO FILL IN] button .................................................... P. 48 ] [PLAY/PAUSE] button ....................................................... P. 35 B INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ................................................ P. 47 ^ [REW]/[FF] buttons ......................................................... P. 134 C MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] buttons ....................... P. 48 a [EXTRA TRACKS] button................................................. P. 140 D [BREAK] button................................................................ P. 48 b [TRACK 2 (L)] button ........................................................ P. 41 E ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] buttons ........................................ P. 48 c [TRACK 1 (R)] button........................................................ P. 39 F [SYNC STOP] button........................................................ P. 48 d [SCORE] button................................................................ P. 38 G [SYNC START] button ...................................................... P. 47 e [LYRICS/TEXT] button (CVP-405) H [START/STOP] button....................................................... P. 47 [LYRICS] button (CVP-403/401)........................................ P. 55 I [MUSIC FINDER] button .................................................. P. 52 f [GUIDE] button................................................................ P. 39 g [REPEAT] button ............................................................... P. 41 J [LCD CONTRAST] knob .................................................. P. 18 K [A]–[J] buttons.................................................................. P. 25 L [DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................. P. 64 M [MIXING CONSOLE] button ............................................ P. 87 12 PIANO Setting h [PIANO RESET] button ..................................................... P. 29 N [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button ................................. P. 105, 139 REGISTRATION MEMORY i REGIST BANK [+] [–] buttons ......................................... P. 128 O [1π†]–[8π†] buttons ................................................ P. 25 j [MEMORY] button ......................................................... P. 127 P TAB [√][®] buttons......................................................... P. 26 k [1]–[8] buttons ............................................................... P. 127 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual CVP-405 CVP-403/401 Introduction VOICE CONTROL l VOICE category selection buttons .................................... P. 32 m [VOICE EFFECT] button ................................................... P. 85 ONE TOUCH SETTING n [1]–[4] buttons ................................................................. P. 50 o [OTS LINK] button ........................................................... P. 51 p Drum Kit icons................ Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) Pedals q Left pedal......................................................................... P. 30 r Sostenuto pedal ............................................................... P. 30 s Damper pedal.................................................................. P. 30 t Keyboard guide lamps ..................................................... P. 39 u Mic signal/over lamps (CVP-405/403) .............................. P. 54 For quick reference, also see the alphabetically sorted “Panel Button Chart” on page 218. For information on the jacks and connectors located on the bottom left of the instrument, see page 185. The [USB TO DEVICE] terminal is also located on the bottom left of the instrument. (CVP-405) CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 13 Playing the Keyboard Connecting the power cable First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the instrument, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. Introduction 1 (The shape of the plug and outlet differ depending on locale.) 2 Opening the key cover CVP-405/403: Using the hand grip on the front, lift open the key cover. CVP-401: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. CVP-405/403 CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and the unit. CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening the cover. CAUTION Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. 3 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening the cover. Turning the power on Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. The power indicator lights up. 14 CVP-401 4 Playing the keyboard Play the keyboard to produce sound. Introduction Adjusting the volume While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using the [MASTER VOLUME] located at the left of the panel. 5 6 Turning the power off Press the [POWER] switch to turn the power off. The screen and the power indicator turn off. Closing the key cover CVP-405/403: Grip the metal rim at the top of the panel, and close the key cover. CVP-401: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. CVP-405/403 CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when closing the cover. CVP-401 CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when closing the cover. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 15 Setting Up Music Rest To Raise the Music Rest: CAUTION Introduction When raising or lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way up or down. CVP-405/403: Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. When raised, the music rest is fixed at a certain angle and cannot be adjusted. CVP-401: 1 Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. 2 Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. 3 Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. CAUTION CVP-405/403 CVP-401 (CVP-401) Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. To Lower the Music Rest: CVP-405/403: Lift the music rest slightly, then turn it back slowly. CAUTION (CVP-405/403) Before lowering the music rest, close the sheet music braces (see below). The music rest will not close unless the sheet music braces are also closed. CVP-401: 1 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. 2 Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). 3 Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CVP-405/403 Close the sheet music braces. CVP-401 CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers. Sheet Music Braces (CVP-405/403) These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place. To Open 16 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual To Close Using Headphones Using Headphones CAUTION Do not listen with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. Introduction Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks located on the bottom left of the instrument. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be connected. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) CVP-401 CVP-405/403 INPUT VOLUME MIN MIC. LINE IN MIC. LINE PHONES MAX Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the instrument package so that you can hang the headphones on the instrument. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure. CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise, the instrument or the hanger may be damaged. CVP-405/403 CVP-401 Outputting sound from the speaker while headphones are connected 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]→ [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] CONFIG 2 2 Press the [3π†]/[4π†] (SPEAKER) button to select “ON.” Outputting sound only from the headphones From the display called up in step 1 above, press the [3π†]/[4π†] (SPEAKER) button to select “OFF.” When “OFF” is selected, the speakers will not sound and you can only hear the instrument sound via the headphones. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 17 Changing the Display Language Changing the Display Language This determines the language used in the display for messages, file names, and character input. Introduction 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER Press the [4π†]/[5π†] button to select a language. Display Settings Adjusting the Contrast of the Display You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [LCD CONTRAST] knob located to the left of the display. 18 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Display Settings Adjusting the Brightness of the Display (CVP-405/403) Adjust the brightness of the display. 2 Introduction 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] CONFIG 2 Press the [2π†] button to adjust the brightness of the display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 19 Display Settings Entering the Owner Name in the Opening Display You can have your name appear in the opening display (the display that appears when the power is turned on). Introduction CVP-405 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER Press the [I] (OWNER NAME) button and call up the Owner Name display. Refer to page 74 for character-entry details. Displaying the version number To check the version number of this instrument, press the [7π†]/[8π†] (VERSION) buttons in the display in step 1 above. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display. 20 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (The floppy disk drive is optional. For instructions on installing the floppy disk drive, see page 212.) Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head Formatting a Floppy Disk About Floppy Disks • If you find that you are unable to use new, blank disks or old disks that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. For details on how to format a disk, see page 69. Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the disk contains important data. Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these precautions: Floppy Disk Compatibility n Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable as is on other devices. Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive: • Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. Introduction • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper headcleaning disks. The floppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to floppy disk, and allows you to load data from floppy disk to the instrument. Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. n Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Removing a Floppy Disk • After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off), firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again. To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s writeprotect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). Write-protect tab open (protect position) * Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data. CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 21 Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc) Introduction This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. Be sure to handle USB storage device with care. Follow the important precautions below. n For more information about the handling of USB storage device, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB storage device. Compatible USB storage devices • Up to two USB storage devices, such as a floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, flash memory reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB storage devices that can be used with musical instruments simultaneously even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of two.) This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device. Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. • The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard n Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. Formatting USB storage media • When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation. CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage medias. 22 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Using USB Storage Devices • When connecting a USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE], make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations). CAUTION • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. • When connecting a USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] on the top panel, remove it before closing the key cover. If the key cover is closed with the USB storage device connected, the USB storage device may be damaged. • Though there are two [USB TO DEVICE] terminals on the CVP-405 (and one on the CVP-403/401), if you are connecting two or three devices at the same time (such as two USB storage devices and a LAN adaptor), you should use a USB hub device. The USB hub must be selfpowered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. To protect your data (write-protect): To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Quick Guide Playing the Demos The Demos are more than just songs—they also provide helpful, easy-to-understand introductions to the features, functions and operations of the instrument. In a way, the Demos are an interactive “mini-manual”—complete with sound demonstrations and text showing what it can do for you. Quick Guide 1 Select the desired Language. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J]UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER 2 2 Press the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to select the desired language. Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demos. Demos will play back continuously until stopped. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to stop the Demo playback. When the Demo stops, the display returns to the MAIN display (page 65). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 23 Quick Guide Showing Specific Demo Topics 1 π†]/[8π π†] buttons in the Demo display to call up the specific Demo menu. Press the [7π 2 Press one of the [A]–[I] buttons to show a specific Demo. n On the CVP-401, “Yamaha Piano Technology” is shown instead of “Ultimate Realism.” To return back to the previous display, press the [J] button. When the Demo has more than one screen. Press a [π†] button corresponding to the screen number. 3 24 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from Demo. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operations in the Basic Displays To start with, you should know a little about the basic displays that appear in the Quick Guide. There are three basic displays: Main display ➤ See below. File selection display ➤ page 26 Function display ➤ page 27 Quick Guide Operation of the Main Display The Main display shows the basic settings and important information for the instrument (It is the same display that appears when the instrument is turned on.).You can also call up display pages related to the displayed function from the Main display. n About information in the Main display See page 65. 1 [A]–[J] buttons The [A]–[J] buttons correspond to the settings indicated next to the buttons. For example, press the [F] button, and the Voice (RIGHT 1) selection display will appear in the display. π†]–[8π π†] buttons 2 [1π The [1π†]–[8π†] buttons correspond to the parameters which are indicated above the buttons. (On the CVP-401, open the volume balance display by pressing the [C] button.) For example, pressing the [1π] button will increase the Song (page 35) volume. 1 1 3 3 2 3 [DIRECT ACCESS] and [EXIT] buttons Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 25 Operation of the File Selection Display In the File Selection display, you can select the Voice (page 28)/Song (page 35)/Style (page 44), etc. In the example here, we’ll call up and use the Song Selection display. Quick Guide 2 1 3, 5 3, 5 4 1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. 2 Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the desired drive (PRESET/USER/USB). About PRESET/USER/USB PRESET .............. Internal memory to which the preprogrammed data are installed as preset data. USER ................. Internal memory that allows both reading and writing of data. USB ................... USB storage device, such as USB flash memory/floppy disk drive, etc., which is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. n Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc. will be referred to as “USB storage device.” 3 Select a folder (if necessary). Several Songs may be together in a folder. In this case, the folder(s) will appear in the display (see the illustration at right). Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a folder. Press the [8 π] (UP) button to call up the next highest level folder. 4 Select a page (if the display has several pages). When the drive contains more than ten Songs, the display is divided up into several pages. The page indications are shown at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [1π]–[6π] buttons to select a page. 5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song. You can also select a Song by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. 6 26 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operation of the Function Display In the Function display, you can make detailed settings. In the example here, we’ll call up and use the keyboard touch sensitivity setting display. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Categories of detailed settings are shown. Quick Guide 2 Press the [D] button to select the category CONTROLLER. When the selected category is further divided into sub-categories, the tab(s) will be shown in the display. 3 Press the TAB [®] button to select the KEYBOARD/PANEL tab. When the setting is further divided into additional settings, a list will be shown in the display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 27 4 Press the [A] button to select the “1 INITIAL TOUCH.” Quick Guide 4 5 5 Press the [1π†]/[2π†] button to select touch sensitivity for the keyboard. For details on the touch sensitivity settings, see page 29. Throughout this manual, arrows are used in the instructions, indicating in shorthand the process of calling up certain displays and functions. For example, the instructions above can be indicated in shorthand as: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [®] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH. Playing Voices The instrument features a variety of Voices, including exceptionally realistic piano Voices. VOICE category selection buttons (page 32) METRONOME [ON/OFF] button (page 30) [PIANO RESET] button (see page 29) Playing the Piano Voice Here, we’ll call up and play the piano voice. You can play the piano voice using the pedals or metronome. 28 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual One-touch Piano Play This convenient, easy-to-use feature completely and automatically reconfigures the entire instrument for optimum piano performance. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel, you can instantly call up the piano settings by a single button press. Press the piano-shaped [PIANO RESET] button on the lower right of the panel. Quick Guide Piano Lock Function The convenient Piano Lock function lets you “lock” the piano so that you don’t inadvertently change the settings by pressing another button on the panel. Once locked, the instrument stays in the piano mode, even if other buttons are pressed—preventing you from accidentally starting a Song (page 35) during your piano performance. 1 Press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] button on the lower right of the panel for three seconds or longer, until a message appears prompting you to enable Piano Lock. 2 Press the [F] (OK) button to enable Piano Lock. 3 To turn Piano Lock off, press and hold down the [PIANO RESET] button again for three seconds or longer. Setting the touch sensitivity of the keyboard You can adjust the touch response of the instrument (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). The touch sensitivity type becomes the common setting for all Voices. 1 Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [®] KEYBOARD/ PANEL → [A] 1 INITIAL TOUCH 2 Press the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons to specify the touch response. HARD 2 ..... Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a heavy touch. HARD 1 ..... Requires moderately strong playing for high volume. NORMAL... Standard touch response. SOFT 1....... Produces high volume with moderate playing strength. SOFT 2....... Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch. n • This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard. • When you do not want to apply touch sensitivity, set Touch to OFF for the corresponding parts by pressing the [5†]–[7†] buttons. When Touch is set to OFF, you can specify the fixed volume level by pressing the [4π†] button. • The touch sensitivity settings may have no effect with certain voices. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 29 Using the Pedals The instrument features three pedals. CVP-405 CVP-403/401 Damper Pedal Left Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Quick Guide Left Pedal Damper Pedal Sostenuto Pedal ● Damper Pedal (Right) The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on an actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even after releasing the keys. n • Some Voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held. • Certain Voices in the “PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT,” “GM&XG” and “GM2” groups may not be affected by use of the damper pedal. When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. ● Sostenuto Pedal (Center) If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not sustain. n • Certain Voices, such as [STRINGS] or [BRASS], sustain continuously when the sostenuto pedal is pressed. • Certain Voices in the “PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT”, “GM&XG” and “GM2” groups may not be affected by use of the sostenuto pedal. ● Left Pedal When the Piano voice is selected, pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of the notes you play. The settings assigned to this pedal may differ depending on the selected Voice. When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. n The depth of the left pedal effect can be adjusted (page 98). ● Foot Controller/Footswitch An optional Yamaha foot controller (FC7) or footswitch (FC4 or FC5) can be connected to the AUX PEDAL jack and used to control various functions assigned (page 187). Making Settings for the Pedals You can assign one of the various functions to the three pedals or an optional foot controller/footswitch, doing things like controlling the Super Articulation voices (page 79) (CVP-405) or starting and stopping the Style (page 187). Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and check how a specific tempo sounds. 30 1 Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button to start the metronome. 2 To stop the metronome, press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button again. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the Tempo or Setting the Time Signature of the Metronome Sound ■ Adjusting the Metronome Tempo Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] button to call up the pop-up tempo setting display. 2 Press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons to set the tempo. Pressing and holding either button lets you continuously increase or decrease the value. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to adjust the value. To reset the tempo, press the TEMPO [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. Quick Guide 1 n About the Tempo display The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to close the Tempo display. Set the Popup Display Time 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] CONFIG 2 Select the [B] (2 POPUP DISPLAY TIME) button, and use the [7π†]/[8π†] buttons to set the time. ■ Determine the Metronome Time Signature and Other Settings 1 Call up the operation display: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√] CONFIG 1 → [B] 2 METRONOME 2 π†]–[7π†] buttons. Set the parameters by pressing the [2π VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound. SOUND Determines which sound is used for the metronome. Bell Off............... Conventional metronome sound, with no bell. Bell On............... Conventional metronome sound, with bell. English Voice ...... Count in English German Voice .... Count in German Japanese Voice ... Count in Japanese French Voice....... Count in French Spanish Voice ..... Count in Spanish TIME SIGNATURE Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 31 Playing Various Voices The instrument features a variety of Voices such as strings or wind instruments, including exceptionally realistic piano Voices. Playing Preset Voices Quick Guide The preset Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. VOICE category selection buttons on the panel correspond to the categories of the preset Voices. For example, press the [PIANO] button to display various piano Voices. n About the various Voices Refer to the Voice List in the separate Data List booklet. 1 Use the [A]/[B]/[F]/[G] (RIGHT1) buttons in the Main display to select the RIGHT 1 part. Make sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] buttons are off. The Voice selected here is the RIGHT 1 part. For the Voice part, see page 80. Determining how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). You can select how the Voice selection display is opened (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] CONFIG 2 Select the [B] (2 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS) button, and use the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons to change how the Voice selection display is opened. • OPEN&SELECT: Opens the Voice selection display with the top (first) voice of the voice category automatically selected (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). With the default settings, the OPEN&SELECT function is turned on. • OPEN ONLY: Opens the Voice selection display with the currently selected voice (when one of the VOICE category selection buttons is pressed). 2 32 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to select a Voice category and call up the Voice selection display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Voice. You can call up the information for the selected Voice by pressing the [7π] (INFORMATION) button. n The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. For details on the characteristics, see page 79. Quick Guide n You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons. 4 Play the keyboard. n Restoring the Piano settings Press the piano-shaped [PIANO RESET] button. Recalling your favorite Voices easily The instrument has a huge amount of high-quality Voices, covering an exceptionally broad range of instrument sounds— making it perfect for virtually every musical application. However, the sheer number of Voices may seem overwhelming at first. To easily recall your favorite Voice, there are two methods: ● Save your favorite Voice to the USER display in the Voice Selection display and recall it by using the [USER] button 1 Copy your favorite Voices from the Preset drive to the User drive. Refer to page 71 for details on the copy operation. 2 Call up the selection display. [USER] → [F] VOICE (RIGHT1) 3 Select the desired Voice. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the Voice. ● Register your favorite Voice to Registration Memory and recall it with the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons Refer to page 127 for details on Registration Memory operations. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 33 Playing the Voice Demos To listen to the various Voices and hear how they sound especially in context, listen to the demo songs for each Voice. 1 2 In the Voice Selection display (page 33 step 3), press the [8†] (DEMO) button to start the Demo for the selected Voice. To stop the Demo, press the [8†] (DEMO) button again. Quick Guide Selecting percussion sounds When one of the Drum Kit Voices in the [PERCUSSION & DRUM KIT] group is selected, you can play various drums and percussion instrument sounds on the keyboard. Details are given in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List. To check which “Standard Kit 1” percussion sounds are assigned to each key, look at the icons printed above the keys. Selecting sound effects You can play individual sound effects, such as bird chirps and ocean sounds from the keyboard. The sound effects are categorized as “GM&XG”/“GM2.” 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Use the [A]/[B]/[F]/[G] (RIGHT 1) buttons to select the RIGHT 1 part. Press the [8π] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories. Press the [2π] button to display page 2. Press the [E]/[F] button to select “GM&XG”/“GM2.” Press the [2π] button to display page 2. Press the [F] button to select “SoundEffect.” Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired sound effect. Play the keyboard. Selecting GM/XG/GM2 Voices n For details on the Voice allocation format, see page 195. You can select the GM/XG/GM2 Voices directly via the panel operation. Perform steps 1–4 described above, select the desired category, then select the desired voice. Playing different Voices simultaneously The instrument can play different Voices simultaneously (page 80). • Layering two different Voices This is useful for creating rich and thick sounds. • Setting separate Voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, you can set up the keyboard to play the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right hand. 34 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Practicing with the Songs Quick Guide n Song On the instrument, performance data is called a “Song.” Playing Back Songs Before Practicing The instrument includes not only the preset demo Songs, but also many preset Songs. This section covers basic information on playing back the preset Songs or Songs in a CD-ROM. 1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. 2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song category. The preset Songs are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. 3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song. You can also select the file by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. n You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons. 4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. 5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Songs saved to USER (page 43) 1 2 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. 3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Song. Press the TAB [√][®] button to select the USER tab. Quick Guide n Select the file to which the data is saved. You can also select the specified file to which the data is saved by pressing the [USER] button. [USER] → [A] SONG → [A]–[J] Playing Songs saved to a USB storage device (page 43) For information on using USB storage devices, see page 22. 1 2 3 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 4 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Song. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the USB tab (“USB1”/“USB2”), corresponding to the USB storage device you inserted in Step 1. The indication “USB1”/“USB2” will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices. n Select the file to which the data is saved. You can also select the specified file to which the data is saved by pressing the [USB] button. [USB] → [A] SONG → [A]–[J] Playing Songs in sequence You can play all Songs in a folder continuously. 36 1 2 Select a Song in the desired folder. 3 4 Press the [H] (REPEAT MODE) button to select “ALL.” 5 6 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop continuous playback. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. All Songs in the folder play back continuously, in order. To turn off the Song sequence playback, press the [H] button to select “OFF” in the display in step 2. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Boost the volume of the part to be practiced On the instrument, a single Song can contain separate data for up to sixteen MIDI channels. Specify the channel for practicing and increase the playback volume for the channel. 1 Select a Song. The method for selecting a Song is the same as “Playing Back Songs Before Practicing (page 35 step 1–5).” 2 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. Quick Guide 3 2, 4 3 4 Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the VOL/VOICE tab. 5 6 Press the [E]/[J] button to select “VOLUME.” Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button until “MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8)” is shown at the top of the display. π†]–[8π π†]. To raise the level of the desired channel(s), press the appropriate buttons [1π If the desired channel is not shown in the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH1–8) display, press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE (SONG CH9–16) display. If you don’t know which channel’s volume to raise: • Look at the illustrations of the instruments indicated below “VOICE.” • Look at the channel indicators, which light as the Song plays back. Watching these as you listen can show you which channel you wish to boost. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 37 Displaying Music Notation (Score) You can view the music notation of the selected Song. We suggest that you read through the music notation before starting to practice. Quick Guide n • The instrument can display the music notation of commercially-available music data or your recorded Songs. • The displayed notation is generated by the instrument based on the Song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as commercially available sheet music of the same song—especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes. • The notation functions cannot be used to create Song data by inputting notes. For information on creating Song data, see page 139. 1 Select a Song (page 35). 2 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation. n Look through the entire score before playing back the Song Press the TAB [®] button to select subsequent pages. 3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. The “ball” bounces along through the score, indicating the current position. 4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. Changing the Notation Display You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal preferences. 1 Press the [SCORE] button to display the music notation. 2 Changing the following settings as desired. ● Changing the size of the music notation Press the [7π†] button to change the size of the music notation. ● Displaying only right-hand part/left-hand part notation Press the [1π†]/[2π†] button to disable display of the left-hand part/right-hand part. ● Customizing the notation display • Display the note name at the left of the note 1 2 3 4 Press the [5π†] (NOTE) button to display the note name. Press the [8π†] (SET UP) button to call up the detailed setting display. Press the [6†] (NOTE NAME) button to select “Fixed Do.” Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the setting. • Turn on the note colors (CVP-405) Press the [6π†] button to turn the COLOR on. n About the note colors These colors are fixed for each note and cannot be changed. C: red, D: yellow, E: green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray ● Increase the number of measures in the display You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be displayed (part, lyrics, chords, etc.). Use the [1π†]–[4π†] buttons to turn off the items you want not to be displayed. 38 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Set the detailed parameters of the view type as desired. 1 Press the [8π†] (SETUP) button to call up the detailed setting display. 2 Press the [1π†]–[6π†] buttons to set the view type. KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation. QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the song. NOTE NAME Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the following three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE parameter in “Display the note name at the left of the note” step 1 is set to ON. A, B, C Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B). FIXED DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language. The language is specified in LANGUAGE of the OWNER display (page 63). MOVABLE DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of “So” would be indicated as “Do.” As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language. 3 Quick Guide Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part. This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected. AUTO The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically— setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the [FUNCTION] → LEFT CH/RIGHT CH [B] SONG SETTING. 1–16 Assigns the specified MIDI channel (1–16) to each of the left- and right-hand parts. OFF (LEFT CH only) No channel assignment: This disables display of the left-hand key range. Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the setting. n Save the notation view settings The notation view settings can be saved as part of a Song (page 158). One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps The key guide lamps indicate the notes you should play, when you should play them, and how long you should hold them down. You can also practice at your own pace—since the accompaniment waits for you to play the notes correctly. Here, mute the right- or left-hand part and try practicing the part using the guide lamps. Practicing the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the Guide Lamps 1 Select a Song (page 35). 2 Turn the [GUIDE] button on. 4 3 2 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 39 3 Press the [TRACK 1 (R)] button to mute the right-hand part. The indicator of the [TRACK 1 (R)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself. n Have the guide lamp flash a lead-in to the music In the GUIDE LAMP TIMING, select NEXT (page 138). 4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Practice the muted part using the guide lamps. Quick Guide n Adjusting the tempo Refer to page 31. Quickly changing tempo during a performance (Tap function) The tempo can also be changed during Song playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo. 5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. 6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off. Adjusting the volume balance between the Song and the keyboard This lets you adjust the volume balance between Song playback and the sound you play on the keyboard. 1 Call up the Main display. [DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT] n The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display. When the Balance display is not indicated, press the [EXIT] button. (On the CVP-401, open the volume balance display by pressing the [C] button.) 2 To adjust the Song volume, press the [1π†] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6π†] button. n About keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) See page 80. Other guide functions The initial setting “Follow Lights (page 138)” was used in the instructions “One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps” above. There are additional functions in the Guide feature, as described below. To select a guide function, see page 137. For keyboard performance • Any Key This lets you practice the timing of playing the keys. For Karaoke • Karao-Key This automatically controls the timing of Song playback to match your singing—a convenient feature for singing along with your keyboard performance (page 54). • Vocal CueTIME (CVP-405/403) This automatically controls the timing of the accompaniment to match the melody (pitch) of your singing—allowing you to practice singing with the correct pitch. 40 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Practicing the Left-hand Part (TRACK 2) Using the Guide Lamps 1,2 3 Follow the same steps as in “Practice the Right-hand Part (TRACK 1) Using the Guide Lamps” on page 39. Press the [TRACK 2] button to mute the left-hand part. The indicator of the [TRACK 2 (L)] button goes out. You can now play that part by yourself. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback and practice the muted part using the guide lamps. 5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. 6 Turn the [GUIDE] button off. Quick Guide 4 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a Song or a specific range of measures in a Song. This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult-to-play phrases. Playing Back a Song Repeatedly 1 Select a Song (page 35). 2 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn on Repeat playback. 3 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. The Song will be played back repeatedly until you press the SONG [STOP] button. 4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. 5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback. Specifying a Range of Measures and Playing them Back Repeatedly (A-B Repeat) 1 Select a Song (page 35). 2 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. 3 Specify the repeat range. Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from Point A to Point B is played back repeatedly. n Instantly returning to Point A Regardless of whether the Song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [STOP] button returns to Point A. 4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. 5 Press the [REPEAT] button to turn off Repeat playback. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 41 Other Methods for Specifying the A–B Repeat Range ● Specifying the repeat range while Songs are stopped 1 2 3 4 Press the [FF] button to advance to the Point A location. Press the [REPEAT] button to specify Point A. Press the [FF] button to advance to the Point B location. Press the [REPEAT] button again to specify Point B. ● Specifying the repeat range between Point A and the end of the Song Quick Guide Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. Recording Your Performance Record your performance by using the Quick Recording feature. This is an effective practice tool, allowing you to easily compare your own performance to the original song you are practicing. You can also use it to practice duet pieces by yourself, if you have your teacher or partner record his or her part beforehand. 1 Press the [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song for recording is automatically set. 2 Select a Voice (page 32). The selected Voice will be recorded. 3 Press the [REC] button. 4 Start recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. 5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. A message prompting you to save the recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button. 6 42 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 7 1 2 3 4 5 Save the recorded performance. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song selection display. Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the appropriate tab (USER, USB, etc.) to which you want to save the data. Select USER to save the data to internal memory, or select USB to save the data to a USB storage device. Press the [6†] (SAVE) button to call up the file naming display. Quick Guide Enter the file name (page 74). Press the [8π] (OK) button to save the file. To cancel the Save operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. CAUTION The recorded song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. When the following message appears: “Song” changed. Save?/“Song” speichern?/“Song” modifié. Sauv.?/“Song” cambiado. ¿Guardar?/Salvare “’Song” ? The recorded data has not yet been saved. To save the data, press the [G] (YES) button to open the Song selection display and save the data (see above). To cancel the operation, press the [H] (NO) button. Playing Songs saved to a USER/USB storage device Refer to page 36. Playing Backing Parts with the performance assistant Technology This feature makes it exceptionally easy to play the backing parts along with Song playback. n Before using performance assistant technology To use the performance assistant technology, the Song must contain chord data. If the Song contains this data, the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not. 1 Select a Song (page 35). In these example instructions, we recommend that you use the Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING 3 Press the [8π†] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) on. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 43 Quick Guide 4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. 5 Play the keyboard. The instrument automatically matches your performance on the keyboard to the Song playback and chords, no matter what keys you play. It even changes the sound according to the way you play. Try playing in the three different ways below. ● Playing the left and right hand together ● Playing the left and right hand together ● Playing the left hand and right hand (method 1). (method 2). alternately. Play three notes at the same time with your right hand. Play several notes one after the other with different fingers of your right hand. Play three notes at the same time with your right hand. 6 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. 7 Press the [8π†] button to turn the [P.A.T.] (Performance Assistant) off. Playing Accompaniment with the Auto Accompaniment Feature (Style Playback) The Auto Accompaniment features let you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra— even if you’re playing by yourself. The Auto Accompaniment sound is made up of the rhythm patterns of the Styles. The Styles of the instrument cover a wide range of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and many others. 44 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Accompaniment Feature MARY HAD A LITTLE LAMB Traditional Style: Country Pop C 3 2 1 C 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 2 C 2 C 4 G 3 2 1 3 3 4 5 Quick Guide 1 C G 3 1 2 Ending C 1 1 Press the STYLE CONTROL “COUNTRY” button. Enabling tempo display above Style name You can select whether the tempo is displayed above the Style name or not. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] CONFIG 2 Select the [B] (2 DISPLAY STYLE TEMPO) button, and use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to switch the tempo display on/off. • ON: Tempo is displayed above the Style name. With the default settings, the Display Style Tempo function is on. • OFF: Tempo is not displayed above the Style name. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 45 Quick Guide 2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style “CountryPop.” n • The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. For details on the characteristics, see page 103. • When the [7π] (REPERTOIRE) button is pressed after selecting a Style, you can call up the custom panel settings (for voices and tempos, etc.) designed to best match the selected Style. To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT] button. • You can instantly jump back to the original display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A]–[J] buttons. 3 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment. Use the left-hand section (lower part) of the keyboard to play the chords for sounding the Auto Accompaniment. 3 4 5 4 5 6 Press the [SYNC START] button to set Auto Accompaniment to standby—letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Auto Accompaniment starts. Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. n Chord Fingerings There are seven different fingering methods you can use to specify chords (page 103). 6 Automatically play an appropriate ending by pressing the [ENDING] button, at the point in the score (page 45) indicated by “Ending.” When Ending playback is finished, the Style automatically stops. n • About the various Styles Refer to the Style List in the separate Data List booklet. • Quickly changing the Style tempo during a performance (Tap function) The tempo can also be changed during playback by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button twice at the desired tempo. • Specifying the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range) See page 107. • Turns touch response on/off for the Style playback (Style Touch) See page 106. 46 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the volume balance between the Style and the keyboard (page 40) This lets you adjust the volume balance between Style playback and the sound you play on the keyboard. 1 Call up the Main display. [DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT] n The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display. If the Balance display is not selected, press the [EXIT] button. (On the CVP-401, open the volume balance display by pressing the [C] button.) 2 To adjust the Style volume, press the [2π†] button. To adjust the keyboard (RIGHT 1) volume, press the [6π†] button. Quick Guide Pattern Variation While you play, you can automatically add specially created intros and endings, as well as variations in the rhythm/ chord patterns, for more dynamic, professional-sounding performances. There are several different auto accompaniment pattern variations for each situation: starting your performance, during your performance, and ending your performance. Try out the variations and combine them freely. To Start Playing ● Start/Stop Styles start playing back as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed. ● Intro This is used for the beginning of the song. Each preset Style features three different intros. When the intro finished playing, accompaniment shifts to the Main section (see “Main” in the “During Style playback” below). Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons before starting Style playback and press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start Style playback. ● Synchro Start This lets you start playback as soon as you play the keyboard. Press the [SYNC START] button when Style playback is stopped and play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard to start Style playback. ● Tap Tap out the tempo and automatically start the Style at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the [TAP TEMPO] button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the Style playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. n The particular drum sound and the velocity (loudness) of the sound when the Tap function is used can be selected in the following display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB[√] CONFIG 1 → [B] 4 TAP Fade In For information on the settings, see page 187. n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 105. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 47 During Style Playback Quick Guide ● Main This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats indefinitely. Each preset Style features four different patterns. Press one of the MAIN [A]–[D] buttons during Style playback. ● Fill In The fill-in sections let you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. Turn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button before starting Style playback or during playback. Then, simply press one of the MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D) buttons as you play, and the selected fill-in section plays automatically (AUTO FILL), spicing up the auto accompaniment. When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section (A, B, C, D). Even when [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned off, pressing the same button of the currently playing section automatically plays a fill-in before returning to the same main section. ● Break This lets you add dynamic breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. Press the [BREAK] button during Style playback. To Finish Playing ● Start/stop Styles stop as soon as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button is pressed. ● Ending This is used for the ending of the Song. Each preset Style features three different endings. When the ending is finished, the Style stops automatically. Press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons during Style playback. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same ENDING/rit. button again while the ending is playing back. n If you press the ENDING/rit. [I] button in the middle of your performance, a fill-in automatically plays before the ENDING/rit. [I]. ● Fade Out For information on the settings, see page 187. n For details on setting the fade-in and fade-out time, see page 105. Others ● Synchro Stop When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the Style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in the chord section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance. Press the [SYNC STOP] button before starting the Style playback. n • Enable Synchro Stop by pressing/releasing keys (Synchro Stop Window) See page 106. • Fixing the section pattern to either Intro or Main (Section Set) For example, you can set this function to Intro to conveniently have an Intro play automatically whenever you select a Style (page 106). 48 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual About the section button (INTRO/MAIN/ENDING, etc.) lamps • Green The section is not selected. • Red The section is currently selected. • Off The section contains no data and cannot be played. Quick Guide Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback Learning the Notes to Play for Certain Chords If know the name of a chord but don’t know how to play it, you can have the instrument show you the notes to play (Chord Tutor function). 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√][®] CHORD FINGERING 2 Press the [6π†] button to select the root note. 2 3 3 Press the [7π†]/[8π†] button to select the chord type. The notes you need to play to make the selected chord are shown in the display. n The notes that are displayed correspond to Fingered, no matter which fingering type is selected (page 104). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 49 Checking How to Play Chords with the Guide Lamps For Songs containing chord data, you can have the individual notes of the chords indicated with the Guide lamps on the instrument. 1 Quick Guide 2 Select a Song (page 35). Press the [FUNCTION] button and press the [B] button to call up the Song Setting display, and make sure that the GUIDE MODE is set to “Follow Lights.” 3 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment. 4 Press the [GUIDE] button. 5 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. The Guide lamps in the chord section of the keyboard flash according to the chords of the Song. Try practicing the chords, matching the Guide lamps. Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style (One Touch Setting) One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (Voices or effects, etc.) for the currently selected Style, with the touch of a single button. If you’ve already decided which Style you wish to use, you can have One Touch Setting automatically select the appropriate Voice for you. 1 Select a Style (page 46 step 2). 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons. Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (Voices, effects, etc.) that match the current Style—it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC START, so that you can immediately start playing the Style. 3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the selected Style starts. n Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 128). 50 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Helpful hints for using One Touch Setting ● Automatically changing One Touch Settings with the Main sections (OTS Link) The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section (A–D).To use the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button. n Setting the timing for OTS changes The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings (page 106). ● Memorizing the panel settings to the OTS You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups. Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as desired. 2 3 Press the [MEMORY] button. 4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons. A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings. It is possible to save the panel settings with another file (step 4), so register it in a favorite number from 1 to 4. 2 Quick Guide 1 3 Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style selection display and save the panel settings as a Style file (page 70). CAUTION The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save operation. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 51 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Each Song—Music Finder Quick Guide If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which Style and Voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function can help you out. Simply select the desired music genre from among the Music Finder “Records,” and the instrument automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style. A new record can be created by editing the currently selected one (page 110). n The data (records) of the Music Finder are not the same as Song data and cannot be played back. 1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 1 3 2 Press the TAB [√] button to select the ALL tab. The ALL tab contains the preset records. 3 Select the desired record by using the following four search categories. To select a record, press the [2π†]/[3π†] buttons. n • You can also select the desired record by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. • Searching the records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword—and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria (page 108). • MUSIC ...............Contains the song title or music genre that describes each record, letting you easily find the desired music style. n Skipping up or down through the song alphabetically When sorting records by song title, use the [1π†] button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [π†] buttons to move the cursor to the first record. • STYLE.................This is the preset Style assigned to the record. n Skipping up or down through the Style alphabetically When sorting records by Style name, use the [4π†]/[5π†] button to skip up or down through the Styles alphabetically. Simultaneously press the [π†] buttons to move the cursor to the first record. • BEAT ..................This is the time signature registered to each Record. • TEMPO .............. This is the assigned tempo setting for the record. 52 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 4 Play the keyboard. Notice that the panel settings have been automatically changed to match the music genre of the selected record. n • Tempo Lock Tempo Lock function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during Style playback when selecting another record. To turn on the Tempo Lock function, press the [I] (TEMPO LOCK) button in the Music Finder display. • Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 128). Quick Guide Calling up the panel settings to match the Style (Repertoire) The convenient Repertoire function automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for the currently selected Style. 1 Select the desired Style for which you want to call up the panel settings from the “PRESET”/“USER” tab on Style selection display. n The Repertoire function is valid for Styles in the “PRESET”/“USER” tab. The Repertoire function cannot be used for Styles saved to a USB storage device. To use the Repertoire function, save the desired Style in “USER” tab. 2 Press the [7π] (REPERTOIRE) button. The panel settings that match the Style under selection is searched according to the record group of the Music Finder. The list of the search results is shown on the “SEARCH 2” display of the Music Finder. CAUTION When the result of searching the record in the “SEARCH 2” display has already been shown, the searched result is lost. 3 Press the [2π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the desired panel settings. Sorting the records Press the [F] (SORT BY) button to sort the records. • MUSIC .................. The record is sorted by song title. • STYLE.................... The record is sorted by Style name. • BEAT ..................... The record is sorted by beat. • TEMPO ................. The record is sorted by tempo. Changing the order of the records Press the [G] (SORT ORDER) button to change the order of the records (ascending or descending). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 53 Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance Quick Guide Connect a microphone to the instrument (CVP-405/403) and sing along with Song playback (Karaoke) or your own performance. The lyrics can be displayed when the Song contains lyric data. Sing with the microphone as you read the lyrics shown in the display. Lyrics can also be displayed with the music score, letting you play and sing while following along with the notation and lyrics. Connecting a Microphone (CVP-405/403) 1 2 3 Make sure you have a conventional dynamic microphone. Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum position. Connect the microphone to the [MIC./LINE IN] jack. n Always set the INPUT VOLUME to minimum when nothing is connected to the [MIC/LINE IN] jack. Since the [MIC/LINE IN] jack is highly sensitive, it may pick up and produce noise when nothing is connected. INPUT VOLUME MIN MIC. LINE IN MIC. LINE PHONES MAX 2, 5 34 4 5 Set the [MIC. LINE] switch to “MIC.” (For microphones having a power source, turn on the power first.) Adjust the [INPUT VOLUME] knob while singing into the microphone. Adjust the controls while checking the SIGNAL and OVER lamps. The SIGNAL lamp lights to indicate that an audio signal is being received. Make sure to adjust the INPUT VOLUME so that this lamp is light. The OVER lamp lights when the input level is too high. Make sure to adjust the INPUT VOLUME so that this lamp does not light. Disconnecting the microphone 1 Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob on the bottom panel of the instrument to the minimum position. 2 Disconnect the microphone from the [MIC./LINE IN] jack. n Set the [INPUT VOLUME] knob to the minimum position before turning off the power. 54 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Singing with the Lyrics Display Try singing while playing back a Song containing lyric data 1 Select a Song (page 35). 2 Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] (CVP-403/401: [LYRICS]) button to display the lyrics. When the Text display appears, press the [1†] (LYRICS) button to display the lyrics. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Quick Guide 3 Sing while following along with the lyrics on the display. The color of the lyrics changes as the Song plays. 4 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback. n • When the lyrics are unreadable You may need to change the Lyrics Language setting to “International” or “Japanese” in the Song Setting display ([FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING), if the lyrics shown are garbled or unreadable. This setting can be memorized as part of the Song data (page 158). • Changing the Lyrics Background Picture (CVP-405) You can change the background picture of the Lyrics display. Press the [7π†]/[8π†] (BACKGROUND) button in the Lyrics display to call up the Lyrics picture selection display for the available picture files and select the desired one. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. The lyrics background picture can be saved to the Song (page 158). • Changing the lyrics You can change the lyrics as desired (page 162). Displaying Text (CVP-405) This feature lets you show text files (created on a computer) in the display of the instrument, enabling various useful possibilities, such as the showing of lyrics, chord names, and text notes. 1 2 3 4 5 Connect the USB storage device containing the text file to [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button to display the text. When the lyrics are displayed, press the [1†] (TEXT) button to display the text. Press the [5π†]/[6π†] (TEXT FILE) buttons to call up the Text selection display. Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the desired TAB. Double-click one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a text file. If the text is long, use the TAB [√][®] buttons to select other pages. n An optional foot pedal can also be used to turn pages (page 187). The following additional settings are available in the TEXT display: LYRICS ..........................................Switches the screen to the Lyrics display. CLEAR...........................................Clears the text from the display (the text data itself is not erased). F (FIXED) 11 pt (point)– P (PROPORTIONAL) 16 pt............Determines the text type (fixed or proportional) and font size. TEXT FILE......................................Opens the Text selection display. BACK GROUND...........................Allows changing of the background picture of the text display, as in the Lyrics display described above. The background setting is common for both the Lyrics display and Text display. n • The text file, which is copied in the USER tab can be showed. • Line feed (or “carriage return”) is not automatically performed in the instrument. If a sentence is not displayed in its entirety because of limitations in the screen space, execute the line feed on your computer. • When the background color is specified in the song data, the BACKGROUND setting cannot be changed. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 55 Quick Guide Displaying the lyrics/text on an external TV monitor (CVP-405) The lyrics/text indicated on the display can also be output via the VIDEO OUT terminal. 1 Use an appropriate video cable to connect the [VIDEO OUT] connector of the instrument to the Video input connector on the TV monitor. 2 Set the external television/video monitor signal (NTSC or PAL) used by your video equipment, if necessary. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] SCREEN OUT 2 Press the [1π†] button to select the external television/video monitor signal. L L+R VIDEO OUT AUX IN Convenient Functions for Karaoke Adjusting the tempo ➤ page 31 Transpose ➤ See below. Applying Effects to Your Voice (CVP-405/403) ➤ page 56 Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice (CVP-405/403) ➤ page 57 Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch (Vocal CueTIME) (CVP-405/403) ➤ page 137 Transpose You can use this to adjust the key of the Song if it is too high or low. • Transposing the Song key up................ Press the TRANSPOSE [+] button. • Transposing the Song key down ........... Press the TRANSPOSE [–] button. • Resetting the transposition ................... Press the TRANSPOSE [+][–] buttons simultaneously. Applying Effects to Your Voice (CVP-405/403) You can also apply various effects to your voice. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY 2 Press the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to turn the effect on. n Selecting an effect type You can select the effect type in the Mixing Console (page 91). 56 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual R Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice (CVP-405/403) You can also automatically apply various harmony vocals to your voice. 1 Select a Song which contains chord data (page 35). If the Song contains this data, the current chord name will be displayed in the Main display during Song playback, letting you easily check whether the Song contains chord data or not. 2 Call up the operation display. 3 Quick Guide [FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY Press the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons to turn the harmony vocals (Vocal Harmony) on. 4 3 4 Press the [H] button to call up the Vocal Harmony selection display. 5 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type. For details on the Vocal Harmony types, refer to the separate Data List. 6 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on Auto Accompaniment. 7 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button and sing into the microphone. The harmony is applied to your voice according to the chord data. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 57 Adjusting the microphone and Song volume (page 40) You can adjust the volume balance between the Song playback and the microphone. 1 Call up the Main display. [DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT] n The Balance display is indicated at the bottom of the Main display. If the Balance display is not indicated, press the [EXIT] button. Quick Guide 2 To adjust the microphone volume, press the [4π†] button. To adjust the Song volume, press the [1π†] button. Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance Changing the Key (Transpose) ➤ See below. Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics on TV (CVP-405) ➤ page 59 Making Announcements Between Songs (CVP-405/403) ➤ page 59 Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice (Karao-Key) ➤ page 137 Changing the Key (Transpose) You can match both the Song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, the Song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the keys, set the Master Transpose to “0,” the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and the Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the keyboard part up and the song data down to your desired singing key. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [®] KEYBOARD/PANEL → [B] TRANSPOSE ASSIGN 2 Press the [4π†]/[5π†] button to select the desired transpose type. The following types are available. Select the one most suited to your purpose. ●KEYBOARD Transpose pitch of the keyboard played Voices and Style playback (controlled by what you play in the chord section of the keyboard). ●SONG Transposes the pitch of Song playback. ●MASTER Transpose the overall pitch of the instrument. 3 Press the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] button to transpose. You can set the value in semitone steps. To reset the transpose value, press the [+][–] buttons simultaneously. 4 58 Press the [EXIT] button to close the TRANSPOSE display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Displaying the Music Score on the Instrument and the Lyrics and Text on TV (CVP-405) This convenient sing-along function lets you have the music score shown on the display of the instrument (for your playing purposes), while only the lyrics are shown on a separate TV (page 56) so your audience can sing along. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] SCREEN OUT Press the [3π]/[4π] button to select LYRICS. Quick Guide 2 Making Announcements Between Songs (CVP-405/403) This function is ideal for making announcements between your singing performances. When singing a song, several effects are usually assigned to the MIC Setup. When speaking to your audience, however, these effects may sound disturbing or unnatural. Whenever the TALK function is turned on, effects are automatically turned off. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY 2 Press the [2π]/[3π] (TALK) button to turn the function on. n Talk settings can be customized as well, allowing you to add any desired effects to your voice as you speak to your audience (page 170). 2 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 59 Quick Guide Recording Your Performance as Audio (USB Audio Recorder) (CVP-405/403) Here you’ll learn how to record your performance as audio data to a USB storage device. For example, by connecting a guitar, microphone or other device to the instrument, you can record an ensemble performance of guitar and keyboard together or record yourself singing along with Song playback. The performance data is saved as a WAV file of conventional CD quality (44.1 kHz/16 bit). Since it is possible to play back the file on computer, a listener doesn’t need to have the particular instrument in order to hear the performance. This makes it possible to easily share your performances and recordings with your friends via e-mail, record your own CDs, or upload the recordings to websites for many others to enjoy as well. Recording methods on the instrument include MIDI recording as well as audio recording. For details about the difference between audio and MIDI recording, see page 192. For specific instructions on MIDI recording, refer to page 196. n • In order to record your own original CD, you’ll need a CD-R drive (or compatible device). Refer to the manual that came with your specific computer for details. • When you attach a recorded file in an e-mail message, make sure the file size is small enough to be sent. The following sounds can be recorded. • Internal tone generator of the instrument. Keyboard parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left), Song parts, Style parts • Input from a microphone, guitar or other instrument (via the [MIC./LINE IN] jack). • Input from another audio device, such as a CD player, MP3 player or the like (via the [MIC./LINE IN] jack). n Songs protected by copyright, such as preset songs, and the metronome sound cannot be recorded. The recorded data using this function is saved as: • Stereo WAV data • 44.1 kHz sample rate/16 bit resolution Recording Your Performance as Audio Now, try recording a performance of your singing along with Song playback with a connected microphone. The maximum amount of recording time is 80 minutes, though this may differ depending on the capacity of the particular USB storage device. 1 Set the desired Voice, etc. which you want to use for your performance, and connect a microphone. (For information on setting the Voice, see page 28; for connecting a microphone, see page 54.) Here, you’ll also see by example how to sing along with accompaniment/Style playback. To set the Style, go on to step 6 (page 46). 2 Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. n • To record your performance by USB Audio Recorder, use the compatible USB flash memory. When the USB flash memory is not compatible, it is not likely to be able to record/playback normally. • Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 22. 60 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 3 Press the [USB] button. 3 5 Quick Guide 4 4 Press the [E] (USB AUDIO RECORDER) button to call up the recording display (USB AUDIO RECORDER display). If necessary, press the [E] (PROPERTY) button to call up the Property display, then check the information of the USB storage device. 5 6, 7 8 The following information is indicated on the PROPERTY display. • DRIVE NAME ...................................... Number of the USB storage device (USB 1, USB 2, etc.) • ALL SIZE .............................................. Size of USB storage device • FREE AREA........................................... Available recording space on the USB storage device • POSSIBLE TIME.................................... Available time for recording Press the [F] (OK)/[EXIT] button to close the PROPERTY display. n The USB storage device of “USB1” is selected as the recording destination when multiple USB storage devices are connected. To check the number of the USB storage device (USB1 and USB2, etc.), press the [A]/[B]/[F] button on the display of step 4, and change the tab. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. 6 Start recording by pressing the [J] (REC) button, then start your performance. When recording begins, the “RECORDING” indication on the display changes to red (CVP-405), and the elapsed recording time is displayed. CAUTION Avoid frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB storage device, or turning the power on/off too often. Doing so may corrupt the USB storage device data or the recording data. 7 Stop recording by pressing the [J] (STOP) button. The file name is automatically named (and is always given a new, unique name), and a message indicating the file name is displayed. n The recording operation continues, even if you close the Recording display by pushing the [EXIT] button. To stop the recording, press the [J] (STOP) button on the Recording display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 61 Playing Back the Recorded Performance Play back the recorded performance. 1 Call up the USB AUDIO RECORDER display. [USB] → [E] (USB AUDIO RECORDER). 2 Press the [7π†]/[8π†] (AUDITION) button to display the audio files (WAV data) saved to the connected USB storage device. Quick Guide The file recorded is selected in step 1-7 (page 60). For information about the operation method to change the name of the displayed file or to delete a file, see the section “File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display” on page 69. However, the operation that copies/moves file/folder to the User tab cannot be done here. 3 Press one of the [A]-[J] buttons corresponding to the file you want to listen to, then press the [8†] (AUDITION) button. The song is played back from the beginning, and the display indicates the auditioning process. This display closes automatically when auditioning is stopped. Press the [G] (CANCEL) or [EXIT] button to stop auditioning. CAUTION Avoid frequently connecting/disconnecting the USB storage device, or turning the power on/off too often. Doing so may corrupt the USB storage device data or the auditioning data. n Audio recording is processed internally so that playback volume will be appropriate when played on a computer. Therefore, the playback sound might be distorted if you record at too high a volume. In this case, lower and adjust the volume of each part with Volume Balance display (page 40) and the Mixing Console (page 87), etc., and try recording again. 4 62 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the USB AUDIO RECORDER display shown in step 4 of “Recording Your Performance as Audio” above. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation Selecting Message Language You can select the desired language of the display messages. 1 2 3 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®] OWNER Use [4π†]/[5π†] (LANGUAGE) buttons to select the language. The language selected here is also used for various “Messages” shown during operations. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. Basic Operation 3 2 The Messages Shown in the Display A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When the message appears, simply press the appropriate button. In this example, press the [F] (YES) button to start formatting the MEDIA (USB storage device such as USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 63 Instant Selection of the Displays—Direct Access Instant Selection of the Displays— Direct Access With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display—with just a single additional button press. 1 Basic Operation 2 Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button. A message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. Refer to the separate Data List for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function. Example of calling up the Guide function display Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [GUIDE] button. 1 2 Returning to the Main display You can conveniently return to the Main display from any other display by simply pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. 64 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) There are two basic display types – Main and Selection. Here are explanations of each display segment and its basic operation. Main Display The Main display shows the current basic settings of the instrument such as the currently selected Voice and Style, allowing you to see them at a single glance. The Main display is the one you’ll usually see when you play the keyboard. CVP-405/403 ) 7 8 ! 7 9 1 8 ! 9 Basic Operation Returning to the Main display Here’s a convenient way to return to the Main display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. CVP-401 1 6 2 4 3 5 6 3 2 5 4 1 Voice name • RIGHT 1 (indicated at the right edge): Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 1 part (page 80). • RIGHT 2 (indicated at the right edge): Voice name currently selected for the RIGHT 2 part (page 80). • LEFT (indicated at the right edge): Voice name currently selected for the LEFT part (page 80). When the Left Hold function is ON, an “H” indication appears (page 85). Pressing one of the [A]–[C] and [F]–[H] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each part (page 32). On the CVP-401, one of the [A]–[B] and [F]–[I] buttons calls up the Voice Selection display for each part (page 32). 2 Style name and related information Displays the currently selected Style name, time signature and tempo. On the CVP-405/ 403, pressing the [D] button calls up the Style Selection display (page 46). On the CVP401, open the Style Selection display by pressing the [1π†]–[4π†] buttons. 3 Current chord name If the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is set to On, the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard will be displayed. 4 Song name and related information Displays the currently selected Song name, time signature and tempo. On the CVP-405/ 403, pressing the [I] button calls up the Style Selection display (page 46). On the CVP401, open the Style Selection display by pressing the [5π†]–[8π†] buttons. If the Song contains the chord data, the current chord name will be displayed in the “CHORD” segment (see 3 above). Pressing the [I] button calls up the Song Selection display (page 35). 5 Registration Memory Bank name Displays the currently selected Registration Memory Bank name. Pressing the [J] button calls up the Registration Memory Bank Selection display (page 128). When the Freeze function is ON, an “F” indication appears (page 129). 6 Volume Balance Displays the volume balance among the parts. On the CVP-401, open the volume balance display by pressing the [C] button. Adjust the volume balance among the parts by using the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons. 7 Transpose Displays the amount of transposition in semitone units (page 56). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 65 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) 8 Tempo Displays the current tempo of the Song or Style. 9 BAR (current position of the Song or Style) Displays the current position of the Song or bar and beat number from playback start of the Style. ) Recording status of USB Audio recorder (CVP-405/403) While recording, a “REC” indication appears. ! Registration Sequence Appears when the Registration Sequence is active (page 130). File Selection Display Configuration and Basic Operation Basic Operation The File Selection display appears when you press one of the buttons shown below. From here you can select Voices, Styles, and other data. VOICE category selection buttons SONG SELECT button STYLE category selection buttons REGIST BANK selection buttons File Selection Display Configuration • Location (drive) of data Preset Location where pre-programmed (preset) data is stored. User Location where recorded or edited data is saved. USB Location where data on USB storage device (USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc) is saved. Hereafter in this manual, any USB storage device such as USB flash memory/floppy disk, etc. will be referred to as “USB storage device.” 66 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) • Data files and folders The data, both pre-programmed and your own original, are saved as “files.” You can drop files into a folder. Folder File Folder Icon Basic Operation File Selection Display Basic Operation 1 Select the file to which the data is saved. You can also select the specified file to which the data is to be saved by pressing the [USB]/ [USER] buttons. [USB]/[USER] → [A] SONG/[B] STYLE/[F] VOICE → [A]–[J] 3 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 3 Select the tab containing the desired file by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Select the page containing the desired file by using the [1π]–[7π] buttons ([1π]–[5π] buttons for Voice, [1π]–[6π] buttons for Song and Style). Select the file. There are two ways to do so. • Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons. • Select the file by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button to execute. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 67 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Closing the current folder and calling up the next highest level folder To close the current folder and call up the next highest level folder, press the [8π] (UP) button. Example of the PRESET Voice Selection display The PRESET Voice files are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Basic Operation This display shows the Voice files in a folder. The next highest level—in this case, folder—is shown. Each folder shown in this display contains appropriately categorized Voices. 68 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) File/Folder Operations in the File Selection Display • Saving Files ............................................................................................. page 70 • Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste)....................................................... page 71 • Moving Files (Cut & Paste)....................................................................... page 72 • Deleting Files/Folders .............................................................................. page 72 • Renaming Files/Folders ........................................................................... page 73 • Selecting Custom Icons for Files (shown at the left of file name) .............. page 73 • Creating a New Folder ............................................................................ page 73 • Entering characters.................................................................................. page 74 Basic Operation Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the format operation. CAUTION The format operation deletes any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage medias. 1 Insert a USB storage device for formatting into the [USB TO DEVICE]. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√][®]MEDIA 3 Press the [A]/[B] buttons to select the “USB” Tabs (USB1/USB2) connected to the devices in step 1. 4 Press the [H] button to format the media. The indications USB 1, USB 2, etc. will be displayed depending on the number of the connected devices. 3 4 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 69 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Saving Files This operation lets you save your original data (such as Songs and Voices you’ve created) to a file. 1 After you’ve created a Song or Voice in the relevant SONG CREATOR or VOICE SET display, press the [SAVE] display button. The File Selection display for the corresponding data appears. Keep in mind that the Save operation is executed from the File Selection display. Basic Operation Internal memory (User tab displays) capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 1.4MB (CVP-405/403), or about 560KB (CVP-401). This capacity applies to all file types, including Voice, Style, Song, and Registration data files. 2 3 4 5 70 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Select the appropriate tab (USER/USB) to which you want to save the data by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [6†] (SAVE) button to call up the file naming display. Enter the file name (page 74). Press the [8π] (OK) button to save the file. If you want to cancel the Save operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. The saved file will be automatically located at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Restrictions for protected Songs Commercially available song data may be copy protected to prevent illegal copying or accidental erasure. They are marked by the indications at the upper left side of the file names. The indications and relevant restrictions are detailed below. Indicates Preset Songs saved to the User tab display, Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) Songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft Songs. These cannot be copied/moved/saved to USB storage device. Prot. 2 Orig Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage device. Prot. 2 Edit Indicates edited “Prot. 2 Orig” Songs. Make sure to save these to the same folder containing the corresponding “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. These cannot be copied. These can be moved/saved only to the USER tab display and USB storage device. Basic Operation Prot. 1 Note for “Prot. 2 Orig” and “Prot. 2 Edit” Song file operation Make sure to save the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song to the same folder containing its original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song. Otherwise the “Prot. 2 Edit” Song cannot be played back. Also, if you move a “Prot. 2 Edit” Song, be sure to move its original “Prot. 2 Orig” Song to the same location (folder) at the same time. Copying Files/Folders (Copy & Paste) This operation lets you copy a file/folder and paste it to another location (folder). 1 2 3 Call up the display containing the file/folder you want to copy. Press the [3†] (COPY) button to copy the file/folder. The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/ folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. ■ Selecting all files/folders Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. 4 5 6 Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Select the destination tab (USER/USB) to paste the file/folder, by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder. The folder/file copied and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 71 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Moving Files (Cut & Paste) This operation lets you cut a file and paste it to another location (folder). 1 2 Basic Operation 3 Call up the display containing the file you want to move. Press the [2†] (CUT) button to cut the file. The pop-up window for the Cut operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. ■ Selecting all files Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. 4 5 6 Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file selection. To cancel the Cut operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Select the destination tab (USER/USB) to which the file is to be pasted, by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the file. The file moved and pasted appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. Deleting Files/Folders This operation lets you delete a file/folder. 1 2 3 Call up the display containing the file/folder you want to delete. Press the [5†] (DELETE) button. The pop-up window for the Delete operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. To cancel the selection, press the same [A]–[J] button again. ■ Selecting all files/folders Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display including the other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. 4 5 Deleting all data in a USB storage device at once Formatting a USB storage device completely erases all data on the USB storage device (page 69). 72 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Delete operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Follow the on-display instructions. YES ........................Delete the file/folder YES ALL .................Delete all selected files/folders NO ........................Leave the file/folder as is without deleting CANCEL.................Cancel the Delete operation Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Renaming Files/Folders This operation lets you rename files/folders. 1 2 5 6 Press the [1†] (NAME) button. The pop-up window for the Rename operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons corresponding to the desired file/folder. Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Rename operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Basic Operation 3 4 Call up the display containing the file/folder you want to rename. Input the name (characters) of the selected file or folder (page 74). The renamed folder/file appears on the display at the appropriate position among the files in alphabetical order. Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name. Selecting Custom Icons for Files (Shown at the Left of File Name) You can select custom icons for files (shown at the left of file name). 1–4 5 6 7 8 Operations are the same as the above “Renaming Files/Folders” section. Press the [1†] (ICON) button to call up the ICON display. Select the icon by using the [A]–[J] buttons or [3π†]–[5π†] buttons. The ICON display includes several pages. Press the TAB [®] button to select different pages. To cancel the operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply the selected icon. Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name. Creating a New Folder This operation lets you create new folders. Folders can be created, named and organized as desired, making it easier to find and select your original data. 1 2 3 Call up the page of the File Selection display for which you wish to create a new folder. Press the [7†] (FOLDER) button to call up the naming display for a new folder. Input the name of the new folder (page 74). A new folder cannot be made in the PRESET tab. Folder directories for the USER tab display In the USER tab display, folder directories can contain up to four levels. The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 740 (CVP-405/403), 370 (CVP-401), but this may differ depending on the length of the file names. The maximum number of files/folders which can be stored in a folder in the USER tab is 250. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 73 Basic Displays (Main Display and File Selection Display) Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files/ folders and when entering the Keyword for Music Finder function/website. The method is much the same as entering names and numbers to a conventional mobile phone. Entering characters should be done in the display shown below. 1 • If you select a language other than Japanese as the Language (page 63), the following different types of characters are available: CASE......................Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) case .......................Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) • If you select Japanese as the Language (page 63), the following different types of characters and sizes can be entered: (kana-kan) ...Hiragana and Kanji, marks (full size) (kana) ............Katakana (normal size), marks (full size) (kana) ..............Katakana (half size), marks (half size) A B C .....................Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size) ABC .......................Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) Basic Operation Depending on the display for character entry you are working in, some types of characters cannot be entered. Even if you select Japanese as the Language, when you enter the characters in the lyrics editing display (page 162), the Internet Setting display (page 179), or website, the type of characters “CASE”/“case” may be entered. 2 3 The following half-size marks cannot be entered for a file/ folder name. \/:*?"<>| Entering password or WEP key of wireless LAN connection in the website, those characters are converted to “*“. Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired position. Press the [2π†]–[6π†] and [7π] buttons, corresponding to the character you wish to enter. For details on entering characters, refer to the following section, below instruction step 4. Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. 4 In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks (with the exception of kanakan and half-size katakana), you can call up the mark list by pressing the [6†] button after selecting a character (before actual entry of a character). 74 Change the type of character by pressing the [1π] button. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Press the [8π] (OK) button to actually enter the new name and return to the previous display. Entering letters, numerals and symbols can be done by moving the cursor or pressing one of the character entry buttons. Alternately, you can wait for a short time and the characters will be entered automatically. • Deleting characters Move the cursor to the character you wish to delete by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and press the [7†] (DELETE) button. To delete all characters on the line at once, press and hold the [7†] (DELETE) button. • Entering special character marks (Japanese “ ” and “ ”) Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6†] button before actual entry of the character. • Entering marks 1 After actually entering a character by moving the cursor, press the [6†] button to call up the mark list. 2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor to the desired mark, then press the [8π] (OK) button. Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Basic Operation • Inserting a Character 1 Move the cursor to the desired position. Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above. 2 Press the [2π†]–[6π†], [7π] buttons to enter numbers and symbols. 3 Press the [8π] (OK) button to enter characters. • Entering a Space 1 Move the cursor to the desired position. Use the same operation as in “Deleting Characters” above. 2 Press [6†] button to call up the mark list. 3 Make sure the cursor is at the beginning space (blank) of the mark list, and press the [8π] (OK) button. • Entering numbers First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” ”CASE“ (half-size capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold down the appropriate button, [2π†]– [5π†], [6π] and [7π] button, for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected. • Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) When the entered “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the [1π]/[ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate kanji. To actually enter the change, press the [8π] (OK) button or enter the next character. When the entered “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted): • Re-converting the characters into other kanji Press the [1π]/[ENTER] button. • Changing the reversed area Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial. • Changing the converted kanji back to “hiragana” Press the [7†] (DELETE) button. • Clearing the reversed area at once Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. • Entering the “hiragana” itself (without converting it) Press the [8π] (OK) button. • Canceling the character-entering operation Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Restoring the Factory-programmed System While holding the C7 key (right-most key on the keyboard), turn the [POWER] button ON. This operation has the same result as and is a shortcut for the System Setup restore operation explained in step 2 of the following section. The operation of restoring the factory-programmed settings does not affect the Internet Settings. To reset the Internet Settings, refer to page 183. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 75 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item CAUTION 1 2 Basic Operation This operation deletes all your original data for the respective item (MIDI SETUP, USER EFFECT, MUSIC FINDER, and FILES&FOLDERS). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[®]SYSTEM RESET Select items by pressing the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons. SYSTEM SETUP Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory resettings. Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup. MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display to the original factory status. USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the user effect types, user master EQ types, and user vocal harmony types (CVP-405/403) created via the Mixing Console display to the original factory resettings. MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory resettings. FILES&FOLDERS Deletes all files and folders stored in the User tab display. REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected Bank. The same can be done also by turning the [POWER] button ON while holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). 4 2 3 4 3 Checkmark the box of the item to be reset to the factory programmed settings by pressing the [4π] button. Press the [D] button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all checkmarked items. Saving and Recalling Your Original Settings as a Single File For the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall. 1 2 76 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Make all desired settings on the instrument. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[®]SYSTEM RESET Data Backup 3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data. SYSTEM SETUP Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → UTILITY and microphone setting display (CVP-405/403) are handled as a single System Setup file. Refer to the separate Data List booklet for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup. MIDI SETUP The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the User tab display are handled as a single file. USER EFFECT The User Effect settings including the user effect types, user master EQ types, and user vocal harmony types (CVP-405/403) created via the Mixing Console displays are managed as a single file. MUSIC FINDER All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single file. 5 6 Basic Operation 4 Select one of the tabs (other than the PRESET) by pressing the TAB [√][®] buttons. Note that the file in the PRESET tab display is the file of factory-programmed settings. If you select it, the factory-programmed settings for the respective item will be restored. (This is the same results as on page 75 “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings Independently by Item”.) Save your file (page 70). To recall your file, select the tab and page to which you’ve saved the file (same tab and page as specified in step 4), and press the corresponding [A]–[J] button. Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your important data to a USB storage device. This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged. Data that can be saved1 1 Song*, Style, Registration Memory Bank and Voice 2 Music Finder Record, Effect**, MIDI Template and System File * Protected Songs (those with a “Prot.1/Prot.2” indication at the upper left of the file name) cannot be saved. However, Songs with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cut-and-paste operation) to a USB flash memory. **Effect data includes the following: - Edited or saved data in the Mixing Console “EFFECT/EQ.” - Edited or saved data of the Vocal Harmony type. (CVP-405/403) 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above, as well as the Internet settings. The backup procedure is different for the data types in 1, 2, and 3 above. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 77 Data Backup Backup procedure 1 Song, Style, Registration Memory Bank and Voice Data 1 Basic Operation 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Insert/connect the backup USB storage device (destination). Call up the display containing the desired file to be copied. Song: Press the [SONG SELECT] button. Style: Press the STYLE category selection buttons. Registration Memory Bank: Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–]. Voice: Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons. Select the USER tab by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [3†] (COPY) button to copy the file/folder. The pop-up window for the Copy operation appears at the bottom of the display. Press the [6†] (ALL) button to select all files/folders indicated on the current display and all other pages. To cancel the selection, press the [6†] (ALL OFF) button again. Press the [7†] (OK) button to confirm the file/folder selection. To cancel the Copy operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Select the destination USB tab to which the file/folder is to be copied, by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [4†] (PASTE) button to paste the file/folder. If a message appears indicating data cannot be copied Protected Songs (“Prot. 1/Prot.2” is indicated at the upper left side of the file names) are included in the copied files. These protected Songs cannot be copied. However, Songs with a “Prot.2” indication can be moved (cutand-paste operation) to a USB flash memory. 78 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 2 Music Finder Record, Effect, MIDI Template and System Data 1 2 3 4 5 Insert/connect the backup USB storage device (destination). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] SYSTEM RESET Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data. Select the appropriate USB tab to which you want to save the data by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. Save your data (page 70). 3 All data listed in 1 and 2 above 1 2 3 Insert/connect the backup USB storage device (destination). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] OWNER Press the [D] (BACKUP) button to save the data to the USB storage device. To restore the data, press the [E] (RESTORE) button in step 3 above. n • It takes a few minutes to complete the backup/restore operation. • Backup data which has not been created on the CVP405/403/401 cannot be restored. CAUTION Move the Protected Songs which are saved to the USER display before restoring. If the songs are not moved, the operation deletes the data. Using, Creating and Editing Voices Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing Voices ................................................................................ page 28 Playing the Piano Voice ........................................................... page 28 Playing Various Voices............................................................. page 32 Voice Characteristics The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Voice name. These rich and luscious Voices are comprised mostly of keyboard instrument sounds and are especially intended for playing piano and other keyboard parts. They also take full advantage of Yamaha’s advanced sampling technology such as Stereo Sampling, Dynamic Sampling (CVP-405/403), Sustain Sampling (CVP405/403), and Key-off Sampling (CVP-405/403). S. Articulation! (CVP-405) The Super Articulation voices sound remarkably authentic and natural, featuring the unique performance characteristics of each instrument—for example, guitar scratching sounds or the legato phrasing of wind instruments. They provide many of the same benefits as the MegaVoices (see below), but with greater playability and expressive control in real time. To effectively play these natural sounds in performance of certain voices, you may need to use the pedal or footswitch. For details on how to best play each voice, call up the Information window (pressing the [7π] button in the Voice Selection display). Mega Voice (CVP-405/403) The Mega Voices are not intended to be played from the keyboard. They are primarily designed for use with recorded MIDI sequence data (such as songs and styles). Some of the guitar and bass Voices in particular have been created as Mega Voices. What makes Mega Voices special is their use of velocity switching. Normal Voices use velocity switching, too—to make the sound quality and/or level of a Voice according to how strongly or softly you play it. This makes the instrument’s Voices sound authentic and natural. However, with Mega Voices, each velocity range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different sound. For example, a Mega guitar Voice includes the sounds of various performance techniques. In conventional instruments, different Voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect. However, now with Mega Voices, a convincing guitar part can be played with just a single Voice, using specific velocity values to play the desired sounds. Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to play the sounds, they’re not intended for playing from the keyboard. They are, however, very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data—especially when you want to avoid using several different Voices just for a single instrument part. Live! These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound—full of atmosphere and ambience. Cool! These Voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments—thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming. Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology—and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing! Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Organ Flutes! This authentic organ Voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ sounds. See page 100 for details. Using, Creating and Editing Voices Natural! Mega Voices Compatibility Mega Voices are unique to the Clavinova and are not compatible with other models. Any song/ style data you’ve created on the Clavinova using the Mega Voices will not sound properly when played back on other instruments. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 79 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Different Voices Simultaneously The instrument keyboard features various functions and performance conveniences that are simply unavailable on an acoustic instrument. It allows you to play several different Voices together in a layer, or play one Voice with your left hand while you play a different Voice (or even two layered Voices!) with your right. Keyboard Parts (Right 1, Right 2, Left) Voices can be assigned independently to each keyboard part: Right 1, Right 2, and Left. You can combine these parts by using the PART ON/OFF buttons to create a rich, ensemble sound. Using, Creating and Editing Voices Keyboard Part Combinations Adjusting the volume balance among parts Adjust the volume balance among the parts in the BALANCE display (page 40). ■ Playing a single Voice (Right 1 part) You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range. This is used for normal performance—for example, with the piano Voice. Make sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] buttons are turned off. Right 1 part ■ Dual: Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 parts) You can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar Voices to create a thicker sound. Right 2 part Right 1 part Refer to page 81 for Voice selection operations for the Right 2 part. Specifying the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range) See page 107. ■ Split: Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts) You can play different Voices with the left and right hands. For example, try playing the bass Voice with your left hand and the piano Voice with your right. The keyboard lamp will light at the split point of the keyboard. Left part Right 1 part Refer to page 82 for Voice selection operations for the Left part. ■ Dual+Split: Playing Three Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1, 2 and Left parts) You can combine these three parts to create a rich, ensemble sound. Left part 80 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Right 2 part Right 1 part Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Right 1 and 2 Parts) You can play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts by turning Dual on. 1 2 For the selected part, a LEFT mark appears at the right of the Voice name in the Main display. Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Right 2 part. Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display. Quickly selecting Voices for Right 1 and 2 parts You can quickly select the Right 1 and 2 part Voices, just from the VOICE category selection buttons. Press and hold one VOICE category selection buttons, then press another. The Voice of the first pressed button is automatically set for the Right 1 part, while the Voice of the second pressed button is set for the Right 2 part. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 3 Press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button to play two Voices simultaneously with the Right 1 and 2 parts. 3 4 4 5 6 4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. Play the keyboard. Press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button again to turn it off. Switching the Dual on/off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Dual on/off (when the PART ON/ OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] is appropriately assigned; page 187). This is useful for turning the Dual on and off while you play. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 81 Playing Different Voices Simultaneously Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left Parts) You can play different Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Right 1 and Left parts) by turning Split on. 1 Press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button to play different Voices with the Right and Left Hands (Right 1 and Left parts). For the selected part, a RIGHT mark appears at the left of the Voice name in the Main display. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 2 3 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the Left part. Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display. 3 4 Switching the Split on/off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the Split on/off (when the PART ON/ OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] is appropriately assigned; page 187). This is useful for turning the Split on and off while you play. 4 5 6 Specifying the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range) See page 107. 82 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 4 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. Play the keyboard. Press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button again to turn it off. Changing Pitch Changing Pitch Transpose Transpose the pitch of the keyboard up or down (in semitones). • Transposing during performance You can easily set the desired transposition of the overall sound of the instrument by pressing the TRANSPOSE [–]/[+] buttons. • Transposing before performance Change the transpose settings in the MIXING CONSOLE display. You can set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KBD), song playback (SONG), or overall sound of the instrument (MASTER), respectively. 1 Call up the operation display. [MIXING CONSOLE] → TAB [√][®] TUNE 2 Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to set the transposition. Using, Creating and Editing Voices Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument You can fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument—useful when you play the instrument along with other instruments or CD music. 1 2 Please note that the Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [√] MASTER TUNE Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to set the tuning. Press the 4 or 5’s [π] and [†] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the factory resetting of 440.0 Hz. Hz (Hertz): This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. Scale Tuning You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres. 1 2 3 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [®] SCALE TUNE Select the desired part for which you want to set the scale by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons. Checkmark the box by pressing the [8π] button. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale. The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is indicated in the keyboard illustration at the upper right of the display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 83 Changing Pitch 4 Change the following settings as necessary. • Tuning the individual notes of the keyboard (TUNE) 1 2 Cent: In musical terms a “cent” is 1/ 100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.) • Determines the base note for each scale. Press the [2π†] button to select the base note. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. Preset Scale Types Using, Creating and Editing Voices Instantly recalling the desired scale Register the desired scale to the Registration Memory. Be sure to checkmark the SCALE item when registering (page 127). Press the [3π†] button to select the note for tuning. Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to set the tuning in cents. EQUAL TEMPERAMENT The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. PURE MAJOR PURE MINOR These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies – such as choirs and a cappella singing. PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. WERCKMEISTER KIRNBERGER This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. ARABIC Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. Tuning values for Preset Scales (base note: C) (in cents) C C## D Ebb E F F## G Abb A Bbb B EQUAL TEMPERAMENT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PURE MAJOR 0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 PURE MINOR 0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 PYTHAGOREAN 0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2 MEAN-TONE 0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2 WERCKMEISTER 0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 KIRNBERGER 0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7 ARABIC 1 0 0 -50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 0 0 ARABIC 2 0 0 0 0 -50.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50.0 * In the display, the rounded off value is shown. 84 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard The instrument features a sophisticated multi-processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound. 1 2 4 Select the desired part for which you want to add effects by pressing one of the [A]–[C], [F]–[H] buttons. On the CVP-401, select the desired part for which you want to add effects by pressing one of the [A]–[B] and [F]–[I] buttons. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 3 Call up the operation display. [DIRECT ACCESS] → [EXIT] Press the [VOICE EFFECT] button to call up the VOICE EFFECT display. Use the buttons at the lower/right part of the display to apply effects to the Voices. Effect Parameters LEFT HOLD This function causes the LEFT part Voice to be held even when the keys are released. Non-decaying voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed). HARMONY/ ECHO The Harmony/Echo types are applied to the right-hand Voices (page 86). MONO/POLY This determines whether the part’s Voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically. Using the MONO mode lets you play single, lead sounds (such as brass instruments) more realistically. It also lets you expressively control the Portamento effect (depending on the selected Voice) by playing legato. DSP/DSP VARIATION With the digital effects built into the instrument, you can add ambience and depth to your music in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall. • The DSP switch is used to turn the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effect on or off for the currently selected keyboard part. • The DSP Variation switch is used to change between variations of the DSP effect. You could use this while you play, for example, to change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect. You can use a pedal to turn the Harmony/Echo effects on and off (page 187). Portamento: Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. The portamento time (the pitch transition time) can be set via the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 89). DSP: Stands for Digital Signal Processor (or Processing). DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to produce a wide range of effects. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 85 Adding Effects to Voices Played on the Keyboard Selecting the Harmony/Echo type You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types. In order to make the type you’ve selected here effective, set HARMONY/ECHO to On in the display shown in step 4 above. 1 2 3 Call up the operation display by pressing the [J] (TYPE SELECT) button. Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type (page 86). Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings (page 87). The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type. Harmony/Echo Types The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the particular effect applied. Using, Creating and Editing Voices Harmony Types These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the left-hand section of the keyboard. (Note that the “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord.) Echo Types These types apply echo effects to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo. Multi Assign Type This type applies a special effect to chords played in the right-hand section of the keyboard. Canceling the chord sound for the harmony effect This cancels the sound of the chord played in the chord range of the keyboard—letting you hear only the Harmony effect. Set [ACMP ON/OFF] to On, set [SYNC START] to Off, and select “Off” for the Stop Accompaniment parameter. ● Harmony Types When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the type selected above and the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard shown below. Split point Split point Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect Split Point (for Style) Split Point (for keyboard Voice) Chord section Left Voice for Style playback and Harmony effect 86 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Right 1 Right 2 Voices Left Voice and chord section for Harmony effect Right 1 Right 2 Voices Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) ● Multi Assign Type Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously in the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both of the keyboard part [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play. ● Echo Types When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo, trill) is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately. Harmony/Echo Settings VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo effect. This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the harmony/echo notes will be sounded. CHORD NOTE ONLY This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note (played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard. TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). Using, Creating and Editing Voices SPEED Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) The Mixing Console gives you intuitive control over aspects of the keyboard parts and Song/Style channels, including volume balance and the timbre of the sounds. It lets you adjust the levels and stereo position (pan) of each Voice to set the optimum balance and stereo image, and lets you set how the effects are applied. Basic Procedure 1 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. 2 1, 3 4 4 5 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 87 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) 2 About Parts See below. Using, Creating and Editing Voices Instantly setting all parts to the same value Once you’ve selected a parameter in step 4, you can instantly set the same value to all other parts. To do this, simultaneously hold down one of the [A]–[J] buttons, and use the [1]–[8] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. 3 4 5 6 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters, see the section “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays” on page 89. Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display for the relevant parts. The MIXING CONSOLE displays actually consist of several different part displays. The part name is indicated at the top of the display. The various MIXING CONSOLE displays alternate among the following: PANEL PART display → STYLE PART display → SONG CH 1–8 display → SONG CH 9–16 display Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired parameter. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the value. Save your MIXING CONSOLE settings. • Saving the PANEL PART display settings Register them to Registration Memory (page 127). • Saving the STYLE PART display settings Save them as Style data. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU → [B] STYLE CREATOR 2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display. 3 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display for saving your data, then save it (page 70). • Saving the SONG CH 1–8/9–16 display settings First register the edited settings as part of the Song data (SET UP), then save the Song. See the SONG CREATOR → CHANNEL display → SETUP item explanation on page 158. About Parts PANEL PART In the PANEL PART display of the MIXING CONSOLE, you can independently adjust the level balance among the Keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT), SONG, STYLE, and MIC parts (CVP-405/403). The part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [BALANCE] button (page 40). STYLE PART A Style consists of eight separate channels. Here you can adjust the level balance among these eight channels or parts. These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the STYLE display. SONG CH 1–8/9–16 A Song consists of sixteen separate channels. Here you can adjust the level balance among these sixteen channels or parts. These part components are the same as those that appear in the display when you press the panel [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the SONG display. 88 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) Adjustable Items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE Displays The following explanations cover the available items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE displays. VOL/VOICE SONG AUTO REVOICE See page 90. VOICE Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. When the Style channels are called up, neither Organ Flutes Voices nor User Voices can be selected. When the Song channels are called up, User Voices cannot be selected. PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part (channel). VOLUME Determines the level of each part or channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. • The RHY2 channel in the STYLE PART display can only be assigned to Drumkit Voices and SFX kit Voices. • When playing GM song data, channel 10 (in the SONG CH 9–16 page) can only be used for a Drum Kit Voice. FILTER Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 98) for each part. BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 98). Using, Creating and Editing Voices HARMONIC CONTENT TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. This parameter is available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono (page 85). PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND in semitones for each keyboard part (when a pedal is assigned to this function). OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves for each keyboard part. TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part. TRANSPOSE Allows you to set the transposition for the keyboard pitch (KEYBOARD), Song playback (SONG), or overall sound of the instrument (MASTER), respectively. EFFECT TYPE Select the desired effect type (page 92). After editing various parameters for the selected effect type, you can save it as an original effect. REVERB Adjusts the amount of the Reverb sound for each part or channel. CHORUS Adjusts the amount of the Chorus sound for each part or channel. DSP Adjusts the amount of the DSP sound for each part or channel. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 89 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) EQ (Equalizer) TYPE Select the desired EQ type to suit the type of music and the performance environment (page 94). This affects the overall sound of the instrument. EDIT For editing the EQ (page 95). EQ HIGH Determines the center frequency of the high EQ band that is attenuated/boosted for each part. EQ LOW Determines the center frequency of the low EQ band that is attenuated/boosted for each part. Song Auto Revoice Using, Creating and Editing Voices This feature lets you use the high-quality sounds of the instrument to full advantage with XG-compatible song data. When you play back any commercially available XG song data or that created on other instruments, you can use Auto Revoice to automatically assign the specially created Voices of the instrument (Natural!, Live!, Cool!, etc.) instead of the conventional XG Voices of the same type. 1–3 4 5 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 87. In step 2, select the VOL/VOICE tab. Press the [G] (SETUP) button to call up the AUTO REVOICE SETUP display. Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select the Voice to be replaced. 5 6 PIANO REVOICE: BASIC REVOICE: ALL NO REVOICE: CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 7 Use the [4π†]–[6π†] buttons to select the Voice for replacing the XG selected in step 5. Several different Revoice settings are available by using the [F]/[G]/[I] buttons, for conveniently calling up the recommended Revoice settings in one action. ALL REVOICE: 90 6 Replaces all of the replaceable XG Voices with the high-quality Voices of the instrument. Replaces only the piano Voices. Replaces only the recommended Voices that are suitable for playing back the song. All Voices are returned to the original XG Voices. Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) 7 8 Press the [8π] (OK) button to apply your Revoice settings. To cancel the Revoice operation, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. In the VOL/VOICE tab display, press the [F] button to set SONG AUTO REVOICE to ON. Effect Type ■ Selecting an Effect type 1–3 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 87. In step 2, select the EFFECT tab. Press the [F] (TYPE) button to call up the Effect Type selection display. 5 Use the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons to select the effect BLOCK. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 4 DSP: Stands for Digital Signal Processor (or Processing). DSP changes and enhances the audio signal in the digital realm to produce a wide range of effects. 5 6 7 8 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 91 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) Effect Block Effect-applicable parts REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. CHORUS All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously. DSP1 STYLE PART SONG CHANNNEL 1–16 In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types, the instrument has special DSP effects, that include additional effects usually used for a specific part, such as distortion and tremolo. DSP2 DSP3 RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, SONG Any unused DSP blocks are automatically CHANNEL 1–16 assigned to the appropriate parts (channels) as needed. RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, SONG CHANNEL 1–16, Microphone sound (CVP-405/403) DSP4 6 Using, Creating and Editing Voices Effect characteristics 7 8 Use the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect. Use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY. Use the [7π†]/[8π†] buttons to select the effect TYPE. If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation. ■ Editing and Saving the effect 9 92 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Press the [F] (PARAMETER) button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters. Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) 10 If you have selected one of the DSP 2–4 effect blocks in step 5: You can edit its standard parameters as well as its variation parameter. To select the standard type of parameters, press the [B] button. To select its variation parameter, press the [E] button. Re-selecting the Effect block, category and type Use the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons. The re-selected effect configuration is displayed at the upper left side box in the display. 10 13 11 12 13 14 12 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 11 Select one of the parameters you want to edit by using the [4π†]/ [5π†] buttons. Available parameters differ depending on the selected Effect type. Adjust the value for the selected parameter by using the [6π†]/ [7π†] buttons. If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1 effect block in step 5: Adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing [8π†] button. Effect Return Level: Determines the level or amount of effect applied. This is set for all parts or channels. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your original effect. Use the [3π†]–[6π†] buttons to select the destination for saving the effect. The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block. 15 14 15 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect (page 70). When recalling the saved effect, use the same procedure as in step 8. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 93 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) EQ (Equalizer) Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. The instrument possesses a high-grade fiveband digital EQ. With this function, a final effect—tone control can be added to the output of your instrument. You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in the EQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the frequency bands, and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types. Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”) Gain 0 Using, Creating and Editing Voices Freq (Frequency) 5 bands → LOW LOW MID MID HIG MID HIGH EQ1 EQ2 EQ3 EQ4 EQ5 ■ Select a Preset EQ type 1–3 4 Same operation as in the “Basic Procedure” on page 87. In step 2, select the EQ tab. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type to suit your performance (music style or environment). If you want to edit the EQ parameters, go on to the next operation. 94 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance (MIXING CONSOLE) ■ Editing and Saving the selected EQ Press the [F] (EDIT) button to call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display. 6 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset EQ type. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 5 6 9 8 7 8 7 Use the [3π†]–[7π†] buttons to boost or cut each of the five bands. Use the [8π†] button to boost or cut all the five bands at the same time. Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band selected in step 7. • Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”) Use the [1π†]button. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band width. • FREQ (center frequency) Use the [2π†]button. The available FREQ range is different for each band. 9 Press the [H] or [I] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited EQ type (page 70). Up to two types of EQ can be created and saved. When recalling the saved EQ type, use the same procedure as in step 6. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 95 Voice Creating (Sound Creator) Voice Creating (Sound Creator) Editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices compared to other Voices. For instructions on editing the ORGAN FLUTES Voices, see page 100. The instrument has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER/(USB) display for future recall. The editing method is different for the ORGAN FLUTES Voices and for other Voices. Basic Procedure Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice) (page 32). Press the [6π] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display. Using, Creating and Editing Voices 1 2 3 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays” on page 97. 3 4 7 6 5 4 CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings, the settings will be lost. If you wish to store the settings here, make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off. 96 5 6 7 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the Voice. Press the [D] (COMPARE) button to compare the sound of the edited Voice with the unedited Voice. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice (page 70). Voice Creating (Sound Creator) Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 96. The Sound Creator parameters are organized into five different displays. The parameters in each display are described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters (page 102), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected. The available parameters differ depending on the Voice. PIANO This display is available only when the Natural! piano Voice (page 79) is selected. TOUCH SENSE DEPTH Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth (with Offset set to 64) TUNING CURVE Determines the tuning curve. Select “FLAT” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano Voice does not quite match that of other instruments Voices. STRETCH Tuning curve particularly for pianos FLAT Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range Adjusts the volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key). SUSTAIN SAMPLE (CVP-405/403) Adjusts the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal. STRING RESONANCE (CVP-405) Actual Velocity for tone generator Depth=127 Depth=64 (twice) (normal) 127 Depth=0 0 Adjusts the depth of string resonance. Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice. TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. DEPTH Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the voice changes in response to your playing strength (velocity). OFFSET Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the actual velocity effect. PART OCTAVE Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically (page 85). PORTAMENTO TIME Sets the portamento time when the edited Voice is set to “MONO” above. 127 TOUCH SENSE OFFSET Changes to velocity curve according to VelOffset (with Depth set to 64) Actual Velocity for tone generator Offset=96 (+64) Offset=127 (+127) 127 Offset=64 (normal) 64 Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–2 parts, the R1/ R2 parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part, the LEFT parameter is available. MONO/POLY 64 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) COMMON VOLUME Depth=32 (half) 64 Using, Creating and Editing Voices KEY OFF SAMPLE (CVP-405/403) Changes to velocity curve according to Touch sensitivity 0 Depends on offset Offset=32 (-64) Depends on 64 offset 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) Offset=0 (-127) CONTROLLER 1. MODULATION When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION, the pedal can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters. FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter Cutoff Frequency. For details about the filter, see page 98. AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude (volume). LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or the vibrato effect. LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modulation, or the wah effect. LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude, or the tremolo effect. Portamento Time: The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 97 Voice Creating (Sound Creator) 2. LEFT PEDAL This allows you to select the function to be assigned to the left pedal. FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the left pedal. For details on the pedal functions, see page 187. [2π†]–[8π†] buttons (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, etc.) Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the respective keyboard part. This also determines the depth for the function. For details, see page 188. SOUND ● FILTER Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer–like effects. Using, Creating and Editing Voices BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. HARMONIC CONTENT Frequency (pitch) Cutoff range Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance), set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. Volume Resonance Frequency (pitch) 98 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Voice Creating (Sound Creator) ● EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments—such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack. DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the quicker the decay. RELEASE Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay. Level Sustain level ATTACK Time RELEASE Using, Creating and Editing Voices Key on DECAY Key off ● VIBRATO DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect. DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset. Vibrato: A quavering, vibrating sound effect that is produced by regularly modulating the pitch of the Voice. SPEED Pitch DEPTH DELAY Time EFFECT/EQ 1. REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb (page 92) depth. CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus (page 92) depth. DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP (page 92) depth. If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the DSP menu explained on page 100. DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off. VIBE ROTOR This will be displayed only if VIBE VIBRATE is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained on page 92. Determines whether VIBE VIBRATE should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice. Switching the VIBE ROTOR on/off with a pedal You can use a pedal to switch the VIBE ROTOR on/off (when the VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF function is properly assigned; page 187). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 99 Voice Creating (Sound Creator) 2. DSP DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select a type after selecting a category. VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type. Here, you can edit the VARIATION on/off status and variationparameter value setting. ON/OFF The factory-programmed assignments are set to variation-off for all Voices (standard variation of DSP is assigned). If you select VARIATION ON here, a variation of the DSP effect is assigned to the Voice. The variation parameter value can be adjusted in the VALUE menu explained below. PARAMETER Displays the variation parameter. VALUE Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter. 3. EQ Using, Creating and Editing Voices EQ LOW/HIGH These determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. HARMONY Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Select the Right 1 part (page 32, step 1) in the Main display, before you set it. This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo type” on page 86 in step 1. Creating Your Original Organ Flutes Voices The instrument features a variety of lush, dynamic organ Voices that you can call up with the [ORGAN FLUTES] button. It also gives you the tools to create your own original organ sounds by using the Sound Creator function. Just as on a traditional organ, you can create your own sounds by adjusting the levels of the flute footages. Basic Procedure 1 2 100 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Select the desired Organ Flutes Voice to be edited (page 32). In the ORGAN FLUTES Voice Selection display, press the [6π] (FOOTAGE) button to call up the SOUND CREATOR [ORGAN FLUTES] display. Voice Creating (Sound Creator) 3 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters, see the following “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET [ORGAN FLUTES] displays”. (When selecting the EFFECT/EQ tab display.) 3 4 6 5 5 6 Using, Creating and Editing Voices 4 If you select the EFFECT/EQ tab display, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the parameter to be edited. Use the [A]–[D], [F]–[H] and [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the Voice. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited ORGAN FLUTES Voice (page 70). Editable Parameters in the SOUND CREATOR [ORGAN FLUTES] displays The following covers in detail the editable parameters that are set in the displays explained in step 3 of the “Basic Procedure” on page 100. The Organ Flutes parameters are organized into three different pages. The parameters in each page are described separately, below. These are also treated as part of the Voice Set parameters (page 102), which are automatically called up when the Voice is selected. CAUTION If you select another Voice without saving the settings, the settings will be lost. If you wish to store the settings here, make sure to save the settings as a User Voice before selecting another Voice or turning the power off. FOOTAGE, VOLUME/ATTACK (common parameters) ORGAN TYPE Specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage. ROTARY SP SPEED Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see “EFFECT/EQ” DSP TYPE parameter on page 100), and the Voice Effect DSP (page 100) is turned on (this parameter has the same effect as the Voice Effect VARIATION ON/OFF parameter). VIBRATO ON/OFF Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF. VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 (high). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 101 Voice Creating (Sound Creator) FOOTAGE Footage: The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). 16' ← → 5 1/3' Which footage (16' or 5 1/3') is operated with the [1π†] button can be switched by pressing the [D] button. 16'–1' Determines the basic sound of the organ flutes. The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16' setting determines the lowest pitched component of the Voice, while the 1' setting determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume of the corresponding footage. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds. Using, Creating and Editing Voices VOLUME/ATTACK VOL Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume. RESP Affects both the attack and release (page 99) portion of the sound, increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the slower the swell and release. VIBRATO SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above. MODE The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes. 4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume. LENG Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar, the longer the decay. EFFECT/EQ Same parameters as in the SOUND CREATOR “EFFECT/EQ” tab display explained on page 99. Disabling automatic selection of Voice Sets (effects, etc.) Each Voice is linked to its related parameter settings that are indicated in the SOUND CREATOR displays, including effects and EQ. Usually these settings are automatically called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained below. For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect, set the HARMONY/ECHO parameter to OFF (in the display explained below). You can set these independently by keyboard part and parameter group. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST.SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [®] VOICE SET 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part. 3 Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling up of the settings (ON or OFF) independently for each parameter group. Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters contained in each parameter group. 102 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Reference to Quick Guide pages Playing “Mary Had a Little Lamb” with the Auto Accompaniment Feature ..................................................................... page 45 Pattern Variation ...................................................................... page 47 Learning How to Play (Indicate) Chords for Style Playback ...... page 49 Appropriate Panel Settings for the Selected Style (One Touch Setting) ................................................................. page 50 Style Characteristics The Style type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Preset Style name. These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined with perfect playability. The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the chords of the player. As a result, your chord changes and colorful harmonies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment. Session These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. Keep in mind, however, that the Styles may not necessarily be appropriate—or even harmonically correct—for all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad for a country song may result in a “jazzy” seventh chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in inappropriate or unexpected accompaniment. Pianist These special Styles provide piano-only accompaniment. Just by playing the proper chords with your left hand, you can automatically add complicated, professional-sounding arpeggios and bass/chord patterns. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Pro Selecting a Chord Fingering Type Style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard. There are seven types of fingerings. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [®] CHORD FINGERING Press the [1π†]–[3π†] buttons to select a fingering. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 103 Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles SINGLE FINGER The rhythm does not sound for the Pianist Styles (or other similar Styles). When you want to use any of these Styles, always make sure that ACMP ON/OFF is turned on. For a major chord, press the root key only. Cm For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. C7 For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. Cm 7 For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key a both a white and black key to its left MULTI FINGER Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering types. FINGERED Lets you finger your own chords on the Chord section of the keyboard, while the instrument supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected Style. The Fingered type recognizes the various chord types which are listed on the separate Data List booklet and can be looked up using the Chord Tutor function (page 49). FINGERED ON BASS Accepts the same fingerings as the Fingered, but the lowest note played in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords (in the Fingered mode the root of the chord is always used as the bass note). FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands—for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. AI FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). Playing Only the Rhythm Channels of a Style Rhythm is one of the most important parts of a Style. Try to play the melody along with just the rhythm. You can sound different rhythms for each Style. Keep in mind, however, that not all Styles contain rhythm channels. 1 2 3 4 104 C AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced fingering type is engaged, the instrument will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to worry about specifying the Style chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard type is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. This type is similar to Full Keyboard, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th, 11th and 13th chords cannot be played. This type is available only for Style playback. AI: Artificial Intelligence Starting the rhythm with Sync Start You can also start the rhythm simply by playing the keyboard, if Sync Start is enabled (turn on the [SYNC START] button). Makes it simple to produce orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the Chord section of the keyboard. This type is available only for Style playback. The abbreviated chord fingerings described at right are used: CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Select a Style (page 45). Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] to turn Auto Accompaniment off. Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to play back the rhythm channels. Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop the rhythm. Style Playback-related Settings Turning channels of the Style on/off A Style contains eight channels: RHY1 (Rhythm 1) – PHR2 (Phrase 2). You can add variations and change the feeling of a Style by selectively turning channels on/off as the Style plays. 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the CHANNEL ON/ OFF display. When the STYLE tab is not selected, press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button again. 2 Press the [1†]–[8†] buttons to turn the channels on or off. To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Playing the chords in free tempo (without Style playback) You can have the accompaniment chords sound without playing back the Style, by setting [ACMP ON/OFF] to on, and [SYNC START] to off. For example, if MULTI FINGER is selected (page 104), you can perform with your own pace while sounding the chord by pressing the chord section of the keyboard with your one finger. Setting the fade in/out time You can set the time of the fade in and fade out (page 133). 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB[√] CONFIG 1 → [A] FADE IN/OUT/ HOLD TIME 2 Set the parameters by using the [3π†]–[5π†] buttons. FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum. FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum. FADE OUT HOLD TIME Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out. Style Playback-related Settings The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions, which can be accessed in the display, see page 106. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB[√] STYLE SETTING CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 105 Style Playback-related Settings 2 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Data that is recorded when recording a Song Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data will be recorded when set to “STYLE,” and only the chord data will be recorded when set to “OFF” or “FIXED.” Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons for each setting. • Stop Accompaniment When [ACMP ON/OFF] is turned on and [SYNC START] is off, you can play chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accompaniment chord. In this condition—called “Stop Accompaniment”—any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display. From the display in page 106, you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status. OFF...............................The chord played in the chord section will not sound. STYLE ...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices of the selected Style. FIXED ...........................The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice, regardless of the selected Style. • OTS Link Timing This applies to the OTS Link function (page 51). This parameter determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION [A]– [D] change. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.) Real Time.....................One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN VARIATION button. Next Bar ......................One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a MAIN VARIATION button. • Synchro Stop Window This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to a value other than “OFF,” this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal, letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if you release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop function works. • Style Touch Turns touch response for the Style playback on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the Style volume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the keyboard. • Style Change Behavior There are three types as shown below. Section Set Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback is stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected. When any of the MAIN A-D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest section is automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in the selected Style, MAIN C will be called up. 106 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Split Point Settings Tempo This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles during Style playback. HOLD ..........................The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained. RESET...........................The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. Part On/Off This determines whether the Style Channel On/Off status changes or not when you change Styles during Style playback. HOLD .......................... The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained. RESET...........................All Style Channels are set to On. Split Point Settings These are the settings (there are two Split Points) that separate the different sections of the keyboard: the Chord section, the LEFT part section and the RIGHT 1 and 2 section. The two Split Point settings (below) are specified as note names. 1 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [√][®] SPLIT POINT Use the [F]–[H] buttons to set the Split Point (see below). • Split Point (S)— separates the Chord section for Style playback from the section(s) for playing Voices (RIGHT 1, 2 and LEFT) • Split Point (L)— separates the two sections for playing Voices, LEFT and RIGHT 1– 2. These two settings can be set to the same note (as in the default) or two different notes as desired. Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to the same note Split Point (S+L) Chord section + Voice LEFT Voice RIGHT 1and 2 Press the [F] (S+L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Setting the Split Point (S) and the Split Point (L) to different notes Split Point (S) Chord section Split Point (L) Voice LEFT Voice RIGHT 1and 2 Press the [H] (S) button or the [G] (L) button and rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Split Point (L) cannot be set lower than Split Point (S), and Split Point (S) cannot be set higher than Split Point (L). Specifying the Split Point by note name Press the [1π†]–[4π†] buttons. You can specify the Split Point of the Voice and chord section of the keyboard by using STYLE in the display, and you can specify the Split Point of the left and right Voices by using LEFT. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 107 Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE) Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance of the Style (MIXING CONSOLE) You can set various mixing-related parameters of the Style. (See “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 89.) Call up the “STYLE PART” display in step #3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 87, and follow the instructions. Convenient Music Finder feature Music Finder (page 52) is a convenient feature that calls up pre-programmed panel settings (for Voices, Styles, etc.) that match the song or type of music you want to play. The records of the Music Finder can be searched and edited. Searching the Records Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles You can search the records by specifying a song name or keyword, using the Search function of the Music Finder. You can also save your favorite records in the FAVORITE display. 1 2 Press the TAB [√] button to select the ALL tab. The ALL tab display contains the preset Records. 3 Press the [6π] (SEARCH 1) button to call up the Search display. 4 Enter the search criteria. Clear the search criteria To clear the entered Music/Keyword/Style, press the [F]/[G]/[H] (CLEAR) button. 108 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Convenient Music Finder feature • Search by song title or music genre (MUSIC) or keyword 1 Press the [A] (MUSIC)/[B] (KEYWORD) button to call up the character entry display. 2 Enter the song title or music genre, or the keyword (page 73). • Search by Style name Entering several different keywords You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. 1 Press the [C] (STYLE) button to call up the Style selection display. 2 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Style. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the search display. • Adding other Search Criteria You can specify other search criteria in addition to the song name/keyword/Style name. 5 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles BEAT ............................Select the beat (time signature) you want to use in your performance by pressing the [D] button. All beat settings are included in the search if you select ANY. SEARCH AREA .............Select the pages to be included in the search by pressing the [E] button. (These correspond to the tabs at the top of the Music Finder display.) TEMPO.........................Set the range of the tempo you want to use in your performance by using the [1π†]/[2π†] (TEMPO) buttons. GENRE .........................Select the desired music genre by using the [5π†]/ [6π†] (GENRE) buttons. Press the [8π] (START SEARCH) button to start the search. The Search 1 display appears, showing the results of the search. To cancel searching, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. Searching other music genres When you want to search other music genres, press the [6†] (SEARCH 2) button in the Music Finder display. The search result is displayed in the SEARCH 2 display. Calling up the panel settings to match the style (REPERTOIRE) When searching by style name, the same search result is obtained even if the search is done by using the Repertoire function. See page 53 for details. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 109 Convenient Music Finder feature Creating a Set of Favorite Records As convenient as the Search function is in plumbing the depths of the Music Finder records, you may want to create a “folder” of favorite records—so you can quickly call up those Styles and settings you use most often in your performance. 1 2 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 3 Select the desired record from the Music Finder display. Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE display. Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [√][®] buttons, and check to see if the record has been added. Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display 1 2 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display. Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button. Editing Records You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly created records are automatically saved in the internal memory. CAUTION You can also change a preset record to create a new one. If you want to keep the original preset, make sure to change the name and register the edited record as a new record (see step 5, page 111). 110 1 2 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Select the desired record to be edited in the Music Finder display. Press the [8π†] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the Edit display. Convenient Music Finder feature 3 Edit the record as desired. • Editing the song name/keyword/Style name Input each item in the same way as done in the Search display (page 109). • Changing the Tempo Press the [1π†] (TEMPO) button. • Memorizing the Section (Intro/Main/Ending) Use the [2π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the section that will automatically be called up set when the record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro section. • Editing the Genre Select the desired genre by using the [5π†]/[6π†] (GENRE) buttons. When creating a new genre, press the [7π†] (GENRE NAME) button and input the genre name. (page 74) Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself. • Deleting the Currently Selected Record Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button. • Canceling and Quitting the Edit functions Press the [8†] (CANCEL) button. 5 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 4 To enter the edited record to the FAVORITE display, press the [E] (FAVORITE) button to turn on the FAVORITE. Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below. • Creating a new record Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 4 above, the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display. The maximum number of records is 2500 (CVP-405/403) and 1200 (CVP-401), including internal records. • Overwriting an existing record Press the [8π] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 4 above, the record is added to the FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten. Saving the Record The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created records as a single file. Keep in mind that individual records (panel setups) cannot be handled as separate files. 1 2 3 Call up the Save display. [MUSIC FINDER] → TAB[√][®] ALL → [7π†] (FILES) Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/ USB). Press the [6†] button to save the file (page 70). All records are saved together as a single file. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 111 Convenient Music Finder feature Calling up Music Finder Records Saved to USER/USB To call up the Music Finder records you’ve saved to USER/USB, follow the instructions below. CAUTION Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles • Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original records from internal memory and replaces them with the factory Music Finder data. • Make sure that all important data has been archived to another location beforehand, when the file to delete all records of the Music Finder is downloaded from the web (page 113) and executed. 1 Call up the [MUSIC FINDER] display. [MUSIC FINDER] → TAB [√][®] ALL 2 Press the [7π†] (FILES) button to open the File selection display of the Music Finder. 3 Use the TAB [√][®] buttons to select USER/USB. 4 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder file. The message is displayed according to the content of the file when the file is chosen, and the desired button is pressed. • REPLACE All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file. • APPEND The records called up are added. Execute the operation to call up the Music Finder file. Select “CANCEL” to abort this operation. Restoring the Music Finder Data You can restore the instrument’s Music Finder to its original factory resettings (page 75). 2 3 4 112 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 4 Style Creator Viewing information about Music Finder records Information on the record about which you like in Music Finder is called, and the song of the model is downloaded, or it is possible to add it to musical instruments by downloading the Music Finder record which you like. For more details about this service, refer to the following website. http://music.yamaha.com/idc The available contents of the service described at left are subject to change. 1 Make sure that you’re connected to the Internet (page 175), press the [MUSIC FINDER] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 Use the [1π†]–[5π†] buttons in the display to select the record for which you want to view information on the Web. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to make a selection. After using the dial to make a selection, press [ENTER]. 3 Press the [J] (MUSIC FINDER +) button to open the Web page. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 3 4 4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the browser screen and return to the MUSIC FINDER display. Style Creator You can create your own Styles—recording them by yourself or by combining the internal Style data. The created Styles can be edited. Style Structure Styles are made up of fifteen different sections and each section has eight separate channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the channels, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles. Style Section Four different Fill-ins are available. Channel CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 113 Style Creator Creating a Style You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style. The created Styles can also be edited (page 119). ■ Realtime Recording ➤ See page 114 This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the instrument. You can select an internal Style that most closely matches your image of the Style you want to create and then re-record parts of the Style as desired, or you can create a new Style from scratch. ■ Step Recording ➤ See page 117 This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This allows you to create a Style without having to play the parts on the instrument, since you can enter each event manually. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles ■ Style Assembly ➤ See page 118 This convenient feature lets you create composite Styles by combining various patterns from the internal preset Styles. For example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat Style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “70’s 8Beat” Style, use the bass pattern from “60’s Rock1” Style and import the chord patterns from the “Cool8Beat” Style—combining the various elements to create one Style. 60’s Rock1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 70's 8Beat Cool8Beat Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Realtime Recording (BASIC) Create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using realtime recording. Realtime Recording Characteristics • Loop Recording Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and Style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded material. • Overdub Recording This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 116) and Delete (page 116). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material. When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm), delete the original data before recording. 114 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Style Creator When using realtime recording based on the internal Styles: Overdub recording not possible. Delete the data before recording. Overdub recording possible. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing (page 45). When creating a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button from the display shown in step 5 below. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU Press the [B] button to call up the Style Creator display. When recording channels BASSPHR2 based on an internal Style, delete the original data before recording. Overdub recording is not possible on channels BASSPHR2 (see page 114). When the RECORD display (channel indication) at the lower part of the STYLE CREATOR display disappears, you can press the [F] (REC CH) button to re-display it. Use the TAB [√][®] buttons, then select the BASIC tab to call up the RECORD display. Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT] button. Use the [3π†]/[4π†] buttons to select the section (page 113) to be recorded. Muting specific channels during recording Turn off the desired channels by pressing the [1†]–[8†] buttons. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Specifying sections from the panel buttons You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING], etc) on the panel. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display. Change the sections by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons and execute the selection by pressing the [8π] button. 7-2 The INTRO 4/ENDING 4 sections cannot be specified with the panel controls. 6 7 7-1 Use the [5π†]/[6π†] buttons to determine the length (number of measures) of the selected section. Actually enter the specified length for the selected section by pressing the [D] (EXECUTE) button. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 115 Style Creator 8 Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1†]–[8†]. To cancel the selection, press the appropriate numbered button [1†]–[8†] again. 8 10 9 8 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Limits on the recordable Voices • RHY1 channel: Any except Organ Flute Voice/ S. Articulation Voice • RHY2 channel: Only drum/SFX kits • BASS–PHR2 channels: Any except Organ Flute Voice, Drum/SFX kits, and S. Articulation Voice S. Articulation (Super Articulation) Voices are available on the CVP-405. Deleting the recorded rhythm channel (RHY 1, 2) To delete a specific instrument sound, simultaneously hold down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button (from the display where the recorded channels are shown) and press the appropriate key. CAUTION 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 70). 116 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1π]–[8π] buttons and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. To delete a channel, simultaneously hold down the [J] (DELETE) button and press the appropriate numbered button, [1π]–[8π]. You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again, before releasing your finger from the [J] button. Start recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button. Playback of the specified section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern plays back repeatedly in a loop, you can record individual sounds one by one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the section “Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” (see below). To continue recording with another channel, simultaneously hold down the [F] (REC CH) button and press the appropriate [1†]–[8†] button to specify the channel, then play the keyboard. Stop recording by pressing the Style Control [START/STOP] button. Call up the display for selecting sections, etc. by pressing the [EXIT] button. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 70). Style Creator Rules when recording non-rhythm channels • Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B). • Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B). Any desired chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sections. C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes C R C C R C Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. The chord which forms the basis for this note conversion is called the Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example illustration above). You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER display on page 123. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 124. Changing the Source Chord If you want to record the pattern with a Source Chord other than CM7, set the PLAY ROOT and PLAY CHORD parameters on the PARAMETER page (page 123) before recording. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Step Recording (EDIT) The explanation here applies when selecting the EDIT tab in step 4 of “Realtime Recording” (page 115). In the EDIT display, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 117), with the exception of the points listed below: • In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the Style is automatically fixed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 117 Style Creator • Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1–16 tab display; however, they cannot be changed in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display. • In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can be edited (delete, copy, or move). You can switch between the two by pressing the [F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System Exclusive data cannot be entered. Style Assembly (ASSEMBLY) Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns (channels) from existing internal Styles. 1 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 2 Select the basic Style, then call up the display for Style Assembly. The operation steps are the same as steps 1–4 in “Realtime recording” (page 115). In step 4, select the ASSEMBLY tab. Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style. Call up the SECTION display by pressing one of the Section buttons ([INTRO]/[MAIN]/[ENDING], etc.) on the panel. Change the section as desired by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons and execute the operation by pressing the [8π] (OK) button. Section display Indicates the channels that make up the section. 3 4 You cannot select the SECTION INTRO 4/ENDING 4 directly via the panel operation. CAUTION 5 6 7 The recorded Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 70). 118 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again. Select the Style containing the pattern you want to replace in the Style Selection display. To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the Style. Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step 3 above) by using the [2π†]/[3π†] (SECTION) buttons. Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 4 above) by using the [4π†]/[5π†] (CHANNEL) buttons. Repeat steps 3–5 above to replace the patterns of other channels. Press the [J] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display, and save your data from the display (page 70). Style Creator Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style and select the method of playback. Use the [6π†]/[7π†] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method. • SOLO Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously. • ON Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Any channels set to something other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC page are played back simultaneously. • OFF Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY tab display. Editing the Created Style Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles You can edit the Style you’ve created by using Realtime recording, Step recording and/or Style Assembly. Basic Operation for Editing Styles 1 2 3 4 Select a Style to be edited. Select the file to which the data is saved. You can also select the specified file to which the data is to be saved by pressing the [USB]/ [USER] buttons. [USB]/[USER] → [B] STYLE → [A]–[J] Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU Call up the Style Creator/Edit display by pressing the [B] button. Press the TAB[√][®] button to select a tab. • Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) ➤ See page 120 These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created Style. • Editing Data for each Channel (CHANNEL) ➤ See page 122 The editing features let you delete data as desired and apply quantize settings for each channel in the Style data. • Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ➤ See page 123 For playback of your created Style, you can decide how notes will be converted and sounded for the accompaniment when changing chords in the chord section of the keyboard. 5 Edit the selected Style. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 119 Style Creator Changing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) The explanation here applies when you select the GROOVE tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 119). 1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 121). 1 3 4 2 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 2 3 4 CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation (page 70). 120 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see page 121. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 70). Style Creator ■ GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style. Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat,” the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat—but not including the first beat—will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles ORIGINAL BEAT ■ DYNAMICS This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback. The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the selected Style. CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied. ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied—in other words, which notes in the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings. STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. EXPAND/COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 121 Style Creator Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL) The explanation here applies when you select the CHANNEL tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 119). 1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (see below). 1 4 5 2 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles 2 3 4 5 CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the save operation. 122 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the [1π†]/[2π†] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. Use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see below. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, you can execute the edition and this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 70). QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator (page 157), with the exception of the two additional available parameters below. C Eighth notes with swing C Sixteenth notes with swing VELOCITY CHANGE Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel, according to the percentage specified here. BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. SOURCE specifies the first (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be copied. DEST specifies the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Style Creator Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) Special Parameter Settings Based on Style File Format Source Pattern SOURCE ROOT (Chord Root setting of a Source Pattern) SOURCE CHORD (Chord Type setting of a Source Pattern) Chord change via the chord section of the keyboard. Note Transposition NTR (Note Transposition Rule applied to the Chord Root change) NTT (Note Transposition Table applied to the Chord Type change) • Source Pattern There are a variety of possibilities for Style playback notes, depending on the particular root note and chord type that are selected. The Style data is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. This basic Style data that you create with the Style Creator is referred to as the “Source Pattern.” • Note Transposition This parameter group features two parameters that determine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be converted in response to chord changes. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles Other Settings HIGH KEY (Upper limit of the octaves of the note transposing caused by the Chord Root change) NOTE LIMIT (Note range in which the note is sounded) RTR (Retrigger Rules that determine how notes held through chord changes will be handled) Editing of Style File Format data is related only to note conversion. Editing the rhythm channels has no effect. The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single unified format. By using the Style Creator, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own Styles. The chart shown at left indicates the process by which the Style is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature. • Other Settings Using the parameters of this group, you can fine-tune how Style playback responds to the chords you play. For example, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shifting the pitch to an authentic range—ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instrument (e.g., very low notes of a piccolo sound). Output The explanation here applies when you select the PARAMETER tab in step 4 of “Basic Operation for Editing Styles” (page 119). 1 Press the [A]/[B] button to select the edit menu (page 124). 1 4 2 3 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 123 Style Creator 2 Use the [1π†]/[2π†] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. CAUTION The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. 3 Use the [3π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see below. 4 Auditioning Your Style with a Specific Chord Normally in the Style Creator, you can hear your original Stylein-process with the Source Pattern. However, there is a way to hear it played by a specific chord and root. To do this, set NTR to “Root Fixed,” NTT to “Bypass,” and NTT BASS to “OFF” then change the newly displayed “Play Root” and “Play Chord” parameters to the desired settings. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Style Selection display to save your data. Save the data in the Style Selection display (page 70). ■ SOURCE ROOT/CHORD These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of “M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new Style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you change Source Root/Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. When the Source Root is C: CM 6 Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles CM CM 7 (#11) CM 7 CM7 (9) CM add9 C 6 (9) C C R C C R C R C C R Cm 7 (11) C C C C C C C C C C 1+8 C R C C C R C C C 1+5 C C R C C C C C R C C 7 sus4 C C C C C 7 (#9) R C C C C 7 (b13) C C C C R C C R C C C C R R C C C Cm 7 (9) C C C 7 (b9) C C R C C7 C R C C R C C R C R C R C 7 (13) C R C C C Cm (9) C C C C R C C C R C C C 1+2+5 Csus 4 R C C C R C R C C R Cdim 7 C C C R C C 7 aug CM 7 aug C C C R C Cdim C 7 (#11) C C R C C R C R C C C C Cm 7 b5 C C R C C R C C R C C CmM 7 (9) C 7 (9) C C R C C C C R C 7 b5 C R C Cm 7 C R R C CmM 7 C C R C Cm 6 C R C R C R C C R C C R Cm Caug C R C C = Chord notes C C C C R C C C C R C R C, R = Recommended notes ■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) This determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes. ROOT TRANS (Root Transpose) ROOT FIXED 124 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. When playing a C major chord. When playing a C major chord. When playing an F major chord. When playing an F major chord. Style Creator ■ NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used only converts the root note. MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. CHORD Suitable for chord transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern. HARMONIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. HARMONIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third, flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. NATURAL MINOR 5th In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a Major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles BYPASS ■ NTT BASS ON/OFF The channels for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note, when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument. ■ HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. This setting is available only when the NTR parameter (page 124) is set to “Root Trans.” Example—When the highest key is F. Root changes CM C#M FM F#M Notes played C3-E3-G3 C#3-F3-G#3 F3-A3-C4 F#2-A#2-C#3 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 125 Style Creator ■ NOTE LIMIT This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible—in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range. Example—When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4. Root changes CM C#M FM Notes played E3-G3-C4 F3-G#3-C#4 F3-A3-C4 High Limit Low Limit Using, Creating and Editing the Auto Accompaniment Styles ■ RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. 126 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual STOP The notes stop sounding. PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. PITCH SHIFT TO ROOT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. RETRIGGER TO ROOT The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups—Registration Memory The Registration Memory function allows you to save (or “register”) virtually all panel settings to a Registration Memory button, and then instantly recall your custom panel settings by pressing a single button. The registered settings for eight Registration Memory buttons should be saved as a single Bank (file). Registering and Saving Custom Panel Setups Registering Custom Panel Setups 1 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, Style, effects, and so on) as desired. Refer to the separate Data List for a list of parameters that can be registered with the Registration Memory function. 2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY [MEMORY] button. The display for selecting the items to be registered appears. Only the items selected here will be registered. 5 3 3 4 5 6 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups 2 4 Press the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons to select items. To cancel the operation, press the [I] (CANCEL) button. When recalling registration setups, you can also select the items to be recalled or not, even if you selected all items when registering (page 129). Enter or remove the checkmark in the box of the item to determine whether the item should be registered or not, by pressing the [8π†] button. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons to register your settings. It is recommended that you select a button whose lamp is not lit in red or green. Buttons that are lit in red or green, already contain the panel setup data. Any panel setup previously registered to the selected REGISTRATION MEMORY button (lamp lights in green or red) will be erased and replaced by the new settings. About the lamp status: Off.............. no data registered On (green)...data registered, but not currently selected On (red)......data registered, and currently selected Register various panel setups to other buttons by repeating steps #1– #5. Deleting an unneeded panel setup See page 129. Deleting all eight current panel setups To delete all the eight current panel setups, turn the [POWER] button ON while holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 127 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Saving the Registered Panel Setups You can save all the eight registered panel setups as a single Registration Memory Bank file. Bank 4 Bank 3 Bank 2 Bank 1 1 Registration Memory data compatibility In general, Registration Memory data (Bank files) is compatible among the models CVP-409/ 407/405/403/401. However, the data may not be perfectly compatible, depending on the specifications of each model. Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display. 2 Press the [6†] button to save the Bank file (page 70). 1 2 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Recalling the Registered Panel Setups About recalling setups from a USB storage device When recalling the setups including Song/Style file selection from a USB storage device, make sure that the appropriate USB storage device including the registered Song/Style is connected into the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal. 1 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display. 2 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank. 2 3 2 3 Press one of the green-lit numbered buttons ([1]–[8]) in the Registration Memory section. Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls—in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, Song or incoming MIDI data, etc. Call up the Parameter Lock display ([FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√] CONFIG 1 → [B] 3 PARAMETER LOCK). Select the desired parameter by using the [1π†]–[7π†] buttons, then lock it with the [8π] button. 128 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Deleting an Unneeded Panel Setup/Naming a Panel Setup The panel setups can be deleted or named individually as desired. 1 2 3 4 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection Display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a bank to be edited. Press the [8†] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT Display. Edit the panel setups. • Deleting a panel setup Press the [5†] button to delete a panel setup (page 72). • Renaming a panel setup Press the [1†] button to rename a panel setup (page 73). The number above the file name corresponds to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons. Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups 5 Press the [8π] (UP) button to return to the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze Function) Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. For example, you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the settings of certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Registration Memory buttons. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√][®] FREEZE CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 129 Recalling the Registered Panel Setups CAUTION Settings in the REGISTRATION FREEZE display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from this display. However, if you turn the power off without exiting from this display, the settings will be lost. 2 3 4 5 Press the [2π†]–[7π†] buttons to select items. Enter checkmarks for the items to be “Frozen” (i.e., to remain unchanged), by pressing the [8π†] button. Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze function on. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display. Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order—Registration Sequence As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you want to quickly switch between settings—without having to take your hands from the keyboard. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the TAB [√][®] buttons or the pedal as you play. 1 Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups 2 3 4 5 130 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence (page 128). Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET → TAB [√][®] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings, specify here how the pedal will be used—to advance or to reverse through the sequence. Use the [C] button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence. Use the [D] button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence. Use the [E] button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END). STOP .....................Pressing the TAB [®] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” TOP .......................The sequence starts again at the beginning. NEXT BANK...........The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder. Program the Sequence order. The numbers shown at the lower part of the display correspond to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel. Program the Sequence order from left to right. Recalling the Registered Panel Setups Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] button on the panel, then press the [6π†] (INSERT) button to input the number. • Replacing the number Press the [5π†] (REPLACE) button to replace the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. • Deleting the number Press the [7π†] (DELETE) button to delete the number at the cursor position. • Deleting all numbers Press the [8π†] (CLEAR) button to delete all numbers in the sequence. 6 7 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on. CAUTION Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display and confirm whether the Registration Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence programmed above. • Use the TAB [®] button to call up the Registration Memory numbers in the order of the sequence, or use the TAB [√] button to call them up in reverse order. The TAB [√] [®] buttons can only be used for Registration Sequence when the Main display is called up. • When pedal operation has been set in step 3, you can use a pedal to select the Registration Memory numbers in order. The pedal can be used for Registration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the display in step 3 above). Settings in the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from this display. However, if you turn the power off without exiting from this display, the settings will be lost. Registering and Recalling Custom Panel Setups Returning to the first Sequence in one action In the Main display, press the TAB [√] and [®] buttons simultaneously. This cancels the currently selected Sequence number (the box indicator at the top right goes out). The first Sequence will be selected by pressing one of the TAB [√][®] buttons or by pressing the pedal. The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of the Main display, letting you confirm the currently selected number. Saving the Registration Sequence Settings The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file. To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank file. 1 2 Press simultaneously REGISTRATION MEMORY [REGIST BANK] buttons [+][–] to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. Press the [6†] button to save the Bank file (page 70). CAUTION Keep in mind that all Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks, unless you’ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank file. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 131 Using, Creating and Editing Songs Reference to Quick Guide Pages Practicing with the Preset Songs .................................................. page 35 Playing Back Songs Before Practicing ..................................... page 35 Displaying Music Notation (Score) ......................................... page 38 One-handed Practice with the Guide Lamps ........................... page 39 Practicing with the Repeat Playback Function ......................... page 41 Recording Your Performance.................................................... page 42 Singing Along with Song playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance ............................................................................page 54 Connecting a Microphone...................................................... page 54 Singing with the Lyrics Display ................................................ page 55 Displaying Text ....................................................................... page 55 Convenient Functions for Karaoke ........................................... page 56 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance ................................................................... page 58 Recording Your Performance as Audio ..................................... page 60 Compatible Song Types The instrument can play back the following Song types. Preset Songs Songs in the Song Selection PRESET display. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 22. Before using a floppy disk and the disk slot, be sure to read “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 21. Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws. Copying commercially available data is strictly prohibited, except for your own personal use. Your Own Recorded Songs These are Songs which you’ve recorded (page 42, page 139) and saved to the USER/USB display. (USB is available when you connect an USB storage device such as USB flash memory/floppy disk to the instrument.) Commercially Available Song Data Song data downloaded from the Yamaha Web site and commercially available Disk Songs are available when you connect the optional floppy disk drive to the instrument. The instrument is compatible with the Song disks (floppy disks) that bear the following marks: See page 195 for information on the types of Song data that can be played on the instrument. 132 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operations for Song Playback Operations for Song Playback This section explains detailed operations and functions related to Song playback which are not covered in the “Quick Guide.” ■ Starting/Stopping a Song Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Song playback, and press the SONG [STOP] button to stop. In addition, there are several other convenient ways to start/ stop a Song. Depending on the particular Song data, the Style will also play back at the same time. Starting Playback Synchro Start You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. While playback is stopped, simultaneously press the SONG [STOP] and [PLAY/ PAUSE] buttons simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, simultaneously press the SONG [STOP] and [PLAY/PAUSE] buttons simultaneously once again. • Tap function This useful function lets you press the [TAP TEMPO] button to tap out the tempo and automatically start the Song at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the button (four times for a 4/4 time signature) while the instrument is in Synchro Start standby mode, and the Song playback starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. Fade In The Fade In function can be used to produce smooth fade-ins when starting the Song. To produce fade-ins, press the foot pedal which is assigned to Fade In/Out while playback is stopped and then press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. For information on the settings, see page 187. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Stopping Playback Fade Out The Fade Out function can be used to produce smooth fade-outs when stopping the Song playback. Press the foot pedal which is assigned to Fade In/Out at the beginning of the phrase you want to fade out. For information on the settings, see page 187. Set the Fade In/Out time The times of the fade-in and fade-out can be set independently. For details, refer to page 105. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 133 Operations for Song Playback ■ Top/Pause/Rewind/Fast Forward Moving to the top position of the Song Press the SONG [STOP] button, regardless of whether the Song is stopped or playing back. Pausing the Song Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button during Song playback. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button again and the Song will resume from the current position. Phrase Mark: Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed marker in certain Song data, which specifies a certain location (set of measures) in the Song. Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward) 1 Press the SONG [REW] or SONG [FF] button to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward). It calls up a pop-up window showing the current measure number in the Main display. For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can use the [FF] or [REW] buttons to navigate through the Phrase Marks in the Song. If you don’t want to set the Song position by the phrase marks, press the [E] button and select “BAR” in the window showing the Song position. For Songs not containing Phrase Marks For Songs containing Phrase Mark 2 Press the [EXIT] button to close the pop-up window showing the current measure number (or Phrase Mark number). Using, Creating and Editing Songs ■ Repeat Playback/Chain Playback 1 The preset Songs in the “Follow Lights” folder contain the Guide settings. These Songs are inappropriate for use with ALL or RANDOM repeat. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Set the parameters related to the Repeat Playback by using the [H]/[I] buttons. The available parameters are shown below. REPEAT MODE OFF Plays through the selected Song, then stops. SINGLE Plays through the selected Song repeatedly. ALL Continues playback through all the Songs in the folder containing the current Song repeatedly. RANDOM Randomly and repeatedly plays back all Songs in the folder containing the current Song. PHRASE MARK REPEAT For Songs containing Phrase Marks, you can set Repeat Playback to “ON” or “OFF.” When this is on, the part corresponding to the specified Phrase Mark number is repeatedly played back. The steps for specifying the Phrase Mark number are the same as in the steps 1–2 of the section “Moving back and forth (rewind and fast forward)” (see above). 134 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operations for Song Playback ■ Queuing the Next Playback Song While a Song is playing back, you can queue up the next Song for playback. This is convenient for chaining it to the next Song smoothly during stage performance. Select the Song you want play next in the Song Selection display, while a Song is playing back. The “NEXT” indication appears at the upper right of the corresponding Song name. To cancel this setting, press the [8†] (Cancel) button. Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 128). ■ Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with the Song Playback When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9–16 in the Song data are replaced with style channels—allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below. When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select a Song (page 35). Select a Style (page 45). Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment function. Press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button to enable standby— letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. When the Song playback is stopped, the style playback is also stopped at the same time. • Tempo for playing back a Song and a style at the same time When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used. If the Song data does not contain this data, the current chord name will not be displayed in the Main display during Song playback. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Play chords along with the Song. The chord name is indicated in the Main display. To return to the Main display, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button. Playing Songs with the Quick Start function With the default settings, the Quick Start function is turned on. On some commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song (such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instrument reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” a Song is played back directly from the first note (which may be in the middle of a measure). If you want to play from the beginning of the measure that has silence prior to the first note, turn Quick Start “OFF.” 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING 2 Press the [7†] (QUICK START) button to turn the Quick Start “OFF.” CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 135 Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) Reading Song data automatically when connecting a USB storage device You can have the instrument automatically call up the first Song (not contained in a folder) on a USB storage device, as soon as the device is connected in the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] MEDIA 2 Press the [3π]/[4π] (SONG AUTO OPEN) button to select “ON”. Adjusting the Volume Balance and Voice Combination, etc. (MIXING CONSOLE) Using, Creating and Editing Songs About the [SONG CH 1–8]/ [SONG CH 9–16] displays A Song consists of 16 separate channels. Separate settings can be made for each of the 16 channels in the MIXING CONSOLE display. Adjust the parameters in the SONG CH 1–8 or SONG CH 9–16 display respectively. Usually, CH 1 is assigned to the [TRACK 1] button, CH 2 is assigned to the [TRACK 2] button, and CH 3–16 are assigned to the [EXTRA TRACKS] button, respectively. You can set the mixing-related parameters of a Song. Refer to the section “Adjustable items (parameters) in the MIXING CONSOLE display” on page 89. Call up the “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16” display in step 3 of the Basic Procedure in “Editing the Volume Balance and Voice Combination (MIXING CONSOLE)” on page 87. Below are two operation examples. Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel 1 2 3 4 Press the [C]/[H] (VOICE) buttons in step 5 to select the Voice which you want to change. Then, press one of the [1 π†] to [8 π†] buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the channel. 136 5 6 7 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Select a Song (page 35). Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button to call up the MIXING CONSOLE display. Select the [VOL/VOICE] tab by pressing the TAB [√][®] buttons. Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button repeatedly to call up the display of “SONG CH 1–8” or “SONG CH 9–16.” Press the [J] button to select the “VOLUME.” Adjust the volume balance of each channel by using the [1π†]– [8π†] buttons. You can save the volume settings to the Song in the Setup operation of the SETUP (page 158). Make sure to checkmark the “VOLUME” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure. Using the Practice Function (Guide) Changing Voices 1–4 5 6 7 8 The operation steps are the same as in the “Adjusting the Volume Balance of Each Channel” (see page 136). Press the [H] button to select the “VOICE”. Press one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to call up the Voice selection display for the channel. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Voice. You can save the changed Voice selection to the Song in the Setup operation (page 158). Make sure to checkmark the “VOICE” item in step 2 of the Setup procedure. Using the Practice Function (Guide) Saving the Guide settings in the SONG SETTING display You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data (page 158). For Songs to which Guide settings have been saved, the Guide function will be automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected. The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play. Also, when you sing along with a Song playback using a connected microphone (CVP-405/403), the instrument automatically adjusts the timing of the Song playback to match your vocal performance. To use the practice function, press the [GUIDE] button. Selecting the Guide Function Type 2 Call up the setting display: [FUNCTION] → [B] SONG SETTING Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. The following types are available. Using, Creating and Editing Songs 1 Turning the keyboard guide lamps off Press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) button in the SONG SETTING display (in step 1 as described at left) to turn the keyboard guide lamps off. 2 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 137 Using the Practice Function (Guide) For Keyboard Performance Follow lights With this function, the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play (page 39). Song playback pauses and waits for you to play. When you play the correct notes, Song playback continues. Any key With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with music (any key is OK) and the Song playback continues. For Karaoke Karao-key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. This is useful for singing to your own performance. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play a key on the keyboard and the Song playback continues. Vocal CueTIME (CVP-405/403) This function lets you practice singing with the proper pitch. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. When you sing with proper pitch, Song playback continues. Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light (GUIDE LAMP TIMING) Press the [D] button in the SONG SETTING display in step 1 (page 137) to select the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light. Using, Creating and Editing Songs JUST........................... The guide lamps light in time with the music, at the same timing you should play. NEXT ......................... The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music, indicating the notes you should play next. The guide lamps flash if you fail to play the keys with the correct timing. If the guide lamps do not light as intended The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and 2 and the chord data in the Song (when such data is included). If the guide lamps do not light as intended, you may need to assign the appropriate right- and left-hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively, by using the [1π†]/[2π†] buttons in the SONG SETTING display as described in step 1 on the previous page. 138 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance Turning playback channels of the Song on and off A Song consists of 16 separate channels. You can independently turn each channel of the selected Song playback on or off. Usually, CH 1 is assigned to [TRACK 1] button, CH 2 is assigned to [TRACK 2] button, and CH 3–16 are assigned to the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. 1 Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button to call up the Song CHANNEL ON/OFF display. If the display shown below does not appear, press the [CHANNEL ON/ OFF] button again. 2 Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to turn each channel on or off. If you want to play back only one particular channel (muting all other channels), press and hold down one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons corresponding to the desired channel. To cancel solo playback, press the same button again. Recording Your Performance You can record your own performances and save them to the User tab display or a USB storage device. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording which lets you record performance conveniently and quickly, Multi track Recording which lets you record several different parts to multiple channels, and Step Recording which lets you enter notes one by one. You can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded. For details on MIDI Recording, see page 192. For details on USB Audio Recording (CVP-405/403), see page 60. The microphone input signal can not be recorded. Recording Methods Using, Creating and Editing Songs Internal memory (User tab displays) capacity The internal memory capacity of the instrument is about 1.4MB (CVP-405/403), or about 560KB (CVP-401). This capacity applies to all file types, including Voice, Style, Song, and Registration data files. Step Recording Realtime Recording There are three methods as shown below. Quick Recording ➤ page 140 This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance—useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces. You can record to the [TRACK 1 (R)] or [TRACK 2 (L)] button, and also to the [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] track, which can be used for recording at the same time. Multi track Recording ➤ page 141 This lets you record a whole Song including several different instrument parts, to create the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument part one by one and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over already-recorded parts of an existing Song (Preset Song or a Song on USB storage device) with your own performance. Step Recording ➤ page 143 This method lets you compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, manual recording method – similar to writing music notation onto paper. You can input notes, chords and other events one by one (realtime performance is not needed). You can also edit Songs after they’ve been recorded (page 154). For example, you can edit specific notes one by one, or you can use the Punch In/ Out function to re-record a specific part. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 139 Recording Your Performance Quick Recording This lets you conveniently and quickly record your performance. 1 2 Press the SONG [REC] and SONG [STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Make the desired panel settings for your keyboard performance. Below are some example settings you may want to try. The RIGHT and/or LEFT parts are recorded onto separate tracks. • Recording the RIGHT 1 part Select the voice for the RIGHT 1 part by calling up the Voice selection display (page 32). With Multi Track Recording, you can record RIGHT 2 part individually. • Recording the Dual voice (RIGHT 1 and 2 parts) Turn on the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button (page 81). Select the voice for each keyboard part (RIGHT 1, 2) by calling up the Voice selection display (page 32). • Recording the LEFT part Turn on the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button (page 82). Select the voice for the LEFT part by calling up the Voice selection display (page 32). • Recording Styles 1 Select a Style (page 45). 2 Set the tempo for recording by pressing the TEMPO [–] [+] buttons, as necessary. • Using Registration Memory panel setups Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1–8] buttons. Using, Creating and Editing Songs 3 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the SONG TRACK buttons to be recorded. + • Recording your performance Press the SONG [TRACK 1 (R)] button for the right-hand part recording, and/or the SONG [TRACK 2 (L)] button for the left-hand part recording. • Recording Styles Press the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button. • Recording your performance and the Style playback simultaneously Press the SONG [TRACK 1 (R)]/[TRACK 2 (L)] buttons and the SONG[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button. 140 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance 4 Start recording. There are several different ways you can start recording. • Starting by playing the keyboard If you’ve selected the SONG [TRACK 1(R)]/[TRACK 2 (L)] buttons in step 3 above, play in the right-hand section of the keyboard (page 80). If you’ve selected the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLES)] button in step 3 above, play in the left-hand (chord) section of the keyboard (page 107). Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. Using the metronome You can record your performance while playing back the metronome (page 30). But the metronome sound is not recorded. • Starting by pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button If you start recording in this way, “empty” data is recorded until you play a note on the keyboard. This is useful for starting a Song with a short one-or two-beat pick-up or lead-in. • Starting by pressing the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. In this case the rhythm parts (channels) of the Style begin playing back and recording starts simultaneously. 5 Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. Pausing and restarting your recording To pause recording, press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button during recording. To restart recording, follow the operations shown below. • For recording to [TRACK 1]/ [TRACK 2] recording, press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. • For recording to [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLES)] recording, press the STYLE CONTROL [SYNC START] button, then play in the chord section of the keyboard. When recording is finished, a message prompting you to save the recorded performance data appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button. See step 7 for instructions on saving your recording. 6 Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button to play back the performance you just recorded. CAUTION Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). Using, Creating and Editing Songs 7 The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). Multi Track Recording A Song consists of 16 separate channels. With this method, you can record data to each channel independently, one by one. Both Keyboard and Style parts can be recorded. 1 Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Select Voices for recording the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and/or LEFT) (page 32, page 81, page 82). Select a Style for recording also, as necessary (page 45). About Channels See page 143. Example Recording the keyboard RIGHT 2 part to the channel 2 Turn the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button on. Then, call up Voice Selection display, and select a voice for the RIGHT 2 part (page 81). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 141 Recording Your Performance Setting all of the 9–16 channels to “REC” simultaneously While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the SONG [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button. 2 While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the desired channels to “REC”. Normally, the keyboard parts should be recorded to channels 1–8, and the Styles should be recorded to channels 9–16. To cancel the channel selection, press the SONG [REC] button again. While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the [2π] button to set the channel 2 to “REC”. 3 Using, Creating and Editing Songs When selecting the MIDI part • Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1–16 is recorded. When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device. • Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this records data only over the set MIDI channel— meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel. Recording each channel with the same tempo Use the Metronome function (page 30) to record each channel with the same tempo. Keep in mind that the metronome sound is not recorded. + 2 3 4 5 Press the [D] button to select the “RIGHT2”. Start recording. The method for starting is the same as in step 4 of Quick Recording (page 141). Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. When recording is finished, a message appears prompting you to save the recorded performance appears. To close the message, press the [EXIT] button. For instructions on saving Song data, see step 8. Pausing and restarting your recording See page 141. 6 7 142 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to select the desired part for the channel to be recorded. This determines which part—keyboard or Style (Rhythm 1/2, Bass, etc.)—is recorded to each of the channels selected in step 2. Default channel/part assignments are shown in the section “About Song channels” (page 143). To close PART selection display, press the [EXIT] button. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Listen to your newly recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button to playback the performance you just recorded. To record another channel, repeat steps 2 through 6. Recording Your Performance 8 Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). About Song channels Default channel/part assignments are shown below. Channels Keyboard parts 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RHYTHM1 RHYTHM2 BASS CHORD1 CHORD2 PAD PHRASE1 PHRASE2 Style parts RIGHT1 Channels Keyboard Parts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Default Parts CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). About keyboard parts There are three keyboard parts, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and LEFT. As the default, the RIGHT 1 part is assigned to each of the channels 1–8. Normally, the keyboard parts should be recorded to the channels 1–8. About Style parts As the default, each of the Style parts is assigned to the channels 9–16, respectively as shown below. Normally, the Style parts should be recorded to the channels 9–16. Using, Creating and Editing Songs RHYTHM ......... This is the basic part of the Style, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used. BASS ................ The bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style. CHORD ........... This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar Voices. PAD ................. This part is used for sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir, etc. PHRASE ........... This part is used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting. Step Recording This method lets you record regular music data such as melodies and chords. Basic Operations for Step Recording 1 2 Press the SONG[REC] and SONG[STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 143 Recording Your Performance 3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display for recording/ editing a Song. 3 4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [√][®] buttons. For recording melodies .............. Select the [1–16] tab. For recording chords .................. Select the [CHORD] tab. 4 5 6 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 5 6 7 144 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual If you select the “1–16” tab in step 4, press the [F] button to select the channel for recording. Press the [G] button to call up the STEP RECORD display. Start Step Recording. For recording melodies .............. See page 145. For recording chords .................. See page 152. Recording Your Performance Recording Melodies This section explains how to step-record notes, using three music score examples. Example 1 The explanations here apply to step 7 of the section “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 144. Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data, it may not appear exactly the same as shown below. 3–5 1 6 7 2 * The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step numbers. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display. 1 Press the [G] button to select “.” 1 2 3 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 4 2 3 4 5 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length. Play the keys C3, D3, E3, F3, G3, and A3 in order, according to the notation example. About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 147. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 145 Recording Your Performance 6 Press the [6π†] button to enter a quarter-note rest. To enter the rest, use the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons. (Press the button once to select the rest value, and once again to actually enter it.) A rest having specified note length will be entered. 7 Play the C4 key. 8 Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. 8 9 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered notes. Using, Creating and Editing Songs 10 CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). 11 Move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. Press the SONG [STOP] button during recording. 146 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 9 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 154). Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted. 1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons in the STEP RECORD display (page 144) to select the data you want to delete. 2 Press the [J] (DELETE) button to delete the selected data. Recording Your Performance About items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons in the Step Record display [G] button ........... Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered. Items Kbd.Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp Velocity to be recorded Actual velocity you play the keyboard with 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15 About velocity Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard. The more strongly you play the keyboard, the higher the velocity value and the louder the sound. The velocity value can be specified within a range from 1 to 127. The higher the velocity value, the louder the sound becomes. [H] button ........... Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to be entered. Items Gate time to be recorded Normal 80% Tenuto 99% Staccato 40% Staccatissimo Manual 20% The gate time (note length) can be set to any desired percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. [I] button ............. Determines the note type to be entered. Pressing the button alternately switches the note selectors (at the bottom of the display) among three basic note values: normal, dotted and triplet. Using, Creating and Editing Songs CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 147 Recording Your Performance Example 2 The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 144. 2–5 6–8 10–13 14–16 9 1 * The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers. In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the operation. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display. About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 147. 1 Press the [G] button to select “.” Using, Creating and Editing Songs 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 148 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [5π†] button to select the half-note length. While holding F3 on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button. Before you go on to step 6, release the F3 key and the [7π†] button. Press the [H] button to select the “Staccato”. Press the [7π†] button to select the eighth-note length. Recording Your Performance 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Play the keys E3, F3, and A3 in order, according to the notation example. Press the [G] button to select “.” Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [I] button to select “dotted.” Press the [5π†] button to select the dotted half-note length. Play the A3 key on the keyboard, as specified in the example. Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length. Play the F3 key on the keyboard, as specified in the example. Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. 17 18 20 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered notes. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. You can also edit the Songs you’ve recorded as necessary (page 154). Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). Using, Creating and Editing Songs 19 18 CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 149 Recording Your Performance Example 3 The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 144. 5 1–4 6 7 * The numbers shown in the sheet correspond to the following operation step numbers. In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the entire operations. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Record display. About the items which can be selected via the [G] [H] [I] buttons See page 147. 1 Press the [H] button to select “Normal.” Using, Creating and Editing Songs 1 2 3 2 3 4 150 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Press the [I] button to select “normal” note type. Press the [7π†] button to select the eighth note. While holding C3 key on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button. Do not release the C3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following steps. Recording Your Performance 5 6 7 9 10 11 While holding the C3, E3 and G3 keys on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button. Do not release the C3, E3 and G3 keys yet. Keep holding them while executing the following steps. While holding the C3, E3, G3 and C4 keys on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button, and successively press the [5π†] button. After you press the [5π†] button, release the keys. Using, Creating and Editing Songs 8 While holding the C3 and E3 keys on the keyboard, press the [7π†] button. Do not release the C3 and E3 keys yet. Keep holding them while executing the following steps. Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered notes. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 154). CAUTION Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 151 Recording Your Performance Recording Chords You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time with precise timing. These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function. The explanations here apply to step 7 of the “Basic Operations for Step Recording” on page 144. 1 4 7 MAIN A BREAK MAIN B C F G F 2, 3 G7 C 5, 6 8,9 * The numbers shown in the notation correspond to the following operation step numbers. 1 Make sure the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to OFF, then press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION A] button. 3 C 1 Using, Creating and Editing Songs F G 2 2 3 4 Press the [5π†] button to select the half-note length. Play the chords C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard. Press the STYLE CONTROL [BREAK] button. 6 F G7 4 152 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 5 Recording Your Performance 5 6 7 Press the [6π†] button to select the quarter-note length. Play the chords F, and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard. Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION B] button. 7 9 C 8 8 9 10 11 12 14 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard. CAUTION Press the SONG [STOP] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the Song. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered notes. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Record display. If you want, you can also edit already recorded Songs in the same manner (page 154). Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change data into the Song data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). Deleting data Mistakenly entered notes can be deleted (page 146). Using, Creating and Editing Songs 13 Press the [4π†] button to select the whole-note length. Entering fill-ins Turn the STYLE CONTROL [AUTO FILL IN] button to ON, and simply press one of the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D)] buttons. (The appropriate fill-in section plays and then automatically goes to the selected [MAIN VARIATION (A, B, C, D)] pattern playback.) CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 153 Recording Your Performance Editing a Recorded Song You can edit the Songs you’ve recorded with any recording method—Quick Recording, Multi Track Recording, or Step Recording. Basic Editing Operation 1 2 3 Select a Song for editing. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU Press the [A] button to call up the SONG CREATOR display to record or edit Songs. 3 Using, Creating and Editing Songs 4 Select the appropriate tab by using the TAB [√][®] buttons and edit the Song. • Re-Recording a Specific Section —Punch In/Out (REC MODE) ............................................... page 155 This lets you re-record a specific section of a Song. • Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL) .................................... page 156 This lets you edit the channel events. For example, you can delete data or transpose notes by channel. • Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16) .................... page 159 This lets you change or delete the recorded notes or chords. • Editing System Event (SYS/EX.) ........................................... page 161 This lets you change the tempo or the time signature. • Editing Lyrics (LYRICS).......................................................... page 162 This lets you change the Song name or lyrics events. 154 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance Re-Recording a Specific Section—Punch In/ Out (REC MODE) When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch IN/OUT function. In this method, only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over, although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In/Out timing. You can specify the Punch In and Punch Out points as measure numbers beforehand for automatic operation, or manually execute the Punch In/Out recording by using a Foot Pedal or simply by playing the keyboard. The explanations here apply to the REC MODE display in step 4 of the “Basic Editing Operation” on page 154. 1 2 Use the [1π†]–[6π†] buttons to determine the settings for rerecording (see below). While holding the SONG [REC] button, press the desired track button. + 3 4 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). CAUTION ■ PUNCH IN settings NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro Standby mode. FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as soon as you play the keyboard. PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that point. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3π†] button. Using, Creating and Editing Songs The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). ■ PUNCH OUT settings REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the specified Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button), at which point recording stops and normal playback continues. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out measure by pressing the [6π†] buttons. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 155 Recording Your Performance Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. PUNCH IN setting PUNCH OUT setting Original data 1 2 Start overwrite recording NORMAL REPLACE ALL 1 3 4 5 *1 2 Stop recording 3 4 1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006 2 1 2 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL 1 2 Play back (Original data) FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT 1 FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006 2 Play back (Original data) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/Play original data 3 4 5 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 3 4 4 4 8 7 8 Stop recording *2 5 6 Stop overwrite recording/Play original data Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 3 7 5 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 3 6 Stop recording *2 5 6 7 8 7 8 Stop recording *2 Play back (Original data) PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL 8 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording *1 Play back (Original data) 7 *2 5 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT 6 Start overwrite recording 1 2 3 4 5 Stop recording *2 Play back (Original data) PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT Start overwrite recording 1 PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006 2 3 4 5 6 Stop overwrite recording/Play original data Play back (Original data) Start overwrite recording 1 2 3 4 5 6 *1 To avoid overwriting measures 1-2, start recording from measure 3 *2 To stop recording, press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5. 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data Using, Creating and Editing Songs ■ Pedal Punch In/Out settings When this is set to ON, you can use the sostenuto pedal to control the punch-in and punch-out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) the sostenuto pedal instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch Out).You can press and release the sostenuto pedal as often as you want during playback, to punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current function assignment of the sostenuto pedal is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out function is set to ON. Editing Channel Events (CHANNEL) The explanations here apply to the CHANNEL tab display in the step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 154. 1 2 3 156 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the Edit menu (page 157). Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to edit the data. For information on the available parameters, see page 157. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display. After the operation (with the exception of the SETUP menu display) is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the Operation results. The Undo function only has one level; only the immediate operation can be undone. Recording Your Performance 4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). ■ QUANTIZE menu The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel. For example, if you record the musical phrase shown at right, you may not play it with absolute precision, and your performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way of correcting for this. CHANNEL Determines the channel in the Song to be quantized. SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use eighth note as the Quantize size. About Quantize size (resolution) The Quantize size or resolution is the number of clocks per quarter note. After eighth note quantization Settings eighth note sixteenth note thirty-second note sixteenth note + eighth note triplet* quarter note triplet eighth note triplet sixteenth note triplet eighth note + eighth note triplet* sixteenth note + sixteenth triplet* Using, Creating and Editing Songs quarter note The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes—completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. Quarter-note length Original data Quantizing strength=100 Quantizing strength=50 ■ Deleting the data of the specified channel (DELETE menu) You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel whose data to be deleted by using the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 157 Recording Your Performance ■ Mixing (merging) the data of the specified two channels (MIX menu) This function lets you mix the data of the two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. SOURCE 1 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. All MIDI events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel. SOURCE 2 Selects the channel (1–16) to be mixed. Only note events in the selected channel are copied to the destination channel. In addition to the values 1–16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. If “COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the destination channel. (The original channel data is maintained.) DESTINATION Selects the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. ■ CHANNEL TRANSPOSE menu This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. To display the channels 9–16 Press the [F] button to toggle between the two channel displays—Channels 1–8, and Channels 9–16. Transposing to the same value for all channels simultaneously While holding the [G] (ALL CH) button, press one of the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons. SETUP menu The current settings of the Mixing Console (page 87) displays and other panel settings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts. ■ Setup recording procedure Using, Creating and Editing Songs 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [F] DIGITAL REC MENU → [A] SONG CREATOR → TAB [√][®] CHANNEL → [B] SET UP 2 Use the [1π†]–[7π†] buttons to determine the settings to be automatically called up when the Song starts. SONG Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings including the Voice selection of the keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status. Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting. This can be recorded at any point in a Song (the other items in this chart can be recorded only to the top position of the Song). SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display. GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON/OFF setting. LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display. MIC SETTING (CVP-405/403) Records the microphone and the Vocal Harmony settings in the Mixing Console display (page 87). 3 Checkmark the selected item by pressing the [8π] button. 158 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance 4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the SETUP recording operation. 5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). Editing Note or Chord Events (CHORD, 1–16) The explanations here apply to the CHORD and 1–16 tab displays in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 154. 1 2 3 When the 1–16 tab display is selected, press the [F] button to select the channel to be edited. Move the cursor to the desired data. To move the cursor up or down ..............................Use the [A]/[B] button. To move the cursor to the top data ..........................Press the [C] button. To move the cursor by Measure/Beat/Clock units ....Use the [1π†]– [3π†] buttons. Edit the data. Editing the data line by line Use the [6π†]–[8π] buttons to cut/copy/paste/insert/delete the events. Editing each parameter of the data 1 Use the [D]/[E] buttons to select the parameter to be edited. 2 Use the [4π†]/[5π†] buttons to edit the parameter value. The [DATA ENTRY] dial can also be used. To actually enter an edited value, simply move the cursor away from the parameter. Selecting multiple lines of data While holding the [J] (MULTI SELECT) button, press the [A]/[B] buttons. 5 When the CHORD tab display is selected, press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the data into Song data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). Using, Creating and Editing Songs Displaying specific types of event (FILTER) You can select the event types to be displayed in the [CHORD] and [1-16] tab displays. This is convenient, for example, when you wish to have only the note events shown (page 161). To restore the original value, press the [8†] (CANCEL) button before move the cursor. 4 CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). The data recorded by Realtime Recording will not appear on the display and cannot be edited. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 159 Recording Your Performance About the events shown in the display 1 2 3 About Clock A unit of note resolution. The Quantize size is the number of clocks per quarter note. On the instrument, one clock is equal to 1/1920th of a quarter note. 001 : 1 : 1440 Example Clock Beat Measure number (BAR) 1 Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Same as the indication at the lower left of the display. 2 Indicates the event types (see below). 3 Indicates the event values. Using, Creating and Editing Songs Event types shown on the 1–16 tab display Note The individual note of a Song. Includes the note number which corresponds to the key which was played, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the gate time value (the length of a note). Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, filter and effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described on page 87), etc. Prog (Program Change) MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice. P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously. A.T.(Aftertouch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. Event types shown on the CHORD tab display 160 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Style Style Tempo tempo Chord chord root, chord type, on bass chord Sect Accompaniment Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break, Ending) OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style Recording Your Performance Displaying Specific Types of Events (FILTER) In the edit displays various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the edit displays. 1 2 3 4 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the edit displays. Select the event type by using the [2π†]–[5π†] buttons. Checkmark (show) or remove the checkmark for the selected item by using the [6π†]/[7π†] buttons. [H] (ALL ON) ..............Checkmarks for all event types. [I] (NOTE/CHORD).....Selects only NOTE/CHORD data. [J] (INVERT) ................Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa. Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings. Pressing the [C]–[E] buttons calls up the respective Filter displays as shown below. MAIN .........................Call up the Main Filter display. CTRL CHG .................Call up the Control Change Filter display. STYLE .........................Call up the Accompaniment Style Filter Display. Editing System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX.) Using, Creating and Editing Songs The explanations here apply to the [SYS/EX] tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 154. From this display, you can edit recorded System Exclusive events, which do not belong to a specific channel, such as tempo and beat (time signature). The operations here are basically the same as those in the section “Editing Note or Chord Events” on page 159. System Events ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time Signature) Determines the time signature. Key (Key Signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music score shown on the display. XGPrm (XG Parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters. Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the separate Data List booklet for details. SysEx (System exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta Event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). CAUTION The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 161 Recording Your Performance Editing Lyrics (LYRICS) The explanations here apply to the LYRICS tab display in step 4 of the Basic Editing Operation on page 154. From this display, you can edit the recorded Lyrics events. The operations here are basically the same as in the section “Editing Note or Chord Events” on page 159. Lyrics Events Name Allows you to enter the Song name. Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics. Control Codes CR Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF Unavailable on the instrument. On some MIDI devices, this event may delete the currently displayed lyrics and display the next set of lyrics. Inputting and Editing Lyrics CAUTION Using, Creating and Editing Songs The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation (page 70). 162 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 1 Use the [4π†]/[5π†] (DATA ENTRY) buttons to call up the lyrics editing display. Operations are the same as in the section “Entering Characters” (page 73). 2 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the Song Selection display for saving your data, then save the data in the Song Selection display (page 70). Using a Microphone (CVP-405/403) Reference to Quick Guide pages Singing Along with Song Playback (Karaoke) or Your Own Performance.................................................................................. page 54 Connecting a Microphone........................................................... page 54 Singing with the Lyrics Display ...................................................page 55 Convenient Functions for Karaoke ..............................................page 56 Adjusting the tempo ................................................................ page 31 Transpose ................................................................................ page 56 Applying effects to Your Voice ................................................. page 56 Adding Harmony Vocals to Your Voice..................................... page 57 Practicing Singing with Proper Pitch (Vocal CueTIME)........... page 137 Convenient Functions for Singing Along with Your Own Performance................................................................................. page 58 Changing the Key (Transpose).................................................. page 58 Displaying the Music Score on Instrument and Lyrics on TV .... page 59 Making Announcements Between Songs ................................. page 59 Controlling Playback Timing by Your Voice (Karao-Key) ......... page 137 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters This section explains briefly how to create your own Vocal Harmony (page 57) types, and lists the detailed parameters for editing. Up to ten Vocal Harmony types can be created and saved. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY Press the [H] (VOCAL HARMONY TYPE) button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE selection display. Using a Microphone 2 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 163 Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters 3 Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a Vocal Harmony type to be edited. 3 3 4 4 5 Press the [8†] (EDIT) button to call up the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT display. If you want to re-select the Vocal Harmony type, use the [1π†]/ [2π†] buttons. Or you can re-select the Vocal Harmony type by pressing the [8π†] (RETURN) button to return to the Vocal Harmony selection display. Using a Microphone 8 5 6 CAUTION The settings here will be lost if you change to another Vocal Harmony type or you turn the power off without executing the save operation. 164 7 8 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 6 7 Use the [3π†]–[5π†] buttons to select the parameter (page 165) you want to edit. Set the value of the parameter selected above. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Vocal Harmony type (page 70). Editing Vocal Harmony Parameters Editable Parameters in the VOCAL HARMONY EDIT Display Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the microphone sound when the Harmony mode (page 169) is set to “VOCODER.” CHORDAL TYPE Determines how the harmony notes are applied to the microphone sound when the Harmony mode (page 169) is set to “CHORDAL.” HARMONY GENDER TYPE Determines whether the gender of the harmony sound is changed or not. Off The gender of the harmony sound is not changed. Auto The gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically. LEAD GENDER TYPE Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound (i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be changed. Please note that the number of harmony notes differs depending on the selected type. When set to Off, three harmony notes are produced. Other settings produce two harmony notes. Off No gender change occurs. Unison No gender change occurs. You can adjust the LEAD GENDER DEPTH below. Male The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. Female The corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. LEAD GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change. This is available when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice. LEAD PITCH CORRECT This parameter is only effective when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. When Smooth or Hard is selected, the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps. UPPER GENDER THRESHOLD Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones above the lead vocal pitch. LOWER GENDER THRESHOLD Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch. UPPER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the UPPER GENDER THRESHOLD. The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice. LOWER GENDER DEPTH Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the LOWER GENDER THRESHOLD. The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice. VIBRATO DEPTH Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. VIBRATO RATE Sets the speed of the vibrato effect. Also affects the lead vocal sound when the LEAD GENDER TYPE above is set to other than Off. VIBRATO DELAY Specifies the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced. Higher values result in a longer delay. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Using a Microphone VOCODER TYPE 165 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound HARMONY1/2/3 VOLUME Sets the volume of the first (lowest), second, and third (highest) harmony notes. HARMONY1/2/3 PAN Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the first (lowest), second, and third (highest) harmony notes. Random The stereo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played. This is effective when the Harmony mode (page 169) is set to “VOCODER” or “CHORDAL.” L63>R – C – L<R63 A setting of L63>R pans the sound hard left, while C is at center, and L<R63 is at hard right. HARMONY1/2/3 DETUNE Detunes the first (lowest), second, and third (highest) harmony notes by the specified number of cents. PITCH TO NOTE When this is set to “ON,” you can “play” the voices of the instrument with your voice. (The instrument tracks the pitch of your voice and converts it to note data for the tone generator. Keep in mind, however, that dynamic changes in your voice do not affect the volume of the tone generator.) PITCH TO NOTE PART Determines which of the instrument parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is “ON.” Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound 1 Using a Microphone 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY Press the [I] (MIC SETTING) button to call up the MICROPHONE SETTING display. 2 166 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound 3 Press the TAB [√] button to select the OVERALL SETTING tab display. 3 4 4 6 5 4 5 6 Use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the item (parameter) (see below) to be adjusted. Use the [1π†]–[8π†] buttons to set the value. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING display. CAUTION Settings in the OVERALL SETTING tab display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from the display. However, if you turn the power off without exiting from this display, the settings will be lost. Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the OVERALL SETTING Tab Display Using a Microphone ■ 3BAND EQ EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands, which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. The instrument features a high-grade three-band (LOW, MID and HIGH) digital equalizer function for the microphone sound. • Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. • dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB. ■ NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass. • SW (Switch) This turns the Noise Gate on or off. • TH. (Threshold) This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 167 Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound ■ COMPRESSOR This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. • SW (Switch) This turns the Compressor on or off. • TH. (Threshold) This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be applied. • RATIO This adjusts the compression ratio. • OUT This adjusts the final output level. ■ VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled. Using a Microphone • VOCODER CONTROL The Vocal Harmony effect in Vocoder mode (page 169) is controlled by note data—the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the song data. This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony. SONG CHANNEL MUTE/PLAY When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below (to control Harmony) is muted (turned off) during song playback. OFF/Channels 1–16 When set to “OFF,” song data control over harmony is turned off. When set to one of the values 1–16, note data (played from a song on the instrument or an external MIDI sequencer) contained on the corresponding channel is used to control the harmony. This setting is linked to the HARMONY CH setting in the SONG SETTING display (page 137). KEYBOARD OFF Keyboard control over harmony is turned off. UPPER Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony. LOWER Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony. • BAL. This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead Vocal, H: Vocal Harmony), only the Vocal Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead vocal is output. 168 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the Microphone and Harmony Sound • MODE All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes, which produce harmony in different ways. The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony mode, and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice. The three modes are described below. AUTO When the [ACMP ON/OFF] or [LEFT] is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song, the mode is automatically set to CHORDAL. In all other cases, the mode is set to VOCODER. VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard and/or song data. You can specify whether the Vocoder effect is controlled by your keyboard performance or by the Song data (page 168). CHORDAL The harmony notes are determined by the following three types of chord: chords played in the chord section of the keyboard (with the [ACMP] turned on), chords played in the LEFT Voice section of the keyboard (with the [ACMP] turned off and the [LEFT] turned on), and chords contained in song data for controlling the harmony. (Not available if the song does not contain any chord data.) • CHORD The following parameters determine which data in a recorded song is used for chord detection. OFF Chords are not detected from the song data. XF Chords of XF format are used for the Vocal Harmony. 1–16 Chords are detected from note data in the specified song channel. • Vocal Range Set this to obtain the most natural vocal harmony, depending on your voice. Normal setting Low Setting for lower voice. This setting is also appropriate for growling and shouting. High Setting for higher voice. This setting is also appropriate for singing close to the microphone. Using a Microphone Normal ■ MIC The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled. • MUTE When set to ON, the microphone sound is turned off. • VOLUME Adjusts the output volume of the microphone sound. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 169 Talk Setting Talk Setting This function lets you have special settings for making announcements between songs, separate from the settings for your singing performance. 1 2 3 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [G] MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY Press the [I] (MIC SETTING) button to call up the MICROPHONE SETTING display. Press the TAB [®] button to select the TALK SETTING tab display. 3 Using a Microphone 4 6 5 4 CAUTION 5 6 Settings in the TALK SETTING tab display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from the display. However, if you turn the power off without exiting from this display, the settings will be lost. 170 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) (page 171) to be set. Use the [1π†]–[7π†] buttons to set the value. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MICROPHONE SETTING display. Talk Setting Adjustable Items (Parameters) in the TALK SETTING Tab Display VOLUME This determines the output volume of the microphone sound. PAN This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound. REVERB DEPTH This sets the depth of the reverb effects applied to the microphone sound. CHORUS DEPTH This sets the depth of the chorus effects applied to the microphone sound. TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUA- This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the TOR overall sound (excepting the microphone input)—allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound. DSP MIC ON/OFF This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON or OFF. DSP MIC TYPE This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the microphone sound. DSP MIC DEPTH This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound. Using a Microphone CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 171 Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet The special website can be opened when directly connecting the Clavinova to the Internet. You can purchase and download Song data and other types of data from the special Clavinova website by directly connecting the instrument to the Internet. This section contains terms related to computers and online communications. If there are some terms you are unfamiliar with, refer to the Internet Glossary (page 184). Connecting the Instrument to the Internet Depending on the Internet connection, you may not be able to connect to two or more devices (for example, a computer and the instrument), depending on the contract with the provider. This means you cannot connect with the Clavinova. If in doubt, check your contract or contact your provider. Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port. You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. For specific instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible LAN adaptors, routers, etc.), refer to the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself. To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider. Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem without router) Modem* No router capability Due to EU regulations, users within Europe should use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent electromagnetic interference. Router Cable type LAN cable LAN cable LAN port Some types of modems require an optional hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices (such as computer, musical instrument, etc.). * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. Connection example 2: Connecting by cable (using a modem with router) Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet ADSL modem Router capability Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port. LAN cable LAN cable LAN port Connection example 3: Wireless connection Modem* A USB wireless LAN adaptor also can be used. Access point Wireless Game Adaptor * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. 172 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Accessing the Special Website Accessing the Special Website From the special website, you can audition and purchase Song data, among other things. To access the site, press the [INTERNET] button, while the instrument is connected to the Internet. To close the website display and return to the operation display of the instrument, press the [EXIT] button. Operations in the Special Website Scrolling the Display When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser display of the instrument, a scroll bar appears at the right side of the display. Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to scroll through the display and view those parts of the page that are not shown. Scroll bar Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 173 Operations in the Special Website Following Links When there is a link in the page, it is shown as a button or in colored text, etc. To select the link, press the [6†]/[7π†]/[8†] buttons or use the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Press the [8π] (ENTER) button to actually call up the link destination. You can also select and call up links by using the [A]–[J] buttons. Entering Characters This section explains how to enter characters within the website, for inputting a password or searching for data, refer to the “Entering Characters” on page 74. Return to the Previous Web Page Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet To return to a previously selected web page, press the [1π†] (BACK) button. To return to the page selected before pressing the [1π†] (BACK) button, press the [2π†] (FORWARD) button. 174 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operations in the Special Website Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the page, or to try reloading), press the [5π] (REFRESH) button. To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press the [6π] (STOP) button. Monitoring the Internet Connection Status The messages and icons at the bottom right of the Internet display indicate the current Internet connection status. Message 1 3 4 2 The following three messages are displayed according to the loading status of the web page. “Disconnected” This appears when the instrument is not connected with the Internet. When this message is displayed, the web page cannot be seen. Icon 1 is displayed. “Now opening web page... ” The web page is being loaded. Icon 2 flashes. “Web page has been displayed. ” Loading of the web page is completed, and the page is displayed completely. Icon 2 stops flashing. When the displayed web page uses SSL, icon 3 is displayed, and information is encrypted for communication. Strength of the reception is displayed in 4 when connecting to the Internet by wireless LAN. When reception is weak, move the instrument near the access point to improve reception. SSL: SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) is an industry-standard method for protecting web communications by using data encryption and other tools. Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 175 Operations in the Special Website Purchasing and Downloading Data You can purchase and download Song data (for playback on this instrument) and other types of data from the special website. For details on purchasing and downloading data, refer to the instructions on the site itself. CAUTION The purchased data will be lost if you turn the power to the instrument off during download. Operation after purchase and download When downloading is completed, a message appears asking you whether or not to open the File Selection display. Select “YES” to call up the File Selection display, from which you can select the downloaded data. To return to the Internet display, select “NO” When the File Selection display is open, press the [8π] (UP) button to call up the next highest level folder. Download Destination The download destination depends on the use of storage media, as described below. • When a USB storage device is connected to the instrument during purchase: The downloaded data is saved in the “MyDownloads” folder in the USB tab display of the File Selection display. To close the folder and call up the next highest level folder, press the [8π] (UP) button in the File Selection display. • When a USB storage device is not connected to the instrument during purchase: The downloaded data is saved in the “MyDownloads” folder in the User tab display of the File Selection display. To close the folder and call up the next highest level folder, press the [8π] (UP) button in the File Selection display. Registering Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing, and set up a custom link so the page can be instantly called up in the future. 1 Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 2 176 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual With the desired page currently selected, press the [4π†] (BOOKMARK) button. The Bookmark display appears, showing a list of the currently registered bookmarks. The title of the currently selected web page is shown below the list. Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the [3π†] (ADD) button. Operations in the Special Website 3 Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the [1π†] (π/ †) button. 3 4 5 4 To register the bookmark, press the [7π†] (EXECUTE) button, or press the [8π†] (CANCEL) button to cancel. To return to the browser, press the [8π†] (CLOSE) button. Opening a Bookmarked Page 1 2 Press the [4π†] (BOOKMARK) button to call up the Bookmark display. Press the [1π†] (π/†) button to select the desired bookmark. Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 2 3 3 Press the [2π†] (VIEW) button to open the page of the selected bookmark. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 177 Operations in the Special Website Editing Bookmarks From the Bookmark display, you can change the names and rearrange the order of your bookmarks, as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 † 1 π/† Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list. 2 View Opens the web page of the selected bookmark. 3 Add Used when registering a bookmark (page 176). 4 Move Changes the order of the bookmarks. 1 Select the bookmark you wish to move, then press the [4π†] (MOVE) button. The lower part of the display changes, letting you select the new position for the bookmark. 2 Select the intended position by pressing the [1π†] (π/†) button. 3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the [7π†] (EXECUTE) button. Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 5 Changing names Changes the name of the selected bookmark. Pressing the [5π†] (CHANGE) button calls up the display for entering characters. For details on entering characters, see page 74. 6 Delete Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list. 7 Close Closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display. 178 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operations in the Special Website About the Internet Settings Display From the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the Internet connection, including preferences for the menus and displays. The Internet Settings display has four sub-displays: Browser, LAN, Wireless LAN, and Others. Basic Operation 1 2 3 Press the [5†] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting display. Press the TAB [√][®] buttons to select the desired display. Select the desired item by pressing the [1π†] (π/†) button. 3 4 5 4 To call up the relevant Edit display, press the [2π†]/[3π†] (EDIT) button. For some items, the Edit display may not be shown, but the setting or change may be executed. Press the [2π†] (π/†) button to select the setting or change the value. This can also be done by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet Entering Characters When the character input display is opened, you can enter characters. (Refer to “Entering Characters” on page 174.) 5 6 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 179 Operations in the Special Website 6 To execute the setting, press the [3π] (ENTER) button. To cancel, press the [3†] (CANCEL) button. 7 To actually apply all settings changed in the Internet Settings display, press the [7π†] (SAVE) button. To cancel, press the [8π†] (CANCEL) button. Browser 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Encode Selects the character code encoding for the browser. 2 Home Page Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page. 3 Set current page as Home For details, refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 182. 4 Restore Default Home Restores the home page setting. 5 Show images Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to on. Image data is not shown when this is set to off. 6 Time zone This determines the time zone setting for the browser. LAN Both the wired LAN and wireless LAN need to be set in this display. Make a written note of the settings here, in case you have to enter them again. 1 2 Use DHCP Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet DNS server1 3 DNS server2 IP address Subnet mask Gateway 1 Use DHCP Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP, select “ON.” 2 DNS server 1/DNS server 2 These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. These settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manually)” or “OFF.” 3 IP address/Subnet mask/Gateway These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. The settings here are: IP address, subnet mask, and gateway server address. These settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF.” 180 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operations in the Special Website Wireless LAN These settings here are only necessary when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor. For a wireless LAN setup, make sure to set both the LAN settings (page 180) and the Wireless LAN settings below. The settings at left are not necessary when using the Wireless Game Adaptor. Make a written note of the settings here, in case you have to enter them again 1 SSID 2 3 Channel 4 Encryption 5 WEP key type WEP key length WEP key 1 Wireless Networks Determines whether or not Wireless Networks are displayed. 2 SSID Determines the SSID setting. 3 Channel Determines the channel. 4 Encryption Determines whether or not the data is encrypted. 5 WEP key type/WEP key length/WEP key These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the type and length of the encryption key. Others 1 2 3 4 5 Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 1 Proxy server/Proxy port/Non-proxy server Determines the proxy server name, port number and the host name for the nonproxy server. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server. When using a non-proxy server, enter a separator (comma) between each server name. 2 Delete cookies Deletes the information of all saved cookies. 3 Delete all bookmarks Deletes all saved bookmarks. 4 Initialize setup Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. See “Initializing Internet Settings” on page 183. 5 Connection information Shows detailed information on the current connection. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 181 Operations in the Special Website Changing the Home Page In the default condition, the top page of the special website is automatically set to be the Home page for the browser. However, you can specify any desired page on the special website to be the Home page. 1 2 3 Open the page you wish to set as your new Home page. Press the [5†] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Setting display. Press the TAB [√] button to select the BROWSER tab. 3 4 4 5 Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet 6 182 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 5 6 Press the [1†] (†) button to select the setting “Set current page as Home.” Use the [2π†]/[3π†] (EDIT) buttons to actually set the selected page as your new Home page. To return to the browser, press the [7π†] (SAVE) button. To cancel, press the [8π†] (CANCEL) button. Operations in the Special Website Initializing Internet Settings The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize operation of the instrument; Internet settings must be initialized separately, as explained here. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the browser, but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays (except for the cookies and bookmarks), including those related to Internet connection. 1 2 3 Press the [5†] (SETTING) button to call up the Internet Settings display. Press the TAB [®] button to select the OTHERS tab. Press the [1π†] (π/†) button to select “Initialize.” 3 4 4 Use the [2π†]/ [3π†] (EDIT) buttons to initialize the Internet settings. Sometimes cookies contain personal information. Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet Delete cookies/bookmarks Cookies and bookmarks are still remain after executing the initialize operation above. To delete the cookies or bookmarks, use the appropriate operations in the OTHERS tab display (page 181). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 183 Glossary of Internet Terms Connecting the Clavinova Directly to the Internet Glossary of Internet Terms Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, highvolume data communication. Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages. Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each time you visit the site. DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet. DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses. Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other local storage device—much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument, this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument. Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite differing communications standards. Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to mean the “front screen” or top page of a website. Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile phones and other devices. IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location on the network. LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable. Link Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character strings on a web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the relevant link. Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa. NTP Short for Network Time Protocol, a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network. For this instrument, the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for cookies and SSL. Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider. Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network. Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router. Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services. Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site. SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection. Communication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names. SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet. Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks. URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.” Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website. Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection. Wireless Game Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and game Adaptor machines, etc. equipped with LAN ports. (Wireless Ethernet Converter or Bridge) 184 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Using Your Instrument with Other Devices CVP-403/401 CAUTION Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. CVP-405/403 INPUT VOLUME MIN The right side of the instrument (near the higher keys) P. 185 3 P. 186 4 The left side of the instrument (near the lower keys) CVP-401 MIC. LINE IN MIC. LINE PHONES ) P. 192 MAX 8 P. 191 7 P. 190 6 P. 187 The front side of the instrument (the keyboard side) 2 1 Connecting Audio & Video Devices (345) 1 n Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. Using Headphones (1 [PHONES] jacks) Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks (standard 1/4" phone jacks) located on the leftward underside of the instrument. For details, see page 17. Connecting a Microphone or Guitar (2 [MIC./LINE IN] jack) (CVP-405/403) By connecting a microphone to the [MIC./LINE IN] jack (standard 1/4" phone jack) located on the left underside of the instrument, you can enjoy singing along with Song playback (KARAOKE) or with your own performance. The instrument outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the built-in speakers. For instructions on connecting, see page 54. Please note that when connecting devices of high output level, make sure to set the [MIC. LINE] switch to “LINE.” Using External Audio Devices for playback and Recording (3 [AUX OUT] Jacks) You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the instrument’s sound or to a cassette tape recorder or a digital audio device for recording your performance. The microphone or guitar sound connected to the instrument’s [MIC./LINE IN] jack) is output at the same time. Refer to the diagrams below and use audio cables for connection. These jacks are located on the underside jacks panel of the instrument. CAUTION When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Do not route the output from the [AUX OUT] jacks to the [AUX IN] jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the [AUX IN] jacks is output from the [AUX OUT] jacks. These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage both pieces of equipment. CVP-405 The right side of the instrument (near the higher keys) P. 187 6 P. 190 7 P. 190 P. 191 8 9 5 P. 186 4 P. 186 3 P. 185 The left side of the instrument (near the lower keys) ) P. 192 When these are connected, you can use the instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. Connect the instrument’s AUX OUT [L/L+R]/[R] jacks and the input jacks of a pair of powered speakers using appropriate audio cables. Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. Instrument L/L+R Using Your Instrument with Other Devices The front side of the instrument (the keyboard side) [AUX OUT] Jacks (Standard phone jacks of [L/L+R] and [R]) Powered speakers R AUX OUT Input jack Phone plug (standard) Audio cable Phone plug (standard) CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 185 Connecting Audio & Video Devices Playing External Audio Devices with the Built-in Speakers (4 [AUX IN] Jacks) The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the instrument’s speakers. Connect the output jacks (LINE OUT etc.) of an external synthesizer or the tone generator module and the instrument’s AUX IN [L/L+R]/[R] jacks using appropriate audio cables. Instrument L/L+R Synthesizer Tone generator R Showing the Instrument’s Display Contents on a Separate TV Monitor (5 [VIDEO OUT] Terminal) (CVP-405) Connect the instrument to an external TV monitor, and you can have the current display contents, lyrics (for group sing-alongs and the like) or text files displayed on the TV. For instructions on connecting, see page 56. Video out settings (CVP-405) 1 AUX IN LINE OUT Phone plug (standard) Audio cable Pin plug CAUTION 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [J] (UTILITY) → TAB [√][®] SCREEN OUT Select the video equipment standard “NTSC” π†]/ [2π π†] butor “PAL” by using the [1π tons. Select the contents of the Screen Out signal—the current display contents (LCD), or lyrics/text (LYRICS/TEXT) —by using the π†]/[4π π†] buttons. [3π When the sound of an external device is output to the instrument, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the instrument. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. n • Use only the [L/L+R] jack for connection with a monaural device. • The instrument’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting affects the input signal from the [AUX IN] jacks. n Using Your Instrument with Other Devices • Set the NTSC or PAL to correspond to the standard used by your video equipment. • When LYRICS/TEXT is selected as the contents of the Screen Out signal, only the lyrics of the song or text files are output via VIDEO OUT, regardless of the display that is called up on the instrument. • Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight. Take frequent breaks and focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain. 186 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack) Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller (6 [AUX PEDAL] jack) By connecting a Foot Controller or Footswitch to the [AUX PEDAL] jack, you can have convenient control over various user-assignable functions. For example, connecting the Foot controller FC7 and assigning it the volume control function allows you to add expression to your performance by controlling the volume level of the notes you play. Or by connecting the FC4 or FC5 footswitch and assigning it to the Style playback start/ stop function, you can start and stop the Style with your foot. (In this case, the pedal has the same function as the panel STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button.) The assignable functions are listed following the instructions below. 2 3 4 5 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the three pedals or the AUX-connected pedal, to which the function is to be assigned. π†] button to select the functions to Use the [1π be assigned to the pedal specified in step 2. Details on the pedal functions are listed below. π†]–[8π π†] buttons to set the Use the [2π details of the selected functions. The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3. Details on the parameters are given below. Check that the desired function is controllable with the pedal by actually pressing the pedal. n When you use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings (page 130), these settings are invalid. AUX PEDAL Set the polarity of the pedal Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the control. Press the [I] (AUX PEDAL POLARITY) button to switch the polarity. Foot Pedals Footswitch FC4 (optional) Footswitch FC5 (optional) Foot Controller FC7 (optional) CAUTION Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is off. Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal Using Your Instrument with Other Devices In addition to the footswitch or foot controller, the three piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right, Center and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various functions here. The following explanations cover the related operations and assignable functions (parameters). 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [√] PEDAL CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 187 Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack) Details on the pedal functions are listed here. For functions indicated with “ “, use only the foot controller; proper * operation cannot be done with a footswitch. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices Assignable Pedal Functions 188 VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. This function is available only for the pedal connected to the instrument’s AUX PEDAL jack. SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the pedal, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. SOSTENUTO Allows you to use the pedal as a sostenuto pedal. In other words, if you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not sustain. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only for certain appropriate Voices. GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch when the pedal is released. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). Portamento Time can also be adjusted from the Mixing Console (page 89). This function does not affect certain Natural Voices, which would not sound appropriately with this function. PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal. MOD/S.ART1* (CVP-405) MODULATION (CVP-403/401) Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. Moreover, various effects can be added to the S. Articulation Voice (CVP-405) (page 79). The effect becomes deeper when pressing down the foot controller. You can turn this function on/off for each keyboard part on this display. MOD/S.ART2 (ALT) (CVP-405) As a variation on MOD/S.ART1, the effects (waveform) can be switched on/off by the pedal/footswitch. The effects (waveform) is alternately turned on and off each time the pedal/footswitch is pressed. You can turn this function on/off for each keyboard part on this display. S.ART SW (CVP-405) When you use a S. Articulation voice that has an effect assigned to the pedal/ footswitch, you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal/footswitch. You can turn this function on/off for each keyboard part on this display. DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off. VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE effect type is selected. HARMONY/ECHO Switches the HARMONY/ECHO Voice Effect on and off. VOCAL HARMONY (CVP-405/403) Switches the Vocal Harmony function on and off. TALK (CVP-405/403) Switches the MIC SETTING Talk function on and off. SCORE PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page. SCORE PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page. LYRICS PAGE+ While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next lyrics page. LYRICS PAGE– While the song is stopped, you can return to the last lyrics page. TEXT PAGE+ (CVP-405) You can turn to the next text page. TEXT PAGE– (CVP-405) You can return to the last text page. SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button. SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Using the Footswitch or Foot Controller ([AUX PEDAL] jack) INTRO1–3 Same as the [INTRO I–III] buttons. MAIN A–D Same as the [MAIN VARIATION A–D] buttons. FILL DOWN Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. FILL SELF Plays a fill-in. FILL BREAK Plays a break. FILL UP Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. ENDING1–3 Same as the [ENDING/rit. I–III] buttons. FADE IN/OUT Switches Fade In/Fade Out function on and off. FINGERED/FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 103). BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed during Style playback. If the fingering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4π†]–[8π†] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. DUAL ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button. SPLIT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button. OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting. OTS– Calls up the previous One Touch Setting. n The Sostenuto and Portament functions will not affect the Organ Flute Voices, even they have been assigned to the Foot Pedals. Adjustable Parameters for Each Function The parameters below correspond to buttons [2π†]–[8π†], and their availability depends on the selected control type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT,” “RIGHT 1,” “RIGHT 2” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display. These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal. HALF PEDAL POINT* (CVP-405/403) You can specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the damper or soft effect (page 188) starts working. DEPTH Determines the depth of the pedal effect. UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change is raised or lowered. RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. Linked to the Mixing Console → Pitch Bend Range (page 89) setting. ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released. KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal. PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Using Your Instrument with Other Devices SONG, STYLE, MIC (CVP-405/403), LEFT, RIGHT1, RIGHT2 189 Connecting external MIDI devices ([MIDI] terminals)/Connecting a Computer or USB Device Connecting External MIDI Devices (7 [MIDI] Terminals) Use the built-in [MIDI] terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices. MIDI IN Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device. MIDI OUT Transmits MIDI messages generated by the instrument. MIDI THRU Simply relays the MIDI messages received at MIDI IN. For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to the following sections: • What is MIDI?..............................................page 192 • What You Can Do With MIDI.......................page 195 • MIDI Settings ...............................................page 196 Connecting a Computer, USB Device, or Internet (789)) Connecting a Computer (8 [USB TO HOST] and 7 [MIDI] Terminals) By connecting a computer to the [USB TO HOST] or [MIDI] terminals, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI, and take advantage of sophisticated computer music programs. Keep in mind that you also need to install an appropriate USBMIDI driver. The instructions below explain how to connect and use the terminals. n If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recommend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB, rather than by MIDI. n Driver A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware device. You need to install a USB-MIDI driver to connect the computer and the instrument. Refer to the separate Installation Guide (page 4). Using Your Instrument with Other Devices This explanation is divided into two parts, covering the two connections: connection to the [USB TO HOST] terminal and connection to the [MIDI] terminal. • Connecting to the [USB TO HOST] terminal When connecting the instrument to the computer via USB, use a standard USB cable (having the USB logo) to connect the [USB TO HOST] terminal on the instrument to the USB terminal of the computer. Then, install the USB-MIDI driver. Instrument 190 USB cable CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual n About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. Explanations on the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal follow in the next section. CAUTION Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off and restart the computer. • Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby), and quit any open application software, also turns off the power to the instrument. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument off or unplugging the USB cable to/from the instrument/ computer. - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. n • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. • Connection by [MIDI] terminals There are two ways to connect the instrument via MIDI to a computer. If you have a MIDI interface built into your computer, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the computer interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface. Instrument MIDI cable [MIDI IN] [MIDI OUT] terminal terminal [MIDI OUT] terminal [MIDI IN] terminal Computer with MIDI interface installed Connecting a Computer or USB Device The second connection possibility involves a separate, external MIDI interface connected to the computer via a USB port or a serial port (modem or printer terminal). Using standard MIDI cables, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the external interface to the [MIDI IN] terminal of the instrument, and connect the [MIDI OUT] terminal of the instrument to the MIDI IN terminal of the interface. MIDI cable Instrument [MIDI IN] terminal USB port or serial port (modem or printer terminal) MIDI interface [MIDI OUT] terminal Computer n Make sure to use the appropriate MIDI interface for your computer. Connecting to a USB-type LAN Adaptor and USB Storage Device (9 via the [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal) There are two ways of using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. ■ By connecting the USB-type LAN adaptor, you can directly access special Internet websites for downloading music data (page 172). ■ By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. n Checking remaining memory on the USB storage device You can check this in the display called up by the following operation: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [√][®] MEDIA Select the device by using the [A]/[B] buttons in this display and press [F] (PROPERTY). n Even with a computer connected to the [USB TO HOST] terminal and a USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, you cannot access the USB storage device from the computer via the instrument. Formatting USB storage media For details, see page 69. CAUTION Formatting a USB storage media completely erases all data on the media. Make sure that the USB storage media you’re formatting does not contain important data! Backing up your data to a computer ■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown below. Saves internal data to a USB storage device. n About the [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE] terminals There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: [USB TO HOST] and [USB TO DEVICE]. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. Explanations on the [USB TO HOST] terminal can be found in the previous section. Computer USB storage device USB TO DEVICE terminal Instrument Using USB Storage Devices This type is used to connect the instrument to a USB storage device, and allows you to save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. The following description generally explains about how to connect and use them. Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read “Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc)” on page 22. 2 USB storage device Computer Instrument Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 1 Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders Connect the USB storage device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal with a standard USB cable. After that, exit once from the selection display then return to the display (or press the Tab switch buttons [√] and [®] simultaneously from the selection display). The USB tabs (USB 1, USB 2, etc.) are automatically called up, allowing you to save files and play back music data from the devices. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 191 Connecting a Computer or USB Device Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument. Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files and Style File-formatted Style files created on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the data on the instrument. Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device What is MIDI? Put simply, MIDI is a data transfer standard that allows easy and comprehensive control among electronic/digital music instruments and other devices. To get a better idea of what MIDI does, let’s first consider acoustic instruments, such as a grand piano and a classical guitar. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production Internal amp L USB storage device Tone generator (Electric circuit) Internal amp R Playing the key board Computer Instrument Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument Computer USB storage device [USB TO DEVICE] terminal Instrument Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. Now, let’s examine what happens when we playback a recording. When you play back a music CD (for example, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound (vibration in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data. Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument (audio data) Recording Playback Connect to the Internet () [LAN] Port) There are three ways to use the [LAN] port (located on the bottom left of the instrument) to access special Internet websites, and download song data, etc. See page 172 for instructions on connecting. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the actual piano performance. The piano itself is not necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them. 192 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Connecting a Computer or USB Device/What is MIDI Recording and play back the performance of a digital instrument (MIDI data) Recording Playback Tone Generator Sequencer Controller (keyboard, etc.) USB storage device USB storage device Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the instrument’s keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis for sound generation, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. Example Keyboard Data n In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent through output jacks (such as [AUX OUT]) on the instrument. Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano, special recording equipment is needed. However, since the instrument features a built-in sequencer that lets you record performance data, this recording equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument—the Clavinova—allows you to both record and play back the data. Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (strength at which it was played) 120 (strong) Tone generator Sequencer Keyboard performance (MIDI data) n Even though it is a single musical instrument, the instrument can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The instrument can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The instrument can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. n MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data: • The amount of data is much less. • The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices However, we also need a sound source to produce the audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The tone generator of the instrument fills this function. The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds—including that of a piano. Looked at in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano—one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument, such as guitar or violin. Panel operations on the instrument, such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment Styles and Songs also consist of MIDI data. Channel Messages The instrument is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 MIDI channels (or reception of 32 channels for MIDI data reception when using the [USB] terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 193 What is MIDI? Message Name Operation/Panel Setting Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Program Change Control Change For selecting Voices (with control change bank select MSB/LSB settings) Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc. The performance data of all Songs and Styles is handled as MIDI data. MIDI Channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1–16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. Weather report NEWS 1 2 NEWS 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI Transmit channel 2 Using Your Instrument with Other Devices MIDI cable Clavinova track (channnel) RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument n MIDI cable MIDI Receive channel 2 n The instrument’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI. → LOCAL CONTROL (page 198) For example, several parts or channels can be transmitted simultaneously, including the Style data (as shown below). 194 Example: Recording a performance with the auto accompaniment (Style playback) sound of the instrument to an external sequencer CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Channel 1 Channel 2 External sequencer Track 1 Track 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 198). The instrument also allows you to determine how the received data is played back (page 199). System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. These include System Exclusive messages for transferring data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime messages for controlling the MIDI device. Message Name Operation/Panel Setting System Exclusive Message Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc. Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation The messages transmitted/received by the instrument are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the separate Data List. What You Can Do With MIDI What You Can Do With MIDI • The CVP-405/403/401 is compatible with ESEQ. ■ Record your performance data (1–16 channels) using the instrument’s auto accompaniment features on an external sequencer (or computer with sequencer software). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it back on the instrument. ● XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and openended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files. The instrument is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.) MIDI receive Instrument MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI transmit Computer or Sequencer When you want to use the instrument as an XG-compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI channels 1–16 to “SONG” in MIDI/USB 1 in MIDI Receive (page 199). ■ Controlling from an external MIDI keyboard Instrument MIDI receive MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CVP-405/403/401, and whether or not the CVP-405/403/401 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Sequence Formats Song data is recorded and stored in a variety of different systems, referred to as “sequence formats.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the Song data matches that of the MIDI device. The CVP-405/403/401 is compatible with the following formats. ● ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, Voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. The instrument is compatible with the following formats. n Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. ● GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. ● GM System Level 2 “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and improves Song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. ● XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Song data recorded on the CVP-405/403/401 using Voices in the XG category is XG-compatible. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices ● SMF (Standard MIDI file) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The CVP-405/403/401 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. • Song data recorded on the CVP-405/403/401 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0. ● Style File The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. ● DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. ● GS GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 195 MIDI Settings MIDI Settings In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. The instrument gives you a set of ten pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your particular MIDI application or external device. Also, you can edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten of your original templates to the USER display. You can then save all these original templates as a single file to USB storage devices, in the MIDI SETUP selection display (called up by pressing [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY → TAB [®] SYSTEM RESET). Basic Operation 1 2 To use the pre-programmed templates or to edit them Press the TAB [√] button to select the PRESET display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a MIDI template. To use the templates already saved to the USER display or to edit them Press the TAB [®] button to select the USER display. Press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select a MIDI template. †] (EDIT) butTo edit a template, press the [8† ton to call up the MIDI display for editing. The individual parameters settings are shown for the selected template. Here you can edit each parameter. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices 3 Call up the operation (MIDI template selection) display. Function → [I] MIDI 196 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 4 Use the TAB [√]/[®] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings (page 198) TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmission Settings (page 198) RECEIVE display MIDI Reception Settings (page 199) BASS display Settings for the bass note of chord for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 199) CHORD DETECT display Settings for the chord type for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 200) 5 6 When you’ve finished editing, press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI template selection display (PRESET or USER). Select the USER tab display to save the data by using the TAB [√][®] buttons (page 70). MIDI Settings Pre-Programmed MIDI Templates Template name Description All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT1, 2,and LEFT), with the exception of Song parts. KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “All Parts” with the exception of how keyboard parts are managed. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.” Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/ sequencer). Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external sequencer. Clock Ext Playback (Song or Style) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instrument’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instrument. MIDI Accord 1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the lefthand buttons. MIDI Accord 2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI note events. MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit. MIDI Pedal 2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit. MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 197 MIDI Settings SYSTEM display MIDI System Settings The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196. ● START/STOP Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect Song or Style playback. ■ MESSAGE SW ● SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI System Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclusive messages generated by external equipment on or off. ● CHORD SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect. root and type) on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off. ■ LOCAL CONTROL Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the instrument controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the instrument’s internal voices, and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. TRANSMIT display MIDI Transmit Settings The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196. This determines which parts will be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. ■ Clock setting, etc. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices ● CLOCK Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the instrument is being used alone or as a master keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the instrument with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to that device, set this parameter to the appropriate setting: MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the external device is connected properly (e.g., to the instrument’s MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly transmitting a MIDI clock signal. When this is set for control by an external device (MIDI, USB 1 or USB 2), the Tempo is indicated as “Ext.” in the Main display. ● TRANSMIT CLOCK Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back. ● RECEIVE TRANSPOSE Determines whether or not the instrument's transpose setting (page 58) is applied to the note events received by the instrument via MIDI. 198 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Operation Select the part to be transmitted and the channel via which the selected part will be transmitted. You can also determine the types of data to be sent. ● With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual. • UPPER The keyboard part played on the right side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT1 and/ or 2). • LOWER The keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not affected by the on/off status of the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. ● Tx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). MIDI Settings n When different parts are assigned to the same transmit channel If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts, the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel— resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the connected MIDI device. n About the protected Songs Write-protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1–16 are set to be transmitted. ■ MIDI messages which can be transmitted or received (recognized) The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display. • Note (Note events).......................................page 160 • CC (CONTROL CHANGE) ..........................page 160 • PC (PROGRAM CHANGE)...........................page 160 • PB (Pitch Bend)............................................page 160 • AT (Aftertouch).............................................page 160 ● Rx MONITOR The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). n Parameter Lock You can “lock” specific parameters (e.g., effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel controls (page 128). ■ MIDI transmission/reception via the USB terminal and MIDI terminals The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the [USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/ receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the MIDI messages is as follows: MIDI reception MIDI transmission [USB TO HOST] jack [MIDI IN] jack [USB TO [MIDI OUT] jack HOST] jack Port handling RECEIVE display USB1 MIDI Receive Settings Merge MIDI/USB1 01–16 USB2 Merge USB2 01–16 MIDI/USB 01–16 BASS display Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196. This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received. Operation Select the channel to be received and the part via which the selected channel will be received. You can also determine the types of data to be received. The explanations here apply to the BASS display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196. These settings let you determine the bass note for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass note of the chord of Style playback. The bass note will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. ● The instrument can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices ● With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in this manual. • KEYBOARD The received note messages control the instrument’s keyboard performance. • EXTRA PART 1–5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. The instrument can be used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by using these five parts in addition to the general parts (except for the microphone sound). Operation Select the channel and set the “ON/OFF” for that channel. Use the All OFF item to set all channels to OFF. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 199 MIDI Settings CHORD DETECT display Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT display to be called up in step 4 of the “Basic Operation” on page 196. These settings let you determine the chord type for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style playback. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The chord type will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display above. Displaying the Voice Program Change Number Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice selection display. This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB values and program change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device. Using Your Instrument with Other Devices You can set this in the display called up by the following operations: [FUNCTION] → [J] UTILITY →TAB [√][®] CONFIG 2. Switch the DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER menu ON and OFF. n • The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower, since that number system starts from “0.” • For the GS Voices, this feature is not available (the program change numbers are not shown). 200 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Overall The instrument does not turn on. • Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the instrument, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. • Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. This is normal. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers. • Noise may be heard if a mobile phone is used near the instrument or if the phone is ringing. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the instrument. The letters in the display cannot be read, because the display is too bright (or dark). • Use the [LCD CONTRAST] knob to adjust for optimum visibility. • Adjust the brightness of the display (page 19). The overall volume is too low, or, no sound is heard. • The master volume may be set too low. Set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. • The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 40). • Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 105). • Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. (This happens when the speaker setting is set to “HEADPHONE SW”; page 17.) Unplug the headphones. • Make sure the speaker setting is set to ON (page 17). • The Fade-In and Fade-Out function is on, muting the sound. To turn it off, press the pedal to which you assigned the Fade In/Out function. • Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 198). Not all simultaneously played notes sound. • You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 213) of the instrument. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. The keyboard volume is lower than the Song/Style playback volume. • The volume of the keyboard parts may be set too low. Raise the volume in the BALANCE display (page 40). Keys do not sound at the proper pitch. • Make sure the Performance Assistant function is off on the operation display (page 43). - Some Voices have a looping sound. - Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending upon the voice. • This is normal and is a result of the instrument’s sampling system. Some Voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers. • This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. The Main display does not appear even when turning the power on. • This may occur if a USB storage device has been installed to the instrument. Installation of some USB storage device may result a long interval between turning the power on and appearance of the Main display. To avoid this, turn the power on after disconnecting the device. Pedals The damper, sostenuto and soft functions do not work for the relevant pedals. • The pedal cord plug is not connected. Securely insert the pedal cord plug into the proper jack (page 207). • Each pedal has been assigned to a different function. Make sure that each pedal is properly assigned to SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, and SOFT (page 187). • Make sure the Registration Sequence function is set to OFF (page 131). Files/Folders Some characters of the file/folder name are garbled. • The language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the file/folder name (page 18). An existing file is not shown. • The file extension (.MID, etc.) may have been changed or deleted. Manually rename the file, adding the appropriate extension, on a computer. The data contained in the USB storage device is not shown on the instrument itself. • Data files with names of more than 50 characters cannot be handled by the instrument. Rename the file, reducing the number of characters to 50 or less. Appendix Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune display (page 83). - There is a slight difference in sound quality among different notes played on the keyboard. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 201 Demo How can I stop the demo? • Press the [EXIT] button. Voice The Voice selected from the Voice Selection display does not sound. • Check whether or not the selected part is turned on (page 80). • To select the Voice for the right-hand key range, make sure the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)]/[SPLIT (LEFT)] buttons are off. For the Voice to be layered in the righthand range, press the PART ON/OFF [DUAL (RIGHT2)] button. To select the Voice for the left-hand key range, press the PART ON/OFF [SPLIT (LEFT)] button. A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. The sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. • The RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the same Voice. Turn off the RIGHT 2 part or change the Voice of one of the parts. The sound seems strange or different than expected when changing a rhythm Voice (drum kit, etc.) of the Style or Song from the Mixer. • When changing the rhythm/percussion Voices (drum kits, etc.) of the Style and Song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of Song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the Song and playing back from that point. In the case of Style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same Style again. Tremolo/Trill cannot be applied to the Organ Flute Voice. • This is normal; Tremolo and Trill settings in the Harmony/Echo display are not effective for Organ Flute Voices. The Harmony function does not operate. • Harmony cannot be used with the AI Fingered or AI Full Keyboard fingering modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 103). When a Voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed. • Each Voice has its own suitable preset settings, which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 102). Appendix The Voice produces excessive noise. • Certain Voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 89). The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. 202 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual • This may be caused by certain effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects (page 91). • Adjust the sound using the [8π†] (TOTAL GAIN ADJ.) buttons from the display shown in step 6 of “Editing and Saving the selected EQ” (page 95), if you are using the Master EQ. • Some filter resonance settings in the VOICE SET display (page 98) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary. • Noise may occur depending on the settings made in the Filter display of the Mixing Console. Adjust the Harmonic Content or Brightness controls in the Filter display (page 89). The sound does not change when replacing Voices with the Song Auto Revoice feature. • Depending on the particular Song data, there are some instances where Song Auto Revoice has no effect, even when replacing Voices. The sound of the Voice doesn’t change, even when editing the Voice. • Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the original settings of the Voice. Voices other than those in the Preset display cannot be selected for Step recording. • This is normal. Style Style playback does not start. • Make sure to press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 198). Only the rhythm channel plays. • Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. • You may be playing keys in the right hand range of the keyboard. Make sure to play keys in the chord range of the keyboard. Styles cannot be selected. • If the size of the Style data is large (about 120 KB or greater), the Style cannot be selected because the data is too large to be ready by the instrument. The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment. • You may not be playing the correct keys for indicating the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” of the separate Data List. • You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode (page 104). Synchro Stop cannot be turned on. • Synchro Stop cannot be turned on when the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard,” or when Style On/Off is set to off. Make sure the fingering mode is set to something besides “Full Keyboard” or “Al Full Keyboard” and set Style On/Off to on. Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard. • This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different fingering mode (page 104). When playing back one Style and selecting another, the newly selected Style doesn’t play at the proper Tempo. • You can select whether the appropriate tempo will be called up automatically or not by using the TEMPO parameter in the STYLE CHANGE BEHAVIOR function. Starting a Song while playing back a Style stops Style playback. This is because Song playback has priority. The two ways shown below let you play back a Style and Song simultaneously. • Set the Song to Synchro Start standby, then start the Style. • Start the Style playback after playing back a Song. The level balance of the various Parts becomes wrong or unexpected sounds are output when selecting a Style or a Voice after selecting a Song. • The level balance of the Parts can change and unexpected sounds can be produced because of the effects applied to each Part. The “Off” setting is not shown for the Play Type parameter in the Assembly (Style Creator) feature. • The selected section is set to record enable. Release the recording assignment by pressing the appropriate [1†]– [8†] button in the recording channel display (TAB [√] button → BASIC tab → [F] REC CH). The channels BASS-PHR2 cannot be edited in Channel Edit. • This is normal; BASS-PHR2 channels of the Preset Styles cannot be edited. Registration memory The order for calling up Registration Memory settings is not shown on the Registration Sequence setting display. • The bank containing the Registration has not been selected. Select the appropriate bank (page 128). Even though a Registration Memory setting containing a User/USB voice is selected, the File Selection display shows a Preset Voice. • This is normal; even with the Preset Voice shown, the actual sounding Voice is the selected User/USB Voice. When a User/USB Voice is saved to the User/USB drive, the actual data is divided into two separate types: 1) the source Preset Voice itself, and 2) the parameter settings as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a User/USB Voice, the instrument selects the Preset voice (on which the User/ USB Voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings to it—so that your original User/USB Voice is sounded. Song Songs cannot be selected. • This may be because the language settings have been changed. Set the appropriate language for the Song file name. • If the size of the Song data is large (about 300 KB or greater), the Song cannot be selected because the data is too large to be read by the instrument. Song playback does not start. • “New Song” (a blank Song) has been selected. Make sure to select an appropriate Song in the Song Selection display (page 35). • Make sure to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. • The Song has been stopped at the end of the Song data. Return to the beginning of the Song by pressing the SONG [STOP] button. • In the case a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the original file may not be in the same folder. It cannot be played back unless the original file (showing “Prot.2 Orig” at the upper left of the Song name) is in the same folder. • In case of a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the original file name may have been changed. Rename the file with the original file name (so that “Prot.2 Orig” is shown at the upper left of the Song name). • In case of a Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name), the file icon may have been changed. Songs to which write-protect has been applied cannot be played back when the file icon of the original has been changed. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 198). CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Appendix The Song/Style registered to the Registration Memory cannot be called up. • If the registered Song/Style is contained on USB storage device and the USB storage device is not inserted or connected to the instrument, the Song/Style cannot be called up. Insert or connect the appropriate USB storage device containing the Song/Style data. When using the Freeze function of the Registration Memory, the On/Off setting of the Left Part does not change even when changing the Registration Memory setting. • The Left Part On/Off setting is included in the Style group. Remove the checkmark from “STYLE” in the Freeze setting display (page 129). 203 Song playback stops before the Song is finished. • The Guide function is turned on. (In this case, playback is “waiting” for the correct key to be played.) Press the [GUIDE] button to turn off the guide function. The lamps in the chord section of the keyboard light. • The Guide function for chords (page 50) has been enabled. Turn the Style off by pressing the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button. The Song last selected before turning off the power is no longer available. • If the Song last selected before turning off the power is contained in USB storage device, you’ll need to reinsert/ reconnect the same USB storage device to call up the Song again. The Guide lamps do not indicate how to play chords. • Make sure that the Guide Mode is set to “FollowLights” (page 104). • You cannot check how to play chords with the Guide lamps if the chord fingering method is set to “Single Finger,” “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” Select another fingering method (page 104). The measure number is different from that of the score in the Song Position display, shown by pressing the [REW]/[FF] buttons. • This happens when playing back music data for which a specific, fixed tempo is set. In the AB Repeat function, the B point cannot be set. • The A point has not been set. Set the B point only after setting the A point. When playing back a Song, some channels do not play. • Playback of these channels may be set to “OFF.” Turn playback on for those channels that are set to “OFF” (page 139). A Song to which write-protect has been applied (“Prot. 2 Edit” is shown at the upper left of the Song name) cannot be moved to external media such as a SmartMedia card or floppy disk. • A Song to which write-protect has been applied cannot be moved to an external media such as SmartMedia/ floppy disk, etc. Use the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal to move the song to a USB flash memory device connected to this instrument. The Tuning Curve of the piano Voice does not quite match that of other instruments’ Voices. • The Tuning Curve designed especially for piano Voices may not sound with the appropriate pitches when used with other instrument Voices. Set the Tuning Curve to “FLAT” (page 97). Guide The melody still plays back, even when specifying Track 1 as the part to be muted for one-handed practice. • A part other than the melody part has been assigned to Track 1. Reassign the channel containing the melody to Track 1 (page 138). Appendix The Guide lamps do not light during Song playback, even after pressing the [GUIDE] button. • Make sure to turn on the Guide lamps (page 137). • Any notes outside of the 88-key range cannot be indicated by the Guide lamps. The Guide lamps light an octave or two lower/higher than the actual pitch. • The Guide lamps sometimes light an octave or two lower/higher than the actual pitch depending on the selected Voice. 204 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Score When displaying the music score, long notes that have been entered, such as whole notes and ties, are not displayed correctly. • Long notes, such as whole notes and ties, may not be shown in the music score display exactly as they were entered. Selecting “Tenuto” by pressing the [H] button before inputting each note in the Step Record display (page 145) may solve the problem. The tempo, beat, measure and music notation is not displayed correctly. • Some Song data for the instrument has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. For such Song data, the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not be displayed correctly. The note name partially obscures the note in the display. • When several notes occur close to each other, the note name may obscure the note at left. The music score of the right-hand/left-hand part is not displayed. • The appropriate channels have not been assigned to the right-hand and left-hand parts. Set RIGHT and LEFT to the appropriate channels (page 39). The notation in the display is cut off, with the middle of a measure starting on the next line. • When all the notes of a measure cannot fit on one line, the remaining notes in the measure are carried over to the next line. Dotted notes are indicated as rests. • This is normal; sometimes dotted notes are indicated as rests. Chords are not displayed. • If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed. Lyrics (Karaoke) Microphone/Vocal harmony (CVP-405/403) Some of the lyrics overlap each other. • This happens for Songs containing many lyrics. The microphone input signal cannot be recorded. • The microphone input signal cannot be recorded by Song/Style recording. Use the USB Audio Recorder function (page 60). Furthermore, you can connect a recorder to the output terminals [AUX OUT] and record the microphone signal. The Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed. (CVP-405) • When the background color is specified in the song data, the Lyrics Background setting cannot be changed. Harmony can be heard in addition to the microphone sound. • Vocal Harmony is set to “ON.” Turn Vocal Harmony off (page 57). Lyrics are not displayed. • If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. Performance assistant technology Performance assistant technology does not work appropriately. • Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop Song playback, then set the [ACMP ON/OFF] and PART ON/OFF [LEFT] to off. Finally, restart the Song. Video out (CVP-405) The instrument display contents cannot be sent via video out and do not show on an external monitor. • Make sure that the NTSC/PAL setting corresponds to the standard of your particular video equipment (page 56). Some flashing parallel lines appear in the television or video monitor. • Occasionally some flashing parallel lines may appear in the television or video monitor. This does not necessarily indicate that the monitor is malfunctioning. For optimum results, try adjusting the color settings on the monitor itself. The monitor you are using may not show the instrument's display contents as expected. • Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as recommended, the monitor you are using may not show the instrument's display contents as expected (e.g., the display contents may not fit on the screen, the characters may not be completely clear, or the colors may be incorrect). The Vocal Harmony effect sounds distorted or out-oftune. Your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds, such as the Style sound from the instrument. In particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony. To remedy this: • Sing as closely to the microphone as possible. • Use a directional microphone. • Turn down the Master volume, Style volume, or Song volume control (page 40). • Separate the microphone from the external speakers as much as possible. • Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 167). • Raise the microphone input level (TH) via the Compressor function in the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 168). Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature. • Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Harmony mode (page 169). USB Audio Recorder (CVP-405/403) The message “This drive is busy now.” appeared, and then the recording was aborted. • Make sure to use a compatible USB storage device (page 22). • Make sure that the USB storage device has enough memory (page 191). • If you are using a USB memory device to which data has already been recorded, check first that no important data remains on the device, then format it (page 69) and try recording again. Appendix CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 205 CVP-405: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up Have a Phillips-head (+) screwall screws upon comdriver ready. pleting assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. 1 • Do not place the unit A with the rear side facing down. Incorrect • Do not lay the unit A upsidedown on the floor. Incorrect 3 Attach B and C. Remove all parts from the box. Confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. CAUTION A C D B B To prevent the key cover from accidentally opening during assembly, press down on the key cover, making sure that the sheet (shown) remain in place. C 1 Fix B to the bottom surface of A using two screws. 2 Fix B to the speaker box using two screws. A A B B E Bundled pedal cord inside 3 Fix C in the same way. If the screw holes do not align, loosen the other screws and adjust the position of C and D. AC power cord 5 ✕18 mm fixing screws ✕ 14 4 Attach D. 2 Fix D to the speaker box using two screws. 2 With the key cover closed and the keyboard side on the bottom, lean A against the wall. CAUTION A Please do not touch the speaker net. Doing so may damage the speaker inside. 1 Fix D to the bottom surface of A using two screws. A D If the screw holes do not align, loosen the other screws and adjust the position of D. Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom. 5 Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the floor. Place the unit A on the cloth with the keyboard side on the bottom and lean A against the wall so that it will not fall or slip. Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the instrument and wall from scratches. • Be careful not to pinch your fingers. • When you raise A, do not hold the key cover. Raising A to the standing position. Use the B and C as support to raise A. CAUTION CAUTION Appendix • Be careful not to pinch your fingers. • The top part of the music rest is not fixed. When you lean the unit against the wall, support the music rest with your hand so that the music rest will not fall. 206 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual A 6 Installing E. 1 Remove the plastic cover from D. 2 Untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of E. D E Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the instrument or result in improper operation. 9 D 3 Pass the pedal cord between E and D. E 4 Make sure that E lays flat, with no gap between itself and the floor, then affix the E using two screws. 7 Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. Connect the pedal cord. 1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal connector. Insert the plug with the arrow-printed side facing front (toward the keyboard side). If the plug will not go in easily, do not force it. Double-check the orientation of the plug, then try again. Correct Incorrect 2 Align the pedal cord into the groove on D, and install the plastic cover onto the groove. Be careful not to insert the cover’s attachment strip between the groove wall and the leg. ■ After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? → Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? → Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? → Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. Appendix Do not hold here. Key cover 110 220 240 8 127 (the bottom of the right side as seen from the front) Do not hold here. Hold here. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 207 CVP-403: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up Have a Phillips-head (+) screwall screws upon comdriver ready. pleting assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. 1 Open the package, take out marked “C” in the illustration, take out the styrofoam pads, and place the unit A on top of the pads. 3 1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E, then attach the upper side to D and E. 2 Attach the top of B to D and E by finger-tightening the thin screws (4 ✕ 12mm). 3 While pushing the lower part of D and E from outside, secure the bottom ends of B using two tapping screws (4 ✕ 20mm). 4 Insert the other two tapping screws (4 ✕ 20mm) into the other two screw holes to secure B. 5 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that were attached in Step 3-2. Position the pads so that they will protect the headphone jack located underneath the front left corner. A Phones jacks Styrofoam pads Attach B. Depending on the model of digital piano you purchased, the surface color of one side of the rear panel may be different from the other side. In this case, position the rear panel so that the side of the surface color similar to the side panel (left) and the side panel (right) faces the player. E 1 To prevent the key cover from accidentally opening during assembly, press down on the key cover, making sure that the sheet (shown) remain in place. 25 B D 3 3 B 4 4 Bundled pedal cord inside C Mount A. CAUTION D • Fingers can become pinched between A and C/D/E, be extra careful so as not to drop A. • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. E Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm from either end of A when positioning it. Assembly Parts AC power cord A 6 ✕ 25 mm long screws ✕ 4 6 ✕ 16 mm short screws ✕ 4 4 ✕ 20 mm tapping screws ✕ 4 4 ✕ 12 mm thin screws ✕ 2 Cord holders ✕ 2 2 Attach C to D and E. 1 Untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the C. Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 6. Appendix D E C 2 Use the four 6 ✕ 25 mm long screws to attach C. First attach one side panel, then attach the other side panel. 208 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual At least 10 cm 5 Fix A. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. 1 Center A to produce equal A clearance on the left and right sides. 8 2 Use 6 ✕ 16 mm short screws Set the adjuster. to secure A from the front. A Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. 6 Connect the pedal cord. 1 Insert the pedal cord plug to the pedal connector from the front. 3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. 2 Attach the cord holders to D as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. 7 D Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. ■ After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? → Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? → Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? → Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion Voltage Selector Key cover Do not hold here. Hold here. Do not hold here. Appendix Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 209 CVP-401: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up all Have a Phillips-head (+) screwscrews upon completing driver ready. assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. 1 Open the package, take out marked “C” in the illustration, take out the styrofoam pads, and place the unit A on top of the pads. Remove all parts from the box. Confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. 3 Attach B. Depending on the model of digital piano you purchased, the surface color of one side of the rear panel may be different from the other side. In this case, position the rear panel so that the side of the surface color similar to the side panel (left) and the side panel (right) faces the player. 1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E, then attach the upper side to D and E. 2 Attach the top of B to D and E by finger-tightening the thin screws (4 ✕ 12mm). 3 While pushing the lower part of D and E from outside, secure the bottom ends of B using two tapping screws (4 ✕ 20mm). 4 Insert the other two tapping screws (4 ✕ 20mm) into the other two screw holes to secure B. 5 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that were attached in Step 3-2. E 25 A Styrofoam pads B 1 D 3 B 3 4 4 C D L Bundled pedal cord inside Securely tighten the screws on C that were attached in Step 2-3. E Assembly Parts AC power cord C 6 ✕ 20 mm long screws ✕ 4 Tighten the screw. 6 ✕ 16 mm short screws ✕ 4 4 x 20 mm tapping screws ✕ 4 Cord holders ✕ 2 4 ✕ 12 mm thin screws ✕ 2 2 Attach (finger-tighten) C to D and E. E 2 5 Mount A. CAUTION • Fingers can become pinched between the unit A and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the A. • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm from either end of A when positioning it. D C E 1 1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord. Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 7. 2 Align D and E with each end of C. 3 Attach D and E to C by finger-tightening the long screws (6 ✕ 20 mm). 210 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual At least 10 cm R 3 L Appendix A B D 6 Secure A. 1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right ends of A will project beyond D and E equally when seen from the front. 2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 ✕ 16mm) from the front. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. 9 Set the adjuster. 1 Center A to produce equal A clearance on the left and right sides. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. 2 Use 6x16 mm short screws to secure A from the front. 7 Connect the pedal cord. 1 Insert the pedal cord plug to the pedal connector from the rear. 3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. 2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. 8 Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. ■ After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? → Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? → Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? → Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion 110 127 220 240 Key cover Do not hold here. Appendix Voltage Selector Do not hold here. Hold here. Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 211 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) (CVP-405) The floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case and screws. For a list of optional floppy disk drives available for this instrument, see “Optional Accessories” (page 214). Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 1 Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy disk drive into the case. 3 Attach the drive and case assembly to the left underside of the instrument, using the included four screws (4 mm x 10 mm). Insert the drive to the case, with the side having the rubber stoppers facing the case. 4 Dual-sided adhesive tape Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown. Appendix 2 212 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Specifications CVP-405 Sound Source Keyboard CVP-403 AWM Stereo Sampling Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) Keyboard Graded Hammer (GH) Keyboard Number of keys 88 320 ✕ 240 dots QVGA Monochrome 5.7 inch LCD 320 ✕ 240 dots QVGA color 5.7 inch LCD Display Music Score, Lyrics YES YES – Wallpaper Customize (Lyrics display) YES – Voice 128 96 414 voices + 480 XG Voices 19 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2 + GS (GS Voices for GS Song playback) 340 voices + 480 XG Voices 16 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2 + GS (GS Voices for GS Song playback) 296 voices + 480 XG Voices 15 Drum/SFX Kits + GM2 + GS (GS Voices for GS Song playback) Natural! Voice 21 21 3 S. Articulation! Voice 24 Mega Voice 15 Voice Selection – 10 20 14 10 Cool! Voice 26 18 16 Sweet! Voice 22 13 11 Regular Voice 10 276 254 Sound Creator Effect Blocks Effect Types - Live! Voice Organ Flutes! 246 YES Reverb/Chorus/ DSP/Master 6 Microphone 1 Reverb/Chorus/ DSP Reverb: 34 Preset + 3 User Chorus: 29 Preset + 3 User DSP 1: 191 Preset + 3 User DSP 2–4: 106 Preset + 10 User Master EQ – 5 Preset + 2 User Part EQ 27 Parts Vocal Harmony 60 Preset + 10 User – Accompaniment Styles 344 243 191 Pro Styles 284 195 151 Session Styles 24 12 4 Pianist Styles Mega Voice Styles Accompaniment Style 320 ✕ 240 dots QVGA Monochrome 4.6 inch LCD Text Polyphony (max) Effects CVP-401 AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling YES – Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard Fingering Style Creator OTS (One Touch Setting) OTS Link YES 4 for Each Style YES Preset YES Edit YES Appendix Music Finder 36 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 213 CVP-405 CVP-403 Preset Songs Guide Song 120 61 Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key, Vocal CueTIME Follow Lights, Any Key, Karao-Key Guide Lamp YES Performance assistant technology Recording YES Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing Record Channels 16 USB Audio Recorder YES – LAN Port, Wireless Game Adaptor (LAN Port), External adaptor (via USB to DEVICE) Internet Direct Connection USB Flash Memory Memory Device YES Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD) External adaptor (via USB to DEVICE) Hard Disk External adaptor (via USB to DEVICE) Flash Memory (Internal) about 1.4 MB Memory Card (SmartMedia, etc.) Metronome Registration Memory Buttons 5–500, Tap Tempo YES Sound Bell on/off, Human Voices (5 Languages) 8 Regist. Sequence/Freeze YES Demo YES Language for Display USB Connection about 560 KB External adaptor (via USB to DEVICE) Tempo Range Tempo Others CVP-401 6 Languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian) Direct Access YES Piano Reset Button (incl. Piano Lock) YES Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master Scale Type 9 USB to HOST (Computer) YES USB TO DEVICE (left side of front panel) YES USB TO DEVICE (bottom left panel of the instrument) YES – PHONES ✕ 2, MIDI (THRU, OUT, IN), AUX PEDAL, AUX IN (L/L+R, R), AUX OUT (L/L+R, R), LAN Appendix Other Connectors Pedals Functions Amplifiers/ Speakers Amplifiers Speakers MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./LINE IN), VIDEO OUT MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./LINE IN) – VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, S. Articulation (CVP-405), SONG PLAY/PAUSE, STYLE START/STOP, etc. 40 W + 40 W 20 W + 20 W (16 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2 16 cm ✕ 2 Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H] (with the Music Rest) 1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 890 mm [56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 35-1/8"] (1430 mm ✕ 609 mm ✕ 1047 mm) [56-1/2" ✕ 24" ✕ 41-3/8"] 1432 mm ✕ 614 mm ✕ 888 mm [56-1/2" ✕ 24-1/4" ✕ 35"] (1432 mm ✕ 614 mm ✕ 1045 mm) [56-1/2" ✕ 24-1/4" ✕ 41-1/4"] 1372 mm ✕ 595 mm ✕ 896 mm [54-1/8" ✕ 23-1/2" ✕ 35-1/4"] (1372 mm ✕ 595 mm ✕ 1049 mm) [54-1/8" ✕ 23-1/2" ✕ 41-3/8"] Weight 79 kg (174 lbs., 2 5/8 oz) 73 kg (160 lbs., 15 oz) 59 kg (130 lbs., 1 oz) Optional Accessories Headphones HPE-160 Foot Switch FC 4/FC 5 Foot Controller FC 7 USB-FDD Unit UD-FD01 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 214 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Index Numerics 1–16 .................................................................. 144, 154 A A-B Repeat ................................................................... 41 AI ............................................................................... 104 AI FINGERED ............................................................. 104 AI FULL KEYBOARD .................................................. 104 Any key ...................................................................... 138 ARABIC ........................................................................ 84 Assembly ...................................................206, 208, 210 ASSEMBLY (Style) ....................................................... 118 Audio Recorder ............................................................ 60 Auto Accompaniment Feature ...................................... 44 AUTO REVOICE SETUP ............................................... 90 B Background (Lyrics) ...................................................... 55 Backup ......................................................................... 77 BASIC ......................................................................... 114 BASS .......................................................................... 199 BOOKMARK .............................................................. 176 Brightness ..................................................................... 19 Browser ...................................................................... 180 C Chain Playback .......................................................... 134 CHANNEL ......................................................... 122, 154 CHANNEL ON/OFF ................................................... 105 Characters .................................................................... 74 CHORD ............................................................ 144, 154 CHORD DETECT ....................................................... 200 CHORD FINGERING ................................................. 103 Chord Tutor function .................................................... 49 COMMON ................................................................... 97 CONFIG 1 ............................................31, 47, 105, 128 CONFIG 2 .....................................................17, 19, 200 Contrast ........................................................................ 18 CONTROLLER .............................................................. 97 Cool! ............................................................................ 79 COPY ........................................................................... 71 CUT ............................................................................. 72 D E EDIT ........................................................................... 117 Edit (Bookmarks) ........................................................ 178 Edit (Effect) ................................................................... 92 Edit (EQ) ....................................................................... 95 F F ................................................................................... 65 Factory Reset ................................................................ 75 Factory-programmed Settings ....................................... 75 FADE IN/OUT (Song) ................................................. 133 Fade In/Out time ........................................................ 133 FADE IN/OUT/HOLD TIME ........................................ 105 Fast forward ............................................................... 134 Favorite ...................................................................... 110 File ............................................................................... 66 File Selection Display ............................................ 26, 69 File Selection Display Basic Operation ......................... 67 File Selection Display Configuration ............................. 66 File/Folder Operations .................................................. 69 FILTER ................................................................. 89, 161 FINGERED ................................................................. 104 FINGERED ON BASS ................................................. 104 Flash Memory .............................................................. 22 FOLDER ....................................................................... 73 Folder ........................................................................... 66 Follow lights ............................................................... 138 Foot Controller ............................................................. 30 FOOTAGE ......................................................... 100, 101 Footage ...................................................................... 102 Footswitch .................................................................... 30 Format .......................................................................... 69 FREEZE ....................................................................... 129 FULL KEYBOARD ...................................................... 104 Function display ........................................................... 27 - For information on the panel controls, see “Panel Controls” on page 12. - For information on the jacks and connectors located on the bottom of the instrument, see “Using Your Instrument with Other Devices” on page 185. - For Internet-related terms, see “Glossary of Internet Terms” on page 184. - For information on the parameters in the tab displays, refer to the tab names in this index. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Appendix Damper Pedal .............................................................. 30 DELETE ........................................................................ 72 Demo ........................................................................... 23 Demo (Voice) ............................................................... 34 Direct Access ............................................................... 64 DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) ............................... 195 Drums .......................................................................... 79 DSP .............................................................................. 85 DSP/DSP VARIATION .................................................. 85 DUAL ........................................................................... 80 Edit (Lyrics) ................................................................. 154 Edit (Music Finder) ..................................................... 110 Edit (OTS) ..................................................................... 51 Edit (Song) .................................................................. 154 Edit (Style) .................................................................. 119 Edit (Vocal Harmony) ................................................. 163 Edit (Voice) ................................................................... 96 EFFECT ......................................................................... 89 Effect (microphone) ...................................................... 56 Effect (Voice) ................................................................ 85 Effect Return Level ........................................................ 93 Effect Type ................................................................... 91 EFFECT/EQ ................................................................... 99 Entering characters ....................................................... 74 Entering Characters (Internet Direct Connection) ........ 174 EQ (Equalizer) .............................................................. 90 EQUAL TEMPERAMENT .............................................. 84 ESEQ .......................................................................... 195 EXIT ............................................................................. 67 215 G GM System Level 1 .................................................... 195 GM System Level 2 .................................................... 195 GROOVE ................................................................... 120 GS .............................................................................. 195 Guide ......................................................................... 137 Guide Lamp ................................................................. 39 GUIDE LAMP ON/OFF ............................................... 137 GUIDE LAMP TIMING ............................................... 138 NAME .......................................................................... 73 Natural! ........................................................................ 79 Notation ....................................................................... 38 O H .................................................................................. 65 HARMONY ................................................................ 100 HARMONY/ECHO ....................................................... 85 Headphone Hanger ...................................................... 17 Headphones ................................................................. 17 Home Page ................................................................ 182 Hz ................................................................................ 83 One Touch Setting ....................................................... 50 One-Handed Practice ................................................... 39 Organ Flutes ............................................................... 100 Organ Flutes! ............................................................... 79 Others ........................................................................ 181 OTS Link ...................................................................... 51 OTS Link Timing ........................................................ 106 OVERALL SETTING .................................................... 167 OWNER ................................................................ 18, 20 Owner Name ............................................................... 20 ICON ........................................................................... 73 Initialize ....................................................................... 75 Initializing Internet Settings ........................................ 183 Internet Direct Connection ......................................... 172 Internet Settings .......................................................... 179 K Karaoke ........................................................................ 54 Karao-key ................................................................... 138 key cover ..................................................................... 14 Keyboard Parts ............................................................. 80 KEYBOARD/PANEL ............................................... 29, 58 KIRNBERGER ............................................................... 84 L LAN ........................................................................... 180 LAN port ........................................................... 172, 192 Language ...................................................................... 18 Left ............................................................................... 80 Left Pedal ..................................................................... 30 Live! ............................................................................. 79 LYRICS ....................................................................... 154 Lyrics ........................................................................... 55 M Main Display ......................................................... 25, 65 MASTER TUNE ............................................................. 83 MEAN-TONE ............................................................... 84 MEDIA ........................................................69, 136, 191 Mega Voice .................................................................. 79 MELODIC MINOR ..................................................... 125 Messages ...................................................................... 63 microphone .................................................................. 54 MICROPHONE SETTING ........................................... 166 MIDI .......................................................................... 192 MIDI Settings .............................................................. 196 MIDI Templates .......................................................... 197 MIXING CONSOLE ...................................................... 87 MONO/POLY ............................................................... 85 Appendix N H I 216 MULTI FINGER .......................................................... 104 Multi track recording .................................................. 139 Music Finder ................................................................ 52 Music Rest .................................................................... 16 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual P PANEL PART ................................................................ 88 PARAMETER .............................................................. 123 Part .............................................................................. 80 PASTE ................................................................... 71, 72 Pause ......................................................................... 134 PEDAL ........................................................................ 187 pedal polarity ............................................................. 187 pedals .......................................................................... 30 percussion sounds ........................................................ 34 performance assistant technology ................................. 43 Phrase Mark ............................................................... 134 PHRASE MARK REPEAT ............................................. 134 Pianist ........................................................................ 103 PIANO ......................................................................... 97 Piano Lock ................................................................... 29 Portamento ................................................................... 85 Portamento Time .......................................................... 97 Practice Function ....................................................... 137 PRESET ......................................................................... 26 Pro ............................................................................. 103 PROPERTY ................................................................. 191 Prot. 1 .......................................................................... 71 Prot. 2 Edit ................................................................... 71 Prot. 2 Orig .................................................................. 71 Punch In/Out Recording ............................................. 155 PURE MAJOR ............................................................... 84 PURE MINOR .............................................................. 84 PYTHAGOREAN .......................................................... 84 Q QUANTIZE ................................................................ 122 Quick Recording ........................................................ 139 QUICK START ............................................................ 135 R T RANDOM .................................................................. 134 Realtime Recording .................................................... 114 REC .............................................................................. 66 REC MODE ................................................................ 154 RECEIVE ..................................................................... 199 Record (Song) ...................................................... 42, 139 Record (Style) ............................................................. 114 REGISTRATION MEMORY ......................................... 127 REGISTRATION SEQUENCE ...................................... 130 REPEAT MODE ................................................... 36, 134 Repeat Playback ......................................................... 134 Repeat Playback Function ............................................ 41 Repertoire .................................................................... 53 Revoice ........................................................................ 90 Rewind ....................................................................... 134 Right 1 ......................................................................... 80 Right 2 ......................................................................... 80 TALK ............................................................................ 59 TALK SETTING ........................................................... 170 Tap function ............................................................... 133 Text .............................................................................. 55 Top ............................................................................ 134 TRANSMIT ................................................................. 198 Transpose ........................................................56, 58, 83 TUNE ........................................................................... 89 S Vibrato ......................................................................... 99 VIDEO OUT ................................................................. 56 Vocal CueTIME .......................................................... 138 VOCAL HARMONY EDIT ................................. 164, 165 VOCAL HARMONY TYPE .......................................... 163 Voice ..............................................................28, 32, 79 VOICE EFFECT ............................................................. 85 Voice Program Change Number ................................. 200 VOICE SET ................................................................. 102 VOL/ATTACK ............................................................. 101 VOL/VOICE .................................................................. 89 UP ................................................................................ 68 USB Audio Recorder .................................................... 60 [USB TO DEVICE] Terminal ....................................... 191 USER ............................................................................ 26 V W WERCKMEISTER .......................................................... 84 Wireless Game Adaptor .................................... 172, 184 Wireless LAN ............................................................. 181 X XF .............................................................................. 195 XG ............................................................................. 195 - For information on the panel controls, see “Panel Controls” on page 12. - For information on the jacks and connectors located on the bottom of the instrument, see “Using Your Instrument with Other Devices” on page 185. - For Internet-related terms, see “Glossary of Internet Terms” on page 184. - For information on the parameters in the tab displays, refer to the tab names in this index. CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual Appendix S. Articulation! ............................................................. 79 SAVE ............................................................................ 70 Save (Music Finder) .................................................... 111 SCALE TUNE ................................................................ 83 Score ............................................................................ 38 Search (Music Finder Records) .................................... 108 Section Set ................................................................. 106 Session ....................................................................... 103 Set the polarity of the pedal ........................................ 187 SFX ............................................................................... 79 Sheet Music Braces ...................................................... 16 SINGLE FINGER ......................................................... 104 SMF (Standard MIDI file) ............................................ 195 Song ............................................................................. 35 SONG CH 1-8/9-16 ..................................................... 88 Song channels ............................................................ 143 Sostenuto Pedal ............................................................ 30 SOUND ....................................................................... 98 Sound Creator .............................................................. 96 sound effects ................................................................ 34 Speaker setting ............................................................. 17 SPLIT ............................................................................ 80 SPLIT POINT .............................................................. 107 Step Recording .................................................. 114, 139 Stop ACMP ................................................................. 106 Style .................................................................... 44, 106 Style Assembly ........................................................... 114 Style Change Behavior ............................................... 106 Style Creator ............................................................... 113 Style File .................................................................... 195 STYLE PART ................................................................. 88 Style parts ................................................................... 143 STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT .................................... 105 Style Structure ............................................................ 113 Style Touch ................................................................ 106 Sweet! .......................................................................... 79 Synchro Start (Song) ................................................... 133 Synchro Start (Style) ...................................................... 47 Synchro Stop ................................................................ 48 Synchro Stop Window ................................................ 106 SYS/EX. ....................................................................... 154 SYSTEM ...................................................................... 198 SYSTEM RESET ............................................................. 76 U 217 Panel Button Chart The position of the button on the panel can be confirmed by the Panel Control (page 12). Symbol M [–] [+] (TEMPO) ............................................................. 8 [–] [+] (TRANSPOSE) ..................................................... 6 MAIN VARIATION [A]/[B]/[C]/[D] .....................................C [MASTER VOLUME].............................................................3 [MEMORY] ............................................................................j Mic signal/over lamps (CVP-405/403)............................ u [MIXING CONSOLE] ...........................................................M [MUSIC FINDER] ..................................................................I Number [1]–[4] (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ................................... n [1]–[8] (REGISTRATION MEMORY)............................... k [1π†]–[8π†] ................................................................... O O A [ACMP ON/OFF] ........................................................... 0 [AUTO FILL IN] ............................................................. A [A]–[J]............................................................................ K B [BREAK]................................................................................. D C R [CHANNEL ON/OFF] .......................................................... N [REC] ......................................................................................[ REGIST BANK [+] [–] ...........................................................i [REPEAT]................................................................................g [REW]/[FF] buttons ...............................................................^ Damper pedal....................................................................... s [DATA ENTRY]..................................................................... R [DEMO]......................................................................... 4 [DIRECT ACCESS] ................................................................ L Drum Kit icons ..................................................................... p [DUAL (RIGHT2)] ................................................................ V E ENDING/rit. [I]/[II]/[III] ........................................................ E [ENTER]................................................................................. S [EXIT]..................................................................................... Q [EXTRA TRACKS] ................................................................. a S [SCORE].................................................................................d [SONG SELECT]....................................................................Z Sostenuto pedal.....................................................................r [SPLIT (LEFT)] ........................................................................W [START/STOP] ............................................................... H [STOP] ...................................................................................\ STYLE category selection buttons................................... 9 [SYNC START] ......................................................................G [SYNC STOP] ........................................................................F T F [FUNCTION] ........................................................................ X G TAB [√][®] ...........................................................................P [TAP TEMPO] (TEMPO) ................................................. 7 [TRACK 1 (R)]........................................................................c [TRACK 2 (L)] ........................................................................b [GUIDE] ................................................................................ f U I [USB]......................................................................................T [USB TO DEVICE] ......................................................... 2 [INTERNET] .......................................................................... Y INTRO [I]/[II]/[III] ................................................................. B K Keyboard guide lamps......................................................... t Appendix P [PIANO RESET] .....................................................................h [PLAY/PAUSE].......................................................................] [POWER] ...............................................................................1 D L [LCD CONTRAST] ............................................................... J Left pedal .............................................................................. q [LYRICS] button (CVP-403/401) ......................................... e [LYRICS/TEXT] button (CVP-405)....................................... e 218 [ON/OFF] (METRONOME) ............................................ 5 [OTS LINK] ............................................................................o CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual V VOICE category selection buttons.................................. l [VOICE EFFECT] ...................................................................m The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for fifty seven (57) of the songs pre-installed in this instrument: Alfie Theme from the Paramount Picture ALFIE Words by Hal David Music by Burt Bacharach Copyright © 1966 (Renewed 1994) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved All Shook Up Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley Copyright © 1957 by Shalimar Music Corporation Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis Songs International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Beauty And The Beast from Walt Disney’s BEAUTY AND THE BEAST Lyrics by Howard Ashman Music by Alan Menken © 1991 Walt Disney Music Company and Wonderland Music Company, Inc. All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Bésame Mucho (Kiss Me Much) Music and Spanish Words by Consuelo Velazquez English Words by Sunny Skylar Copyright © 1941, 1943 by Promotora Hispano Americana de Musica, S.A. Copyrights Renewed All Rights Administered by Peer International Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Blue Hawaii from the Paramount Picture WAIKIKI WEDDING Words and Music by Leo Robin and Ralph Rainger Copyright © 1936, 1937 (Renewed 1963, 1964) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Blue Moon Words by Lorenz Hart Music by Richard Rodgers © 1934 (Renewed 1962) METRO-GOLDWYN-MAYER INC. All Rights Controlled by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG INC. (Publishing) and WARNER BROS. PUBLICATIONS U.S. INC. (Print) All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Brazil Words and Music by Ray Barroso English lyrics by S. K. Russell Copyright © 1941 by Peer International Corporation Copyright Renewed International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved California Girls Words and Music by Brian Wilson and Mike Love Copyright © 1965 IRVING MUSIC, INC. Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Can You Feel The Love Tonight from Walt Disney Pictures’ THE LION KING Music by Elton John Lyrics by Tim Rice © 1994 Wonderland Music Company, Inc. All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Can’t Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore Copyright © 1961 by Gladys Music, Inc. Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Gladys Music All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. and Chrysalis Music International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Chim Chim Cher-ee from Walt Disney’s MARY POPPINS Words and Music by Richard M. Sherman and Robert B. Sherman © 1963 Wonderland Music Company, Inc. Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Do-Re-Mi from THE SOUND OF MUSIC Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II Music by Richard Rodgers Copyright © 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright Renewed WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights throughout the world International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Don’t Be Cruel (To A Heart That’s True) Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Elvis Presley Copyright © 1956 by Unart Music Corporation and Elvis Presley Music, Inc. Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis Songs International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Edelweiss from THE SOUND OF MUSIC Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II Music by Richard Rodgers Copyright © 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright Renewed WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights throughout the world International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Fly Me To The Moon (In Other Words) featured in the Motion Picture ONCE AROUND Words and Music by Bart Howard TRO - © Copyright 1954 (Renewed) Hampshire House Publishing Corp., New York, NY International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Including Public Performance For Profit Used by Permission Hey Jude Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright © 1968 Sony/ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Hound Dog Words and Music by Jerry Leiber and Mike Stoller Copyright © 1956 by Elvis Presley Music, Inc. and Lion Publishing Co., Inc. Copyright Renewed, Assigned to Gladys Music and Universal - MCA Music Publishing, A Division of Universal Studios, Inc. All Rights Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. and Chrysalis Music International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved I Just Called To Say I Love You Words and Music by Stevie Wonder © 1984 JOBETE MUSIC CO., INC. and BLACK BULL MUSIC c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC. All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Permission I Left My Heart In San Francisco Words by Douglass Cross Music by George Cory © 1954 (Renewed 1982) COLGEMS-EMI MUSIC INC. All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Permission CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 219 In The Mood By Joe Garland Copyright © 1939, 1960 Shapiro, Bernstein & Co., Inc., New York Copyright Renewed International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Moon River from the Paramount Picture BREAKFAST AT TIFFANY’S Words by Johnny Mercer Music by Henry Mancini Copyright © 1961 (Renewed 1989) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Isn’t She Lovely Words and Music by Stevie Wonder © 1976 JOBETE MUSIC CO., INC. and BLACK BULL MUSIC c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC. All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Permission Moonlight Serenade Words by Mitchell Parish Music by Glen Miller Copyright © 1939 (Renewed 1967) by ROBBINS MUSIC CORPORATION All Rights Controlled and Administered by EMI ROBBINS CATALOG INC. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Let It Be Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright © 1970 Sony/ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Let’s Twist Again Words by Kal Mann Music by Dave Appell and Kal Mann Copyright © 1961 Kalmann Music, Inc. Copyright Renewed All Rights Controlled and Administered by Spirit Two Music, Inc. (ASCAP) International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Linus And Lucy By Vince Guaraldi Copyright © 1965 LEE MENDELSON FILM PRODUCTIONS, INC. Copyright Renewed International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Love Story Theme from the Paramount Picture LOVE STORY Music by Francis Lai Copyright © 1970, 1971 (Renewed 1998, 1999) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Lullaby Of Birdland Words by George David Weiss Music by George Shearing © 1952, 1954 (Renewed 1980, 1982) EMI LONGITUDE MUSIC All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Permission Michelle Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright © 1965 Sony/ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Mickey Mouse March from Walt Disney’s THE MICKEY MOUSE CLUB Words and Music by Jimmie Dodd © 1955 Walt Disney Music Company Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Mission: Impossible Theme from the Paramount Television Series MISSION: IMPOSSIBLE By Lalo Schifrin Copyright © 1966, 1967 (Renewed 1994, 1995) by Bruin Music Company International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Mona Lisa from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A. Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved 220 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual My Favorite Things from THE SOUND OF MUSIC Lyrics by Oscar Hammerstein II Music by Richard Rodgers Copyright © 1959 by Richard Rodgers and Oscar Hammerstein II Copyright Renewed WILLIAMSON MUSIC owner of publication and allied rights throughout the world International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved My Way By Paul Anka, Jacques Revaux, Claude Francois and Giles Thibault © 1997 by Chrysalis Standards, Inc. Used by Permission. All Rights Reserved. The Nearness Of You from the Paramount Picture ROMANCE IN THE DARK Words by Ned Washington Music by Hoagy Carmichael Copyright © 1937, 1940 (Renewed 1964, 1967) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Theme From “New York, New York” Music by John Kander Words by Fred Ebb © 1977 UNITED ARTISTS CORPORATION All Rights Controlled by EMI UNART CATALOG INC. (Publishing) and WARNER BROS. PUBLICATIONS U.S. INC. (Print) All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Ob-La-Di, Ob-La-Da Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright © 1968 Sony/ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Proud Mary Words and Music by J.C. Fogerty © 1968 (Renewed) JONDORA MUSIC All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Return To Sender Words and Music by Otis Blackwell and Winfield Scott Copyright © 1962 by Elvis Presley Music, Inc. Copyright Renewed and Assigned to Elvis Presley Music All Rights Administered by Cherry River Music Co. and Chrysalis Songs International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved The Shoop Shoop Song (It’s In His Kiss) Words and Music by Rudy Clark Copyright © 1963, 1964 by Trio Music Company, Inc. and Top Of The Charts Copyright Renewed All Rights for the United States Controlled and Administered by Trio Music Company, Inc. All Rights for the World excluding the United States Controlled and Administered by Trio Music Company, Inc. and Alley Music Corp. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Used by Permission (Sittin’ On) The Dock Of The Bay Words and Music by Steve Cropper and Otis Redding Copyright © 1968, 1975 IRVING MUSIC, INC. Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Smoke Gets In Your Eyes from ROBERTA Words by Otto Harbach Music by Jerome Kern © 1933 UNIVERSAL - POLYGRAM INTERNATIONAL PUBLISHING, INC. Copyright Renewed All Rights Reserved International Rights Secured. Not for broadcast transmission. DO NOT DUPLICATE. NOT FOR RENTAL. WARNING: It is a violation of Federal Copyright Law to synchronize this Multimedia Disc with video tape or film, or to print the Composition(s) embodied on this Multimedia Disc in the form of standard music notation, without the express written permission of the copyright owner. Somewhere, My Love Lara’s Theme from DOCTOR ZHIVAGO Lyric by Paul Francis Webster Music by Maurice Jarre Copyright © 1965, 1966 (Renewed 1993, 1994) Webster Music Co. and EMI Robbins Catalog Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Spanish Eyes Words by Charles Singleton and Eddie Snyder Music by Bert Kaempfert © 1965, 1966 (Renewed 1993, 1994) EDITION DOMA BERT KAEMPFERT All Rights for the world, excluding Germany, Austria and Switzerland, Controlled and Administered by SCREEN GEMS-EMI MUSIC INC. All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Permission Speak Softly, Love (Love Theme) from the Paramount Picture THE GODFATHER Words by Larry Kusik Music by Nino Rota Copyright © 1972 (Renewed 2000) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Stella By Starlight from the Paramount Picture THE UNINVITED Words by Ned Washington Music by Victor Young Copyright © 1946 (Renewed 1973, 1974) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Take The “A” Train Words and Music by Billy Strayhorn Copyright © 1941; Renewed 1969 DreamWorks Songs (ASCAP) and Billy Strayhorn Songs, Inc. (ASCAP) for the U.S.A. Rights for DreamWorks Songs and Billy Strayhorn Songs, Inc. Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Tears In Heaven Words and Music by Eric Clapton and Will Jennings Copyright © 1992 by E.C. Music Ltd. and Blue Sky Rider Songs All Rights for E.C. Music Ltd. Administered by Unichappell Music Inc. All Rights for Blue Sky Rider Songs Administered by Irving Music, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved That’s Amore (That’s Love) from the Paramount Picture THE CADDY Words by Jack Brooks Music by Harry Warren Copyright © 1953 (Renewed 1981) by Paramount Music Corporation and Four Jays Music International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Up Where We Belong from the Paramount Picture AN OFFICER AND A GENTLEMAN Words by Will Jennings Music by Buffy Sainte-Marie and Jack Nitzsche Copyright © 1982 by Famous Music Corporation and Ensign Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Waltz For Debby Lyric by Gene Lees Music by Bill Evans TRO - © Copyright 1964 (Renewed), 1965 (Renewed), 1966 (Renewed) Folkways Music Publishers, Inc., New York, NY International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Including Public Performance For Profit Used by Permission White Christmas from the Motion Picture Irving Berlin’s HOLIDAY INN Words and Music by Irving Berlin © Copyright 1940, 1942 by Irving Berlin Copyright Renewed International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved A Whole New World from Walt Disney’s ALADDIN Music by Alan Menken Lyrics by Tim Rice © 1992 Wonderland Music Company, Inc. and Walt Disney Music Company All Rights Reserved Used by Permission Yesterday Words and Music by John Lennon and Paul McCartney Copyright © 1965 Sony/ATV Songs LLC Copyright Renewed All Rights Administered by Sony/ATV Music Publishing, 8 Music Square West, Nashville, TN 37203 International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved You Are The Sunshine Of My Life Words and Music by Stevie Wonder © 1972 (Renewed 2000) JOBETE MUSIC CO., INC. and BLACK BULL MUSIC c/o EMI APRIL MUSIC INC. All Rights Reserved International Copyright Secured Used by Permission You Sexy Thing Words and Music by E. Brown Copyright © 1975 by Finchley Music Corp. Administered in the USA and Canada by Music & Media International, Inc. Administered for the World excluding the USA and Canada by RAK Music Publishing Ltd. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved That Old Black Magic from the Paramount Picture STAR SPANGLED RHYTHM Words by Johnny Mercer Music by Harold Arlen Copyright © 1942 (Renewed 1969) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual 221 MEMO 222 CVP-405/403/401 Owner’s Manual IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Electronic Piano Model Name : CVP-405/403/401 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music * This applies only to products distributed by Ltd. YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (mercury) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [CL] 41 Clavinova Web site http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2007 Yamaha Corporation Printed in Indonesia WH96710 612APZC?.?-01A1